This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
i;
i.sy.
r
AlfflR,
'E<u^4rT \5^\v.s^.Ht'r"
HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY
THE ESSEX INSTITUTE
TEXT-BOOK COLLECTION
GIFT OF
GEORGE ARTHUR PLIMPTON
OF NEW YORK
JANUARY 25, 1924
(M-
3 2044 102 855 848
/
■ /
NEW METHOD
OF LEABNINO THB
FEENCH LANGUAGE.
BT
PBOF. JEAN GUSTAVE KEETELS,
OT THX BBOOXLTN OOLLXOUTK AND PO^TTBOHMXa I Nyi ' lTUTl .
NEW YORK:
SHELDON & COMPANY.
IR59.
^dUjL^T iri V, ST^,H-irb'
■*«¥A»D COLLr«E LIBRARY
GIFT Of
6(0RGE ARTHUR PLIMfTtM
JANUAKY 25, 1924
Entered aeoording to Aet of CongreM, in the year 1856, by
JEAN OUSTAVE KEETELS,
In the 01erk*8 Offlee of the DUtrict Goart of the United States for the Soathern
District of New York.
RSNNIK. 8HEA k LIWDSAT,
8tBKBOTVI>BBS AMD El,B0TBOTVPBM»
81, 8S, A tt Oi>ntni-«trMt».
Nbw Yobk«
PREFACE.
SuocOESfl in teaohing a kngaage depends materiallj on the mode
of instraotion, which shoold combine theory and practice in dne
proportions. The popular method, developing the elements and
principles of the language in a series of progressive lessons, is well
adapted to the purpose, and possesses the advantage of being prac-
tical ; but, to be efficacious, it requires a clear, simple, and judi«
cious arrangement, or else is apt to perplex the youthful mind, by
crowding upon it more ideas than it can master at a time. This
discouraging effect may be urged as a serious objection against the
many works prepared on the above plan. However excellent some
of them may be, in point of execution, all continue throughout to
evolve, in rapid succession, new facts in Etymology, mixed up with
the ever increasing difficulties of construction, and weary the mind
by a constant repetition of the same process. This New Method is
intended to remedy the defect, without sacrificing any of the ad-
vantages which other methods may possess.
It is divided into five parts : —
Past Fibst contains the elements of Orthoepy, Exercises in Pro-
nouncing, Reading-Lessons with the English underlined, and the
first principles of grammar. This part is designed for juvenile
classes. They may begin with the Exercises in Pronouncing, § vii.,
and next proceed to the Beading-Lessons, § viii. ; and, while they
are receiving practically the first impression of what they are after-
wards to learn theoretically, they may also acquire a knowledge of
the principles of grammar, contained in this part, which will pre-
pare them to enter upon the next. The plan possesses this advan-
tage, that new students may at any time join a class, during its
progress though Part First, without inconvenience to the teacher
or disadvantage to the class.
4 PRBFA08.
Past Seoond embraces a conrse of thirty-two Progressive Les-
sons, with Yocabnlaries and Exercises. The Yocabnlaries are ar-
ranged in such a manner, that the difficulties of the genders may
be overcome with comparatively little labor. The French Exercises
are composed of questions and answers, which may be recited in
the manner of a conversation : the teacher giving the question in
French, which the pupil translates into English ; the answer being
given by the teacher in English, and translated into French by the
pupil. The English Exercises are intended to be translated both
orally and in writing. An Exercise in Parsing is given with each
Lesson, to impress firmly upon the mind one or more essential
points, explained in the lesson.
Past Thibd contains the Etymology of the parts of speech, Pa-
radigms of the different coigngations, and Lists of irregular verbs*
Each separate subject is accompanied by a French Exercise.
Pabt Foubth is a continuation of Part Second, containing an
equal number of Progressive Lessons. Each lesson comprises an
additional French Exercise, called DicUe^ in continuation of the
Exercises in Part Third. These are first to be read and translated ;
afterwards, when the student is going through Part Fifth, they
should be written from dictation, committed to memory, and re-
cited, in answer to questions in French from the teacher.
Pabt Fifth is a treatise on Syntax.
In Parts Second and Fourth, the practical predominates ; in Parts
Third and Fifth, the theoretical. They are so far independent of
each other, that the several parts need not be studied in the order
in which they stand. The arrangement, however, was suggested
by a long course of experience, and adopted after mature delibera-
tion. The practical develops principles, elements, and facts, in
natural succession, but without regard to scientific method; the
theoretical embraces, in a connected view, and in systematic order,
the cognate parts that have been studied separately. By this plan,
the treatment of the verbs is presented to the mind, unembarrassed
with other difficulties ; the student, once familiar with their forms,
may enter upon a course of reading-lessons, which adds variety to
the exercises, and increases his interest in the study of the language.
Bbookltv, Oek 16B8L
CONTENTS.
ladex to Parts of Speech 7 | Genenl Index • 8
PART FIRST.—:
L Letteft and Oribogniplilo Signs 11
IL Towels, Towel-sonnds, Diph-
thongs U
IIL Gonaonants IS
IT. Liquids 18
T. Final Letters 14
TI. DiTision of Words intoSyllt-
bles 14
TIL Exercises in Pronouncing. .... 16
TIIL BeadinglLessons 19
■Intboduotobt.
IX. Cardinal and Ordinal Nnmbers 88
X. Parts of Speech 34
XL Definitions of the Parts of
Speech 84
XIL Properties of the Parts of
Speech 86
XtlL Sentences 88
Hints to Pupils 40
Explanation of Abbreviations. 42
PART SECOND.— Pbogrbssivb LitaQRB, 1-82 48
(The Contents of the Lessons sre given in the Indeo^ pp^ 7-ia)
PART THIRD.— Etymology.
XIT. The Noun.— PormsUon ol
XXIX.
the Plural
185
12T
XT. The Article
XXX
XTL The AcUecUve.— Formation
XXXL
of the Feminine
128
180
XXXIL
XTIL Formation of the Plural . . . .
XXXIIL
Pofisemi ve ............ t .
182
188
188
184
XXXIT.
XIX. Demonstratire
XXXT.
XX. Numeral
XXXTI.
XXL Indefinite
XXXTIL
Pronouns. ..«
185
188
XXXTIIL
XXIIL Possessive Pronouns.
XXXIX
XXIT. Demonstrative Pronouns ..
18T
XL.
XXT. Relative Pronouns
18T
XLL
XXTL Indefinite Pronouns
187
XLIL
XXTII. The Terb.— Modifications..
189
XXTIIL Auxiliary Terbe
189
, Col\|ngation 140
Conjugation of Avoir—
Aflirmatively 141
Negatively 149
Intem^tively 144
Interr. and Negatively. 145
Conjugation ofMra—
Affirmatively 147
Negatively 148
Interrogati vely 150
Interr. and Negatively. 151
Conjugation otParler—
Affirmatively 168
Negatively 154
Interrogatively 156
Interr. and Negatively. 157
Bemarlcs on certain Teiiw
of the First Conjuga-
tion 15^
CONTENTS.
ZLIIL OoiOngstlM of JHtUr 160
XLIV. •• "jBM!0tM><r... 102
XLV. ** « Vendre,.,, 100
ZLYL Ck>iijiig. of PMsiye Verbs. . . 107
XLVIL CoDjttg: of Neater Verbs... 170
Ck>nJ. of BeflectiTo Verbs—
XLVIII. Alflrmati vely 178
XLIX Negatively 174
lu Interroghttveiy 170
LL Interr. and Negatively ... 177
LIL Coi^Qgatlon of the Imper-
sonal Verb, Y Avoir .... 179
LIIL CoiOagation of the Imper-
sonal Verb, FalMr 180
LTV. Formation of Tenses 181
LV. Bemarks on the FormatloD of
Tenses ........ ■• 188
LVL List of Model 'Verbs 'of 'the
Irregolar Conjugations .... 184
LVII. Defective or slif^tly Irregalar
Verbs 190
LVIIL List of Irregular Verbs 198
LIX. The Participle 208
LX. The Adverb 208
LXI. The Preposition 200
LXIL The Conjunction 200
LXIIL The Inteljection ............ 208
LXIV. Words that «re common to
both Langnages 208
LXV. Bnles for using the Accents.. 211
PABT FOURTH.— Pbqgbisbitk Lksbonb, 8^-64 sis
PART FIFTH,— Syntax.
y^y VI. Sentences <... 885
T^XXXVIT.
LXVIL The Noun.— Gender of
LXXXVUI.
certain Nenns 880
LXVIIL Pl«r«I of certain l^ouns.. 887
liXlX. Place of Nouns 889
LXXXIX.
LXX. The Article nsed before
xc.
Common Nouns 840
J.XXT. Use of the Article before
proper Nouns 848
XCI.
LXXIL Bepetition and Place of the
XCII.
Article 844
XCIII.
LXXIIL Idioms in which the Artt*
XCIV.
cle is omitted 846
LXXIV. Qualifying Aiyeotives.—
Agreement 845
xcv.
LXXV. Place of the A4jective .... 840
LXXVL Government of Adjectives 847
XCVI.
LXXVII. Complement of two Ad-
Jeetivee 849
XOVIL
LXXVIII. Possessive AcQectlves.... 849
LXXIX. Demonstrative AAJecttye* 880
LXXX. Numeral Adjectives 861
XOVIII.
LXXXI. Indefinite A<]l}ective8 .... 861
XCIX.
LXXXII. The Pronoun 868
a
LXXXIH. Personal Pronouns 868
CL
LXXXIV. Possessive Pronouns..... 850
CIL
LXXXV. Demonstratfve Protioiwa. 800
LXXXVL BelaUve Prononns. 808
Indefinite ProBoans.... 889
. The Verb.— Agreement
of the Verb and its Sub-
ject 801
UseoftheAaliliaries.. 808
, Use of the Tenses of the
Indicative, Conditional
and Imperative 803
, The Subjunctive 800
. The Infinitive... 860
Government of Verbs.. 807
, List of Verbs requiring
no preposition before
the Infinitive 807
. Verbs requiring the prep.
<) before the Infinitive. 808
, Verbs requiring the prep.
de before the Infinitive 869
, Verbs requiring some-
times d and sometimes
de before the Infinitive 870
, The Participle 871
.The Adverb 871
Adverbs of Negation. . .88
The Preposition 874
. The Conjunction 876
Veeabnlary to the Dio-
Mea. from 88 to 64.... 87S
INDEX TO THE PARTS OP SPEECH.
Tb« Bonuui flgans indieate the sections in Parts Fint, TUrd, and Fiftb; fbe ordlotfy
flgorei^ tlie seettons In Psrts Second and Foorth.
Novir, xl 1; xiL 1, 4, 5; zttr.; IxviL ; IzvilL; Izlx—gender, 1 ; phinl, 17, 18; genefal
sense, ST; names of materials, 84; paititlTe sense, 58} Mloma, 9§; noon of dimen*
slon, 147.
Abtiolk, x1. 2; ztt. 8; zt. ; Izx. ; boi ; IxxH ; lzxUi>-fender, 1 ; elision, 5; repeti-
tion, 14; plaral, 17; before nonns in a general sense, 87; contraction, 86; before conn*
tries and places, 57; partitiTe, 68, 61; omi88lbn,86; before the parts of tlM bodj, f6f
181 ; before the days of the week, 119 ; beftne noons of designation, 186k
Anuconrn {Qwtl^fying% zL 8; zii. 8; xTl.; zviL; Izziy.; Izzr.; IzzrL; Izzrii—
agreement, 8, 49; repetition, 14; phind, 17 ; phwe^ 68; comparison, 91, 98^ 94; goTem-
ment, 184.
DeterminaUvs, zL 3, c; zriH. ; IzxrilL
JiMeeMiee, zi. 8, c; zrliL ; Izzviii.— 4; 6^ b; repetition, 14; plnnd, 17.
J)em(m9trati9ef xL 8, o; ziz. ; Izzix.— 11 ; repetition, 14; plvml, 17, SSL
Ifumeralf zL 8, e ; zz. ; Izzz.— 14, 81.
IndefinUe, zl 8^ c; zxL ; IzxxL— 4; repetition, 14; pinral, 17.
Pbonovn, xL 4; xii. 8, 4, 6 ; xzii. ; Ixz^ii.
Pergonal, xi. 4^ b; xfL 8, 4, 6; xxii.; Ixxxiii.— as snl^Jeet, 8 ; as direct ob^t^ 86, 46}
as indirect object, 4^ 46 ; place, 26 ; with two verbs, 105 ; in compound tenses, 107 ;
with a yerb in the imperetive, 108, 161; disjnnctiye prononos^ 68; nss^ 168; proncnn
le, 50 ; prononn eA, 64, 69; pronoun y, 54; pronoun se, 86.
Po96e»9i/9e, xi. 4, 6; xii. 8, 4, 6; xxUi; Ixxxiv.— 16; pinral, 17, 89.
DemoMtr<Uk>€, xL 4, &; xii. 8, 4, 5; xxir. ; Ixzxt.— 24, 87, 64, 66, 144
JRelatiffe, xi. 4, b ; xii. 8, 4, 5 ; xxv. ; lxxzTi.-45, 66.
IndeJPnite, xi. 4, ft; xii. 8, 4, 5 ; xxyi. ; IxxxviL— 16, 83 ; prononn on, 84; Yoe. 18, 5&
YxBB, xi. 5; xii. 6, 7, 8; xxvit. to IvilL; Ixxxrill. to xevii.—actiire yerbi^ xi. 5; 22, 89,
90, 188; passiye rerbs, xL 6; 90 ; neuter verbs, xl 5; 89,188; reflectiye yerbs, xi 5; 86,
120, 121, 158 ; iippetsonal yerb^ xi. 5 ; 86, 1(7, 98; aoxilimy yerbs, xxyiiL ; Ixxxix. ; 116^
117, 180.
Moods, xl 8 ; x& to xcil— indicatiye, 9, 20, 81 ; oonAUonal, 108 to 164, 156 ; impera-
tiye, 108, 160, 161; snbjnnettye, 165 to 170, 178 to 176; infinitiye, 70, 72, 104, 106, 178.
TensM, xi 9; liv. ; ly.; xc to xcii—present, 9, 20, 68; irregalar verbs, 78, 74; past
definite, 106, 116, 117, 120; mtnre, 127, 128, 180; ftitnre anterior, 127, b; imperibct, 187,
188; plaperfect, 140; past definite, 149, 150; past anterior, 151.
PABnoiPLB, xi. 6; Hz.; xovili.— present, lix.; 180; past, lix.; zeyiil.; 86 to 90, 108^
110,118,114,121,181,182.
Advkbb, xi 7; Ix. ; xdx. ; &— place, 41, 107; comparison, 91 to 94
PBEPosmoir, xl 8 ; Ii^ ; d.-^r, soue, dntu, 29; <le, 81, 86, 104 ; d^ 82, 85, 67, 104;
178, d. Rem. 2; 186 ; cAee, 55; jMmr, 78, b ; dana, en, 186^ 8<i; goyernment, cS. ; 78, 186^
CovJwanoK, zl 9; Izii.; cil—179L
InnauKonoir, xi 10; 1x111
GENEJ^AL INDEX
TO THE LESSONS IN PABT SECOND AND PART FOURTH.
fhe fignna refer to Uie SeetlooB In the LessooB; p. metns Page; and ci, Tooabnlaiy.
A, prep. 8St 87, 67, 104, 178» 18(k
A or an, IndeC art 81.
Abbreviations, pv. 4S, 60.
Accents, pp. 11, Sll.
Ad?er1>B ufqaantity, 4IS.
Afford (I eannoIX 106.
Age,14&
Ago, 124
Agree (to), 144
Agreement p. 88.
In, 45.
Aller, 6«.
Alors, «. 44
Also, V. 6.
Amnse one% self (to), 189.
Angry (to be), 146.
Answer (to), «. 89.
Any, 68.
Anybody, 89,
Any thing, 39.
Apply one's selfftoX 188i
Apply to (to), 168.
Apr«s,88.
Ai, 98; (ooffMiie), 9%
As usual, «. 84
At, 67, 141.
Aussi ial9o\ «. 6; (a9\ 98.
Aotant, 98.
Avant avaat de, 8L
Avoir {idioTM), 95.
Ayoir enrle, 78.
Back (to be), «. 48.
Be (to), 88; beflmtha inlliftitlTe, 7a
Be there (to), 9&
Become (to), 167.
Bed (to go to), 128.
Before, 98.
Believe (to), 88.
Bell rings (the), 118.
Besoin (avoir), 182.
Best (I will do my), 166.
Better (to be), 18a
Body— everybody, «. 89; somebody, 39;
nobody, 40.
Bom (to be), 148.
Borrow (toX 188.
Bring (to), 87.
Bat, ooi\). «. 8. But, ady. «. 81.
Boy (to) Bomethtng of aomebody, 48L
By, «. 87; {par^ €U\ 90, S&in»
By, by the side oi; «. 86.
By and by, v. 85.
Oall(to),46. Oall on (toX 198»
Care (to take), 129, 174
Garty (to), 43. Garry away (to), 99, 80, 61.
Case (poesf^sive), 84
Get oe qni, ee one, ce dont, 66, 100^ 179.
Ghange (tol 167. '"* ' '" " *""
Ghasse (& la), 189.
Ghange aidea (toX 167.
(7hez,56.
Gi,88.
Glock (o*), 68.
Cold (to have aX (to catob aX «. 61.
Come (toX 78. Come in (U>X «. 86. Gom«
out (to), 9. 26.
Gome (to) up, down, 148.
Come (to) near, away, 16CL
Commrlsoa of a<Veotiyes and adverfaa» 91,
Gondaet (toX 88.
Goantry (in theX 67.
Goald have, 166.
Dana. 89. Dans, en, 186.
Day,48,69. Every day, aU the da/, 69.
Day before, day after, «. 48.
Days of the week, 119; month, 18L
De, 81, 87, 78, 104
Deoeive (toX 148.
Deliver (toX 171.
Demi,4&
Desire (to have aX 78.
Dimensions, 147.
Distance, 124
Disturb (toX 9. 61.
Do (toX 17. Do with (toX lit Do with
out (to), 168. How do yoa do? 188.
Done, 9. 44
Down stairs, «. 43,
Drink (toX 88.
Droite (4X 9. 85.
Each, 9. 65.
Early, 76. Early In the morning, «. 26.
GBNXRAL INDEX.
Either (nor I), 164
En, pron. 64, 69 ; prep^ «. 19.
Emnd (to go on anX 19>
Est-ceque? lUl.
£tre,2&
Every, every one, 45^ «. 66i
Expect (toX 70, 84
Extinguish (to), 8&
Far, 118, 124
Fault, (whose Ikalt is It?) 164
Few (a), 09.
Fit (to), 144
Fond of (are yon)? 2T.
Foot (onX «. 41.
For, prep. «. 90 ; ooiO. 76L
For, not expreaeed, 14L
France (inX 67.
French (do yon apeak)? 80.
Frenchman Tare yon a)f 60l
From, 81. From there, 76. From where,
Chmche (ft), «. 36.
Oet maile (to), 105^
Olad (to be), 146.
Glance (to), «. 61.
Go (toX 66: away, 184, 168; np, down, 142;
near, 158,
Go (to) a mile, 128; on ajoomey, 128.
Hair (his), 96.
HhIC 45.
Handf (my) are cold, 96.
Happen (toX 144, 177.
Ha>te (to makeX «l 44
Hasten (t»X ^ 6L
Have made (toX 106.
Have Just (to), 105. «. 8&
He, expres.'-ed by ee. 100.
Hear (toX 84,124 Hear oC from (toX 126L
Hear news (toX 124
Here, 29. Here is, 108.
Home (at), 66.
Honmbacic (onX v. 41.
Hour, 63.
How, «. la How mach. many, 68.
How far, how long. 118, 124, 126.
Hanting (to goX 189.
Harry (to be in aX «. 44
Hurt (toX 94
Idiomatic exprosaiooa, 187.
l<Uoiiis with avoir, 96.
It 76.
Iiu 29, 37, 184
Inform (toX 177.
Inqnire (to), 177.
Insiiire with (toX 184
Instead ot, 171.
Intend (to), 7a
Intransitive verba rendered by reflectlTe
verba, 148.
Introduce (toX 164
Intrust (toX 184
Interrogative sentMcea. 10, 12, 21, lOL
lB(UXoftheweatberr64
It, 98, 64 100. 144
It ia, ofdisunce or length of time, 124
Jnsqae, Jnsqu'i, Jnaqn^oik, 114
Keep (toX 76, 9.49.
Keep waiting (toX v. 44
Know bow (toX 77.
Know (to), to be acqnalntsd with, 84
U2429.
Last, last month, 74
Last night, «. 87.
Left (to the leftX «. ^.
Left (to baveX (de ruU), «. 64
De down (to), 124
Dke {flomm4U 99; Ipar^O^ «. 84
Like (bow do yoa)f 27, a.
Listen (toX «. 89.
a4MivM
Look (toX «. 89.
Make (toX 77; (remlre), 167.
Make (to) a mistake, 148.
Many, 4 a.
Married (to getX in.
Marry (U»X 177.
Materials (names oO not naed aa
—atOioerdi^Zi^h,
Mean (to), v. 86.
Might hHve, 164
Mine (of X 88. A relative of mine, 104
Month, 74 Day of month, 181.
More, 64 More, still, 67. No more, 67.
Morning, 69. In the morning, 44 €tood
morning, «. 24
Much, 62. Ab much, 94 So loueh, 189.
Most, 70, 97.
Ne, idiomaUeaOy ved, 167, 174
Ne paa, ne rien, ftjf&rv Me U^Uutiv^ 174
Near, «i 86.
NeoMsaxy (to beX 97.
Negative sentenoes^ 4
Neither,
Next month. 74
Ni, fr^/re afiniU «er6, 174
Night, to-night, 69.
NiiiMidy, 44
Not. 6
Nothing, 24
Nowhere, 99.
Object, xiL 6. 6.
Oblige (toX 9. 44
Obliged (to beX 74
OC 81.
Old (how old), 144
On, 29. On. before days of the week, 119.
Onoe, 109.
One, 87. One(oiiX64 One,notespreBsed,
Only, CL 21.
Order to (inX 72.
Ought, 166.
Pain (to hare a), 94
10
OKNSRAL INDEX.
Pas. mniUed, 79.
Passive voice, 90, bv reflective yerba, 148.
Pay (toX 141. To pay attentton, 189.
People (onX 84
Place (to talceXirr, 9.44
Play (to) on fnstrameatauiML, 18ft.
Please (to), 186.
Plea»e<f with (to be), 181
Pour, 78.
PueseMive ease, 84
Pretty, adv. 94
Prevent (I cannot), 158.
Pull oat (to), 188.
Pat (to), to pat on, 80l
Pat (to) oH^ back, 171.
Qne,4,64 98. Qua de (d^^wv ai» oc^.X
Que (neX «. 91.
Quelqoe choae, 88.
Qae!qu*an, 89.
Quite, adv. 99.
Rather,
Read(toX88.
RfOoIleet(toX15&
Bejoice (to), 158.
RemetnWr (to). 168.
Re|>etidon of Uie artiele and n^leeUTe^ 14.
Ke>eiiible (to), 15&
Ride on horseback (to), 148. .
Rieii, 8*^ «).
Rieht (to theX «i 86t In the right, 9ek
Ring (I4>X «. 88.
Rise (toX 18SL
8ay(toX80.
Season^ 146^
See (t»X 77.
8entence^ xlU.
Several, 99.
Shoald have, 158.
Sit down (toX 184
Site, 147.
So (^X M ; (atM9(), 98; {ti), 139.
Sleep (tuX 148w
Sleepy, 9.).
Some, 58. 59, 99.
S4»iiiebody, 89.
Somewliere, 99.
Sore, 98.
Sorry (to beX 145.
Sortir ( paat iente qf), 117.
Steal (toX 188L
Still, 67, 9. 84
Strike (toX«.8&
8iibj6etztLfi,a.
Sacoeed (to), 17L
Snit (toX 144
Snapeot (toX 177.
Take (toX 48. 80. Totek60fl;8a
Than (que, de\ti;{sfi$de),tn.
Then, 9. 44
There, 89. There ia, 108.
They (oi»X 8*.
Thiaorthathat,9B.
Time, 68.
Tired, weary, 18ft. Tlrad,14&
Toiit,45.
Towards, v. 61.
Travel (toX 191
Tarn (toX to torn aiwnr, 188.
Twice, 109.
Under, 89. Under f^ 111
Upbraid (toX 181
Upon, 89. Upon it, 111
Up stairs, 9. 41
Use (toX 151
UBaal,«.84
Very, 94
YoicJ, 101
Voili^ 101
Youloir, TL
Walk (toX 181
Want (toX 181
Weather. 85.
Went (IX byi*a< Hi, 117.
What? 4; preoeded by • pnpoiitioo, 88.
Wiiatr snbjeot, 164
When, 41
Whence, 71
Whera,89.
Whether, 71
WhUe (to be wortbX 181
Which, 16, 61 Of which, 88, 61
Whose? 88,61
Will yoa hive 7 81
Willing CtobeX 71.
Wish, fehowed by the Imperfect 151
With. 9. 80. «
Without, 17t
Worth (to beX 181
Write (toX SI.
Wrong (in theX 91
Wrong (I took tlM wrong iwdX 141
Y,44,64
Tnvoir,91
PART FIRST.
INTRODUCTORY.
§ L — ^Letters and Ortsooraphic SioNa
Thk French Alphabet contains the same letters as the £ng^
lish, with the exception of the w^ which is foand, however, in
some foreign words adopted into French.
The written language has accents, cedilla^ dieresU^ apostrophe^
hyphen, and the ordinary punctuation marks.
There are three accents :
The acute, (');
The grave, (');
The circumflex ( * ).
The cedilla (J is put under the c (p) when it has the sound
of s before a, o,u; as, pa, gon, ^u.
The dieresis (*') is placed over a vowel which begins a new
syllable, after another vowel ; as, naif.
The apostrophe ( ' ) indicates the suppression of a vowel, be-
fore another vowel, or silent h; as, Vami, for U ami ; Vhomme,
for le homme.
The hyphen ( - ) serves to indicate the connection between two
or more words, or parts of a word, as ai-je f arc-en^ieL
§ n. — ^VOWKLS AND YOWKL-SOUNDS, ^DlPHTHOKOS.
There are six vowels : a, e, i, o, u, y. But there are thirteen
vowel-sounds; nine of which are pure, and /our, nasal.
12 CONSONANTS.
Pure Vowel-sounds.
Of the nine pure vowel-sounds, the letter e furnishes three.
1. The unaccented e, also called the mute or silent e; as in de*
2. The a4iute {e) ; as in d^,
3. The grave or long («, ^); as in des^fite.
The combinations eu and ou form two more. Thus : a, — e, —
e, — e, ^, — t, — 0, — tt, — ew, — oit.
The y has the sound of i: after another vowel, it has the
sound of double i ; as, pays^ pronounced pai-i.
A vowel is long, when, in pronouncing it, the voice dwells on
it ; and sJiort, when it is passed over rapidly : as bal, bos ; mode,
mot.
Nasal Vowel-sounds.
The nasal vowel-sounds are : an, tn, on, un. M, preceded by
a vowel, has the nasal sound of n. E^ before m or n, has the
nasal sound of a ; as in enfant : but e», preceded by t, has the
nasal sound of in ; as, lien.
Exception. — Jf and n, when double, or followed by a vowel,
are not nasal ; as immohile, innocent, unique.
Diphthongs.
A diphthong is a combination of two vowel sounds, which^ in
pronouncing, are both heard ; as, lien, lieu, loi, loin.
§ III. — Consonants.
Most consonants are pronounced with the aid of the vowel e^
either the accented (^), or the unaccented (e). Thus : b, c, are
pronounced be, or be ; ce, or ce, &c. ; the former is called the
old, the latter, the new, mode of pronouncing.
When combined with one another, or with vowels, the con-
sonants are sounded as in English, with some exceptions.
C has two sounds : before e, i, y, it has the hissing sound of
s ; as, eeci : before a, o, u, it has the sound of k ; as, cabas,
* We abstain from the attempt to represent French pronuneiation by English sonnds
it should be imparted orally.
LIQUIDS. 18
colon, cure : but p {cedilla), before a, o, u, retains the sound of
s; asi facade, /aeon, re^u,
Ck has generally the sound of sh ; as, charme : but c or ch,
followed by another consonant, has the sound of k ; as, crin^
cru, Christ.
Ch has also the sound of k, in words from the Greek and
Hebrew; as, ccAo, Cham.
G, before e, t, y, has the sound of s in pleasure ; as, germe,
gilet : before a, o, ti, it has the sound of the English g in grate ;
as, ganty gobelet.
H is generally silent. When it is aspirated, it causes the next
vowel to be pronounced with a guttural breathing ; as, heros.
S has the hissing sound of c, at the beginning of a word ; as,
sa (fa) ; between two vowels, it has the sound oiz ; as, voisin.
Ss, between two vowels, has always the hissing sound of c ;
as, poisson.
Sch is sounded like sh ; as, schisme.
T is sounded like c, in a few words ending in tie ; as, minutte :
and in those ending in atie ; as, diplomatie : also before ial, iel,
ion; as, nation ; except when it is preceded hysotx ; as, question.
Th is sounded like t ; as, th^.
X, initial, is sounded like gz ; as, Xavier : also ex, initial,
when followed by a vowel ; as, examen.
X is sounded like ks, in Alexandre, maxime, Ac.
X is sounded like ss, in soixante, siXy dix, ico.
X is sounded like z, in deuxi^me, sixiime, Ac.
§ IV, — Liquids.
G, followed by «, and /, preceded by t, are generally pro-
nounced so smoothly that their natural sounds are not heard ;
they are then called liquids.
The liquid sound of gn is heard in the word mignonette, and
that of /, in the word brilliant.
14 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO 8TIXABLBS.
§ V. — Final Lettbrs.
A final consonant is generally silent But a final consonant
immediately followed by a word that begins with a vowel or
silent A, is pronounced with the next syllable, when no pause
takes place between the words; as num'^afni, vwur^avez un
bel^habit; il^est {i-lit) ; elleTest {i-li).
Final c, before a vowel, is sounded like k; asjdu blane au noir.
" rf, ** ** t;as^quandiL
'* /, ** ** v; B&^neu/heures.
" ^, " ** k; as^ran^ elevi.
" - * or a?, " ** «; as, tV* (mi deux enfants.
Unaccented final e, in words of more than one syllable, after a
single or double consonant, is silent But final e, after two con-
sonants, is slightly sounded ; as, table^ sahre, livre.
§ VI. — Division op Words into Syllables.
In dividing words into syllables, a single consonant between
two vowels belongs to the vowel that follows ; as, rcLser {ra-ser).
If this vowel is au unaccented final e, the consonant is pro-
nounced with the preceding vowel ; as, rase (m-«e), pronounced
raz.
The first part of a double consonant belongs to the vowel that
precedes ; the second, to the vowel that follows : the latter only
is pronounced ; as, addition^ pronounced, a-di-eian.
Two consonants in the middle of a word are separated ; as,
parler ( par-ler), rampant (ram-pant) ; except the following
combinations, which are inseparable : hl^ br, ch, chl, chr, cl, cr,
dl, dr, fijr, gl, gn, gr, gu, ph, phi, pi, pr, gu, rh, ih, thl, thr, tr,
vr. Observe that they are principally / or r, preceded by another
consonant, but not by m ox ».
EXERCISES IN FRONOUKGINO.
16
§ Vn. — ^EXBROISKS IN PrONOUNGINO.
1. Vowels.
a, e, i, o, n, y.
2.
Pure Vowel-sounds.
a, e,
6, ^6,
i, 0, u, en,
ou.
3. Nasal Vowel-sounds.
an
in
am
en
-=an
im
ain
"=in
on )
• =on
om
nn
nm
em
aim
> =nn
4. Diphthongs,
ia, ien, ion, oin, onft, oni, ni, etc.
b,
c,
5
. Cm
%sona
nts.
•
J.
k,
1, m,
Oldnamea:
M,
c6.'
«6.
eff<s
g«,
BCb,
jl.
k«.
ene, emme,
2fevD names
•!».
«»
de,
ft.
ge,
he.
Je.
ke.
le. me.
n,
P>
q^
r,
8j
t,
v(w),*
X, Z.
Old names :
enne,
P6.
qu,
enre,
ease,
t6,
V*.
iCB, Bide.
New names
• ne,
pe,
que,
w,
Be,
to,
▼e.
xe, Be.
6. Natural and Accidental Sounds of C aiM^ G.
C =k: ca, CO, cu, cl6, cri.
=s: §a, 50, ju, ce, ci.
Ch=SH: cha, cho, chn, che, chi.
Ch=K: cilia, chlo, chro, clir6, chri.
Ghard: ga, go, gu, gu6, gui.
Q8oft: gea, geo, geu, ge, gi.
* IF is oalled dattble «, and soanded like 9,
16
SXEBGISES IN PRONOUNCING.
Y. Vowels combined with Consonants,
S, at the beginning of the line, indicates that the vowels in that line are she rt; 1!^ that
they arc long.
Words and syllftbles whose finftl consonants are to be pronoaneed, are printed in
italics.
A hyphen indicates that the combination to which It la Joined, does not represent •
word, but only « part of* word, « syllable.
"
ta
ca-
9a
ga-
-gea
cha-
s.
hoc
cal
sac
gar-
jar-
char
L.
bacs
cals
sacs
gars
jare
chars
A-
L.
tas
qu'as
-qas
-guas
jas
-chas
S.
balle
qu'at-
salle
galle
jatte
chasse
L.
basse
casse
Basse
grasse
-geasse
chasse
L.
base
case
sale
goz
jase
ch&le
II.
^e
cage
sage
gag«
rage
-tage
e|«-
de
que
ce, se
gue-
g«-Je
che-
table
cable
sable
cadre
nacre
sacre
rS.
d6
-qu6
Bu-
-gug
■g6
ch6-
t<
s.
-le, -ler
pied
sied
gr6
-ger
-cher
s.
-dai
quai
-9ai
gai
j'ai
-chai
LL.
-rez
-qucz
-cez
-guez
-gez
• -chez
'S.
mer-
quW'
ser-
guer-
/«-
ser-
L.
mer
qu'air
sere
guere
fer
vers
L.
m^re
-caire
•saire
guerre
frere
verre
t^
S.
met
-quet
cet
guet
jet
-chet
L.
mes
est
ces
pres
fais
-chais
S.
mette
dette
cette
prenne
jette
-chette
L.
mais
des
-^ais
-guais
-geais
-chais
t—L.
m^ine
qu'aime
s^aime
guepe
j^aime
ch6ne
rS.
ri
qui
si
gui-
^'
chi-
L.
crie
plie
-cie
-phie
-gie
chimie
I ^
L.
mis
-quis
-sis
gris
h
-cratie
L.
mise
acquise
assise
grise
gise
guise
Ll.
ivre
livre
cidre
cnivre
givre
suivre
XXXBCI8KS IN FBONOUNOINO.
ir
Y I
CO- -90 go- jo->j'0" clio-
col sol gor- for- choc
cdte sot gros ged- -chot
qu'eau -ceau gateau j'au- chaud
cause sauce gauche j'ose chose
6cu -9u -gu -geu -chu
qu'eQt BUS -gu6 j'eus -chus
crut -gut put fut -chut
qu'eiites -gdtes eOtes fdtes -chutes
6cume -^umes legumes fOmes -chdibes
qu'heu- seu- peu jeu jeune
qu^eux ceux pieux jeux jeOne
ceuf hceuf neuf -jmr -cheur
oduh* boeufs* neuve coeun mbuib
ecu sous godt joue chou
cour sourd pour- jour four
coCite soupe godte joute voftte
pays paysan payer raycr voyez moyen
{ban
chant
chantant
cent
IN
I 81<
vin
sien
r mon
ON i onde
( rend
UN I brun
ExGSp's. I homme
8. Nasal Vowel Sounds.
dans dent
franc lent
rampant lentement
sans sang
fin faim
rien impie
garqon ton
ombre monde
rondon long
parfum
chacun
innocent
inegal
enfant
empire
ambulant
rang
sein
imprudent
flacon
sombre
ponton
humble
unique
• The/l8 sllaiit
18
KXXR0I8E8 IN PRONOUNOIKO.
9. Diphthongs.
Her
del
liure
crieur
lien
chien
lieu
lueor
bois
soie
choix
foie
boire
croiw
gloire
foire
boit
boivent
doivent
resolvent
coin
Boin
loin
foin
joint
joindre
moindre
poindre
lui
luire
bruit
bmire
oui
fooet
ouest
joueur
10.
Liquids,
Allemagne
campagne
compagnie
champignon
cognde
rogner
poign^e
poignard
fille
coquille
brille
bnllant
ceil
orgueil
cueille
cneillant
Boleil
Bommeil
bouteille
treillis
bail
b^tail
paille
Versailles
bouille
mouille
fouille
roui lions
caille
bataille
raille
raillons
11.-4 Double Consonant is sounded like
a Single,
HhU
afBche
commode
correct
ft-M
ft-flche
oo-moda
eo-net
Double c andvdouble g, followed hj eori, are both sounded ; ai^
acces accise succes sugg^rer
12. S and SS between two vowels.
cloison
croissons
poison
poisson
maison
laissons
13. T sounded like C.
patient essentiel initier
Th is sounded like t,
ih6fitre thdme th^ologie
lisons
frisson
diplomatic
th^ocratie
RSADING LBSSOmi. 19
§ VIII.— RsADIKa LSBSOKB.
1. Le livre et la plume.
The book and the pen.
2. Un livre et une plume.
A book and a pen.
3. Quel livre et quelle plume?
Which book and which pen?
4. Oe livre et cette plume.
This book and this pen.
5. Un enfant, un babit, une assiette.
A child, a coat, a plate.
6. L'eufant, Fhabit et rassiette.
The child, the coat, and the pUite.
7. Quel enfant, quel habit et quelle assiette!
Which child, which coat, and whidi plate?
8. Get enfant, cet habit et cette assiette.
This child, this ooat, and this plate.
9. Je. J'ai.
L I have.
10. J'ai mou livre et ma plume.
I haYe my book and my pen.
11. Tu as ton livre et ta plume.
Thon hast thy book and thy pen.
12. II a son livre et sa plume.
He has his book and hla pen.
13. Elle a son livre et sa plume.
She has her book and her pen.
14. Nous avons notre livre et notre plume.
We have our book and oar pen.
16. Vous avea votre livre et votre plume.
Ton have your book and your pen.
20 READING LB880N6.
16. lis ont leur livre et leur plume.
They have their book and their pen.
17. EUes ont leur livre et leur plume
They (ladies) have their book and their pea.
18. Ai-je votre livre ou le mien?
Havel your book, or minof
19. As-tu le tien?
Hast thoa thine f
20. A-tril le sient
Has he his?
21. A-t-elle le sient
Has she hers!
22. Avons-nous le n6tref
Hare we oarsf
23. Avez-vous le votre?
Have you yours?
24. Ont-ils le leur?
Have they theirs f
25. Ont-elles le leur?
Have they (htdies) theirs?
26. As-tu ta plume ou la miennet
Hast thou thy pen, or minet
27. Je n'ai pas la tienne.
I have not thine.
28. II n'a pas la sienne.
He has not his.
29. Elle n'a pas la sienne.
She has not hers.
30. Nous n'avons pas la ndtre.
We have not ovan.
READING LESS0K8. $1
31. VouB n'avez pas la v6tre.
Ton hftT6 not j<maL
32. lis (elles) n'ont pas la leur.
Thej bare not tbolm
33. Le d6 de ma soeur.
The thimble of my sister (my slster'b thimble).
34. Celui de ma soeur.
Thftt of my sister (my sister^X
35. La clef de mon frere.
The key of my brother (my brother^s kcj).
36. Celle de mon frere«
That of my broUier (my brother^s).
37. Avez-vous le d6 de ma soeur?
Hftve yon the thimble of my sister f
38. Oui, monsieur; je I'ai.
Yes, sir; I it have (I have itX
39. Avez-vous la clef de mon fr^re?
Hare yon the key of my brother?
40. Non, madame; je ne I'ai pas.
No, madam; I it have not (I have it Bot>
41. Avez-vous le verre de mon fr^re?
Have yoa the glass of my brother?
42. Non, monsieur; j'ai celui de ma soeur.
No, sir; I have that of my sister.
43. Avez-vous la tasse de ma soeur?
Have yoa the cup of my sister?
44. Non, madame; j'ai celle de mon frere.
No^ madam; I have that of my brother.
45. L'homme et la femme.
The man and the woman.
46. L'homme a-t-il I'assiette?
The man has he the plate (Has the man the plate)?
RlfcADDTQ LESSONS.
47. n I'a.
Ha it has (He hM It).
48. II ne Ta pas.
He ItbM not (He hes ItaoQi
49. Que? QuVt-il?
Wbatr What has he!
50. Qui! Qui a?
Who? Who has?
51. Qui a le plat?
Whobflsthe dish!
52. Nous Pavons.
We it hare (We hare it).
58. Nous ne Tavons pas.
We it have not (We have tt not).
54. Qu^a ce monsieur?
What haa that gentlemaa?
55. Qu^a cet homme?
What baa that man!
56. Qu'a cette dame?
What haa that lady?
57. Du garqoD. De la fiUe. De Penfant.
or the hoy. or the gfrL OT the child.
58. II a le couteau du garpon.
He has the knife of the boj (the boy'a knife).
59. E^le a la fourchette de la fille.
She has the fork or the girl (the girl^ fork).
60* Nous avons I'argent de I'horame.
We have the money of the man (the maa'b money).
61. Du pain. De la viande. De I'eau.
Some bread. Some meat Some water.
62. Voulez-vous du pain?
Will you have some bread !
READING LE880HB. 28
68. Oui, moD&ienr; s'il voiis pla!t.
T«a» ifar; if it 7011 plaaMt (ifToaplMaeX
64. Voulez-vous de la viande?
Will 70a hAva 9omB mettf
65. Non, monsieur; je voos remercie.
Ho, rir; I 7<m thiak (I think job).
66. Avez-vous de Teau?
Hat« 7<m mj wvter!
67. J'en ai.
I aome !»▼• (I hare Mme).
68. Je n'ai pas de verre.
I lifty« not • glaas (I hftye no ifimi^
69. Avez-Yons an cheval?
Bbro joa « hofwf
70. Je nW ai pas.
I of diem I1AT6 not (I hftvo Bone).
71. Avez-vous du fruit?
Hare 70a mj fraitt
72. Nous n^en avons pas.
We of it hare not (We hare Mt).
73. En voulez-vous!
Some wHI 70a (Will 70a haye aome) f
74. Les livres. Les habits. Les couteaux. Les chevaax«
The books. Tlie dothea. The kniyea. The honea.
75. Les livres des enfants. Les chapeaux de ces hommes.
The books of the ehlldien. The hats of those men.
76. Des crayons. Des pommes. Des chapeaux. Des chevaux.
Borne pencils. Some applea. Some hats. Some honMS.
77» Mes crayons. Mes pommes. Nog chapeaux. Vos chevaux.
K7 pencils. K7 applea. Our hats. Tonr horsesi
78. Les miens. Les miennes^ Les n6tTes. Les v6tre8.
Ifina OmsL Tonn.
24 BEADING LESSONS.
79. Le cheval du general et la voituTe de cette dame.
Tha hone of the genenl end the carriage of that lady.
80. Les chevaax des generaux et les voitures de ces damea.
The hones of the generals and the eairfageB of those ladies
81^ Les chevaux de yotre voisin et ceux da n6tre.
The hones of your ne1|^bor and those of oarsb
82. Les voitures de vos amis et celles des n6tres.
The earriages of yoor friends and those of onrs.
83. Ce cheval-ci et celni-la.
This horse and that
84. Cette voiture-la et celle-ci.
That earriage and thiSb
85. Je suis ton ami.
I am thy Mendi
86. Ta es le mien.
Thou art mine.
87. Oil est votre p^ref
Where is yonr Ikther?
88. II est la.
He is there.
89. Voire mere est-elle ici?
Tour mother is she here (Is yonr mother heiia>)f
90. £])e est dans la chambre.
She is in the room.
91. Noos sommes vos Yoisins..
We are yonr neighhom
92. Yous 6tes nos amis.
Yon are ovi friends^
93. lis sont dans le jardin.
They are in the garden.
94. Elles sont dans le salon.
They are in the parlor.
READING LESSONS. 26
95. £te8-vous le premier!
Are yoa the first T
06. Je ne suis pas le premier.
I em not the fint
97. Cette demoiselle est la premiere de sa claase.
That jonng]»dj It the flnt of her efaMU
98. Oe fruit est bon.
This frnit is good.
99. Cette pomme n'est pas bonne.
Tills spple is not good.
100. Ce petit livre est amusant
This UtUe hook is smnslng.
101. Cette petite histoire est amusante.
This little histoiy is emnslng;
102. Nous ne sommes pas petits.
We ws not little
103. Ces petites filles sont trds aimables.
Those little girls ws rerj smUhle.
104. Ma soeur est en haut
My sister is tbore (ap-stalrsX
105. Ma mere est en bas.
My mother is below (down-stairs).
106. Mon pere est dans le jardin.
My Ikther is In the garden.
107. Votre moucfaoir est snr le sofiu
Tour handkerchief is (lies) on the soAu
108. Vos gants sont sous votre chaise.
Yonr gloves are nnder your ehair.
109. OCk allez-vous?
Where go you (Where are yon going)?
110. Je vais chez moi.
I go tothehonseof me (IamgoinghoBie)L
26 READING LESSONS.
111. Votie fr^re va-t-il au magasin?
Tour brother gow 1m to tbo iton (Is joat brctber going. )t
112. n va chez mon oncle.
He goes to my imde'k.
113. Nous allons k la maison.
We go to the boose (boneX
114. Ces enfants vont k T^cole.
Those children go to the school (to school).
116. Y allez-vous?
Thither go 70a (Are yon going there)?
116. Je n'j vais pas a present.
I there go not at present (I sm not «t p r ssent).
117. Votre frere est-il chez vous?
Tonr brother Is he st home (Is yoqr brother st home)
118. II nV est pas; il est chez mon oncle.
He there is not; he is at my iincle*flL
119. Demeurez-vous dans cette rae-ci?
Lire yoa in tUs street (Do yoa Utc.. .)f
120. Je demeure pres d^ci.
I live near here.
121. Od demeurez-vous?
HHiere live yoa?
122. Nous demeurons k c6te de la banque.
We Uye next to the
123. Venez-vou& de T^cole ?
Oome yon from the school (Do yoa come from school)?
124. Je viens de chez moi.
I c6me from home.
126. Nous venons vous voir
We come yon to see (to see yoB>
126. Voyez-vous cette dame, pres de I'arbre?
Bee yoa that lady, near the tree (Do yon see..)?
.BEADING LESSONS. Vi
12*1, Je la Tois; c'est notre voisine.
I Inr see; die to our neighbor.
128. Oonnaissez-vous le monsieur qui est devant la ports f
KDowyoQ (Do7oiikoow)t]ie yeatlenuui who to before the door?
120. Je ne le connais pas.
I him know not (I do net know him).
130. Savez-vous votre leqon?
Know yoa year leiaon (Do jon knew. . . .) ?
131. Je ne la sals pas bien.
I to know not well (I do not know it well).
132. £tudiez-vous le soir?.
study yoQ the evening (Do you stady in the erening) f
133. J'etudie le matin.
I study the Dkomiog (in the nuvnlngX
134. Quand faites-voas votre theme?
When do yoa yont eseretee (Whendoyondo ...)!
135. Je le fais dans Tapres-midi.
I it do in the allemoon.
136. Que dites-vous?
What say you (What do yen say) f
137. Je dis quMl fait beau temps.
I say that it makes (to) fine weather.
138. Lisez-vous beaucoup?
Bead yon nraeh (Deyooreedmnch)?
130. Je ne lis pas beaucoup. '
I read not maeh.
140. Qu'toivez-vous ?
What write yon (Wliat are yon writing) ?
141. J^ecris une lettre k mon onele.
I write , . a letter to my miele (I am writing.. ..%
142. Nous lui 6crivons sou vent
We to him write often (We often write to him>
28 READING LB880KS.
143. Que dites-vous k voire frere?
What say 70a to yoar brother (What do 70a M]r....)f
144. Je lui dis de m^attendre.
I to him toU ma to wait (I teU him to wait te me>
145. Donnez-vous quelque chose k votre soear?
Oiw 70a aome thiiif to yoar alitor (Do 70a giTt.,. )f
146. Je lui donne ces fleurs. ^
I to her give these floweis (I gtre her theae flowara).
147. Que donnez-vous au fils du voisin?
What give 70a totheaonortheaaighbor (Whatdo7«mgit».... f
148. Nous ne lui donnons rien.
We to him giva nothing (We do not giro htm any thingX
140. Parlez-vous de quelqu'un?
speak JOB of lomebodj (Do fon apeak of aomebod7)t
150. Je ne parle de pereonne.
I apeak of Bobod7 (I do not speak of an7 o&aX
151. Parlez-vous k quelqu^un?
Speak 70a to an7 one (Do 70a speak to an7 one)?
152. Je parle a Thomme qui vend les ananas.
I apeak to the man who aella the pine-applea.
153. Avez-vons le livre que je cherchef
Hare fon the book whieh I aeekf
154. Je ne sais pas de quel livre vous parlez.
I know not of whioh book 7011 speak.
155. Voici le livre que vous cfaerchez.
Bee here the book which 70a look ibr (Hera la the book.... >
156. YoWk rhomme dont vous parlez.
There is the man of whom 70a speak.
157. Finissez-vous votre ouvrage ce matin?
Finish 70a 70Qr work thia morning (Do 70a flafah....)!
158. Je le finis a present.
T it finish at present
RSADINQ LESSONS. 29
159. Laquelle de ces cravates choisissez-vous }
Which of Ui«M ersTsti choota foo (do you «hooM) t
160. Je choisis celle-Id.
I ehooM that on«.
161. Avez-vous trouvd votre livref
Haye yoa found your bookf
162. Je Pal trouv6.
I it hm found (I hare).
163. Avdz-vous eu ma plume f
Have yon had my pw?
164. Je ne Tai pas eue.
I it haTtt not had (I hare not).
165. Avez-vouB et^ a I'eglise?
Haro yon bMn to the ehureh (to ehoreb)?
166. J'y ai ^t6 cette apres-midi.
I thora have been this afternoon (I was thora^ this aflanMov^
167. Avez-vous Ju ce livre?
Hare yoa read thto hook?
168. Je Tai lu.
I it have read (I have).
169. Avez-vous va ce monsieur!
HaTO yoa seen that gentleman t
170. Je I'ai vu.
I him bare seen (I saw him).
171. Avez-vous 6crit votre billet!
Hare yoa written yoor notet
172. Nod; pas encore.
No; not yet
173. Quand aurez-vous votre flute?
When shall yon haye yonr flata?
80 READING XB880NS.
174. Je Taurai demain.
I it Aall have to-morrow.
176. Serez-vous chez vous ce soir?
BbftUyoabe at homo to-alghtP
176. J'y serai k sept heures.
I there ahell be at leTea boon (at Berea o*eIeek>.
177. Irez-vous k la campagne cette annuel
Shell yoa go to the eonntrx thb yetr!
178. Nous irons au mois de juin.
We aball go ia the month of Jane.
170. T resterez-vous loDgtempB?
There abell yon remain a long time f
180. Nous J resterons jnsqu'en automne.
We thero fhall remain tUl in autamn.
181. Nous reviendroDs k la ville au mois d'octobre.
We Bball return to the eity in the month of October.
182. En ^tOv il fait trop chand pour demeurer k la ville.
Inenmmer, itmakee(ltto)too warm to live in the dtj.
183. En hiver, il fait trop froid d la campagne.
In winter, it makee (ia) too eold In the eonntij.
184. Au printemps nous ferons un voyage.
In aprlng we shall make a Jonmey (goon aJoam^X
185. Je crois que nous irons en Europe.
I beHeve that we shall go to Europe.
186. Nous irons en France quand nous parlerons franpais.
We ahallgo to Fmnoe when we ahall speak FMneh.
187. Avez-vous froid?
Have jon oold ( Are you oold) ?
188. Avez-vous chaud?
Have you warm (Are you warm)?
180. J^ai faim et soif.
I have hanger and thirst (I am hungry and tUnty).
REAPING LESSONS. 81
100. Mod frere a sommeil.
Ify brother hM sleep (M7 brother Is sleepy).
191. Ce gar^on a peur.
Thif bo7 has fear (This hoy \» afraid).
102. 11 a honte de le dire.
He haa ahame to it mj (He ia ashamed to aajr lo).
103. Ai-je nuBonf
Have I light (Am I right) ?
104. V0U8 avez tort
Ton hare wrong (Ton are wrong).
105. Pouvez-yous faire ce que je vous ai ditf
Can yovL do that which I 70a have told (what I told you)!
106. Je ne puis.
I
107. Youlez-Yous me faire an plaisirf
Will joa BM do • pleasure (do me a fliT€i)f
108. Yolontiers, si je puis.
WUlinglj, if I ean.
100. Youlez-vous aller k la poste pour moil
Will 70a go to Um post-offloe for m«?
200. Savez-vous ^compter en fran^ais?
Know 70a how to coant in Frenefa (Can 70a eooat ••.)t
201. Je ne le sais pas.
I it know not (I do not).
202. Je vous Fapprendrai, si vous voulez.
I 7«a/it willtoaeh, if 70a wish.
203. Je vous serai bien oblig^.
I to 70a ahall be moeh obliged.
204. Commengons a present
Let OS begin at present
32
CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS.
§ IX. — NoMBREs Gardinaux. Nombres Ordinaux.
ordinal Numb&n.
Ordinal Numbers,
1. Un, une.
Ist. Premier.
2. Deux.
2d. Second, or deuxi^ma
8. TroiB.
8d. Troisi^me.
4. Quaire.
4th. Quatri^me.
6. Cinq.
6th. Cinqui^me.
6. Six.
6th. Sixl^me.
7. Sept.
7th. Septi^me.
8. Huit.
8th. Huitiime.
9. Neuf.
9th. Neuvi^me.
10. Dix.
10th. Dixi^me.
11. Onze.
11th. Onzi^me.
12. Douze.
12th. Douzi^me.
18. Treize.
18th. Treizi^me.
14. Quatorze;
14th. Quatond^me.
15. Quinze.
16th. Quinzi^me.
18. Seize.
16th. Seizi^mo.
17. Dix-sept.
17th. Dix-septi^me.
18. Dix-hult.
18th. Dix-huiti^me.
19. Dix-neuf.
19th. Dix-neuviime.
2a Vingt.
20th. Yingti^me.
21. Vingt etQD.
2l8t. Yingt et uni^me
222. Yingt-deux.
22d. Yingt-deuxi^me.
28. Vingt-troig
28d. Yingt-troid^me
24. Yingt-quatre.
24th. Yingt-quatri^me. «
26. Vingt-cinq.
26th. Yingt-cinqui^me.
26. Ving^Bix.
26th. Yingt-sixi^me.
27. Vingt-sept.
27th. Yingt-septi^me.
28. Vingt-huit.
28th. Yingt-huititoe.
29. Tingt-nenf.
29th. Yingt-neuvi^me.
80. Trente.
80th. Trenti^me.
81. Trente etiin.
8l8t. Trente et uni^me.
82. Trente-deux.
82d. ^ Trente-deuxi^me.
88. Trente-trois.
88d. Trente-troia^me.
40. Quarante.
40th. Quaranti^me.
41. Quarante et nn.
41st. Quarante et uni^me.
42. Quarante-deux.
42d. Qnarante-deuxi^me.
48. Quarante-trois.
48d. Quarante-troiHifeme.
60. Cinquante.
60th. Cinquanti^me.
61. Cinquante et un.
6l8t. Cinquante et unifeme
62. Cinquante-deux.
&2d. Cinquante-deuxi^me.
68. Cinquante-trois.
63d. Cinqnante-troisi^me.
OABDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS.
83
60. Soixante.
60th.
61. Soixante et nn.
61st.
62. Soixante-deux.
62d.
68. Soixante-trois.
63d.
70. Soixante-dix.
70th.
71. Soixante et onze.
7l8t.
72. Soixante-donn.
72d.
73. Soixante-treize.
73d.
74. Soixante-quatorze.
74th.
75. Soixante-quinze.
75th.
76. Soixante-seize.
76th.
77. Soixante-dix 8ept.
77th.
78. Soixante-dix-huit.
78th.
79. Soixant€-dix-neuf
79th.
80. Quatre-vingts.
80th.
81. Quatre-vingt-un.
8l8t.
82. Quatre-vingt-deux.
82d.
83. Quatre-vingt-trois.
88d.
84. Quatre-vingt-quatre.
84th.
86. Quatre-vingt-cinq.
86th.
86. Quatre-vingt-six.
86th.
87. Quatre-vingt-scpt.
87th.
88. Quatre-vingt-huit.
88th.
89 Quatre-vingt-neuf.
89tb.
90. Quatre-vingt-dix.
90th.
91. Quatre-vingt-onze.
9l8t.
92. Quatre-Yingt-doiize.
92d.
93. Quatre-vingt-treize.
98d.
94. Qnatre-vingt-qoatorse
94th.
96. Quatre-yingt-quinze.
95th.
96. Qiiatre-vingt-seize.
96tb.
97. Qiiatre-vingt-dix-sept.
97th.
98. Quatre-vingt-dix-huit.
98th.
99. Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf.
99th.
100. Cent.
100th.
101. Cent-un.
lOlst.
200. Deux cents.
200th.
210. Deux cent-dix.
210th.
1,000. Mille.
1,000th.
1,001. Mille-nn.
I,00l8t.
2,000. Deux mille.
2,000th.
2,500. Deux mille-cinq cents.
2,600th.
. 8,000. Trois mille.
1,^,000. Un milUon. 1,0(
8,000th.
30,000th.
Soixanti^me.
Soixante et uni^me.
Soixante-deuxi^me.
Soixante- troisi^me.
Soixante-dixitoe.
Soixante-onzi^me.
Soixante-douzi^me.
Sdxante-treiziime.
Soixante-quatorzi^me.
Soizante-quinzi^me.
Soixante-seizi^me.
Soixante-dix-septiime.
Soixante-dix-huiti^me.
Soixante-dix-neuriime.
Quatre-vingti^me.
Qiiatre-vingt'Uni^me.
Qoatre- vingt-dcnxi^me.
Quatre-vingt-troisi^me.
Quatre-vingt-quatritoe.
Quatre-vingt-dnqui^me.
Quatre* vingt-sixi^me.
Quatre-vingt-septi^me.
Qoatre- vingt-huitiime.
Quatre-yingt-neuviime.
Quatre- vingt-dixi^me .
Quatre- vingt-onziime .
Quatre- vingt-douzitoe.
Quatre- vingt-treizi^me.
Quatre- vingt-quatorzi^me.
Quatre-yingt-quinzi^me.
Quatre-yingt-seizi^me.
Quatre-yingt-dix-septiime.
Quatre-yingt-dix-buiti^me.
Quatre-yingt-dix-neuyi^me
Centi^me.
Cent-uniime.
Deux centi^ma.
Deux cent-dixi^me.
Milli^me.
Mille-unitoe.
Deux milU^me.
Deux mille-einq oentitoo.
IVois milU^me.
Millionitoe.
20
l8% DEflKlTIONS OF tHA PARTS OF BPSSCH.
/
X. — ^Parts of Spbsch.
There are ten parts of speech :
1. Noun, 6. Participle,
2. Article, 7. Adverb,
3. Adjective, 8. Preposition,
4. Pronoun, 9. Conjunction,
6. Verb, 10. Interjection.
§ XI. — Definitions of the Pabts of Spssch.
1. (a.) A Noun is the name of a person, place, or thing; as,
Washington, Paris, city,
(6.) Nouns are proper or common: a proper noun denotes a
particular person or object ; as, Workington, Paris : a common
noun denotes one of a class ; as, dty, tree,
(r.) Onnmon nouns include collective and abstract nouns : a
collective noun is the name of several individuals together; as,
meeting, committee : an abstract noun denotes some quality con-
sidered apart from its substance ; as, goodness, pride, frailty,
2 (a.) The Article is a word placed before a noun to limit its
signification ; as, the tree.
(6.) In French, there is only one article, the equivalent of the,
d. (a.) An Adjective is a word added to a noun, to describe
or limit it ; as, the large tree, my tree.
(6.) There are two kinds of adjectives : qualifying and deter-
minative. The qualifying adjective adds a quality to the noun;
as, the lar^ tree: the determinative adjective limits its sense;
as, my tree.
(c.) The determinative adjectives are either possessive, denoting
possession ; as, my tree : demonstrative, pointing out the object ;
as, that tree : num^ral^ indicating number or order ; as, one tree ;
the first tree : or, indefinite ; as, which tree ?
4. (a.) A Pronoun is a word that is used in the place of a
noun ; as, / have your book, you have mine,
(6.) There are personal, possessive^ demonstrative^ relative^ and
indefinite pronouns.
DEFINITIONS OP THK PARTS OF SPEECH. 35
Personal pronouns represent persons ; as, /, you, he, &c.
Possessive pronouns denote possession; as, mtn^, yours, <fec.
Demonstrative pronouns point out objects ; as, this one^ that
one, &c.
Relative* pronouns relate to a preceding noun, called the an-
tecedent ; as, the man who speaks ; the tree that falls ; the lady
whom I admire.
Indefinite pronouns do not represent any particular person or
thing ; as, ever-^ one, some one.
5. (a.) A Verb is a word that expresses action or being ; as,
to write, to live.
(6.) There are five kinds of verbs : active, passive^ neuter^ re-
flective, VLTidi impersonal,
(1.) The active verb expresses an action performed by the sub-
ject, and is, or may be, acxjompanied by a direct object ; that is,
a person or thing which is directly affected by the action of the
verb. Active verbs are transitive, when they are accompanied
by a direct object; as, he is writing a letter: and intransitive,
when they are not ; slr, he is writing.
(2.) The passive verb is the reveree of the active verb : the
person or thing which is the object of the active verb, is the
subject of the passive verb ; as, the letter is written by him.
(3.) The neuter verb expresses an action performed by the
subject, but cannot have a direct object; as, he works, he
sleeps.
Rem. — We know that a verb is neuter, when we cannot place
somebody or something after it; thus, we cannot say he sleeps
somebody, he sleeps something.
(4.) The reflective [pronominat)\ verb is always accompanied
by a pronoun of the same person and number as the subject ; as,
I flatter myself,
* Under the beftd of Belative Pronouns, French grAinmarians comprise, not only
those pronouns that relate to an antecedent noun, bat also those which, identical in fonn
with the relative pronouns, are however used without an antecedent; as, Who says so ?
Whom do y(m see? Which do you wish ? In the latter case, they are said to be used
absolutely. It would perhaps be more correct to call them, AhioluU Ff¬ms.
t Pronominal does, bat r^cUve does not, apply to all verbs tliat are used with two
pronouns, as some of tliem do not express reflexive, but reciprocal, action.
36 PBOFKRTIKS OF THE PARTS OF BPXECH.
(5.) The impersonal (uniperaormel) verb is used only in the third
person singrular ; as, it rains.
6. A Participle is a part of the verb, which partakes aJao of
the nature of the adjective ; as, Fields covered with snow, fflit-
tering in the sun.
7. An Adverb is a word joined to a verb, participle, adjective,
or other adverb, to express manner, degree, time, place, d^c.
8. A Preposition is a word that shows the relation between
nouns and other words in a sentence ; as, he stands behind the
house.
0. A Conjunction connects words, sentences, and parts of sen-
tences ; as, you and I ; he says that it rains.
10. An Interjection is a word that denotes a sudden emotion
of the mind ; ssj Ah/ alas !
§ XII. — Properties of the Parts of Speech.
1. A noun has gender^ to denote the sex, and number, to in-
dicate whether it means one, or more than one, person or thing.
(a.) The French language has only two genders, the masculine
and the /emtmne.
2. The Article and Adjective agree in gender and number
with the nouns which they limit or describe ; that is, their form
is so varied as to indicate the gender and number of the nouns.
3. A Pronoun agrees in gender and number with the noun in
the place of which it stands. Some pronouns show by their
form the gender and number of the nouns they represent ; as, he^
she, they,
4. A Noun, or the Pronoun which stands in its place, is of
the first person, when it represents the speaker ; of the second,
when it represents the person spoken to ; and of the third, when
it. represents the person or thing spoken of.
1st person : /, we ; us,
2d « Fou.
3d "• He, she, it, they ; him, her, them,
5. A Noun or Pronoun, in a sentence, is usually either the
subject of a verb, or the object of a verb or preposition.
PROPERTIES OF THE PARTS OF 8PES0H. 87
(a.) The subject is the person or thing of which something is
said ; as, he writes : lie is the subject of the verb writes,
(6.) The object of a verb is the person or thing which is di-
rectly affected by the action of the verb ; as, he toriies a letter :
a letter is the object of the verb writes. The object which is
thus directly governed by the verb, is called the direct object
(compliment direct)^ to distinguish it from
(c) The object of a preposition, which is called an indirect ob-
ject (complement indirect) ; as, he writes a letter to me^ or he
writes me a letter : me is the indirect direct, governed by the
preposition to, expressed or understood.
6. A verb must agree with its subject, in person and number ;
that is, the termination of the verb is so varied as to indicate
whether its subject is of the first, second, or third person, and
whether it is singular or plural.
7. A verb has mxiods and ten^s.
Mood or mode is the manner in which the action or being is
represented by the verb.
By Tense is mednt the time to which the verb refers the ac-
tion, yfheihet past^ present, or future.
Mood and tense are indicated by modifications in the form of
the verb.
Moods,
8. A French verb has five moods : the indicative^ the condi-
tional^ the imperative, the subfunetive, and the infinitive,
(a.) The indicaiive expresses the action in an absolute man-
ner ; as, / writCy I have written, I shall write.
(b.) The conditional expresses the action conditionally ; as, /
would write, if I had time,
(c.) The imperative expresses command or exhortation ; as,
Write,
{d,) The subjunctive expresses the action in a subordinate and
dependent manner ; as, / wish that you would write,
(e.) The infinitive expresses the action without reference to
person or number ; as, U> write.
38 SENTENCES.
Tenses.
9. Tenses are simph or compound: simple, when they are
expressed by the verb itself; as, / write : and compound, whec
they are formed with an auxiliary ; as, / have writtm.
(a.) Each simple tense has its corresponding compound tense,
which is formed of the simple tense of Uie auxiliary and the past
participle of the verb ; thus, / have, is a simple tense ; and 1
have hady the compound tense which corresponds with it.
(5.) The compound tenses always express completed action,
(c.) The Indioativs mood has eight tenses : four simple and
four compound ; viz.
SiMPLi. Ck>Mvoinn>.
Present. Past Indefinite or Perfect.
Imperfect, Pluperfect.
Past Definite, Past Anterior,
Future, Future Anterior,
{d,) The Conditional, two :
Present. Past. '
(e.) The Imperative, one ; expressing present or future time.
(/.) The Subjunotivb, four :
Present Past.
Imperfect. PluperfeeU
(^.) The Infinitive, two :
Present Past,
{h.) To the verb belong also the Partioipbes :
Present Compound.
Past
10. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections are
invariable %Yords : that is, their forms are not changed to indicate
gender, number, Ac. They are sometimes called particles.
§ Xin.--SENTEN0E8.
1. A sentence is an assemblage of words making complete sense.
2. Every sentence consists of two parts : the subject and the
predicate. ^
BBKTENCEB. 89
8. The subject is that conoerniDg which something is said.
4. The predicate is that which is said concerniDg the subject
5. A sentence is either (1) affirmative, (2) negative, (3) inter-
rogative, or (4) interrogative and negative.
SvBnot, FFedicaih> Sosnov. PredioaU,
(1.) 'B.KTSKY is 8tttdiou8, (8.) Is"BxjXRY studiotu f
(2.) Hjsnrt is not studious. (4.) Is not Hbnrt studious f
6. A sentence must be so constructed as clearly to express the
different reiations which the words composing it, bear to eiich
other. The rules regulating the construction of sentences, form
that part of grammar which is called Syntax. They are com-
pri^d under the heads of Government, Agreement, and Position.
7. Government is the power one word has over another, in rei>
quiring it to asshme certain modifications, in order to express the
relation in which the dependent word stands to the governing word.
8. Agreement is the correspondence of one word with another,
in gender, number, and person.
0. Position, or Collocation, is the placing of the words in a
sentence, in the order required by their mutual relations.
In the sentence, Henry is uniting a letter to his father {Henry^
subject ; is writing a. letter to his father, predicate), the above
three principles of Syntax are illustrated in the following manner :
Government. — ^I'he subject Henry governs the verb is writing,
in the third person singular; the verb is writing governs the
noun letter, directly, and the woo^n father, indirectly.
Agreement. — The verb is writing is in the third person sin-
gular, to agree with its subject Henry,
Position. — In a declarative sentence, either affirmative or
negative, the subject stands first, then the verb, next the noun
which is the direct object (§ xii., 5, h), and then the noun which
is the indirect object (§ xii., 5, c), of the verb.
Rem. — ^This is the natnral or logical order in which the ideas
present themselves to the mind : first, the thing about which we
wish to say something ; then, the state or action we wish to af-
firm of it ; next^ the object, and lastly, the remote object, of that
action.
40 BINTS TO PUPILS.
HINTS TO PUPILS.
1. When you arc about to translate a sentence irom one lan-
guage into another, read it to the end, in order to ascertain its
true meaning.
2. Never translate a word from one language into another
without knowing what part of speech it is, because each part of
speech is subject to particular rules. If jou cannot determine it
by your own knowledge^ refer to the dictionary, or to your
teacher.
3. Inquire, before translating the article, or an adjective : ^ To
which noun does it belong ! What is the gender and number
of this noun ?" These things you must know in order to apply
correctly the Rules of Agreement.
4. Inquire, before translating a pronoun : ^ Which noun must
it represent f What is the gender and number of that noun !"
For a pronoun must agree, in gender and number, with the noun
it represents.
5. Be careful not to translate an adjective by a pronoun, or a
pronoun by an adjective. When I Kay : My book and his^ my
is an adjective, limiting the noun bo(A^ and hU is a pronoun,
standing in the place of the noun hook. But when I say : His
hook and mine^ his is an adjective, and mine is a pronoun.
6. Ascertain, before translating a verb, whether it is used in a
finite mood or not. Every verb in a finite mood must have a
subject, and every subject must have a verb. Inquire whether
the state or action expressed by the verb, is referred to past,
present, or future time, in order to determine what tense of the
verb you must use. Make the verb agree with its subject, in
person and number. If you cannot determine which is the sub-
HINTS TO PUPILS. 41
ject of the verb, inquire Who, or What performs the action, ex-
pressed by the verb. The answer is the subject ; as. He rwM,
Who runs? Ans. He. The tree falls. What falls? Ans.
The tree.
7. With every transitive verb, ascertain which is its direct
object. If jou cannot determine, inquire, by placing Whom, or
What, after the verb, preceded by its subject Thus : He calls
the man. He calls whom ? Ana. The man. He sees the trees.
He sees what? Ans. The trees. The answers are the direct
objects.
8. When two nouns accompany a transitive verb, without a
conjunction between them; as, I give Charles a book^ the nouns
Charles and hook cannot both be direct objects of the verb give.
To ascertain which is the direct, and which the indirect, object,
inquire : / give what f Ans. A book. To whom f Ans. To
Charles. l%e indirect object is the noun which takes the prep-
osition before it.
EXFLAIITIOK OF THE IBBBEYUTIOKS
TOED IH THD YOLOlOi
m.
MI7.
«.
B«mi nbsla&tiTiS.
«.««♦•.
wUeotire.
MMk
luuMraL
aee.
aooeQt.
n, «•
neuter verb.
ad,madv.
adverb.
cV.
otject.
IMfV* jMt
adverbial phrase*
0.'$$.
one's self.
a, 0.
any one.
ftn.
personal.
art
article.
pk.
phrasa.
a.ih.
anything.
pL or pbir
. plural.
ma.
auxiliary.
pm.
possessive.
a. «•
active verb.
P'P-
past participle.
COitf.
conjunction.
pr, mpron, pronoun.
coitf.i*.
conjunctive phrase.
pr^.
preposition.
dm.
demonstrative.
pr.ph.
prepositive phrase.
dir.
direct.
„,ck.
(quelque chose), some-
/. or fmn.
feminine.
thing, any thing.
imp.
impersonal.
«»•
(quelqu'un), anybody.
M. or tfuV- indefinite.
somebody.
Mir.
indirect.
f^...
reflective verb.
•If.
infinitive.
«. or tmg.
idngular.
ml.
interjection.
A.
thing.
m. or mow.
masculine.
PART SECOND.
PROGRESSIVE LESSONS.
1. PBEMlilRE LE9ON.
1» The names of inanimate objects have a gender* assigned
them bj custom. Livre^ book, and fruity frait, are mascaline ;
and /efo», lesson, and pomme^ apple, feminine.
The article the is lb, for the masculine, and la, for the feminine.
The book. Le livre. The lesson. La le^on.
The fruit. Le fruit. The apple. La pomme.
2» L Jef (iwrt.|mM»., 1j< jMTt.w^.)
Have (Ijf |Mrt. wi^.) ^.^{actioeverh).
Remake 1. — In words of one syllable ending with e mtf/e,§
the e is dropped before a yowel or. silent A, and an.apostrojf^e is
put in ita place ; as,
I have. J'ai.
You. \ovL% {pen. prom., ^ pen.)
Have (2dperi,) Avez {aelme verb).
You have. Yous aves.
Rem. 2, — ^When the pronoun aubject| stands after the verb, it
is joined to it by a hyphen.
• Part 1,1 ziL, 1,0. tzl.,4;ziL,4 ^ zi., 5; zlL,6. Sii.,1. 1x11,6^0.
44 PREMIERS LE^Oir.
Have I r Ai-jef
Hare you f Avez-rous f
Have you the book f Avea-vous le livre f
Yes, sir. Oui, monsieur.
No, sir. Kon, monsieiir.
YOOABULAIRB 1.
(TiM l«ft-haii4 iM^ ta a« Yoo^taltflM, to iwerrad fw maMallBe, th«
The book. liO liyre. The lesson. La le^on.
The bread: Lepain. Hie meat Laviande.
The fruit. Le fruit. The apple. La pomme.
The glass. Le verre. The cup. La tasse.
Sir. Mooaieur. ICadam, Mrs.
Et (eoitf,) Or. Ou (eoi^',)
Yes. Oui(aA^.) No. Kon(«is.)
Akaltse (Pariing) 1*
1. J*ai le verre. 2. Yous avez la tasse.
EXERCIOX 1.
1. Ayei-yoiis le livre f 2. Oni, monsieur; j*ai le livre. 8.
Avei-vous le fruit? 4. Qui, madame; j'ai le fruit. 5. Avez*
V0U8 le verre ou la tasse? 6. J^ai le verre et la tasse. 7. Avez-
Yous le pain? 8. Non, monsieur; j*ai la viande. 0. Ai-je la
pomme ? 10. Oui, monsieur ; vous avez la pomme.
TeftMi 1.
1. Have you the fruit ? 2. I have the apple. 8. Have I the
book? 4. Yes, sir; jou have the book. 5. Have jou the
bread or the meat? 6. I have the bread and the meat. 7.
Have you the glass ? 8. No, madam ; I have the cup.
* The Mcttoiis zi., xlL,, and ztlU In Part L, oontain the naoeMvy informatioii tot Um
I^Miliig of theie Ezerdflcs ; see tiie refereaeea eocompMijriiig each leasoa.
DEUXiftMB LB90K.
45
2. DEUXI^BIE LEgON.
8« (a.) Adjectiyes,* not ending in e mute^ add e for the femi-
nine; as,
Small, Utile. PdU, fern. pdlU,
Large, tall. Orand, fern, ^nmde.
The small gUuM. hdp$tii verre.
The small cup. La jMtifo tasse.
(6.) Adjectives ending in e muie^ are the same for both gen*
ders; as,
The second book. Le dtm ih m llTre.
The second lesson. Ia dtudhm le^n.
4.
What?
What have 70a f
What? which f
Which glass f
Which cap f
Ut.
Mygtass.
H7 cup.
YOUB.
Your glass.
Yonrciqp.
Quart (prxNioMi). (2, Ran. 1.)
Qa'avea-vous f
QuBL f ftm, Quiua 1% {jndtf. ai^,)
Quel vnrref
Quelle tassef
UoH, fern* iulX (pom. a4f.)
Hon verre.
Ha tasse.
Yoraa]: {/or boA gendtn)^ (poit. a^,)
Votre verre.
Yotre tasse.
YOOABULAIBE 2.
The paper. Le papier. The letter.
Hie pencil. Le crayon. The pen.
My hat. Hon chapeau. My cravat.
SmaU, little. Petit (04^.) Large, tell.
First. Premier, -^re (ae^r*.) Second.
What. QQe(/»ron.) What, which.
My. Hon, ma {a^f,) Your.
Lalettre.
La plume.
Macravate.
Grand {o^.)
Deuzidme {adj,)
Quel, quelle (adj )
Yotre (ec{p*.)
• ziL,l
tzLl
txin «.»,«.
TROZSlftMS LE909.
Analtsx 2..
1. Qii'ai-je!
2. Quelle plume avei-vonsf
EZBROIOX 2*
1. Qu'avez-vous ? 2. ^ai mon cfaapeau et ma crayate. 3.
Avez-vou8 le crayon ou la plume? 4. J'ai le crayon et la
plume. 6. Quel verre avez-vous! 6. tPai le petit verre. 7.
Quelle tasse avez-vous, la petite 6u' la grande ! 8. J'ai ma gran-
de tasse. 0. Ai-je le papier on la lettre? 10. Vous avez la
lettre, et j'ai le papier* 11. Quel livre avet^TooBf 12. J'ai le
premier livre. 18. Avez-Yous la premiere leqon ou la denxieme!
14. J'ai la deuxi^me.
TaftMx 2.
1. What have yout 2. ."V^hat have If 8. You have my
paper and my letter. 4. Which pencil have you t d. I have
my pencil and your^pen. 6^ Which pen have you ? 7. Have
you the large glass or the small ! 8. I have the small glass and
the large cup. 9. You have the first lesson. 10. I have the
first and the second. 11. I have your hat. 12. You have my
cravat
8. TROISlilME USgON.
5t (a.) The article, in the singular, drops the vowel (a or e)
before another vowel, and before silent A / as,
The money. L'argent (for U argen£).
The coat. L'hahit (for 2f Ao&i^).
The plate. L'assiette (for la aatidte).
(6.) Mon is used instead of may before a fetninine noun begin-
ning with a vowel, or with silent k ; as,
TR0I8lft|iS LB90K.
49
My plate.
Hy pretty plate.
Hon assiette (for ma auidU).
KajoUeawiette.
f« Not. VM....9AB{ado.^n^gaUm).
iff* is placed before the yerb, and /mm, after it; aa^
I have not. Je n'ai pas.
Toa hare not
HaTelttolf
Have you notf
Tow n'ayei paa.
N'ai-jepaar
IPaTea-Toaspapf
7« Cfcod,
Son,fm.hpmi$.
Biff; largi; eoam.
Oro9, fern, grom.
The good paper.
Le bon papier.
The good pen.
La bonne plume.
The large fruit.
Le gros fruit.
The big apple.
The large paper.
Le grand pafder.
Tlie coarse paper.
Le grqs papier.
The money.
The coat.
The cloth.
The dish.
The knife.
Good. '
Pretty.
L'aigent.
L'habit.
liodrap.
Leplat.
Le contean.
YOOABULAIRX 3.
The money.
The change.
The dress.
The stuff.
The cloth.
The plate.
The fork.' '
Bon, bonne (04^.)
JoU (a^f,)
Big;]«ige;
But.
Lamonnale.
La robe.
iL'^toHe.
L'assiette.
La fourchette.
Otos, grosse (a.)
Mais {egf^\)
Analtsx 8«
1. J*ai ma bonne phune.
2. Je n'ai pas rotre crayon.
• la
vrmj iMgatlTVMslMiM^ iM mint pneede tb* T«rb; bat fM to nwta mtA wl^
48 QITATRlftm LE90K.
EXBRCIOS 8.
1. Qa^arez-voust 2. J'ai I'argent et la lettre. 8* Avez-vous
I'faabitf 4. Je n^A\ pas Pfaabit 5. Avez-vous le plat et Fas-
siette ? 6. J*a^ le plat et la foarchette ; mais je n'ai pas Tassiette.
7. Quel coutean avez-voos f 8. J'ai mon joli couteau. 9. Avez-
vous le boQ drap? 10. Non, monsieur; j'ai le gros drap. 11.
Quelle 6toffe avez-vousf 12. J^ai la grosse 4toffe. 18. Avez-
Tous ma jolie tasse? 14. Je n'ai pas voire jolie tasee. 15.
Quelle robe si-je? 16. Vous avez ma bonne robe. 17. Avez-
vous ma monnaie! 18. Je n'ai pas voire monnaie.
THftMX 8.
1. What have It 2. Ton have my pretty dress. 8. Have
yon the money f 4. I have the money, but I have not the coat
6. Have you the coarse clotb f 6. I have the good cloth and
the coarse stuffl 7. Have you my pretty dish ? 8. I have the
fork and the plate, but I have not the dish. 9. Have you my
large apple ? 10. I have your large knife, but I have not your
apple. 11. Tou have my good stuff. 12. Have I my change?
18. You have your change, but you have not the fruit.
4. QUATRliSME LEgON.
8« The personal pronouns, as subjects of the verb,* are:
I.- Wa. Ja. Koos.
Tbou. You. Tu. Vous.
Ha. Thit. II. Jim,
Shb. Thit (/mi.) Slu. Slues.
Bbm. — Vous is used, as you in English, for the singular as
well as the plural ; tu is also used, but only between parents and
children, and among intimate friends.
QUATRlftMB LB9ON.
49
9.
TOHATB.
Present Tenge.
I have. We have,
)rkouhaat, Toukaoe.
Be has. They have.
She has. They hone.
Atois {aetioe wrb),^
IndicatiYe Mood.
J*ai. Jiout t
Jhi as. Voiu enez,
Jl a, lU ont.
lOt IndicatiYe Present.
Have If Have we f
Sastthouf ' Bfweycuf
Eiuhef Baoeiheyf
Eiu she f Bkve they f
Interrogative Form.
Ai-je f Avoiu-noiu f
Am-Iu f Avez-vout f
A't-af OntriUf
A't-dUf Ontrelletf
Rem. — In the interrogative form, the letter /, between two
hyphens (-/-), is inserted, for euphony, between the verb and the
pronoun of the third person singular, in those tenses in which
the third person ends with a vowel.
11 • This, that. Cb, oxijfem. ccm (demona. acff.)f
Ce is used before a masculine noun beginning with a oonso*
nant ; cet^ before a masculine noun beginning with a vowel, or
with silent A ; as,
This gentleman, that gentleman.
This man, that man.
This lady, that lady.
What has that man f
Who, whom ?
Who has the horse f
We have not the money.
Have they not the letter ?
What have they?
Ce monsieur.
Get homme.
Cette dame.
Qu'a cet homme f
Qm? {rdatioe pronoun,)X
Qui a le cheval ?
Nous n'avons pas 1' argent.
N'ont-ils pas la lettre ?
Qu' ont-ils r Qn' ont-elles f
YOCABULAIRE 4.
The man. L' homme. The woman, the wife. La femma.
The gentleman. Le monsieur. The lady. La dame.
The horse. Le cheval. I^® ^U^J^®'
The vehicle.
(
La voiture.
♦xi,B,&.
t xl., 8, h, c
3
% zL, 4; note p. 85.
60 QUATRlftME LE^ON.
The wine. Le vin. The beer.
The coffee. Le caf6. The coffee
The tea. Le th6. The tea-pot. Lath^i^re.
The wine. Le vin. The beer. La bifere.
The coffee. Lecaf6. The coffee-pot. La caf^ti^ie.
This, that. Ce, cet, cette (a^\) Who, whom. Qui (jnvn.)
Bad. Mauvaifl ((K^'.) Best. MeUleur (a<i^'.)
Analtsk 4.
1. Get homme a men argent
2. Qui a voire argent t
3. QuVtril?
EXERCICK 4.
1. Qa*avoDs-noiis ? 2. Nous avons le bon cafe. 3. Qui a la
caf6tiere ? 4. La femme a la cafeti^re. 5. Qu^a ce monsieur ?
6. II a le cheval et la voiture. 7. Qu'a cet homme ? 8. II a le
mauvais vin. 9. A-t-il la mauvaise biere? 10. II a le vin,
mais il n'a pas la biere. 11. Qu'a cette dame? 12. Elle a le
th6 et la th^iere. 13. A-t-elle le raeilleurth6? 14. £lle n*a
pas le meillenr, 15. Avons-nous I'argent? 16. Nous n^avons
pas I'argent 17. Ont-ils le meilleur drap ? 18. lis out le meil-
lenr. 19. N'ont-elles pas la meilleure ^toffef 20. EUes out la
meilleure.
Th^me 4.
1. Have we the best coflfee ? 2. We have tbe best 3. Who
has the tea and the tea-pot ? 4. Who has the bad wine and the
bad beer ? 5. That gentleman has the beer, but he has not the
wine. 6. What has that man ? 7. He has the horse and the
carriage. 8. Which hoi-se has he ? 9. What has the woman ?
10. She has the coffee-pot 11. Has she the dress? 12. This
lady has the dress. 13. Have we not the fourth lesson? 14.
What have they? 15. Which lesson have they (/ewi.)? 16.
They have the fourth.
CINQUlftMB LE9OK. 51
6. CINQUlilME LEgON.
12t (a.) In an interrogative sentence,* when the subject is a
noun, it stands first, then the verb, and after it, a personal pro-
noun, agreeing with the subject in person, gender and number ; as
JBastkemanf (Themanhashef) L'hommea-t-Uf
Has that gentleman the money ? Ce monsiear a-t-il I'argent ?
Has that lady the letter ? Cette dame a-t-elle la lettre ?
Which letter has the lady f Quelle lettre la dame a-t^elle ?
{b,) When the sentence begins with the pronoun que? the
noun subject may either precede or follow the verb ; as,
What has that gentleman f \ ^^ .""onsieur qu'a-t-il ? or,
( Qu a ce monsienr r
13> Thy. Ton, fern. TAf (poss. adj.)
His, her. Son, fem. SAf *' "
OuE. NoTRBt (/<w hdith genden^ pots. ae^\)
ThBIB. LBUKf " " " *'
His brother, her brother. Son frfere.
His sister, her sister. Sa soeur.
Our horse and their carriage. Notre cheval et leur voiture.
Has your brother his cravat ? Votre Mre a-t-il sa cravate ?
Has your sister her bonnet ? Votre sceur a-t-elle son chapean f
rhy plate, her plate. Ton assiette, son assiette (5, b.)
14t The article and adjectives must be repeated before eacli
noun. The article must also be repeated before each adjective
with which a noun is understood ; as,
Which k^fe and fork ? Quel coutean et quelle fonrchette ?
This knife and fork. Ce couteau et cette fourchette.
His knife and fork. Son couteau et sa fourchette.
The small knife and fork. Le petit couteau et la petite four-
chette.
• fill, «. t xi , 8, &, c
52
CINQUlfcMS LE90N.
Rem. — ^The adjective is frequently used without the noun, to
avoid repetition. The word one, following the adjective, is not
expressed ; as,
Which knife? The small one. Qaelcouteau? Le petit.
Which fork ? The large one. Quelle fourchette ? La grande.
VOOABULAIRC 5.
My father.
Thy brother.
His Bon.
Our nephew.
Your boy.
Your wedter.
Their servant.
Which whip f
This stick.
Hon p6re.
Ton frfere.
Sonfils.
Notre neveu.
[ Votre gar^n.
Leurdomestique.
Quel fouet f
CebAton.
My mother.
Thy sister.
His daughter.
HUgirl.
Our niece.
Your maid-
servant.
Ma m^re.
Tasoeur.
[ Sa fille.
Notre ni^.
y Votre servante.
Their servant (/.) Leur domestique.
Which saddle f Qaelle selle f
This cane. Gette caniie.
Analtsr 6.
1. Qa'acette filler
2. Elle a son couteau, sa fourchette et son assiette.
EZERCICE 5.
1. Votre frere a-t-il le bon drapf 2. II a le mauvais. 3.
Votre soeur a-t-elle la bonne 6toffe ? 4. Elle a la manvaise. 5»
Qu'a votre neveu? 6. II a son fouet. 7.* Son pere quVt-il?
8. II a sa selle. 9. Qu'a sa mere ? 10. Elle a notre voiture.
11. Quel plat et quelle assiette votre nidce a-t-elle? 12. Elle a
son plat et son assiette. 13. Qu^a ce garpon f 14. II a son bft-
ton. 15. Qui a le vin et ie cafe ? 16. Leur domestique a le
vin, et leur servante a le caf(§. 17. Cette dame a-t-elle I'habit
et la robe? 18. Son fils a Thabit et sa fille a la robe. 10.
QuWtu ? 20. J'ai ton chapeau et ta canne.
SIXiftME LS^ON.
58
Th&me 5.
1. Has your nephew the saddle ? 2. He has the whip, and
his father has the saddle. 3. His mother has our carriage. 4.
rheir servant has our hone. 5. Which glass and cup has your
niece ? 6. She has the pretty glass and cup. 7. Has the boy
the letter? 8. His sister has the letter. 9. What has your
brother? 10. He has his hat and cane. 11. Which dish has
the maid-servant? 12. She has the small one. 13. Has that
gentleman the wine and the fruit? 14. His son has the wine,
and his daughter has the fruit. 15. I have thy knife and fork
and his plate. 10. Have we not the letter? 17. We have not
the letter. 18. They have the letter, and we have the money.
6. sixi£:m£ LEgON.
15t The possessive pronouns* are
MlNB, MT OWN.
Thinb, tht own.
His, HBB8, HIS OWN, HKB OWN.
oubs, ovb own.
toubs, tovb own.
Tbsibs, tbmssl own.
Itt Which oni.
Which knife has the servant f
Which one has he ?
Mine, thine, or his ?
Ours, yours, and theirs.
Which fork has he ?
Which one has he 7
Mine, thine, or his ?
Outs, yours, and theirs.
NeUker nor.
Neither. mine nor yours.
He has neither mine nor yours.
He has mine and yours also.
La xiKN, /em. la miknnb.
Lb hbn, fem. la tibnnb.
Lb sibn, /em. la sibnnb.
Lb n6tkb, fem. la nAtbb.
Lb v6tbb, fem. la vAtrb.
Lb lbvb, fem. la lbub.
LbQUBL, fem. LAQUBLLB.f
Quel couteau le domestique a-t-il?
Lequel a-t-il ?
Le mien, le tien, ou le den f
Le n6tre, le v6tre et le leur.
Quelle fourchette a-t-il f
Laquelle a-t-il f
La mienne, la tienne, ou la siennef
La n6tre, la v6tre et la leur.
JVt. . . .m (w before the verb).
Ni la mienne ni la v6tre.
II n'a ni la mienne ni la vfttre.
II a la mienne et la v6tre aussi.
•xL,4; ziL4»&.
t xiL,4; page85tnoteh
54
8IXI&ME LE^OK.
YOCABULAIRE 6.
The countryman. Le paysan.
The ox ; the beef. Le boeuf .
The egg. L'oeuf.
The vinegar. Le vinaigre.
The countrywoman. La paysanne<
The cow. La vache.
The salad. La salade.
The sauce. La sauce.
Neither . . . nor. Ni . . ni (ne), conf. Also, too.
Aussi (tukf.)
Analyse 6.
1. Qaelle lettre a7ez-vou8 ? J'ai votre lettre.
2. Laquelle avez-voos ? J'ai la v6tre.
EXERCICE 6.
1. Le domestique a-t-il votre fouet? 2. II n'a pas le mien;
il a le v6tre. 3. Quel fouet le gar^on a-t-il ? 4. U a le sien.
5. Lequel avons-nous ? 6. Nous avons le n6tre. 7, Votre ne-
veu a-t-il votre selle on la mienne ? 8. II n'a ni la v6tre ni la
mienne. 9. Quelle selle a-t-il? 10. II a la sienne. 11. La-
quelle avons-nous ? 12. Nous avons la n6tre. 13. Ont-ils vo-
tre vache? 14. lis n*(jnt pas la notre. 15. Quelle vache ont-
ils? 16. lis ont la leur. 17. Le paysan a-t-il votre boeuf ou le
sien ? 18. II a le n6tre et le sien aussi. 19. Qu'a la paysanne?
20. Elle a I'oBuf et la salade. 21. A-t-elle le vinaigre et la
sauce ? 22. Elle n*a ni le vinaigre ni la sauce.
THftMS 6.
1. Has the boy his stick or yours? 2. He has his. 8. Which
one have you ? 4. I have mine. 5. Have we their ox or ours ?
6. We have ours and theirs too. 7. Have you his cane or mine?
8. I have neither his nor yours. 9. Which one have yon ? 10.
Which cow has th'e countrywoman? 11. She has hers. 12.
Have we their carriage? 13. We have not theirs. 14. We
have ours. 15. What has the countryman? 16. He has the
SEPTlftMB LE9ON.
55
beef^ the egg^ and the salad. 17. Has the maid-ftervant the vin-
egar? 18. She has the vinegar and the sauce also. 19. Have
they not our horse ? 20. They have not ours. 21. They have
theirs.
1. SEVntME LEgON.
Plural of Nouns, Adjeotives, etc.
17* The plural of nouns, adjectives, and most pronouns, is
formed by adding a to the singular ; as, verre, plural verres.
Thv (phirifl). Lis (for both genden).
The small glasses. Les^tte verres.
The small cups. Ijd&petUea tasses.
(jUmtoE). Mss {for both gendertj pon. a^f.)
Mt
Thy
His, b
Our
Your
THua
Mim
Thinb
His,
OUBS
YOUBS
Thiibs.
ThIBB, THOSB
Which, what
Which ohis
Tbs
Sbs " "
Nos " "
Vos " "
Lbubs *• "
Lrs hiins,/. lb miimnis (pofs.pran,]
las TUNS, fan. lbs tibnnis **
Lis sibns, fern, lbs siihhis '*
Lbs m^tbbs (/or both gmdart) "
Lbs v6tbbs ** "
Lbs lbubs ** '*
Cbs (for both gendertj demont, adj.)
QwsiSt/em. qubllbs (Mff.)
LB8QUEU,/eni. lbsquilum (pron.)
18t (a.) Nouns and adjectives ending in s, x, or z, remain un-
changed in the plural ; as.
The gtocking, the stockings. Le &a«, les bat.
llie bad stockings. Les mamau has.
The bad pens. Les mauvaites plumes.
(&.) Nouns ending in au or eu, add x in the plural ; as.
Tlie knife, the knives.
Ihe nephew, the nephews.
Le eouteaUf les eouteaux,
Le neoeUj les neoeux.
66
SEPTlftME LE9OK.
(c.) Nouns ending in al, change al into aux ; as,
The horse, ihe horses. Le chewd, les chevaux.
The general, the generals. Le ffhUral, les gMraux,
VOCABULAIRB 1.
The stocking.
The umbrella.
The shoe.
The vegetable.
Lebas.
Le paraplnie.
Le Soulier.
Le l^me.
My neighbor. Mon voisin.
The watch.
Theofaair.
The boot.
The potato.
La montre.
La chaise.
Labotte.
La pomme de terra
My neighbor (/. ) Ma voisine .
Analyse 7.
1. Ces hommes ont nos bons cbevaux.
2. Nous avons leurs mauvais chapeaux ; ils ont les n6tres.
EXERCICE Y.
1. Avez-Yous mes souliers ? 2. J'ai les miens. 3. Quels pa-
rapluies vos voisins ont-ils ? 4. lis ont les leurs. 5. Lesquels
avez-vous ? 6. Nous avons les n6tres. 7. Quelles bottes le do-
mestique a-t-il ? 8. U a les v6tres et les miennes. 9. Quelles
chaises voire voisine a-t-elle? 10. Elle a les siennes. 11. Ces
paysans ont-ils vos legumes ? 12. Ils ont leurs pommes de terre.
13. Qu'avez-vou8 ? 14. Nous avons nos petits couteaux et nos
jolies montres. 15. Vos nevenx ont-ils les bons bas? 16. Ils
ont les mauvais. 17. Qui a les meilleurs chevaux? 18. Le g6-
n^ral a les meilleurs.
THftME 7.
1. I have my shoes and yours. 2. Who has your stockings ?
3. My neighbor has mine and his. 4. Which umbrellas have
you ? 5. We have the large ones. 6. Which ones have those
ladies ? 7. Which boots have the servants, yours or mine ? 8.
Which ones have your nephews? 9. They have theirs. 10.
Our neighbor {/em,) has our chairs, and we have hers. 11. My
HUITlftMB LEgON. 57
nieces have their little watches. 12. We have our bad hats and
boots (14). 13. Those men have the best horses. 14. That
countrywoman has the best potatoes. 15. We have her eggs
and her vegetables.
8. HUITlfcME LEgON.
19* There are four classes or conjugations of verbs, distitt
guished by their infinitive endings. (Part III., § xxix.)
The verbs of the^r^^ conjugation end in er ; as,
TdMkox cukfcr^ to inguirefcr. Demander (root demand j ending er).
To taishfor, to desire, Detirer (" de«r, ** er),
lb hokfvr, to aedc, Chereher ( ** eherch, ** er).
Tofind, Trouver ( ** trctw, ** er).
20t The terminations for the indicative present, of the verbs
of the first conjugation, are : e, es, e, ons^ «?, ent.
To form the present tense, add these terminations to the root
of the verb.
Ihdioativs Present of Demander.
Icuik^ or cukfor. We cuk. Je demande. Nam demandom.
ThoucuJout, Touask, Tademandee, Vouu demandez.
Be asks. They ask. 11 demands. Ilsdemandent.
Rem. — In French, the present tense has only one form. The
English compound forms, / am asking for^ I do cuk^ are ex-
pressed simply by ye demande.
We are looking for. Hons cherchons.
We do not find. Koua ne trouvons pas.
21* Indicative Present of Demander — Interrogative Form,
Do I ask f Do we oak f DemandS-Jef Demandons^nous f
Dostthouaskf Doyouaskf Demandes-tuf Demandez-vous f
Ihesheaskf Dotheyaskf Demande-t-Uf DemandentrOtt
8«
58
HUITlftM£ LE9ON.
22* Demander, dmrer^ chereher, trouver^ are active verbs.
Active verbs require do preposition before the noun whicL is the
direct object of their action.*
I am asking /or the bread.
He wishes /or the fruit.
We are looking /or our books.
Something J any thing.
Nothing^ not any thing.
Are you looking for any thing f
I am not (looking for any thing).
Is that gentleman asking for any
thing ?
What is that gentleman asking for f
Whom is that gentleman asking
for?
Je demande le pain.
B d^ire le fruit.
Kous cherchons nos livres.
Qudque dum (maac. noun).
JVi5....no» **
Cherches-votts quelque chose f
Je ne cherche rien.
Ce monsieur demande-t-il quelque
chose ? (12, a.)
Que demande oe monsieur f (12, 6.)
Qui oe monsieur demande-t-il f
VOCABULAIRB 8.
The milk.
The chocolate.
The sugar.
The butter.
Lelait.
Le chooolat.
Le Sucre.
Le beurre.
The cream.
Tlie water.
The sweetmeat.
The preserves.
La cr^me.
L'eau.
)La oonfituic.
Les confitures.
Akaltsb 8.
1. Demandez-vous quelque chose f
2. Qui cherche mon frere !
3. Qui mon frere cherche*t-il f
EXSRCIOE 8.
1. Demandez-vous quelque chose! 2. Je demande le lait.
3. Que d6sirez-vous ? 4. Je desire le sucre. 5. Cherchez-vous
quelque chose ! 6. Je ne cherche rien. 7. Que trouvez-vous !
8. Je ne trouve rien. 9. Yotre m^re que demande-t-elie ? 10.
Elle demande le cafe et la creme. 1 1. Que demande votre soeur ?
12. Elle demande le chocolat et les confitures. 13. Qui demande
le beurre? 14. Ma voisine demande le beurre et Peau. 15. Qui
•arfL,6,>.
KEUVIftMB LEgON. 59
votre sceur cherche-t-elle ? 16. Elle cherche ma m^re. 17. Que
cherchez-vous ? 18. Nous cherchons nos parapluies. 19. Vos
neveux trouvent-ils leurs bas ? 20. Us ne cherchent pas leun
bas ; ils cherchent leurs souliers.
THftME 8.
1. What are you asking for? 2. I am asking for the tea,
milk, and sugar. 3. What does your sister wish for? 4. She
wishes for the preserves, 6. Is your brother looking for any
thing ? 6. He is not (looking for any thing), 1, What do you
find ? 8. We find nothing. 9. Who is asking for the water ?
10. My neighbor is asking for the water and the butter. 11.
Who wishes for the cream? 12. Those ladies wish for the cof-
fee, cream, and eggs. 13. What does that gentleman ask for?
14. He asks for his horses. 15. Whom is he asking for? 16.
What are your nephews looking for ? 17. They are looking for
their shoes, stockings, and hats.
9. NEUVlilME LEgON. -
28* a or la is affixed, with a hyphen, to the noun following
ce, cetj cette, ces^ in order to express relation of place, as this and
that do in English. Ci points out the nearer, and la the more
distant object ; as,
^Am fruit. That fruit. Ce fniit-ct. Ce fruit-W.
This carriage. T?ud carriage. Cette voiture-ci. Cette voiture-Zd.
iTAese stockings. T'Aow stockings. Ces bas-c». Cesbas-Za.
21* Thisonb, this. Cblui-oi, fern, cxllk-gi {dem. pro.)^
Thbsi. Geux-oi, fern, cellbs-oi *'
That OHB, THAT. CxLui-Ll^/ein. osllb-l1 '*
Those. Csux-iA, fern. oeujs-lI "
60
NEUVlftME LE9ON.
25f Ibhiy,
Do yoa buy HUa or that hat f
I buy this one.
Does your brother buy this or that
crayat?
Do your sisters, buy these or those
stockings ?
Which pens do you buy, these or
those?
7b love; to like; to he fond qf,
I love my friends; do you love
yours?
Adider (active verb).
Achetez-vous ee chtq^eau-ci ou eelui-ld,
J'ach^te^ oelui-ci.
Votre frfere ach^te-t-il cette era-
vate-ci ou celle-Ik ?
Yos scBurs ach^tent-elles ces bas-ci
ou ceux-lk ?
Quelles plumes achetez- vous/celles-
ci ou celles-lk ?
Aimer (active verb).
J'aime mes amis ; aimes-vous lea
vdtres?
YOCABULAIRS 9.
My uncle.
My cousin.
My friend.
The cotton.
The satin.
Mon oncle.
Mon cousin.
Mon ami.
Le coton.
Le satin.
My aunt.
My cousin (fern.)
My friend (fern.)
The wool.
The silk.
Ma tante.
Ma cousine.
Mon amie.
Lalaine.
La sole.
Analyse 9.
1. Achetez-vous ce coton-ci et cette laine-1^ ?
2. Quelle montre achetez-vous, celle-ci ou celle-ld !
EXERCICE 9.
1. Quel coton votre oncle d^sire-t-il, celui-ci ou celui-W ? 2.
II desire celui-ld. 3. Quelle laine voire tante acbete-t-elle, celle-
ci ou celle-l^? 4. Elle achate celle-ci. 5. Achetez-vous ces
bas-ci ou ceux-1^? 6. Nous n'achetons ni ceux-ci ni ceux-lji.
7. Quelles chaises vos cousins achetent-ils, celles-ci ou celles-la?
8. lis achetent celles-ci. 9. Voire cousine achete-t-elle le satin
et la soie ? 10. Elle achate le satin, mais pas la soie. 1 1. Qu'a-
chetez-vous? 12. Nous n'acheions rien. 13. Qui aimez-voas?
14. J'aime mon pere et ma mere. 15. N'aimez-voiis pas voa
amis? 16. Nous aimons nos amis aussi.
* For th« use of the gnre accent oyer th« e thtt precedts the I, in/acA^ U aehUi^
Ue aoMterU, see Port III., f xliL 4.
DIXIjIIMS LE9ON. 61
THftMS 9.
1. Do you buy this cotton? 2. I buy that. 3. Does your
uncle buy this or that wool ? 4. He buys this. 5. Which
stockings does your aunt buy? 6. She buys those. 7. Does
your cousin {/em,) buy the satin ? 8. She buys the silk, but not
the satin. 9. My cousin buys the best coffee and tea. 10. We
do not buy any thing. 11. Do you love your aunt? 12. I love
my uncle and my aunt 13. We love our friends. 14. You
love yours. 16. They love theirs.
10. DIXifeME LEgON,
26* The personal pronouns of the third person, representing
the direct objects of verbs,* are :
Him, it.
Li ) (2e and la elide the vowel before
LiL I another vowel or silent A.
Hm, rr.
Thkm.
Lb (for both genders).
These pronouns are placed before the verb ; as.
Are you looking for your brother f
Cherches-vous votre fi^re f
I amf (lookmg for him).
Je le cherche.
Do you not find the spoon f
Ne troavez-vous pas la cniller t
I do not.t
Je ne la trouve pas.
Hayeyouit?
L'avez-vous f
I have it not.
Je ne I'ai pas.
Hayelit?
L'ai-jef
Who hag it r
Qui I'af
That man has it.
Get homme Ta.
Has he it r
L'a-t-a?
He has it not.
H ne I'a pas.
Have not those children it?
Ces enfiuits ne Tont-ils pas f
He is looking for his books, have
n cheiche ses livres; les avei-
you them ?
vousf
I have them not.
Je ne les ai pas.
Those men have them.
Ces hommes les ont.
* xii, (^ ft. t In Frendi, U Is neeessary to oomptoto tti« MntenM^
62 DIXiftME LB9ON.
27* The article is used before nouns taken in a general sense (57).
. Aimez-Yous le fruit f
Do you like fruit f
Are you fond of fruit ?
I like it very much.
I am very fond of it.
(a.) Instead of How do you like
do you find. . .. /
Je I'aime beaucoup.
/ the French say : How
How do you like that cake f
Comment trouvez-vous oe g&teau f
IUkeitwell(/;Jnrfi<^^xxf).
Je le trouve bon.
YOCABULAIRB 10.
The goblet.
Le gobelet.
The spoon.
La cuiller.
The salt.
Lesel.
llie salt-cellar.
The pepper.
Le poivre.
The mustard.
La moutarde.
The cake.
Le g&teau.
The flour.
La&rine.
The chicken.
Le poulet.
The poultry.
La Yolulle.
The child.
L'enfant.
The nursery-miud
. La bonne.
I^Iuch, very much.
Beaucoup (aIp.)
How.
Commoat(a(lD.)
Analyse 10.
1. Je cherche ma plume; ravez-vousf
EXERCICE 10.
1. Qai demande le sel ? 2. Men p^re le demande. 8. Qui
cherche la saliere ? 4. La fille la cherche. 5. Avez-vous votre
gobelet ? 6. Je Pai. Y. Avez-vous ma cuiller ! 6. Je ne I'ai
pas. 9. Qui Ta? 10. La bonne Ta. 11. Qn'ai-je? 12. Yous
avez sa cuiller. 13. L'ai-je? 14. Vous I'avez. 16. Avez-vous
nos gobelets? 16. Nous ne les avons pas. 17. Quilesa? 18.
Les enfants les ont. 19. Get enfant aime-t-il legfiteauf 20. II
Taime beaucoup.- 21. Comment trouvez-vous ce poalet? 22.
Je le trouve bon. 23. Qui achate la farine? 24. Men oncle
Pach^te, et il achate aussi la volaille, le poivre et la moutarde.
ONZlftME LEgON.
68
ThIime 10.
1. Who is looking for tiie pepper? 2. I am. 3. Do you
find the salt-cellar ? 4. I do not. 6. Have you my goblet ? 6.
I have it not. 7. Who has it ? 8. The nursery-maid has it.
9. She has it not. 10. We are looking for our spoons; have
you them? 11. We have them not. 12. The children have
them. 13. Are you fond of cake? 14. I am very fond of it.
15. How d© you like this cake? 16. I find it good. 17. Does
your uncle buy the chicken? 18. He does not. 19. He does
not like poultry. 20. Who has the salt and the mustard ? 21.
My mother is asking for the milk, sugar, butter, and preserves.
11. ONZlfeME LEgON.
28t Present Tense of the neuter verb £1tre, to be.
lam.
Tkouart.
He tf, U is.
She itf it is.
We are.
You are.
They are.
I%ey are (fern.)
Jesuis.
Taes.
11 est.
JSUeesL
Ncmsomma.
VouseUs.
llsatmi.
JSllessont.
29. Where. Sere. There.
Oft. Id. Ld.
Where are you ?
Od etes-vous?
I am here.
Je suis ici.
Where is your brother f
Ob est votre fr^re f
He is there.
11 est Ik.
On, upon. Under. In.
Sur. Sous. Dans.
Where is your pen ?
Oh. est votre plume f
It lies (is) on the table.
Elle est sur la table.
Where are your books?
Oh sont vos livresf
They lie (are) on the sofa.
Us sont sur le sofa.
My father is in the garden.
Mon p^re est dans le jardin.
Bandsome^ beauHfidj fine.
New.
Heau, bely fern. bdle.
Jioweau, nouvel, fern. nouvdU.
VieuXj vieUy fem. vieUU.
64
ONZlftMS L£90N^
Rem. — Beau, nouveau^ vieux, are used before masculine nonns
boginning with a consonant; bel, nouvel, and either vieux or
vieil, before masculine nouns beginning with a Yowel, or with
silent h.
The new horse is handsome.
The new dress is beautiful.
The new friend. The fine coat.
The old coat.
The old clothes.
The fine clothes.
The handsome dresses.
Very.
She is yerj amiable.
Le nouveau cheval est beau.
La nouvelle robe est belle.
Le nouvel ami. Le bel habit.
Le vieux or yieil habit.
Les vieux habits.
Les beaux habits.
Les belles robes.
Elle est trte-aimable.
YOOABULAIRE 11.
The garden.
The gardener.
The cook.
'Vhe sofa.
Le jardin.
Le jardinier.
Le cuisinier.
Le sofa, le canap^.
The kitchen. La cuisine.
The yard. La oour.
The cook (fan.) La cuisinitee.
llie table. La table.
Handsome, fine. Beau, bel, belle. New.
Young. Jeune {cuff.) Old.
Amiable.
Here.
Where.
On, upon.
Aimable (aeff.)
Id {adv.)
OtL (adv.)
Bur {jprqf.)
Very,
There.
In.
Under.
) Nouveau, nouvel,
nouvelle (d^*.)
) Vieux, vieil,
vieille (a^f.)
Trfes (ado.)
lJ6L(ado.)
Dans (prq>.)
Sous(j»i9?.)
Analyse 11.
1. Nos nouvelles cravates sent 1&, sur la table.
2. Laquelle est la v6tre ?
8. Elie est belle.
Celle-ci.
EXERCICE 11.
1. £tes-vous lit? 2. Je suis ici. 8. Oik est le jardinier! 4.
II est dans le jardin. 5. Oii est la cuisiniire ? 6 Bile est dans
DOUZlftMB LB9OK. 65
mA cuisine. 7. Od sommes-nous ? 8. Nous sommes dans la
cour. 9. OiX est la lettre? 10. £lle est sur la table. > 11. Ou
sont mes papiers? 12. lis sont sous le sofa. 13. Votre nou-
veau cheval est-il beau ? 14. II est tres-beau. 15. Est-il jeune ?
16. U n'est ni jeune ni vieux. 17. Qui achate ce be! habit? 18.
Mon nottvel ami Tach^te. 19. Comment trouvez-vous noire
nouvelle voiture f 20. Je la trouve trds-belle. 21. Oii est vo-
tre vieille voiture ? 22. Mon oncle I'a. 23. Aimez-vous votre
petite nidcef 24. Nous I'aimons beaucoup ; elle est trea-aimable.
Th^me 11.
1. Where are yon! 2. I am here, in the yard. 3. The old
gardener is in the garden. 4. Our new horse is young and
handsome. 5. Our new cook {/em.) is in the kitchen. 6. My
old clothes are there, on the sofa. 7. Your handsome cravat
lies (is) under the table. 8. My new coat is handsome. 9. My
handsome coat is not old. 10. He likes fine clothes. 11. I am
not fond of chocolate. 12. The old lady buys the handsome
dress. 13. The water stands {is) on the table. 14. This little
girl is very amiable. 15. How do you like (27, a.) our new
horses? 16. They are very fine, v
12. DOUZIEME LEgOK
31* Okm, aho A or AN. CTn, fern, xnn (numeral {uffeeUve),^
A glass. A cup. Un verre. Une tasse.
Of, fbom. Db (prtp.)
A glass of water. Un verre d'eau.
A cup of coffee. Une tasse de caf^.
A piece of cake. Un morceau de g&teau.
A ten-cent piece (piece of ten cents). Une pi^oe de dix sous.
The eighth lesson. The eleventh. La huiti^rae le^on. La onzi^me.
Rbm. — No elision takes place before huit^ huitihne^ onze, on'
zteme.
♦ix.
66
DOUZlfiMK LE^ON.
S2f To, AT.
7b tpeak.
To give.
To whom do you speak f
Of whom do you speak f
To whom do you give the book?
I give the book to your brother.
I giye it to your brother.
Will you have f J)o you with for f
Will you have a glass of water f
Yes, sir ; if you please.
Ko, sir ; I thank you.
Parlor (neuter verb).
Doimer (actiye vert>).
A qui parlea-vous?*
De qui parlez-vous f
A qui donnes-YOus le livief
Je donne le livre k votre fr^re.
Je le donne k yotre fr^re.
Voulez-vout f or Dimrez-voue f
Voulea-vous un verre d'eau f
Oui, M. ; s'il vous plait.
Non, M. ; je yous remerde.
Monsieur, dkbrwiaUd M.
Messieurs, '' MM.
Madame, *' Mme.
Mademoiselle, <' Mile.
Mesdames. Mesdemoiselles.
83. Sir, Mr.
Oentlemen, Messrs.
Madam, Mrs.
Miss.
Ladies. Young ladies.
Rem. — In addressing a person, it is respectful to say, for
Your father. Monsieur yotre p^re.
Your mother. Madame votre m^re.
Your brother. Monsieur votre fr^re.
Tour sister. Mademoiselle votre soeur.
VOCABULAIRE 12.
rhe bookseller. Le libraire.
The floor. Le plancher.
The handkerchief. Le mouchoir.
ITie morsel. iLemorceau.
The bit. piece. f^™«™»«-
The cent. Le sou.
The young lady.
The room.
The pocket.
ITie piece.
The dollar.
To speak.
Will you have ?
To thank.
Of, from.
Same.
Both.
Tlie one and the
other.
Farler {wnL v.) To give.
Youlez-vous ? If you please.
Bemercier (a. o.) I thank you.
De (/irgj.) To, at.
Meme ipdj.) Other.
L'un et r autre. Neither. i ]
une et 1' autre. Neither the one \ Ni Tune ni I'au-
(ind^.pron.) nor the other. ( ire {ind. pron,)
r
La demoiseUe.
La chambre.
Lapoche.
Lapito.
La piastre.
Donner (ael. v.)
S'il vous plait.
Je vous remercic.
A ijfrqf.)
Autre (adj,)
rNi l'un nil 'autre.
• xlL, 6t a
tziL,5,&,o; xiiL,».
DOUZlftMS LB9ON. 6)
Analtbb 12.
1. A qui donnez-Yoas ce fruit?
2. Nous le donnons a ces enfants.
EXBRCICE 12.
1. Voulez-vous un verre d'eau ? 2. Oui, M. ; s'il vous plait.
3. Que desire mademoiselle voire soeur ? 4. Elle desire une tasso
de the. o. Youiez-vous un morceau de poulet ? C. Non, M. ;
je vous remercie. 7. OA est mon mouchoir ? 8. II est sur le
plaocher, sous votre chaise. 9. 0\k sont vos livres ? 10. lis sont
dans Pautre chambre, sur la table. 11. OiH est votre montre?
12. Je Tai dans ma poche. 13. Avons-nous la dixieme leqon
ou la onzi^me? 14. Nous n'avons ni Tune ni I'autre; nous
avons la douzieme. 15, Ces demoiselles ont-elles la m6me?
16. Elles ont la huitieme. 17. A qui parlez-vous ? 18. Jeparle
a mon libraire. 19. De qui parle-t-il ? 20. II parle de sa cou-
sine. 21. A qui donnez-vous cette belle pomme? 22. Je la
donne a cette petite fille. 23. Avez-vous une piece de diz sous?
24. J'ai une piastre, deux piastres^ trois piastres, &o.
TnftME 12.
1. Have you a knife and fork? 2. Wiiryou have a cup of
chocolate? 3. No, sir; I thank you. 4. Does your mother
wish for a piece of fowl ? 6. A small piece, if you please. 6.
Where is your handkerchief? 7. I have it in my pocket. 8.
Have you the eleventh or the twelfth lesson ? 9. We have both.
10. This young lady has the same lessons. 11. The bookseller
is in the other room. 12. Your letter lies (is) on the floor, un-
der the sofa. 13. Have you the first and the second book ? 14.
I have neither. 15, Of whom do they speak? 16. They speak
of their friends. 17. To whom do you speak? 18. I speak to
my neighbor. 19. To whom do you give that apple? 20. 1
give it to Henry. 21. We give this fruit to your brothers. 22
Who has two three-cent pieces? 23. I have one dollar, <fec.
68 TBSIZlftME UB^ON.
13. TREIZIEME LEgON.
34 1 (a.) The English possessive case is expressed by the piep-
osition de, the object possessed preceding the preposition ; as,
My brother's book (the book qf my Le livre de mon fr^re.
Im^har).
His father's horse. Le cheval de son p^re.
My sisters' friends. Les amies de mes soeurs.
(6.) The names of materials are not used as adjectives. In-
stead of saying, a diver dish^ say, a dish of silver.
A silver dish. T7n plat d'argeni.
A doth coat. Tin habit de dr£qf,
A doth shoe. Un Soulier d'itoffe.
S5t (a.) De and the article le are contracted into du^ and de
and the article les, into dee ; as,
Of the brother. Du frfere.
Of the children. Des enfitnts.
(6.) A and the article le are contracted into au, and a and the
article leSj into aux ; as.
To the son. Au fils.
To the children. Aux enfants.
(c.) De and T, and de and la; a and T, and h and 7a, are not
contracted; as.
Of the child. Of the girl. De 1' enfant. Delafille.
To the child. To the girl. A I'enfiEuit. Alafille.
36* The prepositions de and d must be repeated before each
noun; as,
I speak of Charles and Henry. Je "parl^ de Charles et de Henri.
I speak to both. Je parle )i I'un et It 1' autre.
I give the letter to the bookseller's Je donne la lettre au fils du li-
son {to the son ofihe bookseller). braire.
I am looking for the children's cot- Je cherche les gants de coton des
ton gloves {the gloves of cotton of enfants.
the children).
TRBIZlftME LE^OK.
69
VOOABULAIRE 13.
A tailor.
tTn taillenr.
A seamstress.
TJnecoatari^re.
A thimble.
Und^.
A key.
Uneclef.
A glove.
Un gant.
A pair.
Une paire.
A drawer.
Un tiroir.
A cupboard.
Une armoire.
Adde-table.
Un biifiet.
Abotth
».
One bouteille.
Rich.
Riche (a4f.)
Poor,
P&nvre (a^\)
Scarce.
Rare {atff,)
Dear.
Cher, /. ch6re.
At preaent.
A present (a(fv.)
To-day.
Aujourd'hul.
rimasc
.m^
.)Du(/ordele).
r(maac
.sing
.)Au(/orkle).
Of the •
ifem.
9W&.
)Dela.
To the-
(Jem.
ting
)Xla.
{btf.dww
)Der.
{btf.avow
.)Ar.
UplJ
or aU) Des (/or de les).
.(/rf.>ra«) Anxifar^leB).
Analtsb 13.
1. Je parle au frdre da libraire.
2. Je donne ce fruit aux enfants des voisina.
EXERCICB 18.
1. OOl est le d^ de votre soeur ? 2. II est dans la chambre de
tna mere. 3« Ayez-voos la clef du buffet f 4. EUe est dans le
tiroir de la table. 5. OOl sont les parapluies des enfants? 6.
lis sont dans Tarmoire. 7. Votre cousine achete-t-elle une paire
de gants de soie ? 8. Elle achate une paire de gants de coton.
0. De qui parle-t-elle ? 10. Elle parle de Pamie de ma soeur.
11. A qui parlec-vous f 12. Je parle & la couturi^re. 13. A
qui donnez-vous cette lettre f 14. Je la donne au fils du tailleur.
15. A qui donnez-Tous vos vieux habits ? 16. Nous les donnons
aux pauvres. 17. Parlez-rous k -Charles ou & Henri? 18. Je
ne parle ni k I'un ni k I'autre. 19. Ces hommes sont-ils riches ?
20. lis ne sont ni riches ni pauvres. 21! Quelle lepon avons-
nous aujourd'hui, la onzieme ou la douzieme ? 22. Nous avons
Tune et I'autre* 23. Le fruit est-il cher k present I 24. II est
cher et rare.
70 QUATORZXftMB LE^OV.
THftME 13.
1. My mother's gloves lie (are) on the sofa. 2. Mj silver
goblet stands (is) on the side-table. 3. The tailor^s thimble lies
(is) on the floor. 4. The key of the cupboard is in the drawer
of the table. 5. The children's shoes are in the kitchen. 6. I
have a pair of silk gloves and two pairs of cotton stockings. 7. Of
whom do yon speak ? 8. We speak of the seamstress. 9. To
whom is your sister speaking ? 10. She is speaking to the book-
seller's daughter. 11. To whom do you give those old clothes!
12. We give them to the gardener's children. 13. Those men
are rich ; they give much to the poor (awa? pauvres). 14. Do
you speak of Charles or of Henry ? 16. I speak of neither. 16.
I speak of my brother's friend. 17. We have, to-day, the thir-
teenth lesson. 18. Oranges {les oranges, fem.) are scarce and
dear at present.
14. QUATORZlfeME LEgON.
S7t That, rfHs omi (of). Ckltji, fan, ckllb (de) (dem,pron.)
Those, the okw (of), Cbux, fem. oscles (de) **
(a.) My hat and my brother's Men chapeau et celui de men fr^re.
{tluatffnybrcther).
Our carriage and the general's. Notre voiture et oelle du g^n^ral.
Your gloves and the children's. Yos gants et ceux des enfieuits.
(6.) The silver pencil-case. Le porte-crayon d'argent.
The gold one (the one ofg<M), Celui d'or.
The silver spoon. La ciiiller d'argent.
The wooden one. Celle de hois.
The cotton stockings. Les has de coton.
The woollen ones. Ceux de laine.
The gold pens. The steel ones. Les plumes d'or. Celles d'ader.
Of which one. Duquel /km. de laquelle (/wwi.)^
Of which ones. Desquels, ** desquelles.
* Page 85, note.
QUATOBZlftMB LB^ON.
^1
Of mine.
To which one.
To which ones.
To mine.
fem. delamicnne.
** des miennes.
** ii laquelle.
'^ auxquelles.
'* k la mienne.
'* aux miennes.
( Du mien,
( Des miens,
Auquel,
Auxquels,
)Aa mien,
Aux miens,
Rem. 1. — Whatf preceded by a preposition, is expressed hjquou
Of what do 70a speak f De quoi<^ parlez-yous ?
Rem. 2. — Whose? yfhen it means "to whom heUrngSy^ is ex-
pressed by a qui.
Whose pencil-case is this ? A qm<> est ce porte-crayon f
It is my brother's. H est U mon frdre.
Whose horses are those ? A qui sont ces cheyauz f
VOCABULAIRB 14,
Mabo.
MAsa
The gold.
L'or.
The silver.
L' argent.
The copper.
Le cuivre.
The pewter.
L'^tain.
The iron.
Lefer.
The steel.
L'acier.
The wood.
Lebois.
The oak.
Le chSne.
The mahogany.
L'acajou.
The marble.
Le marbre.
Analyse 14.
1. De quoi parlez-yous?
2. De votre voiture, de la D6tre et de celle da g^n^ral.
3. A qui est celle-la ?
EXERCICE 14.
1. Avez-vous mon porte-crayon ou celui de monfi-ere? 2.
J'ai celui de votre fr^re. 3. Le tailleur a-t-il les des d'argent
ou ceux d'acier? 4. II a ceux d'acier. 5. Quelles cuillers la
cuisinidre a-t-elle? 6. Elle a celles d'6tain. V. Quelle table
votre tante achete-t-elle, celle d'acajou ou celle de ch6ne ? 8.
Elle achate celle d'acajou, et la voisine achate une table de mar-
' Page 86, note^
*I2 QUINZlftMB LB9ON.
bre. 9. De quelle yoisine parlez-voas, de la v6tre ou de la
mienne? 10. Je parle de la ydtre. 11. Donnez-vous ce fruit a
vos neveux ou aux miens? 12. Je le donne aux Y6tres. 13.
De quels chevaux vos cousins parleut-ils? 14. Us parlent des
leurs. 15. Desquels parles-vous? 16. Nous parlous de ceux
du general. 17. De quoi parlez-voua? 18. Je parle de la nou-
velle voiture de mon oncle. 19. A qui est cette bouteille d'eau
de Cologne? 20. EUe est k ma soeur. 21. A qui sont ces
clefs? 22. Oelle de cuivre est k mon frfere, et celle de fer est la
clef du buffet
Tb^me 14.
1. Have you my brother's pencil-case? 2. I have your cous-
in's. 3. Have you the gold pen ? 4. I have the steel one. 6.
The gardener buys the wooden dishes. 6. The cook buys the
pewter ones. 7. We buy the silver forks. 8. They buy ^the
iron ones. 9. Do you speak of your neighbor ? 10. I speak of
yours. 11. Of which one do you speak? 12. Of what do they
speak? 13. Of what carriage do they speak? 14. Of which
one do they speak ? 16. Of ours, of yours, of theirs, of the gen-
eral's. 16. To which children do you give the fruit? 17. To
which ones do you give it? 18. To ours, to yours, to theirs, to
the neighbor's. 19. Which table do you buy, the oaken, the
mahogany, or the marble? 20. Whose handkerchief is this?
21. It is my sister's. 22. Whose gloves are those ?
16. QUINZIEME LEgON.
89t Somebody t anybody. Qudqu'utif, abb. ^jn.
Something, any thing. Qudque ehoaCf " qq. eh.
(a.) Ihlmdmn^ysomethmg^ \ PrSter quelque chose d qudqu^tm.^
Xh lend aomdhtng to somebody. ) ^^ *^
(6.) Some French verbs differ in their government from the
corresponding Eoglish verbs ; as,
QUINZlftME LE9ON
13
Ih atk iomAody for fomethuig (in >
French, 7h atk 9omdh. to aomeb,} '
2b think €f»omAody, of tonuthmg (in !
French, Ih tkmk at 90mA., at tometh.) '
Danander qudque eho» a qudqu*un,
Penaer a gudqvCtin, d qudqut efum.
Whom do yon ask for the book?
I ask your brother for it.
I ask it of your brother.
Of whom do you ihink ?
Of what do you think ?
X qui demandez-Tous le livre f
\ Je le demande ii votre fr^re.
A qui pensez-YOUS?
A quoi pensez-YOUsf (88, Boc. 1.)
40t Nobody , not anybody.
Are you looking for anybody ?
I am not (looking for anybody).
Is anybody speaking of this man f
NobcKly is speaking of this man.
Penonne (with m before the verb).
0herchez-TOU8 quelqu'nnf
Je ne cherdie personne.
Quelqu'un parle-t-il de cet hommef
Personne ne parle de cet homme.
Rem. 1. — Quelqu^un and quelque chose are not used in a neg-
ative sense.
I do not speak of any one.
I do not ask for any thing.
Je ne parle de personne.
Je ne demande rien.
Rem. 2. — Que, qtielque ckosej and rien require de before the
adjective; as,
What have yon beautifiil f Qu'avez-vous de beau ?
Something pretty. Quelque chose de JoU.
Nothing new. Rien de nouveau.
lit Adverbs, generally, are placed after the verbs which they
modify; as,
He often speaks of his friend. II parle towent de son ami.
She always thinks of her mother. Elle pense toujoura ii sa m^re.
VocABULAiRE 16. — MoscuUne Noun%,
The minister.
The physician.
The baker.
The carpenter.
The hatter.
The blacksmith.
Somebody.
Le ministre.
Le m^ecin.
Le boulanger.
Le charpentier.
Le chapelier.
Le forgeron.
Quelqu'un.
The doctor.
The apothecary.
The miller.
The joiner.
The shoemaker.
The mason.
Nobody.
Le docteur.
Le pharmacien.
Le meunier.
Le menuisier.
Le cordonnier.
Le ma^on.
Personne (ne).
74 * QUINZlfeME LEgON.
To lend. Preter (active verb). To think (of). Penser (k), («. v.)
Often. Souvent (adv.) Always. Toujours {adv.)
Sometimes. Quelquefois {adv.) Now. Maintenant (adv.)
Analyse 15.
1. Que demaodez-vous au fils du m6decin?
2. A quoi pensez-vous?
.EXERCIOE 15.
1. Cherchez-vous quelqu'un ? 2. Je cherche le m^ecin. 3.
Parlez-vous de quelqu'un ? 4. Je ne parle de personne. 5. Qui
parle du docteur? 6. Personne ne parle du docteur, mais nous
parlous du pharmacien. 7. Qui achete le bois et le fer du char-
pentier? 8. Le menuisier acbete le bois, et le forgeron acbete
le fer. 9, Que demandez-vous au boulanger? 10. Je ne de-
mande rien au boulanger. 11. Le nieunier prSte-t-il son cbeval
k quelqu'un? 12. II le pr6te quelquefois au vieux ministre.
13. Les chapeliers pr6tent-ils leurs chapeaux aux masons? 14.
lis ne les pr^tent a personne. 15. Pensez-vous souvent k votre
mere? 16. Je pense toujours a mon pere et k ma mere. 17.
A quoi ce jenne homme pense-t-il? 18. II ne pense a rien.
19. Qu'avez-vous de nouveau aujourd'hui? 20. Je n'ai rien de
nouveau, mais j'ai quelque chose de joli.
THftMB 15.
1. Are you asking for anybody? 2. I am not (asking for
any one). 3. Do you speak of anybody? 4. I speak of the
minister's son. 5. We speak of the physician. 6. Nobody
speaks of the apothecary. 7. Do you lend your money to the
doctor ? 8. I do not lend it to any one. 9. Do you ask the
carpenter for any thing? 10. I ask the joiner for a table. 11.
We lend the miller a horse. 12. He lends it to the mason. 13.
What does the shoemaker buy of the hatter? 14. Of what are
you thinking now? 15. Do you sometimes think of your friend ?
16. I often think of my cousin. 17. Nothing new to-day? 18.
What have you pretty? 19. You have always something new.
SEIZlftMS LE9ON.
16
16. SEIZI^ME LEgON.
42t The pronouns of the third person, representing the indi-
rect objects* of verbs {prep, a), are :
To HIM, TO HER. LUI 1 ,t ^ .. tx
,p ' ^ > (before the verb).
To THEM. Leur I
Do you speak to him ? Lul parlez-vous ?
I give her this nosegay. Je lui donne ce bouquet.
I ask them for the papers. Je leur demande les papiers.
43* Sim to Atm, him to them.
Her to him^ her to them.
Them to him^ them to them.
Do you give it to her ?
I do not.
I do not ask them for them.
Lt lui, le leur.
'La lui, la leur,
Les Itd^ Us leur.
Le lui donneZ'Vous ?
Je ne le lui donne pas.
Je ne les leur demande pas.
44* There, to it, at it, w it. Y {adv.), {b^ore Ike verb).
T refers to a place that has been previously mentioned.
Yotre fr&re est-il dans sa chambre f
II y est. II n'y est pas.
Erwoyer (active verb).
Qui envoyez-vous au march6 ?
J'y envoief le domestique.
Porter (active verb).
Portez-vous le parapluie ^ votre
chambre ? Je I'y porte.
Is your brother in his room ?
He is there. He is not.
To send.
Whom do you send to market ?
I send the servant (there).
To take, to carry; to wear.
Do you take the umbrella to your
room ? I do.
45 1 AU; every; whole.
All the cheese, the whole cheese.
A whole piece of cloth.
All men, every man.
All women, every woman.
Half.
Demi, when it precedes the noun, remains invariable ; when it
follows the noun, it agrees with it in gender only.
Half a piece. Une demi-pifece.
Two pieces and a half. Deux pieces et demie.
Thai, fem. ioute, plur. tous^ toutes.
Tout le fromage.
Toute une pi^ce de drap.
Tons les hommes.
Toutes les femmes.
Demi. •
♦xil.,6,c
t S«e note, page IH,
16
. The market.
The store.
The merchant.
The garret, j
The granary. J
The barrel.
The nosegay.
6EIZiI:mb LE90N.
VOCABULAIRE 16.
Le march^.
Lemagasin.
Lemarchand.
Le grenier.
Lebaril.
h& bouquet.
The street. La rue.
The house. La maison.
The merchandise. La marchandise.
The cellar. La cave.
The box, the case. La calsse.
The flower.
La fleur.
To send. Envoyer.o 1^ ^^^' *^^^^' \ Porter (ad. v.)
^ To wear. ) ^
To him, to her, Lui (pron,) There. | y (adn ^
) it, at it, in it.) ^ ^^
To them.
Toi
Leur {pron.)
Al,.e.eo.. whole, {■^^•^t Half.
Demi (tuff.)
Analyse 16*
1 . Je parle au marchand ; je lui parle.
2. Je lui envoie la lettre ; je la lui envoie.
8. J'envoie le domestique au tnagasin ; je Vj envoie.
EXERCICE 16.
1. De quoi parlez-vous au charpentier ? 2. Je lui parle de la
maisoQ de moo oncle. «3. Daus quelle rue est cette luai^on ? 4.
£lie est dans cette rue-<;i. 5. Que demandez-vous k mon fr^ref
6. Je lui demande mes gants. 7. Donnez-vous ce bouquet a
votre tante? 8. Je le lui donne. 0. Donnez-vous ces belles
fleurs u vos cousines? 10« Nous les leur donnons. IL Oik sont
tous DOS amis ? 12. lis sont tous dans le jardin. 13. Toutes les
demoiselles y sont-elles ? 14. Elles y sont toutes. 15. Envoyez-
vous le domestique au marche? 16. Je Vy envoie quelquefois.
17. Envoyonsjious la lettre au marchand? . 18. Nous la lui en-
voyons. 19. Envoient-ils leurs marchandises au magasin? 20.
lis ne les y envoient pas. 21. Portez-vous ce baril au grenier?
22. Je Vy porte. 23. Portent-ils ces caisses d la cave ? 24. lis
ne les y portent pas. 25. Portez-vous ce vieux chapeau ? 26.
. * See note, page 78L
DIX-SEPTliMB IJE9OK. ft
Je le porte quelquefois. 27. Achetez-vous toute une piece de
drap ? 28. J'achete UDe demi-piece de drap et une {Heoe et do-
mie de cette etoflfe.
THtlME 16.
1. Of what do 70a speak to the mason ? 2. I speak to him
about (de) our old house. 3. What do you ask of your cousin I
4. I ask her for that nosegay. 5. Do you give the flowere to
those ladies ? 6. I do (give them to them). 7. Is your sister
in the garden ? 8. She is there. 9. All our friends are there.
10. Do you send the girl to (the) market? 11. I do, sometimes.
12. We send all our goods* to the store. 13. Our store is in
this street. 14. Does he send all the money to the merchant?
15. He does (send it all to him). 16.. Are you taking that box
to the cellar? 17. I am. 18. Does he take the barrel there?
19. He takes it to the garret. 20. We have half a piece of
cloth and a piece and a half of silk. 21. He wears an old coat.
17. DIX-SEPTlilME LEgON.
46t For the first and second persons, there is but one form of
personal pronouns to represent the direct, and the indirect^ object
of the verb.
Ms, TO ME. Us, TO us. Mb. Kous.
Th£E, to thbb. You, to you. T«. Vous.
Who is inquiring for me ? Qm me demande ?
Whj^t do you ask me for ? Que me demandez-vous f
I ask you for the book. Je vous demande le livre.
To iakey to lead, to drive. Mener (active verb).
Do you take me to the office ? Me menez-vous au bureau f
I do. . Je vous y m^ne.
Ih eaU. AppeUr (active verb).
Do you call us ? Nous appelez-vous ?
I do. Je vous appelle.
* Qoodfl, marehandiue.
18
DIX-BKPTlftm IJC9OK.
4T.
Him to fMy her to me, than to me.
Him to iM, her to tu, them to tu.
Him to thee, her to thee, them to thee.
Him to you, her to you, them to you.
Me le, me la, me let.
Nous le, nous la, noue let
Te le, te la, te lee.
Vous le, V0U8 la, vout les.
Does he give you the book f
He lends it to me.
Does he not give it to you ?
He does not.
Yous donne-t-il le livre f
n me le prfite.
Ke vous le donne-t-il pas?
n ne me le donne pas.
48» When,
The morning. In the morning.
The evening. In the evening.
When does he take the horse to
the river t
He takes him there in the evening.
When do you take the journal to
your uncle ?
I take it to him in the morning.
7b buy tomeihmg <^ eomebody.
What do you buy of her ?
Quand.
Thus lee jours.
Le matin,
Leeoir.
Quand m^ne-t-il le cheval k la ri-
viere ?
II I'y m^ne le soir.
Quand portez-vous le journal 4 vo-
tre oncle ?
Je le lui porte le matin.
Achder qq. cA. a gqn., or de qqn.
Que lui achetez-vous ?
YOCABULAIRE IV.
The brook. Le niissean.
The sheep. [lc mouton.
The mutton.
The river.
The sheep.
The ewe.
La riviere.
La brebU.
The calf ; the veal. Le veau.
The cutlet.
I'he chop.
The omelet.
The stable.
- U c6telette.
The cheese. Le fromage.
The office ; the bureau. Le bureau.
L' omelette.
L'^curie.
To take, to lead. Mener.^
To study. fetudier.
When. Quand.
In the morning. Le matin.
To call.
To work.
Every day.
In the evening.
Appeler.*
Travailler.
Tons les jours.
Le soir. '
* M^ner takea the grave accent over the e of the root, when the e of the termination
is silent; appder doables the t, and envoyer changes y Into i, ander the same eiream*
stances : je mine, tu mines, il mine, nous menons, wms menem. Us mitient ; fappette,
tu appelles, il appdle, nous appelons, €ous appeUs, Us appelleni; f envois, tu en*
ffoies, U swvoie, nous envoyons, vous envoyea, Us envoieni. Bee Part IIL, % xliL
DIX-SSPTlftME LE9ON. 70
Analyse 17.
1. Oii vous mene-t-il ?
2. Que vous deraande-t-il f
EZSBCIOE 1*7.
1. Ou me menez-vous ? 2. Je vohs mens an bureau. 3. Que
me demandez-vous ? 4. Je vous demande mon parapluie. 5.
Oii le domestique mene-t-il les chevaux ? 6. II les m^ne a I'e-
curie. v. Quand les paysans m^uent-ils leurs brebis au niisseau ?
8. Us les y meuent le soir. 9. Quand etudiez-vous vos lemons ?
10. Je les 6tudie le matin. 11. Travaillez-vous beaucoup? 12.
Nous travaillons tous les jours. 13. Qui vous donne cette ome-
lette? 14. La cuisiniere me la donne. 15. Voulez-vous une
c6telette de veau? 16. Non, M.; je vous remercie. 17. N'ai-
mez-vous pas le veauf 18. Je n'aime ni le veau ni lemouton.
19. Lapaysanne vous donne-t-elle ces oeufsf 20. Elle ne nous
les donne pas. 21. Les lui acbetez-vous ? 22. Nous lui acbe-
tons les oeufs et le fromage. 23. Qui m'appelle ? 24. Fersonne
ne vous appelle. 25. Qui appelez-vous ? 26. Nous appelons
ces enfeints.
Th^me 17.
1. Where is he taking us? 2. What does he ask you for!
8. He does not ask me for any thing. 4. I take (carry) the let-
ter to the office. 5. You take (lead) the horse to the stable. 6.
We drive the sheep to the river in the morning. 7. The peas-
ants take their calves to the brook every day. 8. Take (portez)
this veal cutlet to my mother. 9. Does your aunt wish for a
mutton chop? 10. How do you like the omelet? 11. Do you
give me the flowers? 12. I do. 13. What do you buy of the
country-girl (paysanne) ? 14. We buy the cheese of her. 15.
Do you call us ? 16. We do not. 17. I call the gardener. 18.
He is working in the garden. 19. We do not work much. 20.
When do you study your lessons? 21. We study them in the
evening. 22. He does not study much.
80 DIX-HUITlftMS LEgOF.
18. DIX-HUITlilME LEgON.
49* (a.) AdjectiveB ending in Xj change x into ae for the ten.
inine; as,
A happy man. Un homme heureux (52).
A happy woman. Une femme JuureMe.
(6.) Those ending in/, change/ into ve; as,
An active boy. Un gar$on adif.
An active girl. Une fille active.
(c.) Most adjectives ending in ely eil^ tan, wiy and et^ with a few
others, double the final consonant and add e for the feminine ; as
An Italian air. Un air iialien.
Italian music. La musiqne Ualienne,
A dumb man. Un homme mud.
A dumb woman. Une femme vwdU.
{d,) An adjective, or pronoun, which refers to nouns of differ
ent genders, must be in the plural masculine.
The man and the woman are old. L' homme et la femme sont vieuu.
50t 8o^ referring to a preceding adjective or sentence, is ex-
pressed by Uj which is invariable. , So is often omitted in Eng-
lish, but in French, its equivalent U must be expressed.
Are you satisfied, miss? tstes-vous contente, mademoiselle f
I am (so). Je le suis.
She is not. Elle ne Test pas.
Whf. Beoauae, Pourquoi. Force que.
Why does she not shig f Pourquoi ne chante-t-elle pas ?
Because she is sick. Farce qu'elle est malade.
51* The indefinite article a or an, before a noun following the
verb to be, and qualifying its subject, is not expressed in French.
The noun, in such case, is used as an adjective ; as.
DIZ-HUITliME LE9ON.
81
rhat genileman is a Frenchmaa.
He is a physician.
Ce monsieur est fran^ais.
U est mddecin.
(a.) Do you speak French ? Farlez-vons fran^ais, or le fran^ais f
That Frenchman speaks Italian Ce Fran^ais parle bien I'italien.
well.
Place op the Adjective.
52t The adjective is generally placed after the noun,
(a.) The following adjectives are placed before the noun, when
they are used singly, and in their literal sense :
Anden. Cher. Faux. Joli. Meilleur. Vienx.
Beau. Digne. Grand. Long. Moindre. Vrai.
Bon. Divers. Gros. Mauvais. Nouveau.
Brave. Doux. Jeune. Mechant. Petit.
(5.) After the noun are always placed: Adjectives derived
from proper names ; those expressing color, form, shape ; those
denoting the defects of the body or mind ; and all participles
used as adjectives.
(c.) Many adjectives are placed before or after the noun, as
harmony and taste may direct
(d,) Some adjectives have one meaning when they precede,
and another when they follow, the noun. To this class belong
the following :
Mon cher ami, my dear friend.
Un ffrand homme, a great man.
Un hpnnite homme, an honed man.
Uii /xmvrd musicien, a toreteAed mu-
sician.
Une rohe thtre, a dear dress.
Un homme grands a taU man.
Un homme honniU, e^poUU man.
Un musicien paxwrt^ a poor musi«
clan.
YOOABULAIRB 18.
A Frenchman. Un Fran^ais.
An Italian. Un Italien.
A musician. Un musicien.
A pupil, a scholar. Un £I^ve.
ITie air. L'air.
The pleasure. Le plaisir.
Lahor. Le travail.
A Frenchwoman. Une Franfaise.
An Italian woman. Une Italieime.
A musician (/em.) Une musicienne
A pupil, scholar. Une 616ve.
40
The music.
La musiquf
Dancing.
La danse.
Stu^.
L'^tude.
82
DIX-HUmfiME LE9ON.
To dance.
Danger (n. fy a. v.)
Toeing.
Chanter (n.^ a.!;.)
Well.
Bien {adv.)
Badly.
Mai (adv.)
Why.
Pourquoi {conj.)
Because.
Parce que {conj)
Content.
Satisfied.
i Content (adj.)
Discontented.
Dissatisfied.
• M^ntent(<u(7'.)
Studious.
Studieux (adj.)
Attentive.
Attentif (atff.)
Sick.
Malade (<»&'.)
Dumb.
Muet {aeff.)
French.
Fran9ais (ae(f.)
Italian.
ItaUen {a^f.)
Analyse 18.
1. Voire frere et votre soeur sont studieux, mais youb ne I'^tes pas.
2. Ce Fran^ais est m^decin.
EXERCIOB 18.
1. £!teB-vous heureuse, mademoiselle! 2. Je ne le suis pas.
3. fites-vous malade? 4. Je ne suis pas malade. 0. Pour-
quoi cet 61eve n'est-il pas attentif a ses lemons ? 6. Parce qu'il
n'aime pas Tetude. 7. Quels Aleves sont attentifs? 8. Les
el^ves studieux le sont. 9. Cette demoiselle est-elle studieuse ?
10, El le est studieuse et attentive. 11. Comment trouvez-vous
cette musique italienne? 12. £Ile est belle. 13. Ce monsieur
est-il italien ? 14. II est fran9ai8. 15. Ce Fran^ais parle-t-il bien
I'italien? 16. II le parle mal. 11, Cette Franqaise danse-t-elle
bien ? 18. Elle danse tr^s-bien. 19. Les Franpais aiment-ils la
musique et la danse ? 20. lis aiment la musique et la danse, et
ils aiment aussi le travail et T^tude. 21. Qu'est cet homme!
22. II est musicien. 23. <Pette Italienne chante-t-elle bien? 24.
Tres-bien ; elle est bonne musicienne.
TntiMB 18.
1. This pupil is studious, but that one is not (so). 2. He is
not attentive, because he does not like study. 3. His sister
is very attentive and very studious. 4. Good scholars are al-
ways attentive. 6. Are you contented ? 6. We are, when we
DIX-NEUVlfcMK LE9ON.
83
work. v. We love labor and pleasure. 8. This Italian air is
very pretty. 9. I am fond of Italian music. 10. Are you an
Italian? 11. I am a Frenchman. 12. This Italian lady is a
good musician. 13. That French lady sings badly. 14. Those
Italian people (Italians) dance and sing well. 15. The French
people are fond of dancing. 16. What is that man ? 17. He is
a music teacher (pro/esseur de muaique). 18. Is he sick? 19.
He is not, but he is dissatisfied. 20. Why is he dissatisfied ?
19. DIX-NEUVI^ME LEgON.
53ff The personal pronouns
XOI, TGI, LVI, ELLB, NOUS, V0U8, EUX, SLLRS,
ly met ^^ou, thee^ he, him^ she, her^ we, us, you^ Ihey^ them, (fern,)
are used, only with reference to persons, or things personified,
when the verb is not expressed, and after prepositions.
WhocallBme? /.
Whom does he call f Me,
1 speak of him.
I think of her.
Qui m'appelle ? Moi.
Qui appelle-t-il ? Moi,
Je parle de lui.
Je pense k elle.
54 1 Or IT, or THKM.
To IT, TO THEM.
Do you speak of your country ?
I speak of it.
I think of it.
En ) (used mth reference to thkifft, and
Y f placed b^ore the verb).
Parlez-vous de votre pays ?
J 'en parle.
J'y pense. (89, b).
55t At home.
Is your father at home ?
7b, tfi, at the houte qf.
He is not ; he is at my uncU'e,
At my, your^ our house.
At his, her, their house.
A la maison.
M. votre p^ro est-il 'k la maison f
Chez.
n n'y est pas ; 11 est chez man onde,
Chez moi, chez vous, chez nous,
Chez Ud, chez die, chez eux, fern, elks
84
DIX e^EUVlftMB LEgov.
M. 'boo.
Iffo, We ffo.
Thou goal, Toujfo,
He goes. They go.
Where are you going f
I am going home.
Where is your brother going f
He is going to our neighbors' .
Where do you live ?
I live in this street, at number
three.
At whose house do you live f
Aluol {irngular neuter verb).
Je vais. Nous allons.
7ki vas. Vous aUez,
11 va. lis voni.
Od allez-yous ?
Je vais chez moi.
Od va votre frftre? (12, b.)
n va chez nos voisins.
Oti demeurez-vous f
Je demeure dans cette rue-ci, an
num^ro trois.
Chez qui demeurez-vous f
57* The article is generally used before the names of coun-
tries; as,
France is a beautiful country. La France est un beau pays.
(a.) In or to, before the name of a country, is expressed by
the preposition en ; as,
He is in France. II est en France.
He goes to France. II va en France.
(5.) /n, aty or to, before the names of cities and places, is ex-
pressed by a ; as,
in, aty to Paris. In, at, to London. A Paris. A Londres.
In, at, to church. A I'^lise
In the country, to the country. A. la campagne.
In town, to town. A la ville.
In town. En ville.
VOCABULAIRB 19.
My country.
The field,
llie village.
The concert,
Tlie theatre.
Togo.
Mon pays.
Le champ.
Le village.
Le concert.
Le thatre.
Aller {neut. v.)
France.
The country.
The town, the city.
The church.
The post-office.
La France.
La campagne.
La ville.
L'^glise.
Laposte.
To dwell, to live. ) Demeurer,
To reside. ) (neut. v.)
DIZ-NEUVIlfeMB LE9ON. 85
Of it, of them. En (jfron.) To it, to them. Y (pron,)
Immediately. IxoutdeBuite («?».) I^st^^^^y- A 1* instant M*.)
Forthwith. } Seldom. Barement (adv.)
Analyse 19.
1. J'aime mon pays; j'en parle et j'y pense sonvent.
2. II est en France, a Pans.
EXERCICE 19.
1. Parlez-vous de moi ? 2. Nous ne parlons pas de vous, 3.
Qui parle de mon jardin ? 4. Nous en parlons. 5. Pensez-vous
a ma cousine ? 6. Je pense souvent k elle. 7. Pensez-vous d
votre pays ? 8. J'y pense souvent 9. Allez-vous k la maison
tout de suite? 10. J'y vais a I'instant. 11. Voire frere va-t-il
au concert? 12. II va chez mon oncle. 13. Oii va votre soeur?
14. Elle va a r^glise. 15. Y allons-nous ? 16. Nous n'y aliens
pas; nous aliens chez nous. 17. Oii vont ces messieurs? 18.
lis vont chez eux. 19. Ges pay sans vont-ils au village? 20.
lis vont au champ. 21. Ou demeurez-vous k present? 22. Je
demeure chez mon oncle. 23. Votre frere demeure-t-il k la
ville ? 24. II demeure k la campagne, mais il est en ville au-
jourd'hui. 25. Votre p6re est-il k Londres? 26. II est en
France. 27. Allez-vous quelquefois au th^litre? .28, Nous y
aliens rarement.
ThI:mb 19.
1. He speaks of yon. 2. I think of him. 8. Does he speak
of his country? 4. He seldom speaks of it. 5. He always
thinks of it. 6. Where are you going? 7. I am going to the
concert 8. My brother is going home instantly (this instant).
9. Where is the merchant going? 10. He is going to his office.
11. My sisters are going to church. 12. My father is not at home.
13. He resides in the country. 14. Those men live in the village.
86 VINGTilCME LE^ON.
15. They take their oxen to the field. 16. They take their
vegetables to the city. 17. At whose house do you live? 18.
I live with my cousin. 19. My uncle is in France. 20. He re-
sides in Paris. 21. We go to France. 22. France is a beauti-
ful country. 23. Take (portez) this letteV to the post-office im-
mediately.
20. VINGTIEME LEgON.
58* The sense of a noun is either
Definite ; as, le livre^ mon livre^ ce livre;
General; K&^faime le fruit {2*1) \
Indefinite ; as, un livre^ deux livres ; or
Partitive,* when the noun is, or may be, preceded, in Eng-
lish, by some or any,
(a.) A noun used in the partitive sense, is preceded by the
preposition de and the article ; that is, rf«, de la^ de T, or des ' as,
I have bread. J'ai du pain.
You have meat. Yous avez de la viande.
They have money. lis ont de T argent.
We have friends. Nous avons des amis.
59« SoMB or ant (Q^t< or Q^t*«n). En {pera.prcn.)
En serves to represent, in the sentence, nouns taken in the
partitive or indefinite sense, as Z^, Za, les serve to represent nouns
taken in the general or definite sense ; as.
Have you sugar ? Avez-vous du Sucre ?
I have (some). J' en ai.
1 have not. Je n'en ai pas.
Have you a watch ? Avez-vous ime montre ?
I have one (of them). J'en ai une.
I have not (none). Je n'en ai pas.
* In French gnmmans the definite and the general sense are called, una diiermini
(determinate sense) ; and the indefinite and the partitive, sena indetsrmifU (indetenni-
aate sensed
TINOTlftHE LSyON.
87
60i 0/ it to me^ io tUf to you.
0/Uto Atm, to them.
Does he speak to you of his country ?
He does.
Do you give him money ?
I do.
Ibeai.
Do you eat fish ?
We do, sometimes.
Do you dine with your uncle ?
I dine with him to-day.
What have you for me ?
Men^ nous en, vou8 en.
Lux m, leuT en.
Vous parle-t-il de son pays ?
U m'en parle.
Lui donnez-vous de I'argent ?
Je lui en donne.
Manger.
Mangez-vous du poisson ?
Kous en mangeons<> quelquefois.
Dlnez-vous avec votre oncle ?
Je dtne avec lui aujourd'hui.
Qu'avez-vous pour mol ?
VOCABULAIRE 20.
Fish.
Du poisson.
Sauce.
rH la sauce.
Lamb.
De I'agneau.
An oyster.
Une huttre.
A cloak.
Un manteau.
Lining.
De la doublure.
Velvet.
Du velours.
Muslin.
Delamousseline
Lead.
Du plomb.
China.
De la porcelaine
An inkstand.
Un encrier.
Ink.
De I'encre.
To eat.
Manger (a. v.)
To dine.
Diner {neui. v.)
With.
Avec iprqf.)
For.
Pour {prep.)
rDu.
Some or any (of"
Some or any (ivith
a noun).
Dela.
Del'.
it, or of them,
the noun not he-
-En ipere.pnm.)
iDes.
wg eipres^d.j -
Analtsr .20.
1. Vous
me demandez d
u pain ; je vous (
Bn donne.
2. Avez-
vous un frere ?
J'en ai deux.
3. lis 801
at en France.
ExERCICE 20.
1. Avez-vous du poisson? 2. Nous avons du poisson et de la
viande. 3. Quelle viande avez-vous? 4. Nous avons du boeuf,
du veau et de Pagneau. 5. Avez-vc»us des hultres ? 6. Nous en
* Verbs in ger^ as manger^ retala tbe e of the termination before a and o. P. IILS zUL
88 YINOT ST UNllEME LE^ON.
avons anssi. *J. MaDgez-vous du poisson ? 8. Nous en man*
geons quelqiiefois. 9. Voulez-vous de la sauce? 10. J'en ai.
11. Avez-vous un manteau ? 12. J'en ai un. 13. Achetez-vons
une robe de mousseline? 14. J'en achete une de velours. 15.
Quelle doublure achetez-vous ? 16. J'achete du satin pour dou-
blure. 17. Avez-vous un encrier de plomt? 18. J'en ai un de
porcelaine. 19. Avez-vous de I'encre? 20. Nous n'en avons
pas. 21. Avez-vous quelque chose pour moi ? 22. J'ai une let-
tre pour vous de votre oncle. 23. Dlnez-vous avec lui aujour-
d'hui ? 24. Je dfne* toujours avec lui quand il est en ville. 25.
Vous donne-t-il de Targent? 26. II m'en donne quelquefois.
27. Lui en demandez-vous ? 28. Je lui en demande rarement.
ThI:me 20.
1. Have you meat I 2. We have mutton and lamb. 3. Have
you oysters ? 4. We have. 5. Do you eat fish ? 6. We do,
very often. 7. Have you sauce ? 8. I have. 9. Do you buy a
velvet dress. 10. I buy one of muslin 11. Have you lining?
12. 1 have. 13. Have you ink? 14. I have not. 15. Have
you a china inkstand? 16. I have one of lead. 17. Do you
dine with your aunt? 18. We dine with her to-day. 19. She
has money for me. 20. Does she often give yon some? 21.
She seldom does. 22. Does she speak to you of her country!
23. She seldom speaks of it to us.
21. VINGT ET UNIfiME LEgON.
61. We have seen (67, a) that de and the article are used be-
fore a noun taken in the partitive sense. To this there are three
exceptions :
1st. The article is omitted, that is, de alone is used, before a
partitive noun, when the noun is preceded by an adjective ; as,
YINOT ET UNlftMB LS9OK.
89
Good paper. De bon papier.
Good pens. De bonnes plumes.
2d. When tlie noun is used in a negative sense ; as,
I have no paper. Je n'ai pas de papier.
We have no pens. Nous u'ayons^pas de plumes.
3d. Wh«n tlie noun is governed, as the indirect object* of a
preceding woi-d, by the preposition de ; as,
A glass of water. ITn verre d'eau.
He speaks of money. 11 parle d'argent.
62* Words expressing parts or quantity, take de- before the
noun; as,
How muchf how many.
Much, many, a great deal.
Too, too much, too many.
IMe.
Amu,
How much money f
How many books ?
Much money.
Many books.
Too much money.
Money enough (0Miugh of money),
little money.
How much hay have you f
I have a great deal.
I have too much, too little.
I have enough.
How many brothers have you ?
I have no brother.
I have one, two, three.
Only, hut, nothing hut,
I have but one.
I buy nothing but hay.
But little, only a Uttle, not much,
I have but little hay.
I have not much.
Oombien (adverb of quantity).
Beaucoup ** **
Trop ** ••
Aeeez ** "
Peu " "
Uhpeu.
Combien d'argent ?
Combien de livres?
Beiiucoup d'argent.
Beaucoup de livres.
Trop d'argent.
Assez d'argent.
Peu d'argent.
Combien de foin avez-vousf
J' en ai beaucoup.
J' en ai trop, trop peu.
J' en ai assez.
Combien de fr^res avez-vous?
Je n'ai pas de fr^re.
J'en ai un, deux, trois.
Ne gw (adv.)
Je n'en ai qu'un.
Je n' achate que du foin.
Ne,,..guire (adv.)
Je n'ai gu^re de foin.
Je n'en ai gu^re.
♦ xii.. ^ c
90
VINOT ET UNlftMB LE^ON.
Hay.
ITie com, grain.
The wheat.
The com.
Indian com.
A pea.
The bean.
How much.
How many.
Too, too much.
Too many,
little.
But, only.
Nothing but.
VOOABULAIRE 21.
Oats.
The straw.
Du foin.
i Le h\L
j- Le mate.
Unpois.
Le haricot.
The beet.
Lettuce.
Asparagus.
[ Combien (adv.) Much, many.
[ Trop (adv.) Enough.
Peu (adv.) A little.
)yj^ ^„^. - . ButUttle.
|Ne..que(arf.;.) o^iy^u^le.
De I'ayoine.
Lapaille.
La betterave.
De la laitue.
Bes asperges.
Beaucoup (adv,)
Assez (adv.)
Unpen.
|-Ne..gudre(adb.)
Analyse 21.
1. J'ai de belles fleurs ; j^en ai beaucoap.
2. Je n'ai pas de frere ; je n'ai qu'une soeur.
Exercice 21.
1, Avez-vous de bon beorre ? 2. Nous en avons de bon. 8.
Avez-vous des <bu& et du fromage ? 4. Nous avons des oeufs,
mais nous n^avons pas de fromage. 5. Le jardinier a-t-il de bons
legumes ? 6. II a des haricots, des betteraves et de la laitue. 7.
A-t-il des pois et des asperges ? 8. II a des asperges, mais il n^a
pas de pois. 9. Combien de mais achetez-vous? 10. Nous en
achetons beaucoup. 11. Achetez-vous du foin et de I'avoine?
12. Nous n'achetons que du foin. 13. Avez-vous assez d'avoine ?
14. Nous en avons assez. 15. Vos chevaux mangent-ils beau-
coup de foin? 16. Us en mangent tres-peu. 17. Avez-vous
assez de paille? 18. Nous en avons trop. 19. Ces pay sans
ont-ils- beaucoup de bl6 ? 20. lis n'en ont guere. 21. Madame
votre mere demande-t-elle quelque chose? 22. Elle demande
un peu de lait. 23. A-t-elle assez de sucre ? 24. £Ue n'en a
gu^re, mais assez pour aujourd'hui.
YINQT-DEUXlftME LE90N. 91
Th&mb 21.
1. Have you hay and oats? 2. We have good hay, but we
have no oats. 3. How much hay have you ? 4. We have a
great deal. 5. Have you much straw ? 6. We have enough.
7. We have too much straw. 8. Have you corn enough ? 9.
We have too little. 10. I buy nothing but a little corn. 11.
Have you much grain? 12. We have but little. 13. Have you
asparagus and peas ? 14. We have no asparagus, but we have
peas and beans. 15. Have you any beets? 16. We have not;
but we have good lettuce. 17. Will you have some ? 18. How
many horses have you ? 19. I have no horses. 20. How many
has your uncle? 21. He has but one. 22. Have you tea and
coffee ? 23. We have coffee enough, but we have but little tea.
22. VINGT-DEUXI^ME LEgON.
63a (a.) The verbs of the seS^ conjugation (19) end in ir; as,
To FINISH. VFiNiE (root^n, ending ir),
I finish^ thou finiahest, hefitmhea. l^/Snts, tufinU^ UfinU.
Wefinkh, ycufinith^ they finish, MusfinisionSf vousfiniueZf HsfinisserU.
Conjugate, in the same manner, the present tense of
To CHOOSE. Choisir (root choiSf ending tr).
(6.) The verbs of the third conjugation end in oir; as.
To BBCEiVK. Bkcevoir (foot rec^ ending evotr).
I receive, thou recavest, he recexotA. Je regois, tu regoiSy il regoU. {p.iM,U.2.)
We receive, you receive, they receive. Nous recevoru, votu recevez, Us regoivenl.
Conjugate, in the same manner, the present tense of
To owH. Devoir (root 2>, ending evoir).
(c.) The verbs of the fourth conjugation end in re ; as.
To RENDER, TO RETURN, TO GIVE BACK. Bendre (toot rend, ending re).
I render, thou renderest, he renders. Je rends, tu rends, il rend.
We render, you render, they render. Nous rendons, vous rendez, ils rendent.
Conjugate, in the same manner, the present tense of
To SBU.. Vbndrb (root vend, ending re).
yiNQT-DEUZli;MB LS90N.
64* TuiB (this ihing).
That {that thing).
Do you choose this or that ?
I choose that.
Do you owe money to that man f
I owe him some.
He owes everybody.
Than, that.
Better, the best.
Mare, the most.
Less^ fewer, the lecut.
You speak better than I.
Do you receive more money than If
Csoi (demonstrative protunm).
Cbla " **
Choisissez-vous ceci ou cela ?
Je choisis cela.
Devez-vous de 1' argent k cet hom*
me?
Je lui en dois.
II doit )k tout le monde.
QuB iconj\)
Mieux, le mieux (adv.)
Plus, leplus (adv. of quantity).
Mms, lemoins '* **
Y0U8 parlez mieux que moi.
Becevez-vou8 plus d' argent que
moi?
Plus de caf^ que de th6.
Moins de cehU-ci que de cdtn-ld.
More coffee than tea.
Less of the latter than of the former.
Rem. — More than, less than^ before a numeral, are expressed
by pliis de, moins de ; as,
More than one. Less than twenty.
To like better.
Do you like this better than that ?
I prefer this to that.
Plus d'un. Moins de vingt.
Aimer mieux.
Aimez-vous mieux ced que cela?
Je pr^f^re ceci 4 cela.
A stranger.
A foreigner.
The world.
The people.
The work.
The taste.
The ribbon.
YOOABULAIRB 22.
} TJn 6t»nger. ^ ^t^^. ( ^•)^-« **«»«*«»-
A part. Une partie.
- Le monde.
L'ouvrage.
Le goftt.
Le ruban.
The thing.
The fashion.
The lace.
To finish. Finir (a. v.)
To receive. Kecevoir (a. v.)
To render, give back. Bendre (a. v.)
To like better.
This (this thing).
Than, that.
More, the most.
Everybody.
Aimer mieux.
Ceci (dem.pro.)
Que (conj.)
Plus, le plus.
Tout le monde.
To choose.
To owe.
Tasell.
To prefer.
That (that thing).
Better, the best.
Less, fewer.
Fashionable.
La chose.
La mode.
La dentelle.
Cholnr (a. v.)
Devoir (a. v.)
Vendre (a. v.)
Pref6rer (a. v.)
CelA idem, pro.)
Mieux, le mieux
Moins (adv.)
A la mode.
VIKOT-DEUZlftME LE^ON. 93
Analyse 22.
1. Je choisis cela, que choisissez-vous f
2. J'aime mieux ceci qae cela.
8. Je lui dois plus de dix gourdes.
EXERGICE 22.
1. Finissez-vous voire ouvrage ce matin ! 2. Nous le finissons
it present 3. Que choisissez-vous ? 4. Je choisis ceci, et mon
ami choisit cela. 5. Quelle ^tofie vos soeurs choisissentrelles ?
6. Elles choisissent cette belle dtoffe i la mode. 7. Recevez-
vons plus de presents (presents) que moi? 8. Je n*en repois
guere. 9. Devez-vous de Fargent au libraire ? 10. Nous lui en
devons. 11. Ces Strangers doivent-ils beancoup? 12. lis doi-
vent a tout le monde. 13. Que me rendez-vous? 14. Je vous
rends une partie de votre papier. 15. Uetrangere vous rend-
ello votre dentelle? 16. Elle nous en rend une partie. 17.
Vendez-vous plus de dentelle que de ruban? 18. Nous vendons
.moins de dentelle que de ruban. 19. Aimez-vous mieux ceci
que cela? 20. J'aime mieux cela. 21. Pr^ferez-vous la cam-
pagne k la ville ? 22. Je prefere la ville k la campagne. 23.
Votre ami a-t-il da gout pour la musique? 24. 11 a plus de
goiit pour la musique que pour T^tude. 25. Avez-vous plus
d'un parapluie ? 26. Je n'en ai qu'un.
TnftME 22.
1. I finish my work this morning. 2. We finish ours, and
they finish theirs. 3. What do you choose ? 4. We choose this.
6. They choose that. 6. Do you receive more letters than your
brother? 7. I receive fewer than he. 8. Those merchants receive
more than ten letters every day. 9. Do you owe much to the
bookseller! 10. I owe him less than twenty dollars. 11. We
owe money to those foreigners. 12. Their friends owe us some.
13. Do you give me back all the lace ? 14. We give you back
a part of it. 15. I sell more silk ribbon than velvet ribbon. 16.
04
VINGT-TROISI&ME LS^OK.
He sells more of the latter than of the former. 17. They sell
less than you do. 18. Do you like this pattern {ce desnn) better
than that? 19. I prefer this to that. 20. Those goods {ces
etoffes) are fashionable. 21. Everybody gnds them pretty. 22.
My friend has little taste for music. 23. You sing better than he
does. 24. I have more books than you. 25. He has the most
28. VmOT-TROISlfeME LEgON.
Relative Pronouns.
C5« The relative pronouns are :
Who, which, that.
Whoh, which, that.
Whosb, of whom, of which.
From whom. To whom.
To which, at which, to whom.
Qui (subject).
Que {direot obfecC).
DoNT {indireet object^ prep. dit).
Db qui. a qui.
AUQUKL, X LAQUSLLB.
The man who speaks.
The lesson which I study.
The woman whose child is sick.
The one of whom you speak.
The merchant to whom I owe
money.
The work at which I am working.
L'homme qui parle.
La le(on que j'^tudie.
La femme dont 1' enfant est malade.
Celle dont vous parlez.
Le marchand k qui je dois de I'ar-
gent.
L'ouvrage auquel je travaille.
Rem. 1. — The relative pronouns cannot be omitted in French^
as they often are in English ; as,
The book you look for. Le livre que vous cherchez.
Rem. 2. — Zr<?, Atm, she^ her^ followed by a relative pronoun,
must be translated by celui^ celle.
He who is contented is happy. Celui qui est content est heureux.
I admire her of whom you speak. J' admire celle dont vous parlez.
66 • That, rr. It is. Is it ?
It is I. It is you.^ It is he.
Is that all ? It is enough.
Ce (demofu. pron.) C'est. Est-c^f
O'est moi. C'est vous. C'est lui.
Est-ce tout ? C'est assez.
VINGT-TROISlftME LE^ON.
95
Rbm. — Ce often stands in the place of a preceding sentence; as,
That is true.
It is right; Mt^fioCf
You are going there ; art you not f
Tou give him that ; do you not f
(a.) What, that which.
That of whioh.
I ask for what is mine.
I give you what I have.
I give you all (that toMch) I have.
I have not what you speak of.
C'est vnd.
G'estbien; n'est-tejnuf
Yous y allez ; n'est-cepasf
Yous lui donnez cela ; n'eat-cepMf
SCk qui (rel. pron. as nibjecst).
Gb qub {rd. j/roH. ob object).
Cbdont.
Je demande ce qui est k moi.
Je vous donne ce que j'ai.
Je vous donne tout ce que j'ai.
Je n'ai pas ce dont vous parlez.
VOOABULAIRB 23.
The tree.
The peach-tree.
The pineapple.
The basket.
To count.
To pick up.
To gather.
Who, which, that.
Of whom, of which.
Whose.
To whom.
That, it.
True.
L'arbre.
Le pdcher.
L'ananas.
Le panier.
The leaf.
The peach.
The strawberry.
The basket (fiat-
bottomed).
La feuille.
Lap^he.
La fraise.
^ La corbeille.
Coropter(a.v.)
) Hamasser,
) (art. V.)
Qui (rd.pron.)^
!Dont (relative '
pron.)
A qui (r. pro.)
Ce (dem.pro.)
Yrai {adj.)
To show. Montrer (a. 9.)
To throw. ) j.^^ . ^ V
m Ai- > Jeter (a. v.)
To throw away. J ^
Whom, which, that. Que {xd.pnm.)
From whom. De qui (r. pro.)
To which. Auquel (r./w.)
What. Ce qui, ce que. .
Bight. Bien {pdiv )
Analyse 23.
1. La dame dont I'en^ant est malade, demande le m^dec^Ot
2. Est-ce vous qui avez le livre que je chercbe ?
d* Je vouB donne tout ce que j'ai.
*iL,4
96 VINOT-TROISlftME LK^OK.
EXERCICJE 23.
1. Qui appelez-vous ? 2. J'appelle la fille qui vend les fraises.
3. Que comptez-vous ? 4. Je compte I'argent que je vous dois.
5. Oh est Panauas dont vous parlez ? 6. II est dans le panier,
qui est sous I'arbre. 7. Oi^ va madame votre mere! 8. Elle
va chez la dame dont I'enfant est malade. 9. A qui envoyez-vous
cet argent? 10. Je Tenvoie au marchand de qui nous reoevons
le bois. 11. Yendez-vousVotre maison? 12. Nous ne vendons
pas celle dans laquelle nous demeurons. 13. Avez-vous beau-
coup de p^ches? 14. Nous n'en avons guer^. 16» Est-ce vous
qui demandez un parapluie? 16. Ce n'est pas moi; c^est ma
soeur qui en demande un. lY. A qui est le parapluie que vous
avez? 18. II est k moi. 19. Que montrez-vous £ votre neveu?
20. Je lui montre ce qui est dans la corbeille. 21. Lui donnez-
vous ce que vous lui montrez? 22. II me le demande, et je le
lui donne. 23. Vous lui donnez tout ce que vous avez; n'est-ce
pas 1 24. Je lui donne tout ce que j'ai, n'est-ce pas bien ? 25.
Oh' jetez-Tous les feuilles que vous ramassez ? 26. Je les jotte
dans la rue.
THftME 23.
1. Where is the man who sells the pineapples! 2. Count
(comptez) the money which I give you. 3. What are you pick-
ing up f 4. I am gathering the leaves that lie (are) on the floor.
6. Do you throw away the peaches? 6, I throw away those
that are not good. 7. Where are the strawberries of which you
speak ? 8. They are in H^ basket that stands (is) under the
tree. 9. Who is there? 10. It is I who am looking for an
umbrella. 11. Is it your umbrella which I have? 12. It is my
sister's. 13. Do you give me what lies (is) on the table? 14.
I give you what you ask for. 15. It is all I have. 16. It is
enough ; is it not ? 17. He who gives all he has, gives too mnch,
does he not ? 1 8. That is true. 1 9. What are you showing him ?
20. I am showing him our peach-trees. 21. Take (portez) the
flowers which are in that basket, to the lady whose daughter is
«ick.
TINGT-QUATRlftMB LSgOK.
97
24. VINGT-QUATRlilME LEfON.
67. I^m, yet, more.
No more, no longer.
Have you any more flour ?
Have you any more ?
I have no more flour.
I have no more.
Not yd.
Are those peaches already ripe ?
• They are not yet (so).
Ever.
Neoer.
Do you ever go to the theatre ?
We never do.
No; never.
[ (adverbs of time).
Encore
Ne. . . .plus )
Avez-vous encore de la farine ?
En avez-vous encore f
Je n'ai plus de farine.
Je n'en al plus.
^•^'^ i (adverbs of time).
Pas encore )
Ces piches sont-elles d^jli miireit'
Mies ne le sont pas encore.
Jhnais ) (adverbs of time).
Ne. . . .jamass i
Allez-vous jamais au th64tre ?
Kous n'y allons jamais.
Non ; jamais.
68.
It is (speaking of the weather).
How is the weather ?
It is fine weather.
It is bad weather.
To ram.
It rains.
Is it still raining ?
It is not.
WhattmeisUf What o* dock is Uf
It is one o'clock, two o'clock.
It is 12 o'clock (noon), midnight.
Half-past one.
Half-past twelve..
A quarter past two.
Ten minutes to three.
II fait (literally, it makes ; see 86, 6.)
Quel temps fait-il ?
II fait beau temps.
H fait mauvais temps.
Pleuvoir (impers. verb, see 86).
n pleut.
Pleut-il encore ?
n ne pleut plus.
Qiielle heure est-Uf
II est une heure, deux heures.
n est midi, minuit.
Une heure et demie.
Midi et demi.
Deux heures et im quart.
Trois heures moins dix minutes.
Every day.
All the day.
Every evening.
All the evening.
Every morning.
All the morning.
Tons les jours.
Toute la jonm^.
Tons les soirs.
Toute la soir^.
Tons les matins.
Toute la matinee.
98
VINGT-QUATRlftME LE^ON.
Every year.
All the year.
This morning.
This evening, to-night.
This night. This year.
The day.
The morning.
The evening.
The noontide.
The bed.
The year.
The time.
The weather.
The quarter.
Tons les ans.
Toute I'ann^
Ce matin.
Ce soir.
Oette noit. Cette ann^
YOOABULAIRE 24.
Le jour.
Le matin.
Lesoir.
Lemidi.
Lelit.
L'an.
The day.
The morning.
The evening.
The afternoon.
The night.
The year.
La joum^e.
La mating.
La soiree.
L'apr^midi.
La nuit.
L'ann^e.
Le temps.
The hour.
L'heure.
Le quart.
The minute.
La minute.
Laisser (orf. v.) To stay, remain. Bester {neut. v.)
Dejeuner («..) ^ Stu^S^:' I ^'^•'^^ <"«'-■ >
It rains. II pleut (imp. v.)
Still, yet, more. Encore (adv.) ^^ ™*^^®' I Ne . . plus (adv.)
'' ^ No longer. )
Already. D6jk (adv.) Not yet. Pas encore (adv.)
Ever. Jamais (dtft;.) Never. Ne. .jamais ((ult;.)
To leave, to let.
To breakfast.
li\R(of1hewtaOi£r). II fait (imp. v.)
Analyse 24.
1. Avez-vous encore du papier? En avez-vous encore!
2. Je n'ai plus de papier. Je n'en ai plus.
EXERCICE 24.
1. A quelle heure dejeunez-vous ? 2. Nous d^ijeunons a sept
heures et demie. 3. Quel temps fait-il ce matin? 4. II fait
mauvais temps. 5. Pleut-il encore ? 6. II ne pleut plus ; il fait
beau k present 7. Est-il d6j^ six heures et un quart ? 8. II
n'est pas encore six heures. 9. Quelle heure est-il k {by) votre
montre? 10. II est six heures moins dix minutes. II. Restez-
VINGT-QUATRIJSME LE^ON. 99
V JUS a la maison ce soir ? 12. Je reste a la maison tous les soirs, et
j'etudie toute la soiree. 13. A quelle heure soupez-vous? 14.
Nous soupons k ueuf heures. . 15. Allez-vous jamais au theatre ?
16. Je n'y vais jamais. 17. Allez-vous souvent a la bibliotheque ?
18. J'y vais tous les matins, et j'y reste toute la matinee. 19.
Quand etudiez-vous vo« lemons ? 20. Je les etudie dans I'apres-
luidi. 21. Allez-vous k la campagne cette annee? 22. Nous y
aliens tous les ans. 23. Laissez-vous vos livres ici ? 24. Je les
laisse ici parce qu'il pleut, et je n'ai pas de parapluie. 26. Avez-
vous encore de Pencre ? 26. J'en ai encore, mais ye n'ai plus de
papier. 27. Yotre frere en a-t-il encore ? 28. II en a encore
un pen.
TniMB 24.
1. Do you study in tlie morning? 2. I study all the morn-
ing. 3. My brother goes to the office every morning. 4. He
stays there all the day. 5. In the evening, we are all at home.
6. I remain at home all the evening. 7. My brother goes every
evening to the library.* 8. Do you ever go there ? 9. I never
do. 10. We eat supper at half-past seven o'clock. 11. We
breakfast at a quarter to eight. •12. Is /our uncle still in the
country? 13. He stays there all the year. 14. Is it already
twelve o'clock? 16. Not yet; it is ten minutes to twelve. 16.
Does it rain? 17. It does not; it is fine now. 18. We leave
our umbrellas here. 19. Has the cook any more salt, pepper,
and mustard ? 20. He has some more salt and mustard, but he
has no more pepper. 21. Where do you go to-night? 22. My
cousin sometimes studies all the night, and remains in (au) bed
all the morning.
100 VINGT-CIMQUlfiHS LE9ON.
26. VlNGT-CINQUlilME LEgON.
70* One verb governs another in the infinitive ; as,
I am going to work. Je vais travailler.
CoMPTSR, before the infinitive, means to intend, to expect ; a%
We intend to go to Fiance this KonscomptonsallerenFrancfiCette
year. ann^.
I expect to have money to-morrow. Je compte avoir de I'argent demain.
Devoir, before the infinitive, means must, to he obliged.*
lmn.t go there. I Je dois y aller.
I am obhged to go there. f
At what time are you to go f A quelle heure devez-vous y aller f
I am to be there at noon. Je dois y dtre k midi.
To go for. Ih tend for. AUer chercher. Enocyer ehercho'.
Are you going for paper f Allez-vous chercher du papier f
I am. Je vais en chercher.
I am going to send for some. Je vais en envoyer chercher.
71 • To Bi wnusa. Youloib {preguUtr adwe verb).
J am tnUingt ihcu art vnOing^ he u Je veux, ta veux, il veut.
vriUxng. •
We are vtOUng^ you are wUImg, ihey Nona vouUms^ vous vouUz^ He veuknt.
arewUUng.
Will yon go to the village f Youles-vous aller au village f
1 am not willing to go there alone. Je ne veux pas y aller seul.
I like better to stay here. J'aime mieux rester id.
What do those men want f Que veulent oes hommes f
7 J« All prepositiong (except en) govern the verb in the infinitive,
(a.) The infinitive, limiting the meaning of an abstract* noun,
must be preceded by the preposition de ; as,
I have no time to go there. ) t > • 1 a » h
(IhaveiuttUtin^ to go Ihert.) } "f' »" P« le tempe iy aUer.
(6.) 2*0, in order to, before the infinitive, is expressed by pour :
I call you, to (m order to) show you Je vous appelle pour vous montrer
this. oeci.
* When lo&« Indleatas ft eomlng event; M,/ am toga txLl, a
VINGT-OINQCI&ME LB^ON.
101
7b haoe a tmA, a dmtt^ a mind,
lb intendf to have the intention.
Do you wish to go to the theatre ?
I haye no desire to go there.
We intend to go to the concert.
Next month.
Next week.
Last month.
Last week.
Avoir envie {dt, 72, a.)
Avoir I' intention ((fe, 72« a.)
Avez-vous envie d'niler an thd&tre f
Je n'ai pas envie d'y aller.
Nous avons 1' intention d'aller au
concert.
Le mois prochain.
La semaine prochaine.
Le mois dernier.
La semaine derni^re.
YOGABULAIRE 25.
The clerk.
The month.
I/O oommis.
Lemois.
The bank.
The week.
To intend. Avoir 1' intention.
To go for. Aller chercher.
To be willing. Vonlolr {act, v.)
Alone. 8enl (adj.)
Next. Prochain (aeff.)
Presently. Tout-&-rheure (adv.)
^^' lBient6t(«to.)
very soon. ) ^ '
To be obliged.
Must.
Tohaveawishy
a desire.
To send for.
To go in.
To come in.
Together.
lASt.
By and by.
To-morrow.
La banqne.
La semaine.
i Devoir (act. «.)
[ Avoir envie.
Envoyer chercher.
I Entrer (neut, v.)
Ensemble (adv.)
Dernier {a^'.)
Tant6t (adv.)
Demain (ado.)
Analyse 25.
1. Youlez-vous aller au bureau avec moi f
2. Je n'ai pas le temps d*y aller.
8. Je vais* 6tudier mes legons.
EXERCICE 25.
1. Allez-vous travailler? 2. Je vais etudier ma le^on. 3.
Vouiez-vous aller k la banque avec moi ? 4. J'aime raieux rester
* The verb vaia (neuter verb) does not govern the verb Hudier as Its direct object,
the preposition pour is nnderstood.
102 TINOT-CINQUlftMK LE90N.
ici. 5. Quand comptez-vous aller k la campagne ? 6 Je conipte
y aller la semaioe prochaiDe. 7. Comptez-vous avoir de Targent
bientot? 8. Je compte en avoir demain. 9. Ou est la lettre
dont vous parlez ? 10. Je vais la chercher pour vous la montrer.
11. Devez-vous aller au magasin? 12. Je dois y aller tout-a-
I'heure. 13. A quelle heure les commis doivent-ila 6tre au bu-
reau? 14. lis doivent y etre k neuf heures. 15. Ne voulez-
vous pas entrer? 16. Je n'ai pas le temps d'entrer. 17. Quand
allez-vous chercher votre soeur? 18. Je vais la chercher tant6t*
19. Qu^envoyez-vous chercher? 20. J^envoie chercher de Fen-
ere. 21. Quand votie pere veat-il envoyer chercher le cheval ?
22. II a rintention de I'envoyer chercher le mois prochain. 23.
Voulez-vouB rester ici ? 24. Je n^ai pas envie de rester ici seul.
25. Votre fi-^re a-t-il envie d'aller au village avec vous? 26.
Nous avons Pintention d'y aller ensemble. 27. Avez-vous en-
core des confitures de Tann^e derniere ? 28. Nous en avons en-
core beaucoup.
THftME 25.
1. Will you go to the office with me ? 2. I have no time to
go there. 3. I must stay here. 4. I am to go soon to the bank.
5. My father expects to go to France this year. 6. Will you
show me the horse of which you speak? 7. 1 am going to show
you the one which we intend to buy. 8. Are you going for
money ? 9. I am going for some by and by. 10. 1 am going
presently to market, to buy fruit. 11. Do you wish to go with
me? 12. I have no desire to go there. 13. I like better to
go home. 14. When will your father send for the trees? 15.
He intends to send for them next month. 16. Is your brother
willing to remain here alone ? 17. We are going to remain here
together. 18. Is the clerk going for any thing? 19. He is go-
ing for the letter, to show it to you. 20. Why do you not come
in? 21. We have no time to go in. 22. Where do you wish
to go ? 23. We must stay at home, to study our lessons.
VINOT SIXI&MS LE9UN. 108
26. VINGT-SIXlilME LEgON,
iS* (a.) To OPEN. OuYBiR (trr. v.)
Iot)en, thou openatf he opens. Tovmt^ tu auvres^ il avre.
We open^ you cpen^ they open, Nout ouvrons^ vout ouvrez^ tb ouvreni.
(b,) To GO OUT. SOBTIR (WT. V.)
J go outf thouyoett out, he goes out. Je aorf, tu ton, U tori.
We go out, you go out, they go out, Nout aorioiu, vout tortez, Ut tortetit.
(c.) To COMK. ViNia (trr. v.)
I come, thou eomeat, he comet. Je tfient, tu vient, U tnent.
We come, you come, they come. Nout venom, vout venez, Ut viennent.
Remarks on thb Terminations of the Indicative Present.
74* Hereafter, the first person singular and plural, only, of the
^ indicative present of irregular verhs, will be given. From this,
the remaining persons are regularly obtained, by changing the
person-endings in the following manner :
Singular. — When the first person ends in e^ add 8 for the
second ; the third person is like the first ; as,
I open, thou openest, he opens. J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre.
When the first person ends in 8 or x, the second is like the
first, and in the third person the 8 or x is changed into ^ ; aa,
I come, thou comest, he comes. Je viens, tu viens, il vient.
' I am willing, thou art willing, he Je veux, tu veux, il veut.
is wUUng.
Rem. 1. — Verbs ending in d8 or t8 in the first person, drop the
8 in the third ; as,
I sell, thou sellest, he sells. Je vends, tu vends, il vend.
I put, thou puttest, he puts. Je mets, tu mets, il met.
Plural. — The termination ons of the first person, is changed
into ez for the second, and into ent for the third ; as,
We open, you open, they open. Nous ouvrons, vous ouvrez, ils ou-
vreut.
We go out, you go out, they go Nous sortons, vous sortez, ils sor-
out. tent.
104
VINOT-SIXlftME LE90y.
Rem. 2^ — In some verbs, the root is different in the singular
from what it is in the plural. In such case, the third person
plural, generally, has the root of the singular ; as,
We come, you oome, they come. Nous venons, vous venez, lis vien-
nent. ^
We are willing, you are willing, Nous voulons, vous voulez, lis
they are willing. veulent.
When this irregularity occurs, the third person plural will h^
given.
75* Ih hold, to keqf.
Are you holding the horse ?
I am.
They keep a store.
Jh leave, to start, ioedwt.
I Itove to-morrow for Boston.
I leave the door open, to let the
children come in.
Early. Late,
We begin early, and finish late.
Tenk (irr. v., 78, c.)«
Tenez-vous le cheval f
Je le tiens.
Us tiennent un magasin.
Partir (irr. v., 78, h.)^
Je pars demaln pour Boston.
Je laisse la porte ouverte,pour lais-
iser entrer les en&nts.
De bonne heure. Tard.
Keus commen^ons de bonne heure,
et nous finissons tard.
76* From where. From (here.
Whence do you come ?
I come from home.
I am going to the bank, and from
there to the office.
Tou are going to market, and I
come from there.
^, whether.
If he wishes. If she wishes.
For.
Shut the door, for it is cold.
jyoU. Deld^en..
D'oti venez-vous ?
Je viens de chez moi.
Je vais k la banque, et de Ik an bu«
reau.
Vous allez au march^, et j' en viens.
Si (elides the t before iZ, Us),
S'il veut. Si elle veut.
Qtr (conj.)
Fermez la porte, car il fait froid.
The workman.
The roof.
The shutter.
VOCABULAIRK 26.
L'ouvrier. The workwoman.
Le toit. The door.
Le volet. The window.
. L'ouvrifero.
La porte.
^ Lafenetre.
Lacrois^.
* The reference indicates the model verb, after which this one is ooi^ogated.
YINGT-SIXlftME LEgON.
105
To open.
To come.
To go out. I
To come out. i
Open, opened.
Warm.
From where.
If, whether.
Early.
Early m the )
morning. )
Ouvrir (trr. ad. v.)
Venir (trr. neut. v.)
To shut.
To hold.
to keep.
Fermer {ad. v )
Tenir (trr. a. i )
Sortir {trr. neut. v.)
To leave,
, to start.
TaxtiT (trr. n. v.)
Ouvert(arfy.)
Chaud {adj.)
D'od {adv.)
Si {(xmj.)
De bonne heure (adv.)
Shut.
Cold.
From there.
For.
Late.
Ferm^ {adj.)
Froid {adj.)
De Ik, en {adv.)
Car {conj.)
Tard (adv.)
De grand matin.
Good mo
ming.
Bonjour.
Analyse 26.
1. Noas venons* reciter notre leqon.
2. Je yais i la banque, yous en venez.
EzsRCiCE 26.
1. D'odl venez-vousf 2. Nous venons du village. 3. Qui
tient votre cheval? 4. Le jardinier le tient. 5. Le commis
doit-il aller a la poste ? 6. 11 en vient. 7. Va-t-il au bureau k
present? 8. II va k la banque, et de la au bureau. 9. D'oii
viennent ces bommes ? 10. lis viennent du march^. 11. Sor-
tez-vous? 12. Jevais sortir k PinstaDt. 13. Vossoeurs sortent-
elles avec vous? 14. Je vais leur demander, si elles veulent ve-
nir avec moi. 15. Le cuisinier sort-il le matin de bonne beure?
16. U sort de grand matin, pour aller au march^. 17. Pourquoi
ouvrez-vous la fen^tref 18. Je Touvre pour former le volet 19.
Les ouvriers ouvrent-ils le magasin de bonne heure? 20. lis
Touvrent de bonne heure le matin, et le ferment tard le soir. 21.
Partez-vous aujourd'hui pour la campagne? 22. Nous avons
I'intention de partir demain, sUl fait beau temps. 23. Pourquoi
laissez-vous la porte ouverte? 24. Je la laisse ouverte parce
quMl fait trop chaud ici. 25. Tenez-vous la fen^tre de votre
chambre ouverte la nuit ? 26. Je la tiens ferm^e, car il fait
froid la nuit.
• 8«e not«^ p. 101
50
106
YINGT-BEPTlftMK LBt^ON.
ThAme 26.
1. Where does the workman come from? 2. He comes from
the store. 3. Are you to go to the post-office ? 4. We come
from there. 5. What are you holding ? 6. I am holding my
umbrella. 1. Are you going out? 8. I am going out with my
brother. 9. We go out early every morning. 10. Open the
window, for it is warm here. 11. We keep the door shut, be-
cause it is cold. 12. My neighbor, the baker, opens his shuttera
early. 13. He shuts them late. 14. Good morning, Mr. 6. . . . ;
will you walk in? 15. 1 have a letter for you from your father.
16. He intends to start for Boston to-morrow, if the weather is
fine. 17. We start to-day. 18. Will you come with us ? 19.
I will (je veux 6ien), if you will lend me a horse. 20. We are
going to the village, and from there to town, 21. Are you go-
ing out to night ? 22. No ; I remain here, for I have no cloak,
and it is cold.
27. VINGT-SEPTli:ME LEgON.
77. To SKI.
/mb. We Bee.
They see.
To KNOW, TO KNOW HOW.
I know. We know.
To BE ABLS, CAN.
lean, thou camt, he can.
We can, you can, they can.
To DO, TO MAKB.
I do or make. We do or make.
You do cr make. They do or make.
Voir (trr. v.)
Je voie. Nous voyom,
JUvoiad.
Savoib (trr. v.)
Je sais. Nous savons.
PouvoiB (trr. v.)
Jepuia or peux, tupeux, Upeut.
Nous pouvons, vous pouvez, UspeuvenL
Fairs (trr. v.)
Jefais. Nousfaisons.
Vousfakes. IlsfotU.
78.
Do you see the physician coming ?
(<z*) I see him coming.
{b.) He comes to see its.
Voyez-vous venir le mideeinf
Je le vols venir (105).
n vlent nous voir (106).
VINGT-8BPTI&ME LBgON.
107
{c) Can you do that (do you
know how) ?
(<^.) Can you do that (are you
able)?
Can I do that? May I do that?
Tou may do it, if you like it.
Will you do me a favor?
Willingly, if I can.
8aioez-\o\a fiiire oela ?
Pmmez-YOViR faire cela ?
Puis-je faire cela?
Yous pouvez le fiiire, si vous voulez ?
Voulea-vous me fiiire un plaisir?
Yolontiers, si je puis.
79« I cannot.
Jenepuis.
Do you know whether your brother
is at home ?
I do not know whether he is or not.
Rem. — Fas may be omitted, with pauvmr, savotr, cesser (to
cease), and oser (to dare), used in an absolute manner, or followed
by an infinitive; as,je nepuis^je ne puis le faire,
Savez-vous si votre fr^re est k la
maison ?
Je ne sals s'il y est ou non.
fAUer faire une eomnUstion.
AUer en commission.
Passer par la ville.
Voulons-nous passer par lit ?
Au coin de la rue.
Au milieu de la place.
Avez-vous une bonne place ?
Nous avons de la place pour vous.
7h go on an errand.
To pass through the city.
Shall we pass that way ?
At the comer of the street.
In the middle of the square.
Have you a good seat ?
We have room for you.
The comer.
Lecoin.
The middle. Le milieu.
The bird. L'oiseau.
(schooltask.)
To see.
To be able.
To pass.
Fast.
YOCABULAIRB 27.
Boom,thesquare.)j^ j^
Place, the seat. )
The fountain. La fontalne.
The cage.
The errand.
The commission.
La cage.
y La commission.
Voir (trr. act. v.)
Pouvoir (trr. a. v.)
Passer (neid. v.)
Vite (adj.)
SSZhow. (B«voir(*..a.,.)
To do, to make. Faire (trr. a. v.)
To walk, to march. Marcher (n. v.)
Slowly. Lentement.
First, at first. D'abord (oift;.) Then, afterwards. Ensuite (a<ft^.)
108 VINUT-SBPTlfiME LE9ON.
By, through. Par {prep.) Which way. Par oh (adv.)
This way. Par ici (ociv. ) That way. Fax l^ {adv.)
Willingly. Yolontlers {adv.) I will, I am willirg Je veux Men
Analyse 27.
1. Je viens ici pour vous demander cela.
2. Je n'y vais pas, car il pleut et je n'ai pas de paiapluie.
3. Savez-vous ce qu'il fait ?
EXEBCIOE 27.
1. Yoye^vous mon frere? 2. Je le vois au coin de la rue.
3. Vientril par ici? 4. II entre dans un magasin. 6. Voyez-
Yous venir le m^decin? 6. Nous le voyons venir au milieu
de la place. 7. Vient-il vous voir ? 8. II vient voir ma mere,
qui est malade. 9. Savez-vous oh est ma soeur? 10. Je ne
sais pas oO elle est. 11. Ces Aleves savent-ils leurs lemons?
12. lis ne les savent pas bien. 13. 0^ allez-vous avec cette
belle cage? 14. Je vais d'abord k la maison et ensuite chez
mon oncle, qui va me donner un oiseau. 15. Puis-je y aller
avec vous? 16. Vous pouvez y aller avec moi, si vous voulez.
17. Pouvons-nous passer par TA venue B. . . .? 18. Nous pou-
vons passer par la. 19. Marcbez-vous vite parce qu'il fait froid?
20. Je ne marcbe jamais lentement. 21. Que faites-vous le
Boir? 22. Je fais mon tb^me, et ensuite nous faisons de la mu-
sique, ma soeur et moi. 23. Que font ces ouvriers? 24. Je ne
sais ce quMls font. 25. Ou le domestique va-t-il? 26. II va
faire une commission pour mon p^re.
ThAme 27.
1. I see a bird on the roof of that house. 2. Do you see it?
3. We see our friends coming. 4. We see them coming in the
middle of the square. 6. I do not know whether they see us or
not. 6. Henry sees me; he is coming this way. 7. Can I
see your father ? 8. Does he know that I am here ? 9. Can
VINGT-HUITldME LB^ON.
109
vou dance ? 10. Can you do that ? (78, c.) 11. Will you do me
a favor? 12. Willingly, if 1 can. 13. Can you go to the bank
for me? 14. I cannot. 15. 1 am to go first to the post-ofii<;e,
and then to the store. 16. The bank is at the corner of the
square; you can pass that way. 17. May I go to the fountain
with my cousin ? 18. You may go there, if you like. 19. When
do you do your exercises ? 20. We do them in the evening.
21. What are you doing? 22. You do not do it right. 23.
What is he making? 24. The joiners are making chairs and
tables. 25. Will you take this cage to your aunt's ? 26. You
walk slowly. 27. It is too warm to walk fast
28. VINGT-HUITlfeME LEgON.
80» To SAT, TO TELL.
J say or teU. We aay or tdL,
Ton toy or tell. They toy or tdl.
To KNOW, TO BE ACQUAINTED WITH.
I know. We know.
To FDT, TO POT OW.
I put. We put.
To TAKE.
I take. We take.
They take.
Dire (trr. a. v.)
Je die. Nous disoru.
Vous dites. lis disent.
.CoMNAiTRS (trr. a.v.)
Je carmais. Nous ctmnaissoM,
Mbttrb (trr. a.v.)
Je mets. Nous meUons,
Pbendbb (trr. a.v.)
Jeprends. Nousprei
lis prennent.
81. Will yon tell hun that?
Will you tell him qf it (it to him) ?
Do you know that Frenchman ?
Do you know French ?
Where do you put my cap ?
Do you put on your new coat ?
To take off, to take away.
Will you not take off your shawl ?
Take those papers from the tahle.
I am going to take them to the
other room.
Do you take music lessons ?
Youlez-Yous lui dire cela?
Voulez-vous U lui dire ?
Conrutksez-yovi& ce Fran^ais ?
Sctvez-Yoxxn le fran9ai8 ?
Oti mettez-vous ma casquette ?
Mettez-Yous votre habit neuf f
Oter.
Ne Toulez- vous pas 6ter votre ch&le f
Otez ces papiers de la table.
Je vais les porter dans Tautre
chambre.
Prenez- vous des le9onB de musique f
110
TINOT-HUITlitMB LSyON.
7h learn.
Those students leani French.
Apprendre (irr. v., W^eprmdre),
Ces ^l^ves apprennent le fran9aLs.
8j. BBX)E.|^^y>-
{(potUion),
Before noon. Before evening.
Before the fire. Before the door.
Bkfom (foUowed by a verb).
1 do my task before I go out.
Behind,
The one after the other.
Behind the house.
Make a fire.
Bring a light.
My green .coat is worn.
I put on my new blue silk dress.
AvAUT (prep.)
DiYAKT {prq>.)
Avant midi. Avant le soir.
Devant le feu. Devant la porte.
AvAiiT Di (with the verb in the infin.)
Je fais mon devoir avant de sortir.
Apres (prep.)
Denriire (prep.)
L'un apr^s I'autre.
Derri^re la maison.
Faites du feu.
Apportez de la lumi^re.
Mon habit vert est us^.
Je mets ma robe neuve de sole bleue.
TheEug]
The heart.
The fire.
The vest.
YOCABULAIRS 28.
.UAnglais.<^ England. L'Angleterre.
Lecoeur. The tongue. [Lai^
The language. )
Le feu. The light. La lumi^re.
Le gilet. The cap. La casquette.
To say, to tey. Dire (irr. a, v.)
To put, to put on. Mettre (irr. a. v.)
To take. Prendre (irr. a. v..)
Before (priorOy). Avant, avant de.
After. Apr^ (p>^')
White. Blanc,/, blanche.
Blue. Bleu (acff.)
Brown. Brun (adj.)
New. Neuff (atff.)
,.j,
y)
Gonnaltre (t. a. v.)
To know.
To take o£f.
To take from. }• Oter (a. v.)
To take away.
To learn. Apprendre (t. a. v.)
Before (position) Devant (prtp.)
Behind. Derri^re (prq>.)
Black. Noir (adj.)
Green. Vert (adj.)
Gray. Gris (adj.)
Old, worn. Usd (adj.)
• The Engltoh language, Pcmgiaie, or la tanffue anglaiee.
t Neuf^ fumveau. Nettf to said of things newly made, in oppoeltion to worn ; «ot#-
veat^, of things new to us, and also of things of new growth. In the latter sense, novt'
veau follows the noun. Vh ?uU>U net^f, a new coat {that hae not been vtorn), Le
nowoeau «<n^ the new wine (the toine toe have lately received). Du vin nouveau^
new wine (of new growth).
VINGT-HUmftMS LE90N. Ill
Analyse 28.
1. Que voulez-vous lui dire?
2. J'apprends ma le^on avant de sortir.
EXBRCICE 28.
1. Que dites-vous ? 2. Je ne dis rien. 8. Connaissez-vous
cet Stranger? 4. Je ne le connais pas. 5. Savez-vous ce qu'il
dit? 6. II dit qu'i] ne sait pas Pauglais. 7. Qui connalt ces
Anglais? 8. Nous les connaissons. 9. Pourquoi prenez-vous
voire casquette? 10. Je vais sortir; je dois aller a la banque
avant trois heures. 11. Mettez-vous votre habit bleu pour aller
k la soiree { party)! 12. Je mets mon babit neuf et un gilet
blanc. 13. Notre tante met-elle sa robe de soie brune? 14.
Elle met une robe neuve de soie grise, et nous meltons des robes
blanches. 1 5. Otez-vous le ruban de votre chapeau ? 16. J'en 6te
le ruban vert, qui est use,et j'y mets un ruban noir. 17. Sortez-
vous avant de prendre le th6? 18. Nous prenons le th6 avant
de sortir. 19. Votre frere va-t-il voir ce monsieur avant de sou-
per? 20. II veut aller le voir aprds-souper. 21. Que disent
vos soeurs? 22. Elles disent que la voiture est devant la porte.
23. OOl demeure la dame que vous allez voir? 24. Elle demeure
derriere P^glise. 25. Le domestique va-t-il faire du feu ? 26.
II va d'abord chercher de la lumiere. 21. Apprenez-vous le
fran^ais ? 28. J'apprends le fran9ais, et mes soeurs prennent des
leqons d'italien.
THfiSME 28.
1. Do you know that Englishman ? 2. I do not (know him).
3. My cousin says that she knows him. 4. We say that we
know our lessons. 6. Our friends say that they know theirs,
6. Do you say so. {cela) ? 7. Can you learn this lesson by heart
before this evening? 8. I do not know. 9. Do you take the
ribbon from your new cap? 10. I do not like this gray ribbon;
I will put a green ribbon on it 1 1. Do you wear (put on) those
112
TINOT-NBUVli^MS LE9ON.
white gloves? 12. I do not wear those; they are worn. 13.
1 will put on new gloves. 14. My brother puts on a brown coat,
a black vest, and a white cravat. 15. Your new blue silk dress
is very pretty. 16. Do you go out before you take your {le)
coffee? 17. I take coffee before I go out. 18. I am going for
alight. 19. Do you take coffee {partitive sense) or tea? 20.
We learn French; it is (c^est) a beautiful language. 21. 1 am
going to take the table that stands behind the door, and put it
{la mettre) before the fire. 22. Those who do not study, do not
learn much. 23. Students must walk, the one after the other
in going from the class-rooms to the study-room {en allant des
classes d la salle d^etude).
29. VINGT-NEUVlfeME LEgON.
8S» To BKAD. Lire (trr. a. v.)
I read. We read, Je Us. Ncm Uaom,
To WEITB. flOBIRK (ifT. a. V.)
I write. WetDrite. J^icris. Ncnu ierwmu.
To DRINK. BOIRB (tTT. a. ».)
I drink. We drink, Jebw, Nombuvoni,
They drink, lis boivent.
To BELIKVB. CbOIBE (tTT. fl. V.)
IbeUeoe. Webdieve. Jecrois. Ninis crayons,
T^hey hdieve. lis croient.
To CONDUCT. CONDUIRI (tTT. a. V.)
I conduct. We conduct. Je conduis. Nous conduisons.
To EXTINGUISH. f^TEINDRE (WT. a. V.)
I extinguish. We extinyuish. J' items. Nous itdgnons.
84 • One, THET, PEOPLE, WE. Os (indtf. pron.t ZdpcTs, siny)
It is said (People say). On dit.
It is believed. On croit.
Do they speak much of the war ? Parle-t-on beaacoup de la guerre ?
Rem. — After et, si, ou, id, qui, and que, V is generally used
before on, for euphony.
YINOT-NBUVlftME LE^ON.
113
It is said and believed.
^ underatandf to eomprdumd.
One does not understand all he
reads.
To hear, to undenkmd.
To wait for, to expect.
Bo you hear that some one is call-
ing you ?
Do you understand me f
They are waiting for you at home.
We expect company to-night.
Bo you believe that you can do
that?
I believe I can.
I believe not.
On dit et Ton croit.
Oomprendre (irr. v., \\kQ prendre).
On ne oomprend pas tout ce qu'on
lit.
Entendre.
Attendre,
Entendez-vous qu'on vous appelle?
M'entendez-vous ?
On vous attend chez vous. ■
Nous attendons du monde ce soir.
Croyez-vous pouvoir fedre cela f
Je crois que oui.
Je crois que non.
YOOABULAIRB 29.
The journal.
The note.
The ticket.
The noise.
The soldier.
The gas.
To read.
To drink.
To conduct.
To lead, to take
To exting^uish.
To put out.
To hear.
To understand.
Le journal.
[Le billet.
Le bruit.
Le soldat.
Legaz.
Lire {irr, a. v.)
Boire {irr. a. v.)
|-Conduire(t/T.t>.)
[£teindre(trr.v.)
]• Entendre {a, v.)
The history,
The news.
The intelligence.
The news.
The war.
The candle.
L'histoire.
[ La nouvelle.
Les'nouvelles.
La guerre.
La chandelle.
To write.
To believe.
To comprehend.
To understand.
To light.
To kindle.
To wait for.
To expect.
£crire {irr. a. v.)
Croire {irr. a. v.)
(Comprendre,
{irr. a. v.)
y Allumer {a. v.)
[ Attendre {a, v.)
Analtss 29.
1. U croit Bavoir tout.
2. On ne pent croire tout ce que Ton entend dire.
114 VINGT-N£UVlftMS LK^OK.
EXBRCICE 29.
1. Que lisez-vous? 2. Je lis Phistoire des fitats-XJnis. 3.
Votre frere lit-il le journal? 4. U ecrit un billet a mon oicle.
6. Lui 6crivez-vou8 souvent? 6. Nous lui ecrivons tres-souvent.
7. Ces eleves savent-ils lire et 6crire ? 8. lis lisent et eciivent
tous les jours. 9. Le petit Henri comprend-il ce qu'il lit? 10.
Je crois qu'il le conajj^rend. 11. Que buvez-vous? 12. Nous
buvons de Peau. 13. Ces soldats boivent-ils du vin ? 14. lis
boivent de la biere. 15. Que dit-on de la guerre ? 16. On n'en
parle pas. 17. Croyez-vous ce qu'on dit dans le journal? 18.
Nous ne le croyops pas. 19. Entendez-vous ce bruit? 20. Je
I'entends. 21. Savez-vous qu^on vous attend chez vous? 22. Je
sais qu'on m'y attend. 23. Avez-vous des nouvelles de votre
frere? 24. Nous attendons de ses nouvelles avec impatience.
25. Oil conduisez-vous vos amis ? 26. Je les conduis cbez moi.
27. Pourquoi 6teignez-vous la chandellef 28. Je I'^teins parce
que je vais allumer le gaz.
THftMs 29.
1. Are you reading the paper? 2. I am reading the history
of England. 3. We read the journals after supper. 4. My
father reads them before he goes out. 5. I am writing a note
to my aunt. 6. Those pupils write well. 7. You write too fast.
8. What do you drink ? 9. I drink water with sugar {de Peau
sucree), 10. We drink milk at (a) breakfast, 11. Those sol-
diers drink wine. 12. Do you believe that? 13. Do people
speak of the war? 14, What do they say of it? 15. We do
not believe that news. 16. One cannot believe all he reads in
the papers. 17. Do you hear the noise they are making? 18.
Some one calls you ; do you hear it ? 1 9. I know that they are
waiting for me. 20. I am expecting a letter from my cousin.
21. We expect news from France (de France). 22. Do you
comprehend this lesson ? 23. I believe I do. 24. Why do you
extinguish the candle ? 25. Because I am going out. 26. I am
going to take my sister to our neighbor's. 27. We light the gas
at six o'clock ; we extinguish it at midnight.
TRBNTlftUK LE9ON. 115
30. TRENTIEME LE5ON.
85* (a.) Impersonal (uniperaonnel) verbs* are used only in the
third person singular ; as,
To freeze.
It freezes.
Qeler.
n gMe.
To hail.
It hoilB.
Or^ler.
H grele.
To snow.
It snows.
Neiger.
11 neige.
To thunder.
It thunders.
Tonner.
11 tonne.
(6.) Faire^ as an impersonal verb, is also used to express the
state of the weather or atmosphere ; as,
It is stormy. II taSt de Torage.
It snows. n fait de la neige.
It lightens. II foit des flairs.
It is windj. H fait du vent.
It is dusty. II fait de la poussiire.
It is muddy. II fait de la boue.
Sb.
86* Reflective {pronominal) verbs* are those which are always
accompanied by an objective pronoun (called the reflective pro-
noun), of the same person and number as the subject ; as,
I wash myself. Je me lave.
We wash ourselves. Nous nous lavons.
Do you wash yourself? Yous lavez-vous ?
Himself, hkbsklp, itsklf.
Ones self; themselves.
To warm one's self. Se chauffer.
Will you not warm yourself? Ne voulez-vous pas vous chauffer ?f
I have no time to warm myself. Je n'ai pas le temps de me chauffer.
She has no time to warm herself. Elle n'a pas le temps de se chauffer.
One has not always time to warm On n'a pas toujours le temps de se
one's self. chauffer.
I warm myself before I wash my- Je me chauffe avant de me lavor.
self.
• xiL, 6, h.
t When the reflective verb is In the infinitive, the reflectiYe pronoan most agree witk
the subject of the verb that governs the infinitive.
116
TUSNTIBME LE^ON.
87* 7b wndud one's sdf.
To behave.
That young man conducts himself
well.
How do these pupils behave f
To bring (carrying),
lb bring (leading or drimng).
Bring your book.
Bring the carriage.
To return^ to come back.
To retumf to go back.
I return (come bade) by the railroad.
I return (go back) by water.
Se conduire (irr. v.)
Se comporUr.
Ce jeune homme se conduit bien.
Comment ces ^l^ves se comportent
lis?
JLpporier,
Amener.^
Apportes voire livre.
Ainenes la voiture.
Beoenir (irr. v., like Mntr).
Rdoumer,
Je reviens par le chemin de far.
Je retoume' par eau.
VOCABULAIRB 30.
The storm.
The thunder.
The wind.
The road.
To freeze.
To snow.
To lighten.
To wash.
To conduct
one's self.
L'orage.
Le tonnerre.
Le vent.
Le chemin.
1
Geler (imp, v.)
Neiger (imp, v.)
Faire des flairs.
Laver (ad, v.)
Se conduire.
To return Bevenir(i,T.»...)
To come back. )
Not. Point (ne), (flMfo.)t
The ram.
The snow.
The dust.
The mud.
To hall.
. To thunder.
To warm.
To behave
(one*s te^).
To bring (lead-
ing).
To return.
To go back,
AtaU.
La pluie.
La neige.
La poussi&re.
La boue.
Grfiler (imp. v,)
iTonner (imp, v.)
Faire du tonnerre
Chauffer (ad, v.)
> Se oomporter.
V Amener (ael. v.)
> Betourner (n. v.)
Du tout (adv.)
Analyse 30.
1. II fait de ToragcJ
2. Ces eleves se comportent bien.
• See note, p. 78.
t Point is a stronger negative than pas : U rCitxtdiepat, he Is not studying; U iftV>
kidie point, he does nM stndy.
X Jlli the apparent, and orage the real, subject of the sentence.
TRENTldMB LE^ON. Il9
EXERCICE 30.
1. Neige-t-il ? 2. II grele. 3. Fait-il du vent et de la pous-
siere? 4. II ne- fait pas de vent du tout, roais il fait froid; il
gele. 5. Fait-il da tonnerre? 6. II tonne et il fait des Eclairs.
7. Que faites-vous? 8. Je me chauffe. 9. Voulez-vous vous
chauffer? 10. Nous n'avons pas le temps de nous chauffer. 11.
Qu'allez-vous faire ? 12. Je vais me laver. 13. Que font les
enfants ? 14. lis se chauffent. 15. Comment se comportent ils ?
16. Ils se comportent bien. 17. Ce jeune homme se conduit-il
bien? 18. II se conduit tres-bien. 19. Que m'appoi*tez-vous ?
20. Je vous apporte de Targent. 21. Le domestique araene-t-il
la voiture ? 22: II va Famener tout de suite. 23. Retoumez-
vous k la campagne aujourd'hui? 24. J'y retourne ce matin.
25. Bevenez-vous par eau ? 26. Je reviens par le chemin de fer.
27. Yotre cousin 6tudie-t-il beaucoup ? 28. II n'6tudie point
THftME 30.
1. Is it bad weather? 2. It is windy and dusty. 3. Does it
freeze ? 4. I believe it is going to snow. 5. Is it stormy ? 6.
It hails, thundei-8, and lightens. 7. Why are you not writing?
8. We are warming ourselves before we write. 0. Are you
washing yourself? 10. I am warming myself. 11. I am going
to wash myself. 12. Your friend conducts himself well ; every-
body says so. 13. We love those that conduct themselves well,
and everybody loves them. 14. How does this pupil behave ?
15. My pupils behave well; I am much pleased with them (tris-
content d'eux), 16. Will you bring me the book that lies on the
table? 17. I bnng you a letter from your uncle. 18. Why do
they not bring the carriage? 19. At what time do you return
(come back) from New York ? 20. I return at five o'clock. 21.
Do your friends return (go back) home by water? 22. They
return by the railroad. 23. Is it cold ? 24. It is not cold at all.
25. This young man does not study ; he learns nothing at all.
118 TRENTE ET UNlftME LE^ON.
31. TRENTE ET UNlilME LEgON.
88. (a.) The past participle is that part of the verb which ex-
presses completed state or action, without reference to persons ;
as, finished^ done^ been,
(b.) The past participle of a regular verb is formed from the
infinitive. In the
1st conj. er is changed into i; as, aimer ^ to love ; p. p. auni^ loved.
2d "it ** • ** finir, to finish ; " fad, finished.
8d ** ewtr " u ** rtceowr, to receive ; " f«fa, received.
4th" rt " « " twirfrc, to sell ; " vctAi, sold.
89* (a.) The past participle of an active verb is used as an
adjective, either with or without the auxiliary Hre, (P. III. § lix.)
(6.) The past participle, used as an adjective, is subject to the
same rules of agreement ; that is, it takes the gender and num-
ber of the noun to which it refers ; as.
The torn coat. L' habit dMvtrk.
The torn dress. La robe dkhirU.
The house is sold. La maison est wmdM.
The houses are sold. Les maisons sont wmSiuM,
Passive Verbs.*
90* (a*) The past participle of an active verb connected with
the auxiliary Hre^ forms the passive verb ; or, as it is sometimes
called, the passive voice ; as, ^ t9 lofoed {by somebody),
(6.) The past participle, joined to the verb Hre^ agrees, like an
adjective, with the subject of the verb.
He is blamed by his friends. II est hldmk par ses amis.
She is blamed by her friends. Elle est Udmee par ses amis.
They are bUmed by their friends. |S« "^"^ ^ ^' ^^™ "^"- ,
J '' ( Eiies 8ont UAmUa par leurs amis.
TRBNTS ET UNldVE LE^ON.
119
Rem. 1. — ^The preposition 6y, preceding the agent of a passive
verb, is rendered by par or de. By de^ when the verb expresses
a sentiment ; as,
She is loved by everybody. Elle est aim^ de tout le monde.
Rem. 2. — The passive voice is not much used in French. The
French prefer the active voice of the verb ; and, in the absence
of an agent, they generally use the indefinite pronoun on as sub-
ject; as,
He is flattered,but he is not loved. On le flatte, mais on ne Taime paa.
YOCABULAIRB 31.
To break.
To tear.
To flatter.
To blame.
To despise.
Diligent.
Dry, dried.
Fresh, cool.
Everywhere.
Casser.
D^hirer.
Flatter.
Bl&mer.
M6priser.
Diligent {adj.)
Sec,/«n. s^che {adj.)
Frais,/. fralche (a.)
Partout {ado.)
To mend.
To bum.
To spoil.
To praise.
To esteem.
Careless.
Green, undried.
Frank, sincere.
Onthecontiary.
Baccommoder
Briiler.
6&ter.
Louer.
Estlmer.
Negligent (adj.)
Vert {adj.)
Franc, /. franche.
Au contraire {adn.)
Analyse 31.
1. La maison est bruise.
2. Elles sont loupes par le professeur.
3. Ces hommes sont estimis de tout le monde.
EXBROIOI 31.
1. Mes mouchoirs dechires sont-ils lav^s? 2. lis sont lav^s
et raccommodes. 3. Votre robe est-elle brulee? 4. Elle est
dechiree. 5. Qui est estim^ de tout le monde? 6. Ceux qui
se conduisent bien. 7. Qui est m^prise de tout le monde ? 8.
Ceux qui sont n^gligents et paresseux {lazy). 9. Ce jeune hom-
me est-il blftme par le professeur ? 10. II en est au contraire lou6,
parce qu^il est diligent. 11. Votre ouvrage est-il fini ? 12. 11
120 TRBNTX XT UNIAME LE9ON.
06 I'est pas. 13. Ces marchandises Bont-elles bien choisies? H,
£iles sont tres-bien choisies? 15. Qui est bien re^u partout?
16. Celui qui se comporte bien. 17. Ces chevaux sont-ils ven-
dus? 18. Celui-la est vendo, mais celui-ci ne Test pas. 19.
Votre montre va-t-elle bien ? 20. Elle ne va pas ; elle est cas-
see. 21. Ce bois est-il sec? 22, 11 est vert. 23. Ou voulez-
vous mettre ces feuilles secbes? 24. Je veux les inettre dans
ma chambre. 25. Ce pain est-il frais ? 26. 11 I'est. 27. Que
m'apportez-Yous ? 28. Je vous apporte de l*eau fratche.
Th^me 31.
1. Is your pretty cup broken ? 2. Is your torn dress washed ?
3. It is washed and mended. 4. Is this pupil praised by the
professor ? 5. He is, on the contrary, blamed by him, because
he is careless. 6. Careless scholars are blamed by everybody.
7. Those who are diligent are praised by the master (le mattre)^
and loved by their parents (parents). 8. Those who conduct
themselves well are esteemed by everybody. 9. They are well
received everywhere. 10. Those who do not behave well, are
despised by everybody. 11. Spoiled children are not amiable.
12. They are flattered, but they are not liked (90, Rem. 2). 13.
This music is well selected.* 14. Those pieces are not finished.
16. Those goods are sold. 16. Dry wood burns better than green
wood. 17. The streets are dry, at present. 18. We have for
our break^t fresh eggs and dried fruit. 19. The weather is
pleasant (agreable) ; the mornings [les matinees) are cooL 20.
He is not frank ; he does not say what he thinks. 21. 1 like
your aunt ; she is frank and kind (bonne),
• To select, ohoMr,
TRKNTE-DSUXiftMB LEgON.
121
82. TRENTE-DEUXI^ME LEgON.
91* Adjectives and adverbs are compared hj means of ad
verbs; as,
Tall, taUoTf the iaUed. Grand, plus grands lephu grand.
Slowlj, more eUnoly, the most sUne^f. Len'tement, plus lentement, le pbtt
lerUement.
Studious, less studious, the least studi- Studienx, moms sludieux, le memi
You are taller than I.
The ridiest man m the dty.
Yous etes plus grand que moi.
L'homme leplus riehe d$ la ville.
92* As, so AS.
He is as studious as his brother.
Not so studious as his brother.
As well as.
Quite as well as.
As MUCH, so MUCH OT XANT AS
I have as many books as jou.
I have not so manj as you.
QuUe or Just as many.
As much coffee as sugar.
AusBi (adv.), . . .QUI (ooi^')
n est aussl studieux que son Mm,
Pas aussi {pas «) studieux que son
frfere.o
Aussi bien que.
Tout aussi bien que.
AuTAiiT (adv.). . . .QUI {eoi^\)
J'ai autant de livres que toqs.
Je n'en ai pas autant (pas tanii que
vous.o
Jbut autant.
Autant de csSi que de sucre.
93« The following adjectives and adverbs are irregularly com-
pared:
Bon, meUleuTf le meUleur.
} Petit \ ^Ki^io^fty le momdre; or
' I plus petit, le plus petU.
(piret lepire; or
Mauvais, \plus mauvais, lephis mau-
Good, better, the beat.
Little, less, the lead.
Small, smaller, the smaUest,
Bad, vforse, the word.
Well, bdkr, the bed.
Much, more, the mod.
Badly, worse, the loord.
Little, less, the lead.
Bien, mieux, le t
Beaucoup, pius, leplus.
Mai, pis, lepis.
Peu, moins, le moms.
* In s negative aentenee, si may be nacd ft>r ausH ; and tant, for autant
122
TRENT£-DEUXI]&MB LE^ON.
94 • The following examples show how adjectives and adverbs
may be modified.
It is raiher cool.
Pretty well.
Vary well. Very strong.
Extremdy polite.
Exceedingly kind.
U fait unpeu frais.
Auez bien.
TVw-bien, fwt bien.
Edrtmantni poll^
Infinmenl bon.
j^tenfort.
YOOABULAIRB 32.
The ship.
The vessel.
The sailor.
The string.
The biscuit.
r Le vaissean.
I Le navire.
( Le b&timent.
Le matelot.
Le cordon.
Le biscuit.
The sea. La mer.
The land. \
ITie earth. >• La terre.
llie ground. )
The steam. La vapeur.
The rope. La corde.
An orange. Une orange.
As, so. Aussi {adv.)
Long. Long,/, longue {a^. )
^;,^i'"^'>[Doux./. douce (a<^-.)
Soft,® mellow. Mou, mol, /. molle.
Salt, salted. Sal6 {adj.)
Bitter. Amer {adj.)
Very. \ Bien (ado.)
Very much, f Fort {adv.)
Pretty (6«/or«l^^^f^^
ana. or ado.) )
?"'*«• JToutCarfr.)
Just. )
As much.
So much.
Short.
Pleasant.
Agreeable
Hard.
Sour.
Strong.
Exceedingly.
Extremely.
[ Autant {adv.)
Court {adj.) .
[ Agr^able {adj.)
Dur {adj.)
Aigre {adj.)
Fort {adj.)
Infinlment {adv.)
Extremement {adv.)
Bather(6«/or«)^^
ana. or ado.) \
\ Tout-k-fait.
Quite.
Entirely.
Analyse 32.
Quel est I'eleve le plus studieux de votre classe ?
II 6crit tout aussi bien que son fr^re.
Mon cheval est bien Fort ; il va fort bien.
* Soft, to the toncb, dUrum; mft^ yielding easily to pressing mou, Le tempi tet dow\
the weather is mild. Le tempi est mou, the weather is soft (heavy).
trskte-deuxiAme LE90ir. 123
EXERCICE 82.
1. Votre cousin est-il plus grand que vous? 2. U est plus
petit que moi. 8. Votre cordon est-il plus long que cette corde ?
4. II est plus court. 5. Cette chambre-ci est-elle aussi longue
que Pautre? 6. £lle est moins longue que I'autre. 7. Votre
frere ecrit-il aussi bien que vous ? 8. II ecrit tout aussi bien, et
plus vite,que moi. 9. Lisez-vous autant que votre ami ? 10. Je
lis moins que lui. 11. Avons-nous d'aussi bons matelots que les
Anglais? 12. Nous en avons d'aussi bons. 13. Ont-ils autaut
de b&timents a vapeur que nous? 14. Us en ont tout autant.
15. Vendez-vous plus de cafe que dethe? 16. Nous vendons
ai :t de Tun que de Tautre. 17. Comment trbuvez-vous ce
biscuit? 18. II est assez bon, mais un pen dur. 19. Ces poires
{pears) sont-elles dures? 20. Eiles sont molles. 21. Cette
orange est-elle douce ? 22. Elle est un pen amere. 23. L'eau
de la riviere est elle salee? 24. Elle Test quelquefois, mais elle
est douce (fresh) k present. 25. Votre cheval est-il fort? 26.
U est bien fort ; mais pas aussi fort que le votre. 27. Va-t-il
bien ? 28. II va fort bien. 29. Votre ami retourne-t-il chez lui
par mer ? 30. II retourne par terre.
THtilME 32.
1. This ship is longer than that one. 2. Those ropes are
longer than these. 8. This string is strong enough, but it is too
short 4. You write faster than jour brother, but he writes bet-
ter than jou do.* 5. He is as studious as you are.* 6. He
reads as much as you do.* 7. He reads quite as well as you.
8. He is the most studious student of his class (sa classe), 9.
Have the French as many vessels as we have ?* 10. They have
not so many. 11. We have quite as many as the English. 12.
We sell as much cloth as silk. 13. We eat more bread than
meat. 14. You have less of your paper than of mine. 15. The
weather is mild and pleasant. 16. It is rather soft. 17. This
* The sQxUltfy Is not to be tnuiBlated.
124 TRKNTS-DKUZlftMS LB9OK.
pen 18 too soft. 18. This stuflf is soft and strong. 19. Those
biscuits are pretty hard. 20. Your oranges are rather sour.
21. This water has a bitter taste. 22. Sea-water {Peau de la
mer) is salt, but the water of our great lakes (le lae) is fresh.*
23. The sailors of the vessel are on (A) land. 24. When they
are at {sur) sea, they eat hard biscait and salted meat
The Fbogresbiyk Lssbons are continued on p. 213.
4<»
Wa have now reached a pohit from which we can, with adTantage,
cast a glance back upon the road we have traversed. In the preceding
lessons, the prindpal rules in Etymology, concerning the noun, article,
ac^^tive, and pronoun, in connection with a variety of other matter,
have been introduced. We shall now review them under their proper
heads, and add those less important £acts, with which it would have
been injudicious to swell the course of the progressive lessons. We
have also learned to conjugate the present tense of the four classes of
regsnlar, and of the most important irregular, verbs ; and we have ac-
quired a rudimental knowledge of the several sorts of verbs. In Fart
Third, we shall complete the conjugation of the regular and irregular
verbs, extend our knowledge to the invariable parts of speech, and em-
brace all the ftcts in Etymology, as far as the limits of an Elementary
Course will admit.
Fart lliird, like Fftrt First, is independent of the course of progressive
lessons in Farts Second and Fourth. See Fre&ce.
* Freeh waSar, d4 r«a« doitct ; eool watw, d4 rMU$Jitfick§>
PART THIRD.
ETYMOLOaY.
Ettmologt is that part of Grammar which treats of the dif-
ferent sorts of words, their inflections and modifications.
We shall keep separate the nile« that are given In the preoedlngr leesons (the revlewaX
from those that are here introdnced for the first time. Th9 sections containing the for-
mer, are marked (a.) ; those containing the latter, (&.)
THE NOUN.
§ XIV. (a.) — Formation of the Plural.
1. General Rule. — ^The p]aral of nouns is formed by adding
s to the singular ; as, un verre^ deux verves.
Exceptions,
2. Nouns ending, in the singular, in «, «, z, remain unchanged
in the plural ; as, un bas^ deux has,
3. Nouns ending in au and eu take x in the plural ; as, un
chapeaUf un neveu ; deux chapeauXy deux neveux,
4. Nouns ending in al change al into aux; as, un cheval^
deux chevaux.
Rem. — A few nouns in al follow the general rule ; as, bal, ball
(dancing party); camaval^ carnival; regalj treat, &c. : plural,
balsj camavals^ regalSj &c.
XIY.— 1. What Is the general rule for forming the plural of nouns? 2. What Is the
plural of noans ending in a, as, • f S. What is the plural of nouns ending In au and eu /
Ik What is the plural of nouns ending \ualt Are there any exceptions ?
126 FORMATION OF THB PLURAU
§ XIV. (6.) — ^Formation of the Plural.
Exceptions continued.
6. Seven nouns in ou add x in the plural ; viz. : bijou^ jevel ;
caillou^ pebble ; chou^ cabbage; genou^ knee ; hihou^ owl ; joujoti^
plaything ; pou^ louse : plural, bijoux^ eailloux^ he.
6. The following nouns in at7, change ail into aux : bail, lease ;
corail, coral ; email, enamel ; soupirail, air-bole ; travail^ labor ;
vantail, the leaf of a folding-door : plural, baux, eoraux, &c.
7. Cfiel, heaven, has in the plural deux/ ciel, climate, sky in
painting, or tester of a bed, has in the plural dels.
8. A^euly ancestor, has in the plural aieux ; aleul, grandfather,
plural aleuU.
9. (Eil, eye, has in the plural yeux ; ceil, a term of art, plural
ceili.
10. Ail^ garlic, has in the plural aulx or ails.
Rem. — Nouns of more than one syllable, ending in ant or ent,
either retain or drop the t in the plural ; as, un enfant, deux en-
fonts, or deux enfans.
DictAx 1.
Theee Bxeretaes are to be tnuislftted Into English, in wrlUng: the words in italics, to
be parsed ; the rales of grammar they illiutrate, to be explained, by the stadents. After
this, they should write them fh>m diotation, and then, translate their Engliah version
into French, in the class-room, writing it on the blackboard, or on a slate.
1. Dans les hdpitaux, les mcUades indigents sont re<^us et trai-
t6s gratis. 2. Sur le continent de FEurope, k Pans, a Yenise,
et dans d*autres villes, on c^lebre les camavals par des bah et
par des r^jouissances publiques. 3. Le cuivre, le fer et I'^tain
sont des metaux tres-utiles. 4. Ces clous sont de cuivre, et ces
verrous sont de fer. 5. Les bijoux de cette dame sont magnifi-
ques. 6. Ces ehoux coQtent six sous la piece. 7. Les kiboux
5. Are there any nouns in <m that add as in the plural f t What is the plural othiH,
lease, and of some other nouns in ail t 7. What is the plural of cM^ heaven ? of oM,
climate? 8. What is the plural of ijaeut, ancestor? of a^tul^ grandfather ? 9. What is
the plural of mil, eye? of oiti, a term of art? 10. Of ail, garlio? What is the plural of
noons of more than one syllable ending in ant otmUt
THE AliTICLK. 127
sont des oiiteaux nocturnes. 8. Mes joujoux sont casses. 9.
Ces eventails sont neufs. 10. Ces soupiraux sont trop petits.
. 11. Les cieux aunoncent la gloire de Dieu. 12. L'ltalie est sous
un des plus beaux dels, 13. Nous admirons les vei-tus de nos
aleux^ mais nous ne les pratiquons pas toujours. 14. Les wieula
de ces enfans sont en Angleterre. 15. Les iliphanta ont les
yetix petits.
Affaire^ n. f. affiiir, business; aUuly n. m. ancestor; grandfather;
annoncer, a. y. to announce ; bcdy n. m. ball ; bijou^ n. m. jewel ; car-
naval, n. m. carnival ; celebrer, a. y. to celebrate ; clou, n. m. nail ; dd,
n. m. heaven ; climate ; corUmerU, n. m. continent ; coitter, a. y. to cost ,
Dieu, n. m. God ; elephant, n. m. elephant ; Europe, n. f. Europe ; evenr
tail, n. m. fan ; gloire, n. f. glory ; gratia, adv. for nothing ; hdpital, ri. m.
hospital; indigent, adj. poor; Joujou, n. m. plaything; magnifique, adj.
magnificent ; malade, n. m. or f. a sick person, patient ; m$tal, n. m.
metal ; nocturne, adj. nocturnal ; night ; ceil, n. m. eye ; pratiquer, a. y.
to practise ; public, fern. puJbUque, ad|. public ; r^youissance, n. f. rejoicing,
merry-making ; aou, n. m. cent ; eoupirail, n. m. air-hole ; trailer , a. y. to
treat ; utile, adj . useful ; verrou, n. m. bolt ; vertu, n. f. virtue.
§ XV. (a.)— THE ARTICLE.
1. The article is subject to elision and contraction.
2. Elision is the suppression of the vowel before another vowel
or silent h ; contraction, the combining of the article with the
prepositions de and a. Thus :
THE.
OF THE.
TO THE.
3.
Masculine singular, before a consonant,
&.
du,
au.
4.
Feminine " ** "
la,
dela,
d la.
5.
Before a vowel or silent A,
P,
del\
dV.
6.
In the plural,
les,
des,
aux.
XV.—l. What is the article sabject to? 2. What is meant by elision? by contraction ?
•I Whflt is the French for the article the^ in the mascaline singular, before a consonant ?
for of the f for to the f 4. What is the French for the article the^ fem. sing., before s
consonHnt? for of the f for to thef 5. What is the French for the article the, in the
singular, before a vowel or silent hf for of the f Tot to the f 6. Wbat Is the French for
the article the, in the plural? for of the t to thef
128 FSMININE or ADJSCTIYS8,
THE ADJECnVK
§ XVL (a.) — QuAUFTiNo Adjsctiyes. Formation of ihb
Feminine.
1. General Rule. — Adjectives not ending in e mute, add e
for the feminine ; as, un livre intereamnt^ an interesting book ;
une hisUdre interessante, an interesting history.
JSxceptions.
2. Adjectives ending in e mute^ remain unchanged for the
feminine ; as, un travail utile, a useful labor ; une le^on utile, a
useful lesson.
3. Adjectives ending in a*, change x into se for the feminine ;
as, un homme heureux, a happy man ; une femme keureuse, a
happy woman.
Rem. — Dqux^ sweet, has in the feminine douce ; see also R. 10.
4. Adjectives ending in/, change /into ve ; as, un habit neuf,
a new coat ; une robe neuve, a new dress.
5. Adjectives ending in el, eil, ten, on, et, double the final con-
sonant and add ^ for the feminine ; as, tel, fem. telle^ such ; parcU,
fem. pareille, similar ; ancien, fem. ancienne, ancient ; bon, fem.
bonne, good ; sujet^ fem. sujette, subject
Rem. — A few adjectives in et follow the general rule ; as, com-
plet, complete ; concret, conci-ete ; discret, discreet ; secret, secret ;
inquiet, uneasy ; replet, corpulent ; fem. complite, concrete, &c.
6. JBeau, nouveau^fou (foolish), mou, vieux, smdjumeau (twin),
are changed for the feminine into belle, nouvelle, folle, molle,
vieille, and jumelle.
Rem. — Beau, nouveau,fou, mou, and vieux, before a masculine
XYL— 1. What Is the general rale for forming the feminine gender of acUectives?
3. What is the feminine of a^jeotives ending in s mtUef 8. What is the feminine of
a(\jective8 ending in (of Are there any exceptions? 4. What is the feminine of adjec-
tives ending in ff 6. What is the feminine of adjectives ending in el^ eil, ien, on^etf
Are there any adjectives in et that follow the general rale? 6. What is the feminine ol
5«a«, fumoeaUf/bu^ moUf vieuoo^ taxdjumeau t
VEMININE OF ADJSCTIVES.
129
noun beginning with a vowel or silent h, have the forms hel, urn-
velj/ol, mol^ and vieil or vieux,
7. The adjectives hlanc^ frane^ sec^ /^^w, a>'e changed for the
femiaine into blanclie, /rancke, siche^fraiche,
8. Long has in the feminine longue^ and obhng, fem. obhngtu^
§ XVI. (6.) — Feminine of Adjectives — Exceptions continued.
Baa, fern
,baue,
low.
Grot, fem
.grotUy
big.
Oras,
ffraue,
fat.
NjA,
nuUe,
null, no.
Las,
hum.
tired.
GenUl,
gtntme,
pretty.
Epau,
epaim,
thick.
Sot,
aoUe,
siUj.
E>^iM,
expntae,
express.
rteiUoi,
viaOoae,
oldish.
Frqfis,
prqfem,
professed.
Observe that these adjectives form the feminine, in analogy
with those under Kule 5, by doubling the final consonant and
adding e.
10.
7W«, feminine, Heree,
Fcaa, " fmuat,
Prifix, •* pr^fixe,
Roux, ** routse,
Observe that these adjectives, as also doux^ douce, are ezcep*
tions to Rule 3.
third,
false,
prefixed,
reddish.
11. Ammoniae,
ammoniac..
Oadue,
" caduQU€m
decaying.
FuUk,
'* pubiigm,
public.
Ture,
" terytie,
Turkish.
Cfree,
" grtcque,
Greek.
12. JBSnm,
femhiine, bln^fn€,
benignant.
Malm,
'< nudigne.
malignant.
On,
«' wUe,
quiet, snug.
favon,
" favorUe,
fevorite.
Demn,
demnerene.
soothsayer.
What are the forma of heau^ nouveaM,/bu, mou, and «i«iMB, before a roaBcuIine nonn
befdnning with a vowel or silent A f 7. What is the feminine of blanr, franc, fraU,
•00 f 8. or long and dUongt 9. What is the feminine of laat ct graat && 10.
What is the feminine of Mar* t offatua f &c 11. What is the feminine of ammoniae f
of eaditc f Ae. 18. What is the feminine of b4ni» t of maUn t fte.
60
130 PLURAL OF ADJEOnVXS.
13. Adjectives in eur have several modes of forming the fem-
inine; as,
(a.) DanseuTf feminine, danmue, dancer.
Thmyxur, ** trom}9etMe, deceitful.
In the same manner (a.), the feminine is formed of adjectives
in euTy derived from verbs.
(6.) Acteur^ feminine, aOriee, actor.
AmbasmukuTf ^* ambauadricej ambaBsador.
InvenUur^ ^* ifwenirieef inventor.
ChanteuTf ** eanUUricef professional singer.
In the same manner (6.), the feminine is formed of adjectives
in teur,
(c.) DemandeuTf feminine, demanderestef plaintiff.
D^endeur, ** difendereue, defendant
EnchanUur, *' tnehanierttae^ endianter.
A few more adjectives in eur, change eur into eresse.
(c^.) OowKTMur, feminine, gouvtmanUf governor.
Senriieur, *' tervante^ servant.
(€.) 'Hiose in erieuvj also majeuVy mineuVj meilUur^ follow the
general rule.
(/.) Adjectives in eur^ denoting occnpations chiefly exercised
by men, such as auteuVy prcf^s^euVy doeteur^ are the same for
both genders.
Rem. — Timoin^ witness, and grogwm^ growler, are used for
both genders. Chatain, chestnut-color; dispos, nimble; fat,
foppish ; aquilin, aquiline ; are not used in the feminine.
§ XVII. (a.) — ^Formation of the Plural of Adjectives.
1. General Rule. — ^The plural of adjectives is formed by
adding 8 to the singular ; as, hon, bonne ; plur. bons^ bonnes.
13. How do adjectives that end in eur form the ibminlne ? What is the feminine of
danstnirt otacUnrf otdmnandeurt otffotttemeurf t^ fn€04Ur^ minsur^ meiUeur,
and of those ending in iriettr t Is there anj feminine to auieur^ prqfeneur, doeUur t
XVIL— What is the general rule for forming the plaral of adjeotiveaf
PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 181
(a. A 6.) — JSJxceptions,
2. There are three exceptions to the general rule, whicL, how-
ever, apply only to the masculine gender of adjectives ; all ad-
jectives, when feminine, come under the general rule.
3. — Exc. 1. Adjectives ending in s and x, remain unchanged
for the masculine plural ; as, un nuage epais, a thick cloud ; des
nuages epais, thick clouds ; un komme keureux^ a happy man ;
des homrnes keureux, happy men.
4. — Exc/2. Adjectives ending in au add x ; as, un beau dis-
course a fine speech ; les beaux discours, the fine speeches.
Rem. — The masculine forms, bel, nouvel, make in the plural,
likewise, beaux, nouveaux; but/o/, mol, plur./ow5, mous,
6. — Exc. 3. (a.) Most adjectives ending in al, change al, for
the masculine plural, into aux ; as, egal, equal ; morale moral ;
social, social ; plur. masc., egaux, moraux^ sociaux,
6. — (b.) The following adjectives in al follow the general rule :
amicul, amicable ; fatal, fatal ; Jinal, final ; frugal, frugal ; gla-
cial, freezing, icy ; matinal, early ; theatral, theatiical ; des in-
stants fatals, fatal moments ; des sons finals, final sounds ; des
repas frugals, frugal meals.
Rem. — Adjectives of more than one syllable, ending in ant or
ent, retain or drop the t in the plural : des kommes prudents, or
des hommes prudens.
DiCT&E 2.
1 . Nous lisons des livres interessants et instructifs, 2. Cette
histoire ancienne est interessante et instructive, 3. Mes freres
sont las d'attendre. 4. Mes soeurs sont lasses d'entendre cette
musique. 6. La langue grecque est belle et harmonieuse, 6. II
y a {there are) deux sortes d'adjectifs numeraux : les cardinaux
et les ordinaux, 7. La Hollande est un pays bcut, et les Hollan-
2. How many exeeptions we there, with regard to the masculine forms of 8<Uectives?
Are there any exceptions, with regard to the feminine forms of adjectives f 8. Wba^ is
the first exception ? 4. The second ? What is the plural of bfl and nouvel t otfol and
molt 5. What is the third exception? ft. Do all adjectives in oZform the plural in
auaa t What is the plural of adjectives, of more than one syllable, ending in ant or wtl
13^2 DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.
dais sont scbrea et indtistrieux. 8. Ces terres bctsses sont scuvent
inondees dans les saisons pluvieuses, 0. Les vents glacials ra-
menent quelquefois les froids de Thiver au milieu du printemps.
10. L'opinion publique est un juge que nous devous respecter.
11. Ces Edifices publics sont caducs, 12. Cette inuraille caduque
menace de tomber. 13. Vambassadeur tare et Xambassadrice
d^Espagne dinent anjourd'hui aveo Tempereur et Pimperatrice.
14. Les dames turques sont voil^es quand elles paraissent en
public. 15. Ce bruit est faux, 16. Cette nouvelle e&t/ausse,
BruU, n. m. noise ; rumor ; cardinal^ adj. cardinal ; idifice, n. m. edi-
fice ; tmperwr^ n. m. emperor ; JEtpoffne, n. f. Spain ; harmomeux, adj.
harmonious ; hiver^ n. m. winter ; HoUande^ n. f. Holland ; HoUandcM^
n. m. Dutchman ; impkratrice^ n. f. empress ; wonder^ a. v. to inundate ;
inlerestantf adj. interesting ; instruettf^ adj. instructive ; juge^ n. m. judge ;
menaeer^ a. v. to threaten ; muraiUe^ n. f. wall ; numeralf adj. numeral ;
opinion^ n. f. opinion ; ordinal^ adj. ordinal ; paraUre^ n. v. to appear ;
pluvioix, adj. rainy ; printemps^ n. m. spring ; rammer^ a. v. to bring back ;
respecter, a. y. to respect ; Axuon, n. f. season ; tobre^ adj. sober ; tortej n. f.
sort, kind ; tomber ^ n. v. to fall ; vent, n. m. wind ; voUer^ a. v. to veil, to
cover with a veil.
§ XVIII. (a.) — Determinative Adjectives — ^Possessive.
Mascuuxs. FnainHB. Fluxax. pob both.
Monf ma, hms, my.
7hn, ia, tes, thy.
San, aa^ tes^ his, her.
jyotrBf notrCf nos, our.
Fcrfre, voire, tw», your.
Leur, leuTf leurtf their.
Rem. — Man, ton, son, are used instead of ma, ta, set, before a
feminine noun beginning with a vowel or silent h,
§ XIX. (a.) — ^Demonstrative Adjectives.
MASa BKF. ▲ GONB., BSF. ▲ TOWXL. FbK. PlVBAL TOB BOTH.
Ce, cetj cette, ces, this, that.
XVIII.— Which ore the posseBslve a4}ectlyeft? Are tna, ta, $a wed before ftfeini<
nine nnan, beginning with a yowel or silent A f
XIX.— Which are the demonstrative adjectiveer
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 133
Eem. — Ci is Dined to the noun that follows ce, cet^ cette^ or
ces, to point out, emphatically,' an objedt that is near; and /a, tc
point out one that is more remote.
§ XX. (a.) — Numeral Adjectitbs.
1. There are two kinds of numeral adjectives: cardinal and
ordinal (P. I., § ix.)
2. The cardinal are un, fem. une^ deux, troiSj 6sc,
3. The ordinal are premier, deuxOme or second^ troitihne^ d^c.
§ XX. (6.) — Remarks on the Numeral Adjectives.
4. The cardinal numeral adjectives, with the exception of t/n,
vingt, and cent, are invariable.
5. Un, fem. une, is used in the plural in lee uns et les autres,
these and those ; and in les uns les autres, the one the other.
6. Vingt and cent, when multiplied, and not immediately fol-
lowed by another number, take the plural ending; as, quatre
vingts piastres, eighty dollars ; trois cents milles, three hundred
miles. But in quatrcrvingt trois piastres, eighty-three dollars;
trois cent vingt milles, three hundred and twenty miles, vingt and
cent, though multiplied, remain unchanged, because they are fol-
lowed by another number.
7. Mille, a thousand, is written im7, in the ordinary computa-
tion of years; as, milhuit cent soixante, 1860.
8. The ordinal numbers are formed regularly from the cardi-
nal, by the addition of ieme ; if the cardinal ends in e, the e is
dropped. Cinq adds uiime; as, cinquieme ; and neuf changes
the /into v; as, neuvihne. Premier and second are exceptions.
9. The ordinal numeral adjectives vary, with regard to gender
and number, like other adjectives.
What particle is Joined to the nonn that follows oe, cet^ cette, OM, to point out, em-
phatically, an object that is near ? to point oat one that is more remote ?
XX.— 1. How many Icinds of nnmeral adjectives are there? S. Which are the cardi-
nal? 8. Which are the ordinal? 4. Which cardinal nnmeral a4jectives can change
their forms? 5. How does un change ? tt. When do vingt and cent take the plaral
ending? 7. How is tnilU written in the ordinary compatation of years? 8. How aro
the ordinal nnmeral adjectives formed from the cardinal ? 9. Do the ordinal nnmenJ
ad)eotiyes vary, with regard to gender and nnmber?
184 INDEFINirS ADJECTIVES.
10. Seeotid, devxikne. Second indicates order; deuxiime de-
notes one of a series, and is con-ectlj used only when a third, a
fourth, &c., are supposed to exist
11. A, or one, betbre hundred and thousand used adjectively,.
is not expressed in French : as, cent (mille) hultres, one hundred
(one thousand) oysters. But when cent and mille are used sub-
stantively, the numeral un may precede them ; as, un cent d'hui-
treSy one hundred (of) oy Sid's.
§ XXI. {a, & b.) — Indefinite Adjectives.
(Thofle printed in small capitab have not been given in Part XL)
1. They are:
AucuN (NX). No. Qud. Which.
NuL, fern. MULLS (ms). No. Quelqux. Some, any.
CHAgus. Each. Qukloomqux. Whatever.
Tbid. All, whole, every. Plusieubs. Several.
M^tne. Same. I'kl, fem. tellb. Such.
Remarks cm Aucun, Nul, and Teu
2. Aucun and nul require ne before the verb; as, aucun
homme nepeut lefaire^ no man can do it ; nul ileve ne mit faire
cela^ no pupil can do that
3. Tel roust not be separated from the noun by un : un tel
homme, such a man ; une telle femme, such a woman. i
DiCTfiE 3.
1. Ce sac contient quatre-vingts piastres. 2. Cette malle pese
quatre-vingt-cinq livres. 3. Cei caisses contiennent trois cents
pieces de mousseline. 4. Chaque piece est de trente verges. 5.
II y a (there are) dans cette bibliotheque deux mille cinq cent dn-
quante volumes. 6. La decouverte de FAm^rique date de I'an
mil quatre cent quatre-vingt-douze, Y. Les premieres lepons sont
moins difficiles que les dernieres. 8. Les unes sont aussi utiles
10. What Is the difference between second and deuwiime t 11. Is a or one^ which in
English precedes hundred uid thounand, expressed in French ?
XXL— t. Which are the indefinite adjectives? 2. Which indefinite acUectives re-
quire lu before the verb ? 8. What is to be observed with regard to te2 f
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 135
que les autres. 9. Le second volume de cet oavrage n'est pas ici.
10. La deuxiime lepon est plus longue que la premiere, 11.
» Ckaque ^leve doit ^tre present k I'appel du matin. 12. Plu-
sieurs eleves sont absents de I'^cole aujourd'hui. 13. j^ul el^ve
ne doit quitter m place sans la permission du surveillant. 14.
Nulle raison ne doit nous determiner k faire une injustice. 15.
Aucun motif ne pent justifier une mauvaise action. 16. Un tel
d^sir n'est pas raisonnable. 17. Une telle negligence merite
une r^primande.
Abtent^ adj. absent; action, n. f. action; Amiriquef n. f. America; op-
pd, n. m. roll-call ; eontenirj irr. a. v. to contain ; daUr, n. v. to date from,
to reckon from ; tUcouverte, n. f. discovery ; disir, n. m. desire ; diterminar,
a. V. to determine ; to induce ; icole, n. f. school ; injusliee, n. f. injustice,
wrong, an act of injustice ; justifier, a. v. to justify ; UorCy n. f. pound ;
nwHU, n. f. trunk ; meriter, a. v. to deserve ; motif, n. m. motive ; moiusselme,
n. f. muslin ; Tiey^enoe, n. f. neglect ; permission, n. f. permission ; peaer,
a. & n. V. to weigh ; present, adj. present ; quitter, a. v. to quit, to leave ;
raison, n. f. reason ; rmsonnabU, adj. reasonable, just ; reprimande, n. f. re-
proof; sac, n. m. bag; sans, prep, without; surveiUant, n. m. superin-
tendent ; verffe, n. f. yard ; volume, n. m. volume.
THE PRONOUN.
§ XXII. (a.) — ^Personal Pronouns.
The personal pronouns are,
1. For the first person ; je, me, moi, nous,
2. For the second person ; tu, te, toi, vous,
3. For the third person ; t7, ils^ elle, ellea^ le, la, les, lui, leur,
eux, ep, y, se, also soi (one's self, himself, &;c,)
4. Tiie personal pronouns used as subjects of verbs, are ; je,
nous, tu, vous, ily ils, elle, elles,
5. Those used as direct objects of verbs, are; m£, nous, te,
vous, le, la, lea, se.
XXII.— 1. Which are the personal pronouns for the first person? 2. Which are the
periM>nal pronouns for the ftecond person ? 8. Which are the personal .pronouns for the
third person? 4. Which are the personal pronouns used as subjects of verba? &
Which are the personal pronouns used as direct objects of verbs ?
136
FOSSSSSIYB PRONOUNS.
6. Those used as indirect objects of verbs, are : me^ nous^ U^
vou.% luiy leur, en, y, ae,
7. The pronouns used with prepositions, when the verb is un-
deretood, when they are separated from the verb, or when they
stand after it, are : moi, toi^ /ut, elle^ tums, voug, eux, eUeSy soi.
These are called disfunetive pronouns,
8. The pronoun le is invariable when it represents an adjective
or a preceding sentence ; as, Ces dames sont-elles aimahles f Elks
le sont. Croyez-VQUS ce guHl dit f Je le crois.
DiCTikE 4.
(In translfttlDg this EzerciM, tbt ttodent should point oat sad pane tho Fenoiua
ProDOuns.)
1. On m'appelle. 2. Quelqu^un vous demande. 3. Que me
demandez-vous ? 4. Je vous demande le livre. 6. Voyez-vous
cette dame? 0. La connaissez-vous ? 7. Ces enfants se com-
portent bien. 8. Nous les aimons. 9. Ma tante est a Paris;
nous lui ^crivons souvent. 10. Mes freres sont \k\ ils nous voi-
ent, 11. Ils nous parlent. 12. Nous les voyons. 13. "Nous
leur demandons des fleurs. 14. lis nous en donnent. 15. On
vous attend ; vous n'y pensez pas. 16. Nous sommes contents;
ces dames le sout-eiles? 17. Nous aliens chez elles, lui et moi.
18. Ils vont chez eux. 19. Elle ne pense jamais a moi. 20,
C^est vous qui le dites.
§ XXIIL (a.)-
— PossKssrvB Pronouns.
Maso. snro.
FsK. snie.
MAsa PLVB. Fbk. TLum,
Lemient
lamienne,
lea mienSf let nUmnea,
mine.
Letim,
latienne,
lea iwUf lea tiennea,
thine.
Lesieriy
lasienne.
lea aiena, lea aiermea,
his, hers.
Le noire,
la ndtrCf
lea ndirea, lea ndtrea.
ours.
Le vdtrCj
la v6tre,
lea vdtrea, lea vHrea,
yours.
LeUur,
la leur f
lea Uura, lea leura.
theirs.
8. Which are the personal pronouns ased as indirect objects of verbs? 7. Which arf
the pergonal pronouns used wiih prepositions, when the verb is understood, when thej
are separated fh>in it, or stand after it f S. When is the pronoun le tnvarlabie ?
XXIIL— Which are the possessive pronouns ?
rsUlTiyb pronouns. 13?
§ XXIV. (a.) — Dbmonstrative Pronouns.
Umbo. bxno. Fxk. sxho. Maba plus. Yvm, plus.
Cb{i<t-ci, ce220-ct, ceuz-ct, edUa-d, this.
a2ut-M, ceOe-ld, cetiz-2d, cdUs-ld, chat.
Os^M, ceUe, eetiz, cdles, that (of ), the one
a, that, it. Od, this (this thing). Ola, that (that thug).
Dict6e 5.
(Point out and pane Uie Poaswrive and DemonstratiTe Pronoans in this EzerdM.)
1. C'est un beau manteau ; le v6tre, le mien et le sien sont
moins beaux que celui-lsi. 2. Cette montre est belle ; la vdtre, la
mienne et la sienne ue sent pas aussi belles. 3. Yos leqons sent
difficiles ; les miennes et les siennes sent encore plus difficiles
que les v6tres. 4. Vous parlez de vos leqons, je parle des mien-
nes, il parle des siennes. 5. Vous pensez aux votres, nous pen-
sons aux n6tres, ils pensent aux leurs. 6. Ce chapeau-ci est plus
beau que celui-la. 7. Cette corde-la est plus longue que celie-ci.
8. Ces crayons-ci sont meilleurs que ceux-l&. 9. Ces deux cra-
vates sont belles; celle de soie est la plus jolie, et celle de laine
est la plus chaude. 10. Oe qui est utile n'est pas toujoun agr6-
able. 11. CTest vrai. 12. J'aime mieux ceci que cela. 13. Le
sommeil est doux et salutaire aprds le travail ; celui-ci ^puise nos
forces, celui-1^ les r^pare. 14. La verti^ et le vice ont des fins
bien differentes ; celui-ci conduit a la mort, celle-la, d la vie.
AgrSabUj adj. agreeable; diffire/Uf adj. different; epuisert a. y. to ex-
haust ; fin^ n. f. end ; force, n. f . strength ; mort, n. f. death ; riparer, a. v.
to repair, to restore ; taluUdrej adj. salutary ; tommeU, n. m. sleep ; veriu^
n. f. virtue ; vice, n. m. vice ; vie, n. f. life ; vrai, adj. true.
§ XXV. (a.) — ^Bblatiye Pronouns.
1. The relative pronouns are : qui, que, quoi, dont, lequeL ■
2. Qui is used as the subject of the sentence ;
XXIY.— Which are the demonstratire pronoans?
XXy.-1 Which are the relative pronoans? 2. Which relative pronoun is used at
iabjectr
138
INDEFINITE PRONOUNB.
3. Que, as the direct object ;
4. Dont, as the indirect object, expressing the relation of the
preposition de,
5. Qui, with reference to persons, and lequel, with reference to
persons and things, are used, when preceded by prepositions.
6. Quoi is used, with a preposition, with reference to an in-
definite antecedent ; as, C6 a quoije pense^ that of which I think.
7. The pronouns qui, quty quoi, lequel, are also used in an ab-
solute manner ; that is, without reference to an antecedent * as,
Qui vientf Que dite9-vouei A quoi peneez-vous? Lequel
vouUxr-voue f When used absolutelj, qui can be the subject or
object, of the verb ; as, Qui me demande ? Qui demundez-vous f
§ XXVI. (a.) — Indefinite Pbonouns.
(Thote printed in until eaplUlf hnye not been given in Part IL)
The indefinite pronouns are :
Qud^un, Somebody.
PerMfiiM (im). Nobody.
On, One, people, they.
Z'tm d V autre. Both.
Also:
AiKniir,ifUL(»), No one;
Tkl, Such a one.
when used without a noun.
L'UN L*ACtBB.
Ghacun.
AniBui.
QUICONQUE.
Plubisubs,
CaBXAIN,
The one the other.
Every one.
Others.
Whosoever.
Several;
Certain;
DiCTfiB 6.
(Point ont and pane the DemonstratiTe, Belative, and Indefinite Prononna in thia
Exercise.)
1 . Gelui qui fait son devoir est plus heureux que celui qui ne
le fait pas. 2. C'est moi qui le dis. 3. Voici Foutil que vous
cherchez. 4. Yoila la dame dont vous parlez. 5. Savez-vous a
qui j^envoie ce billet? 6. Connaissez-vous les dames auxqnelles
8. Which as direct object? 4. Which aa indirect object, to ezpresa the relation of the
preposition oft 6. Which relative pronoun ia used with prepositions, with reference to
persons? Which, with reference to persona and things? i. When is quoi need as a
relative pronoun ? 7. Which relative pronouns may be used in an absolute manner?
XXVL— Which are the indefinite pronouns ? Which ones require 9M before the verb
MODIFICATIONS OF THE VSRB. 139
ils parlent? 7. VoilA le tableau aaquel je travaille. 8. Qui
voyez-vous? 9. Qui me demande ? 10. Que voulez-vous? 11,
A quoi pensez-vous? 12. Connaissez-vous quelqu'un ici ? 13.
Je ne conaais personne ici. 14. Chacun peuse a soi en ce monde.
15. On remarque aisement les defauts d'autrui, mais nul ne veut
voir les siens. 16. Aucun de nous n'est sans reproche. lY. Plu-
sieurs pensent autrement. 18. Tel donne a tout le monde, et
n^oblige personne. 19. QuicoDque neglige ses devoirs, est in-
digne de notre estime. 20. Tel croit tromper les autres, qui se
trorape soi m6me. 21. Les hommes se trorapent les uns les au-
tres. {Ijun et r autre is put in the plural, when it refers to more
than two persons.)
AisSment, adv. easily ; autrement^ adv. otherwise, differently ; dS/aut, n.
m. fault ; defect ; es^tW, n. f. esteem ; indigne^ adj. unworthy ; mime^ adj.'
same ; self ; nkgliger^ a. v. to neglect ; obiUger^ a. v. to oblige ; ouUl, n. m.
tool ; remargueTy a. v. to observe ; reproche^ n. m. reproach, blame ; tans^
prep, without ; tableau^ n. m. picture, painting ; tromper ^ a. v. to deceive ;
se tromper^ v. pron. to deceive one's self, to be mistaken ; u tromper Vun
V cadre, v. pron. to deceive one another ; voict, prep, here is ; voUd^ prep,
there is.
THE VERB.
§ XXVII. (6.)— Modifications.
1. Verbs are subject to four different modifications, to indicate
mood, tense, person, and number. (P. I., xii., 6, 7, 8, 9.)
2. These several modifications are, in some tenses, expressed
by the verb itself; in others, by the help of an auxiliary verb :
the former are called simple, the latter, compound tenses.
§ XXVIII. (6.)— Auxiliary Verbs.
1. There are two auxiliary verbs : avoir ^ to have, and Hre^ to
be. They are auxiliaries only when they are used in the forma-
tion of compound tenses.
XXVII. — 1. How manf differont modifications is the verb snbjert to ? What do t)iey
indicate? 2. How are tbec« several modifications expressed? What are simple, and
what are oomponnd, tenses?
JLXVIII.— 1. How many auziliaiy verbs are there?
140 CONJUGATIONS OF TBI YIBB.
2. Avoir is used in the compound tenses of
(1.) All active verbs;
(2.) Most neuter verbs; and
(3.) Those impersonal verbs which are not used as persona*
verbs,
3. Eire is used with
(1.) All reflective verbs;
(2.) Certain neuter verbs ;
(3.) Those impersonal verbs which are only occasionally used
as such, and
(4.) With the past participle of active verbs, to form the pas-
sive verb, or voice.
§ XXIX. (6.) — Conjugation.
1. To conjugate a verb is to write or recite it with all its mod-
ifications of mood, tense, pei*son, and number.
2. There are four different conjugations, or classes, of verbs,
distinguished by the endings of the infinitive present.
8. The verbs of the 1st conj. end, in the infin. pres., in er,
tt « 2d " ** •* tr.
" " 8d «* " •' oir.
u 44 4th " « « re.
4. The verb consists of two parts : the root and the termina-
tion. The root is what remains after striking off the infinitive
ending; rs^ parler: rooUp^trl; ending, er.
6. Verbs are regular or irregular.
6. A verb is regular when it is inflected, in all its moods and
tenses, according to the model verb of the conjugation to which
it belongs. A verb is irregular when it deviates, in the forma-
tion of any of its moods or tenses, from the model verb of the
conjugation to which it belongs.
S. In the eompoond tonsM of which y«rbe Is the wizlllftry awotr used? & With
what verbs is the anxiliaiy Ure nsed?
XXIX.— 1. What is meant hf coqjngating a verb? 2. How many different coiUa«
gations are there, and how are they distlngaished ? S. What is the ending of the infln>
itive present of the verbs of the let conjugation ? of the verbs of the 2d coqjagation t
of the verbs of the 8d conjugation ? of the verbs of the 4th conjugation ? 4. Of how
many parts does a yeib consist? What is the root? S. When it a verb regular f Wheni
irregular?
CONJUaATION OF AVOIR.
141
Canjugoition of the avaiiUary verb Avonu
§ XXX. — ^Affirmatively.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Past.
Avoir,
iahae€.
Avoir eu,
tohavehad.
PARTICIPLES.
PBmRT.
Past.
Aywit,
hanmg.
Eu, m. ; eue
,/., had.
COVSOVTXD,
Ayanteu,
havmyhad.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
pRmMT.
Past Indxtimitb.
Tuas,
Da,
Nous avons,
Yous aves,
Ilsont,
Ihane,
thou had.
hehM.
you fume,
ihejf htwe.
J'al eu,
Tu as eu,
naeu,
Nous avons eu,
Yous aves eu,
Us out eu.
I have had,
thouhadhad.
hehaehad.
we have had,
you have had,
theyhavehad.
bCPKRVSCT.
J'avals,
Tu avals,
11 avait.
Nous avions
Yous aviez,
Us avalent,
Ihad.
thouhadd.
hehad.
whad,
you had,
they had.
J'avalk eu,
Tu avals eu,
n avait eu.
Nous avions eu,
Yous avlez eu,
Us avalent eu.
I had had.
thouhadd had.
hehadhad.
wehadhad.
youhadhad.
theyhadhad.
Past DsFixriTi.
Past Aittbiuor.
J'eus,
Tueus,
11 eut.
Nous eftmes,
Vous efttes,
lis eurent.
Jhad,
ihauhadd,
hehad,
fee had,
yauhad.
thiyhad.
J*eus eu,
Tueus eu,
11 eut eu,
Nous eftmes eu,
Vous elites eu.
Us eurent eu.
I had had.
thouhadd had.
he had had.
wehadhad.
youhadhad.
theyhadhad.
FUTUKB.
FUTUBB AnTEBIOR.
J' aural,
Tu auras,
11 aura.
Nous aurons
Vous aures,
Us aoront.
f
IthaUhaoe,
thou wiU have.
lie wM nave,
we shall have,
you will have,
they wiU have.
J'aural eu,
TvL auras eu,
11 aura eu,
Nous aurons eu,
Yous aurez eu.
Us auront eu,
lihaUhavehad,
thouwiU have had.
he wOl have had.
we shall have had.
you wUl have had,
they wiU have had
142
CONJUGATION OF AVOIR.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Prisuit.
Past.
J'annds,
Tu aurai8,
II aurait,
Nous aurions,
Yous auriez,
lis aundent.
Aie,
Qu'U ait,
I should have. J'aurais en, / ^ufuld have had.
thou wndda have. Taauraiseu, thou wouldd have had,
he would have. U aurait eu, he would have had.
we ehmUd have. Nous aurions eu, we should have had.
you would have. Yousaurieseu, you would hate had.
they would have. lis auraient eu, they would have had.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
AyODB,
have (thou). Ayez,
let him have. Qu'ils aient,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
letmhave,
have (you).
let them have.
Que J'aie,
Que tu aies,
PSEBBHT.
that I may have,
thai thou mayst have.
Qu'il ait, that he may have.
Que nous ayons, that we may have.
Que Tous ayez, that you may have.
Qu'ils aient, that they may have.
iMPUiraoT.
Que j'euBse,
thatr
Que tu eusses.
thatthou
QuMl eat,
thathe
Que nous eussions,
thatwe
Que vous eussiez,
thatyou
Qu'ils eussent,
thatthey
I
Par.
Que j*aie eu, that I may
Que tu aies eu, that thou mayet
Qu'il ait en, that he may
Que nous ayons en, that we may
Que vous ayez eu, that you may
Qu'ils aient en, that they may
PliUFCRnBOT.
Que ]*eu88e en, that F
Que tu eusses eu, that thou
Qu'il eilt eu, (hot he
Que nous eussions en, that we
Que vous eussiez eu, that you
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they
t
§ XXXI.— NKGATIVKLr.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Past.
Ke pas avoir, not to have. N' avoir pas eu, not to have had.
PARTICIPLES.
Pbsskrt. CoMPOUin).
N'ayant pas, * not having. N'ayant pas en, not having had.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Past iNDEniviTB.
I have not. Je n*ai pas eu, / have not had.
ihou host not. Tu n'as pas eu, thou had not had,
he has not. II n'a pas eu, he has not had.
we have not. Nous n' avons pas en, we have not had.
you have not. Vous n' avez pas eu, you have not had.
they have not. Ds n'ont pas en, Viey have not had:
PRmRT.
Je n'ai pas,
Tu n'as pas,
II n'a pais,
Nous n' avons pas,
Vous n'avez pas,
Ds n'ont pas.
COKJUQATION OF AYOIR.
143
iMFntracT.
Je n' avals pas,
Tu n'avais pas,
II n'avait pas,
Nous n'aTions pas,
Vous n'aviez pas,
lis n'avaient pas,
Past Dxtdiitb.
Je n'ens pas, I had not.
Tu n'eus pas,
n n'eut pas,
Nous n'edmes pas,
Vous n'eiites pas,
Us n'eurent pas,
FUTUBX.
Je n'aurai pas, IshaU not June,
Tu n'auras pas, ihou wilt not have.
II n'aura pas, he vnU not have.
Nous n'auFons pas, we thdU not have.
Vous n'aurez pas, you wHt not have.
Us n'auront pas, they will not have.
I had not,
thou hadstnoi.
he had not.
we had not,
you had not.
they had not.
thou hadst not.
he had not,
wehadnci.
you had not.
they had not.
Plufebykct.
Je n'avais pas eu, I had not had.
I'u n' avals pas eu, thou hadst not had,
H n'avait pas eu, he had not had.
Nous n' avioDS pas eu, we had not had.
Vous n'aviez pas eu, yoii had not had.
Us n'avaient pas eu, Oiey had not had.
Paot Antkriob.
Je n'eus pas eu, I had not had.
Tu n'eus pas cu, ihou hadst not had.
II n'eut pas eu, he had not had.
Nous n' edmes pas eu, im had not had.
Vous n'eCites pas eu, youhadnothad,
lis n'eurent pas eu, &ty had not had.
FuTUBB Autbbiob.
Je n' aural pas eu, lehaU
Tu n'auras pas eu, Ihou wiU
II n'aura pas eu, he will
Nous n'aurons pas eu, we shoM -
Vous n*aurez pas eu, you will I*
Us n'auront pas eu, Ihey will J ^
Pbbskiit.
Je n*aurais pas, I should'
Tu n'aurais pas, thou toouldst
n n'aurait pas, he would
Nous n'aurlons pas, we should
Vous n'aurlez pas, you would
lis n'auraient pas, they would ^
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Past.
Je n'aurais pas eu, lehould
Tu n'aurais pas eu, thouwouldst
II n'aurait pas eu, he would
Nous n' aurions pas eu, we should
Vous n'aurlez pas eu, you would
lis n'auraient pas eu, Oiey would ^
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
N'ayons pas, Id us not have,
N'aie pas, have (thou) not. N'ayez pas, have {you) not.
Qu'll n'alt pas, let him not have. Qu'ils n'alent pas, let them not have.
Present.
Que je n'ale pas,
Que tu n'ales pas,
Qu'll n'ait pas.
Que nous n'ayons pas.
Que vous n'ayez pas,
Qu'ils n'alent pas.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Paw.
that /I I Que je n'aie pas eu,
that thou ^ Que tu n'ales pas eu,
that he 3 Qu'll n'alt pas eu,
/Arrf •«#»«• QiijB nous n'ayons pas eu,
Que vous n'ayez pas eu,
Qu'ils n'alent pas eu,
ihatwe
(hat you
thatthey
Imfervbot.
Que je n'eusse pas.
Que tu n'eusses pas,
' Qu'll n'e&t pas.
Que nous n'eusslons pas.
Que vous n'eussiez pas,
Qu'ils n'euasent pas,
Pluperfect.
Que je n'eusse pas eu,
Que tu n'eusses pas eu,
Qu'll n'eftt pas eu,
Que nous n'eusslons pas eu.
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu,
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu.
ft
f\
U4
OOKJUOATION OF AYOIB.
§ XXXTT. — ^iKTBRBOOATiyELT.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Past Imjdupijiiti.
Ai-Jef
hope If
Ai-jeenf
ha^elhadf
As-tuf
hadUumf
As-tuenf
hadthouhadf
A-t-ilf
hat/uf
A-t-ileuf
haahehadf
AvoDS-noiis!
havewef
Ayons-nousenf
havewehadf
Avez-vousf
kavtfouf
Avez-YOiu ea f
have you hadf
have&eyhadf
Ont-ilsf
havtthe^f
Ont-ilseuf
iMPIBraOT.
Plupebfkct.
Ayais-jer
had If
Ayais-j«en?
hadlhadf
Ayais-tuf
kaddUunif
Avais-tueuf
haddthouhadf
Avait-ilf
hadhef
AvaiMleaf
hadhehadf
Avions-nous?
hadwef
AvioD8-nou8 eu f
hadwthadf
Avies-vous ?
hadyauf
Aviez-vous eu ?
hadyoahadf
Avaient-ils?
kadtheyf
Avuent-ila eu f
hadtheyhadf
Past Dkfiniti.
Past Autkuoa.
Eii«-je?
had If
Eus-je eu f
hadlhadf
EU8-tU?
haddthmf
Eus-tu eu ?
haddthouhadf
Eut-il?
hadhsf
Eut-il eu?
hadhehadf
Eiimes-nous f
hadwef
EfimeR-nous eu f
hadwthadf
E^tes-yonsf
hadytmf
Eiites-youB eu ?
hadf/auhadf
Eurent-ilsf
hadtheyf
Eurent-ils eu f
hadthejfhadf
FUTUBB.
FuTUiUB Amtkrior.
Aunii-Jef
thaUIhaoef
Aurai-je eu f
shaUIhavehadf
Auras-tuf
wiUthouhavef
Aura8-tu eu f
wOt thou have hadf
Aura-t-U?
wiUhehavtf
Aura-t-il eu f
wiUhehavehadf
Aurons-nonBf
thaUtoehavef
Aurons-nous eu f shall toe have had f
Aureas-Tousf
wUlyouhaoef
Aurez-T0U8 eu f
wiU you have hadf
AuTont-ilflr
tnUthesfhavef
Auront-il8 eu f
wOl they have hadf
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Pbsbent.
Past.
Aurais-je? should I have f Aunus-jeeuf should T
Auraifl-tu ? wouldst thou have f Auiais-tu eu ? wouldst thou
Aurait-il f would he have f Aurait-il eu f woidd he
Aurions-nousf shouldwehavef Aurions-nous eu f should we
Auries-Tous f would you have f Auriez- vous eu ? woidd you
Auraient-ils? would they have f Auraient-ils eu ? would ^
CONJUGATION OF AVOIR.
145
§ XXXin. — Interrogatively and Negatively,
PfiiaSSMT.
N'ai-je pas ?
N'as-tu pas?
N'a-t-il pas?
N'avons-nous pas?
N'avez-vous pas ?
N'ont-ils pas?
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Past Inoxfinitb.
have I not t N'ai-je pas eu ? have J
hast thou not f N'as-ta paa eu ? hast thou
has he not f N'a-t-il pas eu ? has he
have we not f N'avons-nous pas eu ? hcKve we
have you not f N'avez-yous pas eu ? heme you
have they not f N'ont-ils pas eu ? have they
I
Impkbfbct.
N'avais-je pas ?
N'avais-tu pas ?
N'avait-il pas?
N'avions-nous pas ?
N'aviez-vous pas ?
N'avaient-ils pas ?
had Inotf
hadst thou not f
had he notf
had v^ not f
had you notf
had ihey not f
Plupkrfect.
N'avais-je pas eu ? had I
N' avals- tu pas eu ? hadst thou
N'avait-il pas eu ? had he
N'avions-nous pas eu ? had we
N'aviez-vous pas eu ? had you
N'avaient-ils pas eu ? had they
Fast Dehnitb.
N'eus-je pas ?
N'eus-tu pas?
N'eut-il pas ?
N'edmes-nous pas?
N'efttes-vous pas?
N'eurent-ils pas ?
had I notf
hadst thou not f
hadhenolf
had we notf
hadyounotf
1\ad ihey notf
Past Antebior.
N'eus-je pas eu ? had I
N'eus-tu pas eu ? hadst thou
N'eut-il pas eu ? had he
N'edmes-nous pas eu ? had toe
N'edtes-vous pas eu ? had you
N' eurent-ils pas eu ? had Ihey
Futdrs.
N'aurai-je pas ? siiaU /'
N' auras- tu pas ? will thou
N'aura-t-il pas ? wHl he
N ' aurons-nous pas ? tihaU toe
N'aurez-Yous pas ? wHt you
N'auront-ils pas ? will they ^
Futubb Anteriob.
N'aurai-je pas eu ? shaU 1
N'auras-tu pas eu ? wiU thou
^ N'aura-t-il pas eu ? will he
N' aurons-nous pas eu? shaUwe
N'aurez-vous pas eu ? wiU you
N'auront-ils pas eu ? wiU they
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
N'aurais-je pas ? should F
N'aurais-tu pas ? wouldst thou
N'aurait-il pas ? would he
N' aurions-nous pas ? shotdd toe
N' auriez-vous pas ? would you
N'auraient-ils pas ? would they
Pact.
N'aurais-je pas eu ?
N'aurais-tu pas eu ?
N'aurait-il pas eu?
N' aurions-nous pas eu ?
N' auriez-vous pas eu ?
N'auraient-ils pas eu ?
146 CONJUGATION OF AVOIB.
DiCTftK 7.
(In transUting this and the following Exercises on the Verbs, the student should stste
the tense, mood, person, and namber of each verb.)
1. J'ai eu votre livre. 2. Avez-vous eu le mien ? 3. Je ne
Tai pas eu. 4. Nous avons eu des oranges. 5. Nous n'avons
pas eu de pSches. 6. lis n*oDt rien eu. 7. J^avais votre plume
quand vous aviez la mienne. 8. II avait un beau cheval. 9.
Les chevaux u'avaient pas de foin, 10. J'aurai un prix, si j'etu-
die bien. 11. Yous n^aurez rien, si vous ne travaiilez pas mieux.
12. Nous aurons noa habits neufs demain. 13. Ces hommes
n'auront pas le temps de finir leur ouvrage. 14. J^aurais eu mon
theme, si j'avais eu le temps de reciire. 15. Nous aurions eu
DOS le<^ns, si nous avions eu le temps de les etudier. 16. Hier,
j*eus le plaisir de voir mon ami. 17. Lundi dernier, nous eOoies
conge. 18. Je veux bien que vous ayez du plaisir. 19. Je
n'aime pas qu'il ait mon livre. 20. Croyez-vous que ces hom-
mes aient de I'argent? 21. Croyez-vous qu'ils eussent eu de
I'argent, s'ils avaient eu le courage de travailler ? 22. Ayez la
bont^ de fenuer la porte.
Oongk, n. m. leave ; avoir conge ^ to have a holiday ; couragey n. m. cour-
age ; Uety adv. yesterday ; hmdi^ n. m. Monday ; prixl n. m. prue.
CONJUaATION OF ftXRK. 147
Conjugation of the av/xUlia/ry verb £trb.
§ XXXIV. — Affirmatively.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pbxsknt. Past.
£:tre, to be. Avoir k\k^ to have hem.
PARTICIPLES.
PaiSBllT.
:6tant.
being.
Past.
£t6, been.
Ck)MPOUMD.
Ayant M,
having been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbesbnt.
Past Indbfinitb.
Je suis,
'l\i es,
11 est.
Nous sommes,
Vous Stes,
Us sont.
lam.
thmaH.
he is.
we are.
you are.
they are.
J'al M,
Tu as et^,
U a 6t6,
Nous avons 6t6,
Vous avez M,
lis ont ^t^,
Ihavebeen^
thou hast been.
he has been.
we have been,
you have been.
they have been.
Impibfbct
Plupbrfbot.
J'^tais,
Tu ^tais,
11 6tait,
Nous 6tions,
Vous ^tiez,
Bs ^talent.
I wax.
thou wad.
hevHU.
we were.
you were.
they were.
J' avals 4t6,
Tu avals 6t^,
11 avait ^t^.
Nous avions ^t^,
Vous aviez 4t^,
lis avaient ^t^,
Ihadbeen.
thou hadst been.
hehadbeen.
wehadbeen.
you had been.
theyhadbeen.
Past Dkfinitk.
Past Antbbiob.
Je fus,
Tu fus,
11 fut,
Nous fftmes,
Vous fiites,
lis furent,
Iwae.
thouwaa.
hetffas.
we were.
you were.
they were.
J'eus M,
Tu eus 4t4,
n eut 6t6,
Nous eftmes M,
Vous edtes M,
lUeurent^t^,
I had been.
■ thou hadst been.
hehadbeen.
wehadbeen.
you had been.
they had been.
FuTUJiB.
Future Antbbiob.
Je serai,
Tu seras,
11 sera,
Nous serons,
Vous serez,
Bs seront.
lehaUbe.
thouwiUbe.
hewiUbe.
we shall be.
you will be.
theywiUbe.
J'aurai (tt6,
Tu auras 4t^,
11 aura 6t^,
Nous aurons ^td,
Vous aurez ^t6,
lis auront dt4.
I shall have been,
thou wilt have been.
he will have been,
we shall have been,
you wUl have been,
they tmU have been.
148
CONJUGATION OF ^RB.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PBttKNT.
Past.
Jc serais,
Tu serais,
II serait,
Nous serions,
Vous series,
lis seraient,
8ois,
Qa'il Boit,
I should be. J'aurais ^td, Ishotdl have been
thou wouldtt be. Tu aurais dt^, thou wouldd have been
he would be, II aundt My he would have been
we should be. Nous aurions ^i6, we should have beat
you would be. Vous auriez dttf , you vould have been.
they would be. Us auraient €U, they would have been
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Soyons,
be (thou). Soyez,
let him be. Qu'ils soient,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
let us be.
be (yon).
let than be.
Pbwnt.
Past.
Que je sois,
Que tu Bois,
Qu'il soit,
Que nous soyons,
Que vous soyez,
Qu'ils soient,
that I may be.
that thou mayst be.
that he may be.
that we may be.
thai you may be.
that they may be.
iMPXBFaCT.
Que je fusse.
Que tu fusses,
Qu'il mt,
Que nous fussions,
Que Yous fussiez,
Qu'ils fussent,
that I
'that thou
thalhe
that we
that you
that they
Que j'aie 6i4, that I may ^
Que tu aies My that thou mayst ^
Qu'il ait 6tiy thai he may . ~
Que nous ayons M, that we may
Que vous ayez Mj that you may
Qu'ils aient ^td, ' that they may
Plupbrfbct.
Que j'eusse 4Uy that I]
Que tu eusses ^t^, that thou
Qu'il ett My that he
Que nous eussions dt^, thai we
Que vous eussiez 6t6y that you
Qu'ils eussent itd, that they ^
§ XXXV. — ^Negativklt.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pbuint.
Ke pas dtre, not to be.
Past.
N' avoir pas My not io have beat.
Vreskst,
K'dtant pas, not being.
PARTICIPLES.
Compound.
N'ayant pas M, not having been.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Prkssmt. Past Ind0INitb.
Je ne suis pas,
Tu n'es pas,
II n'est pas.
Nous ne Rommes pas,
Vous n'ete8 pas.
Us ne sont pas,
lam not. Je n'ai pas dt^, I have
thou art not, Tu n'as pas dtd, thou hast
he is not. II n'a pas dtd, he has
we are not. Nous n'avons pas My we have
you are not. Vous n'avez pas dtd, you have
they are not. Ds n'ont pas 6t6, they have
CONJUGATION 07 AtKB.
149
Imperfect.
Je n'^tais pas,
TvL n'^tais pas,
n n'^tait pas,
Nous n'^tions pas,
Vous n'^tiez pas,
lis n'^taient pas.
Past Definite.
Je ne fus pas, I was fiot.
lu ne fus pas,
II ne fut pas,
Nous ne ftkmes pas,
Yous ne fdtes pas,
Us ne furent pas.
Future.
Je ne serai pas, l8?udl nU be.
Tu ne seras pas, thou wilt noi be,
n ne sera pas, he will noi be.
Nous ne serous pas, we shall not be.
Yous ne serez pas, you will not be.
lis ne seront pas, they will not be.
IvHU not.
thou wast not.
he was not.
we were not.
you were not.
they were not.
thou wast not.
he was not.
ice were not.
you were not.
they were not.
PLUPBEnKTT.
Je n'avais pas dt^, I had
l\i n'avais pas 6t6, thou hadst
II n'avait pas dt6, he had
Nous n'avions pas ii6, we had
Yous n'aviez pas 6t6, you had
Us n'avaient pas ^t4, they had
Past Anterior.
Je n'eus pas ^td, I had
Tu n'eus pas ^t^, Ihou hadst
II n'eut pas e't^, he had
Nous n'elimes pas ^t^, we had
Yous n'edtes pas ^t^, you had
lis n'eurent pas ^t^, they had
Future Amtbrior.
Je n'aurai pas ^td, IshaU
Tu n'auras pas M^ thou wilt
n n'aura pas 616, he toiU
^ous n'aurons pas M, we shall
Yous n'aurez pas £td, you will
lis n'auront pas 6t4, they wiU
Present.
Je ne serais pas, I should
Tu ne serais pas, thou wouldst
II ne serait pas, he would
Nous ne serious pas, we should
Yous ne seriez pas, you would
lis ne seraient pas, they would
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Past.
Je n'aurais pas 6t6,
Tu n'aurais pas 4t^,
I. II n'aurait pas ^t^,
^ Nous n'aurions pas it^,
Yous n'auriez pas ^t4,
lis n'auraient pas 6tk,
IMPERATIYE MOOD.
Ne soyons pas. Id us not be.
Ne Bois pas, be (thou) not. Ne soyez pas, be (you) not.
Qu'il ne soit pas, let him not be. Qu'ils ne soient pas, let them not be.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
Que je ne sois pas, that J
Que tu ne sois pas, that thou
Qu'il ne soit pas, that he
Que nous ne soyons pas, that we
Que vous ne soyez pas, that you
Qu'ils ne soient pas, that they
Imperfect.
Que je ne fusse pas.
Que tu ne fusses pas,
Qu'il ne fdt pas.
Que nous ne fussions pas,
Que vous ne fussiez pas,
Qu'ils ne fussent pas,
I
Pabt.
Que je u'aie pas 4t6,
Que tu n'aies pas dt4,
Qu'il n'ait pas ^td.
Que nous n'ayons pas ^t^.
Que vous n'ayez pas ^t^,
Qu'ils n'aient pas 4t^,
Pluperfect.
Que je n'eusse pas ^t^,
Que tu n'eusses pas ^t6,
Qu'il n'edt pas ^t^.
Que nous n'eussions pas ^t^.
Que YOUS n'eussiez pas ^t^,
Qu'ils n'eussent pas ^t^.
?i
rj
150
CONJUGATION OF ftTRB.
§ XXXVL — ^Interrooatitelt,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbkbit.
Past Iin>iniim.
Suis-jef
am If
Ai-je^t^r have I been f
Es-tu?
artthouf
As-tudtdf hati thou been f
Est-il f
iihef
A-i-ilMf haehebeenf
Sommes-nousr
Etes-vouB?
arewef
AyoDB-nouB M f have we been f
areycuf
Ayes-yoQB 4t6 f have ycu been 7
Sont-il8?
antheyf
Ont-ils ^t€ ? haute they beat f
iMFISnCT
PLUPntnoT.
ttais-jef
was If
Ayais-je^t^? had I been f
ttais-tu?
wadthouf
AyaiB-tu dt^f hadtt thoubeenf
Etait-U?
woBhef
AyaitriUU? had he been f
^tions-nouB f
wertwtf
Ayions-nouB ^td ? had we been f
£tieB-yoii8 ?
wertyou^
werttheyf
Ayies-yous ^t^ ? had you been f
EtaientrilB?
Ayaient-ils Mf had they been f
Past DiniiiTB.
Past Asteriob.
FuB-je?
waalf
Eus-jedtd? had 1 been f
Fll8-tU f
wadthouf
Eus-tu ^t^r hadd thoubeenf
Fut-il?
washef
Eut-ildt^? had he been f
Fftmee-notis f
were wef
Edmes-nous dttf ? hadwebeetif
Ffttes-voiis f
were youf
Eates-yoas ^t^ ? had you been f
Furent-ilBf
weretkeyf
Eurent-ils Ml had they been f
FUTUJU.
FoTUBx Anterior.
Serai-jef
thaUIbef
Aarai-je M ? ehaU I have been f
Beras-tuf
wOtthoubef
Auras-tuit^? wiU thou have been f
Sera-t-ilf
wiUhebef
Aura-t-il 6U f wiU he have been f
Serous-nous f
ahaUwebef
Aurons-nouB 6t^ ? shall we have been f
Berez-yooB ?
wUiyoubef
Aurea-vouB €t6 ? wiU you have been f
Seront-ilB?
wiUtheybef
Auront-ilB^t^f wiU they have been f
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Serais-je ?
Serais-tu?
Serait-ilf
Serions-nousf
Seriez-yoQB ?
Beraient-ils?
ehouldlbef
wouUhlthoubef
wouldhebef
shouldwe bef
wouldyoubef
would they bef
Pabt.
Aurais-je 4i6?
Aurais-tu ^t^?
Aurait-il^d?
Aurions-nous ^t4 ?
Auriez-yous ^t^ ?
Auiaient-ilB €t4 f
shouldr\
wouldttthou
wouldhe
should we
wouldyou
wouldthey
rr
OONJUOATION OF AtRB.
151
§ XXXVII. — Interrogatively and Nbgativkly.
PRESBNT.
Ne suis-je pas ?
N'es-tu pasf
N'est-ilpae?
Ne 8omme8-nou8 pas ?
Netes-vouspas?
Ne sont-ils pas f
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Past Indstoiitb.
am Inotf N'ai-je pas €t^? hoot I
art thou notf N'as-tu pas 6t6? hast thou
uhewtf N'a-t-il pas ^t^ r ha$ he
are toe notf N'avons-nous pas M ? have we
are you not f N'avez-vous pas ^td ? have you
are they not f N'ont-ils pas did ? have they
N'^tais-je pas?
N'itais-tu pas ?
N'^tait-ilpas?
. N'itioDS-nous pas ?
N'titiez-vous pas ?
N'^taient-ilspas?
Imperfect.
v?a8 Inotf
wad thou notf
woe he notf
were we notf
were you not f
were they not f
Pluperfect.
N'avais-je pas ^td ? had I'
N'avais-tu pas €t^ ? hadA thou
N'avait-il pas ^t^ f had he
N'avions-nous pas ^t^ t had we
N'aviez-vous pas ^t^ ? had you
N*avaient-ils pas ^t^? had they
Past Definite. Past Anterior.
woe I notf N'eus-je pas €i^l had I
wast ihou not f N'eus-tu pas M f hadst thou
was he notf N'eut-il pas €16 f had he
were we notf N'edmes-nous pas ^te ? had we
were you not f N'ef^tes-vous pas 6t6 ? had you
were they not f N'eurent-ils pas 6i6 f had they
Ne fus-je pas ?
Ne fus-tu pas ?
Ne fut-il pas ?
Ne fftmes-nous pas?
Ne fdtes-vous pas ?
Ne furent-Us pas ?
FUTURR.
Ne serai-je pas ?
Ne seras-tu pas ?
Ne sera-t-il pas ?
Ne serons-nous pas ?
Ne serez-vous pas ?
Ne seront-ils pas ?
shaUI
wilt thou
wOlhe
shallwe
wiUyou
wUlthey
FimjRB Anterior.
N'aural-je pas 6t6 ? shall F
^ N'auras-tu pas dttf ? wUt thou
i. N'aura-t-il pas €t4 ? tnU he
^ N'aurons-Qous pas ^t^ ? shaU toe
•^ N'aurez-vous pas dt^? tnU you
N'auront-ils pas ^t^ ? wiU ihey ^
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
Ne serais-je pas ? should /'
Ne sends-tu pas ? wouldst thou
Ne serait-il pas ? would he
Ne serions-nous pas? should we
Ne seriez-vous pas f would you
Ne seraient-ils pas ? would they
Pact.
N'aurais-je pas €t6 ?
N'aurais-tu pas iti ?
N'aurait-ilpas^t^?
N'aurions-nous pas M ?
N'auriez-vous pas 6t6 ?
N'aunuent-ils pas 6i4 1
152 conjuoahok of Atbx.
DiotAs 8.
1. J'ai ^t^ daD8 le jardin de mon oncle, et j'ai eu da fruit 2
Ou avez-vou8 6t^ ? 3. Noas avons M a la campagne. 4. Ces
6]^ves ont 6te industrieax, et lis auront chacuD un prix. 5. Cette
demoiselle n'a pas ete aussi studieuse que sa soeur. 6. J^etais
en France quand vous etiez en Angleterre. 7. Mon pere ^tait
alors en Italie. 8. Mes soBurs 6taient k Paris avec ma m^re.
9. Oii serez-vou8 ce soir? 10. Je serai chez moi. 11. Nous
serous k la campagne le mois prochain. 12. Mon ami ne sera
pas de retour demain. 13. Je serais bien aise, si mon pere 6tait
ici. 14. Ce jeune homme serait bien fier, s'il avait de I'argent.
15. Nous serious contents, si vous I'etiez. 16. Je fus k la cam-
pagne la semaine derniere. 17. Mes amis, vous fKttes lon^s hier,
parce que vous aviez 6t^ diligents. 18. Je suis bien aise que
vous soyez ici. 19. Je suis fUche qu'il soit malade. 20. Croyez-
vous que nos amis soient do retour? 21. Vos parents seraient
bien contents que vous fussiez aussi diligent que vos frdres. 22.
Soyez done un peu plus assidu k Tavenir.
Aiae, adj. glad ; d Favemr, adv. in future ; oforv, adv. then ; assidu, adj.
assiduous ; done, oo^]. then ; fdehe, adj. sorrj ; fiar, a($. proud ; de retour,
ady. back.
FIRST CONJUOATION.
153
MODEL YERBS OF THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS.
JFl/rat ConjugdUon m ke — ^Pabler, to speak.
§ XXXVIII. — Affirmatively.
Pbisbht.
Hurler,
INFINITIYE MOOD.
Fast.
AtoIt parl^, to have spcktn*
PARTICIPLES.
Pbibknt.
Pasi
r.
Ftolant,
tpoMng.
Parl^,
spoken
Compound.
Ayant pari*,
having spoken.
INDICATIYE MOOD.
Pbsbbiit.
Past Indifikitk.
Je parle,
Tu paries,
11 parle,
Nous parlons,
Yous parlez,
Ds parlent,
Itpeak,
thou sptakeiU,
heapeaka.
wetpeak.
yau^.
ihiey^peak.
J'ai parl^,
Tu as parU,
11 a parl«,
Nous avons parU,
Yous avez parl6,
Ds ont parli,
thou hast spoken,
he has spoken.
we have spoken,
you have spoken.
they have spoken.
Impb&fsct.
Plupebtbot.
Je parlais,
Tu parlais,
11 parlait,
Nous parlions,
Yous parliez,
lis parlaient,
I was speaking.
thou tcagt tpeakitig.
he tooB epeaking.
you loere epeaking.
they were epeaking.
J' avals pari*,
Tu avals parl6,
n avait parl6,
Nous avions parU,
Yous aviez parld,
lis avaient parU,
Ihadsp(^cen.
thou hada spoken.
he had spoken.
we had spoken.
you had spoken.
they had spoken.
Paot Djefimiti.
Past Ai«teriob.
Je parlai,
Tu parlas,
n parla,
Nous parl&mes,
Yous parl&tes,
Us parl^rent.
Itpoke,
thouqikest.
he spoke,
toeepoke.
youepoke,
th^ spoke.
J'eus parl4,
Tu eus parli,
D eut parl«,
Nous edmes parU,
Yous eiltes parU,
lis eurent parl^,
I had spoken.
ice had spoken,
they had ^foken.
FUTUBS.
FimTU AifTiuo&.
Je parlerai,
IM parleras,
11 parlera.
Nous parierons,
Yous parlerez,
Hb parleront.
IshaUspeak,
thou wiU weak,
he vriU apeak,
we shaU speak,
you will weak,
they via speak.
J'aurai parW,
Tu auras parl^,
11 aura parM,
Nous aurons parld,
Yous aurez parl6,
Ds auront parl6,
IshaU]
thouwiU
hewtU
weshaU
youwiU
they root
r
70
154
FIRST CONiUOATIOK.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRniHT.
Past.
Jc parlenus,
Tu parlerais,
II parlerait,
Nous parlerioDB,
Yous parleriez,
ILb parleraient,
Parle,
Qu'il parle,
I thoudd tpeak,
thou wjuldtt^eak.
ht wcuLd tpeak.
wt thouU tpeak,
you would ipeak.
they vjould ^eak.
J'aorais parl^, Ithould
Tu aurais parld, ihou tcouldtl
II aundt par]6, he would
Nous aurions parl^, we should
Yous auriez parl^, you would
lis auratent parle, they would
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
ParloQs,
9peak (thou). Paries,
let him apeak. Qu'ils parlent,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Uiu8q)eak.
^peak (you).
Id them ^peak.
Present.
Que je parle, that I may tpeak.
Que tu paries, that thou mayei tpeak.
Qu'il parle, that he may speak.
Que nous parlions, that we may speak.
Que vous parliez, that you may speak.
Qu'ils parlent, Hial they may ymk.
Impbbfect.
Past.
Que j'aie parl^, that I
Que tu aies parli, that thou
Qu'il ait parli, that he
Que nous ayons parl^, thai we
Que vous ayez parl<$, that you
Qu'ils aient parl^, that they
PLVPKRrBCT.
Que je parlasse,
that I
1-
Que j'eu8separl6,
Que tu parlasses,
that thou
Que tu euHses parM,
Qu'il parlut,
thathe
a:
Qu'il edt parle',
Que nous parlassions.
thatwe
1
Que nous eussions parM,
Que vous parlassiez,
thatyou
Que vous eussiez parl£,
Qu'ils parlassent,
thatthey
Qu'ils eussent parM,
§ XXXIX.— Negatively.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Pbbbbmt. Past.
Ne pas parler, not to ^eak. N' avoir pas parU, not to have spoken.
PARTICIPLES.
Present. Compound.
Ne parlant pas, not speaking. N'ayant pas parl^, not having spoken.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present.
Je ne parle pas, 1 speak not.
Tu ne paries pas, thou speakest not.
II ne parle pas, he speaks not
Nous ne parlous pas, we speak not.
Vous ne parlez pas, you speak not.
Us ne parlent pas, they speak not.
Past Indefinite.
Je n'ai pas parl^, / have '
Tu n'as pas parM, thou hast
II n'a pas parM, he has
Nous n' avons pas parle*, we have
Vous n'avez pas parle', you have
lis n'ont pas parld, they have
TIR8T CONJUGATION.
155
Imperfect.
Je ne parlais pas, I was'
l\i ne parlais pas, thou wcat
II ne parlait pas, he was
Nous ne parlions pas, tee were
Vous ne parliez pe^, you were
lis ne parlaient pas, they were
Past Defikitb.
Je ne parlai pas, I did
Tu ne parlas pas, Ihou didst
II ne parla pas, he did
Nons ne parl&mes pas, we did
Vous ne parl&tes pas, you did
lis ne parl^rent pas, they did ^
Future.
Je ne parlerai pas, I shall
Tu ne parleras pas, ihou wiU
II ne parlera pas, he will
Nous ne parlerons pas, we shall
Vous ne parlerez pas, you will
lis ne parleront pas, they will
Pluperfect.
Je n'avais pas parl6, / had
l\i n' avals pas parl£, ^u hadst
11 n'avait pas parl6, he had
Nous n'avions pas parl^, we had
Vous n'aviez pas pai-16, you had
lis n'avaient pas parl£, ^ey had
Past Anterior.
Je n'eus pas parl($, I had
l\i n'eus pas parl^, thou hadst
II n'eut pas parl^, he had
Nous n'eCimes pas parM, tpehad
Vous n'etites pas parl^, you had
lis n'eurent pas parl^, Siey had
Future Anterior.
Je n'aurai pas parl^,
Tu n'auras pas parl4,
II n'aura pas parl6.
Nous n'aurons pas parl^,
Vous n'aurez pas i)arl^,
lis n'auront pasparH,
Present.
Je ne parlerais j)as,
Tu ne parlerais pas,
D ne parlerait pas.
Nous ne parlerions pas,
Vous ne parleriez pas,
lis ne parleraient pas,
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Past.
Je n'aurais pas parl^,
Tu n'aurais pas parM,
II n'aurait pas parl£,
Nous n'aurions pas parld,
Vous n'auriez pas parl£.
Us n'auraient pas parl4,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Ne parlous pas. Id us not speak.
Ne parle pas, q)eak (thou) not. Ne parlez pas, speak (you) not,
Qu'U ne parle pas, let him not speak. Qn'i\»ne^paxleni^^jtetthemnot speak,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Past.
Present.
Que je ne parle pas,
Que tu ne paries pas,
Qu'il ne parle pas.
Que nous ne parlions pas,
Que vous ne parliez pas,
Qu'ils ne parlent pas,
Imperfect.
Que je ne parlasse pas,
Que tu ne parlasses pas,
Qu'il ne parl^t pas,
Que nous ne parlassions pas.
Que vous ne parlassiez pas,
Qu'ils ne parlassent pas,
•S"!
Que je n ' aie pas parl6.
Que tu n'aies pas parl6,
Qu'il n'ait pas parld.
Que nous n'aj'ons pas parM,
Que vous n'ayez pas parl^,
Qu'ils n'aient pas parl6.
Pluperfect.
Que je n'eusse pas parl^,
Que tu n'eusses pas parU,
Qu'il n'eftt pas parle,
Que nous n' eussions pas parl£.
Que vous n'eussiez pas parl(J,
Qu'ils n'eussent pas parl6.
156
FIRST CONJUGATION.
§ XL. — Interrogatively.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Parl^-je?
Parles-tu ?
Parle-t-il ?
Parlons-nous ?
Parlez-vous ?
Parlent-ils ?
Prkbint.
do I speak f
dost thou apeak f
does he speakf
do wespeakf
do you speak f
do they speakf
Past InDEianTB.
Ai-je parl^ ? have 1 spoken 9
As-tu parld ? ?uut thou spoken f
A-t-il parl^ ? has he spoken f
AvoD8 nous parl^ t have we spoken f
A vez-vou8 paii^ ? have you spoken f
Ont-ils parl^ ? have they spoken f
Impb&fbct.
Parlais-je ?
Parlais-tu ?
Parlait-il?
Parlions-nouB ?
Parliez-vou8 ?
Parlaient-ils ?
was I speaking f
toast thou speaking f
was hespeakmgf
were we speaking f
were you speaking f
were they speaking f
Plupbrfisct.
Avais-je parl^ ? had I spoken f
Avais-tu parld ? hadst thou spoken f
Avait-il parl6 ? had he spoken f
Avions-nous parM ? had we spoken f
Aviez-vou8 parl^ ? had you spoken f
Avaient-ils parli ? had they spoken f
Past Difinitb.
Parlai-je?
Parlas-tu ?
Parla-t-il?
Parl&mes-nous ?
Parl&tes-vous ?
Parlferent-ilg?
did Ispeakf
didst thou speak f
didhespeakf
did wespeakf
did you speak f
did they speak f
Past Antesiob.
Eus-je x>arl^ ? had I spoken f
Eu6-tu parl^ ? hadst thou spoken f
Eiit-il parld ? ♦ had he spoken f
E&mes-nous x>arld ? had we spoken f
Elites- vous paii^ ? had you spoken f
Eurent-ils parl^ ? had they spoken f
FVTU&B.
Parlerai-je ?
Parleras-tu ?
Parlera-t-il ?
Parlerons-nous ?
Parlerez-vous ?
Parleront-ils ?
shaU Ispeakf
wilt thou speakf
will he speak f
shall we speak f
will you speakf
tpiU they speakf
Future Anterior.
Aurai-je parU ? shall /"
Aura8-tu parl^ ? wiU thou
Aura-t-il parl^ ? fviU he
Aurons-nous parl^ ? shall we
Aurez-vous parld ? will you
Auront-ils parld ? tmU they
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
Parlerais-je ? sJumld I speak f
Parlerais-tu ? wouldst thou speak f
Parlerait-il ? would he speak f
Parlerions-nous ? should we speak f
Parleriez-vous ? would you speak f
Parleraient-ils ? would they speak f
Pact.
Aurais-je parM ? should /'
Aurais-tu parld ? wouldst thou
Aurait-il parM ? would he
Aurions-nouB parM ? should we
Auriez-vous pari 4 ? would you
Auraient-ils parl^ ? would titey
FIRST CONJUGATION.
167
§ XLL — Interrogatively and Negatively.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbesemt. Past Indbfinitb.
Ne parl^-je pas ? do I
Ne paries- tu pas ? dosl thou
Ne parle-t-il pas ? does he
Ne parlons-nous pas f do we
Ne parlez-vous pas ? do you
Ne parlent-ils pas ? do they ^
Impkiubct.
Ne parlais-je pas ? was /'
Ne parlais-tu pas ? vntst thou
Ne parlait-il pas ? tMU Ae
Ne parlioDS-nous pas ? were t0«
Ne parliez-vous pas ? were you
Ne parlaient-ils pas ? were they
Fast Dbfinitb.
Ne parlai-je pas ? did I'
Ne parlas-tu pas ? <fu28< ^Aou
Ne parla-t-il pas ? (fu^ A«
Ne parl&mes-nous past did we
Ne parities- vous pas ? (fuf you
Ne parl^rent-ils pas ? did they
Futdbb.
Ne parlerai-je pas f aAoZi /
Ne parleras-tu pas ? ixnU thou
Ne parlera-t-il pas ? iriK he
Ne parlerons-nous pas ? shaU we
Ne parlerez-vous pas ? irtU you
Ne parleront-ils pas f «^ ^ ,
N*ai-je pas parW ? have L
N'as-tu pas parld ? hast thou
N'a-t-il pas parl^ ? has he
N'avons-nous pas parl6 ? havetoe
N'avez-vous pas parld ? have you
N' ont-ils pas parl^ ? have they
PLUPEBrBCT.
N'avais-je pas parld ? had I'
N' avals- tu pas parl^? hadstthou
N'avait-il pas parl^ ? had he
N'avions-nous pas parl£ ? had we
N'aviez-vouspasparM? hadyou
N'avaient-ilspasparld? hadthey
Past Amtbbiob.
N'eus-je pas parl6 ? had I
N'eus-tu pas parl^ ? hadst thou
N'eut-il pas parl€ ? had he
N' eftmes-nous pas parle' ? hadwe
N' elites- vous pas parld ? had you
N' eurent-Us pas parl^ ? had they
Fcturb Antbbiob.
N'aurai-je pas parl^?
N'auras-tu pas parH ?
N'aura-t-il pas parM ?
N'aurons-nous pas parH?
N'aurez-vous pas parld ?
N'auront-ils pas parld ?
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Pbbsbmt.
Ne parlei-ais-je pas ?
Ne parlerais-tu pas f
Ne parlerait-il pas ?
Ne parlerions-nous pas f
Ne parleriez-YOus pas ?
Ne parleraientrils pas ?
Past.
N'aarais-je pas parl4?
N'aurais-tu pas parl6?
N'aurait-il pas parle?
N'aurions-nous pas parl^ ?
N'auriez-vous pas parl^ ?
N'auraient-ils pas parM?
158 FIBST CONJUGATION.
DiCTftK 9.
1. J'ai 6tudi6 ma lepon. 2. Avez-vous ^tudi6 la v6tre? 3.
Qu'avez-vous achet^ ? 4. Je n'ai rien achete. 6. A-t-on donne
de ravoine aux chevaux ? 6. On leur en a donne. 7. lis u'en
ont pas mange. 8. Vous chantiez quand j'^tadiais. 9. Nous
6tudiions pendant que vous jouiez. 10. Je porterai ma lettre si
la posts. 11. Nous parlerons de cela quand mon frere sera de
retour. 12. II ne penserapas acela. 13. Ceshommesresteront-
ils ici ? 14. J'etudierais, si mes livi^es ^talent ici. 15. lis tra-
vailleraient pour vous, si vous leur donniez de Targent. 16. Hier,
nous achetd,me8 des livres. 17. Le mois dernier mon p^re m*en-
voya de Targent 18. La semaine derniere nos cousins nous
donnerent des fruits. 19. £tudiez votre leqon. 20. Parlons de
cela. 21. Le mattre ne veut pas que nous parlions. 22. Je veux
que vous etudiiez votre lepon. 23. II 6tait temps que je parlasse,
qu*il parl&t de cela.
Jouer^ n. y. to play ; maUref n. m. master, teacher ; pendant ^, conj.
while.
§ XLII. — Remarks on certain Verbs of the First
Conjugation.
1. Verbs ending in ger, retain the e of the termination, before
a or ; as, manger, to eat ; je mangeais^ nous mangeons.
2. In verbs in cer^ a cedilla is added to the c (f), when it is
followed by a or ; as, metujcer, to threaten ; je mend^ais, nous
menagons,
3. In verbs in yer, y is changed into i before e mute ; as en-
voyer, to send ; fenvoie, Us envoient, Scc^ but rums envoyons, &c.
4. Verbs having i (acute), or e mute, before the consonant
that precedes the ending er, change the eore into e (grave), when
followed by a mute syllable ; as, ceder, to yield ; mener, to lead ;
je cide, je cederai, je mine, je mJenerai, &c. From this rule are
XLIL— 1. When do verbe, ending in ger^ retain the € of the termination ? 2. When
does the e of verbs in c^r take a cedilla ? S. When is the y of verbs in yer changed into
it 4. How Is i (acute), or e mtUe^ preceding the final consonant of Uie root, changed
before a mute syllable ?
FIRST CONJUGATION. 159
excepted the verbs in eger^ which always retain the e that pre-
cedes the g ; as, proteger, to protect ; je protege^ &c. ; also the
verbs in eler and eter (see 5).
6. Verbs in eler double the /, those in eter double the t, before
e mute ; as, appeler.fappelle, tu ajypelles^ il appelle, Us appellent,
fappellerai, &c.] jeter, je jette, je jetterai, <kc.; but, nous appe-
hns, vous appelez^ nousjetons, vousjetez, Ac.
Rem. — ^The verbs acheter, bourreUr (to torment), d^celer (to dis-
close), geler (to freeze), harceler (to harass), peler (to peel), are
exceptions to the last rule. These come under Rule 4th.
DlCT^E 10,
1. Mon pere voyageait beaucoup lorsqu'il etait jeune. 2.
Nous ne voyageons pas beaucoup. 3. La semaine derniere cet
enfant mangea trop de fruit, et il en fut malade. 4. Nous com-
raenqons k vous com prendre. 5. Hier nous etions pr^ts a sor-
tir quand il commen^a de pleuvoir. 6. Avez-vous paye cet
homme ? 7. Je le paierai quand j'aurai de I'argent. 8. Je vous
envoie le livre dont je vous ai parle. 9. Je vous ai envoye une
lettre. 10. Les chiens out aboye toute la soiree. 11, Pourquoi
aboient-ils? 12. Les domestiques nettoieront les tapis quand ils
auront balaye les planchers. 13. Voulez-vousrep6ter cela? 14 •
Je le r6pete, et je le repeterai encore. 16. Je vous amene mon
fils. 16. Ces parents nous out amene leurs enfants. 17. Nous
vous amenerous les notres. 18. Dieu nous protege, 19. Nous
vous protegeons. 20. Nous vous appelons. 21. Ils nous appel-
lent. 22. Ils nous appelleront quand ils seront pr^ts. 23. Oi^l
voulez-vous Jeter ces feuilles ? 24. Je les jetterai dans la rue,
25. J'acheterais un chapeau, si j'avais de I'argent.
Ahoyer^ n. y. to bark ; btdayer^ a. v. to sweep ; ctden^ n. m. dog ; Dieu^
n. m. Ood ; lorsque^ conj. when ; nettoytr, a. v. to clean ; parents, n. m. pL
parents ; payer, a. v. to pay ; prit (d), adj. ready (to) ; proteger, a. v. to
protect ; ripeler, a. v. to repeat ; tapis, n. m. carpet ; voyager, n. v. to
travel.
Are there any exceptions to this rnle? 5. When are the consonants I and t doubled
tn Tcrba eadinc in el&r and eter f What are the exceptions to this rule f
160
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Second CcmjugcMon in m — ^Finlb, tojmiah.
§ XLIII.^ — Affirmatively.
INFINITIVE MOOD,
Fehumt.
Finir, tofinith.
Pabt.
Avoir fini, to havefauthed»
PARTICIPLES.
Pkibknt. Past.
Finisaant, fimahing, Fini,
Compound.
Ayant fini, having finished.
finiihtd.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbubmt.
Past Indbfinitb.
Ifinisk.
J'ai fini,
Ihaoefinished
Tu finia,
ihoufiUshest.
Tu as fini,
thou hoMt finished
11 finlt,
he finishes.
11 a fini,
he has finished
Kous finissons,
wtfinish.
Nous avons fini.
we have finished
Vous finissez.
you finish.
Vous avez fini.
Us finissent,
ihtyfiniah.
Us ont fini,
tha/ have finished
iMPERFnTT.
Plupbbfbct.
Je fimsaais,
IvHufinuhing.
J* avals fini,
Ihadfinished.
Tu finissais,
Tu avals fini.
thou hadi^ finished
U finissait,
hetDoafimshmg,
U avait fini.
he had finished.
Nous finissions,
we iDerefimshing.
Nous avions fipi.
we had finished.
Vous finissiez,
you were finishing.
Vous aviez fini.
you had finished
lis fiuissaient,
lis avaient fini.
they had finished.
Past Dkfikitb.
Past Antekior.
Je finis.
Ifimshed.
J'eus fini.
Ihadfinished.
Tu finis,
Ihoufinishedti,
Tu eus fini.
thou hadst finished.
U finit,
hefimshed.
11 eut fini,
he had finished.
Nous finlmes,
toe finished.
Nous etimes fini.
we had finished.
Vous finltes,
you finished.
Vous elites fini.
you had finished.
Us finirent,
theyfimshed.
lis eurent fini.
ihey had finished.
Future.
Future Anterior.
Je finirai,
IshaUfinish.
J'aurai fini,
IshaUhave'
Tu finiras,
thou wiU finish.
Tu auras fini,
thou wiU have
^
11 finira,
he wiU finish.
11 aura fini,
he wiU have
§•
Nous finirons,
toe shaU finish.
Nous aurons fini,
we shall have
'.C
Vous finirea,
you wM finish.
Vous aurez fini.
you iffill have
lis finiront,
they vnU finish.
Us auront fini.
Uiey vnU have ^
SECOND CONJUGATION.
161
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
Past.
Je finiraiSf
Tu tiniraiB,
II finirait,
Nous finirions,
Vous finiriez,
lis finiraieiit,
Finis,
Qu'il finisse,
IshouldfinMh,
thou wouldst finish.
he toould finish.
toe should finish.
you would finish.
they fooidd finish.
J'aurais fini,
Tu aurais fini,
II aurait fiui,
Nous aurions fini,
Vous auriez fini,
lis auraient fini,
rshfftdd'
thou wouldst
he would
we should
you vHMld
they tffould^
t
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Finissons,
finish (thou). Finissez,
let him finish. Qu'ils finissent,
let us finish.
finish (you).
Ut them finish.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Pbesbmt.
Que je finisse, that /'
Que tu finisses, ' that thou
Qu'il finisse, that he
Que nous finissions, that we
Que vous finissiez, that you
Qu'ils finissent, that^they ^
Imperfect.
Que je finisse, that I
Que tu finisses, that thou
Qu'il finlt, that he
Que nous finissions, that we
Que vous finissiez, that you
Qu'ils finissent, that they ^
Past.
Que j'aie fini,
Que tu ales fini,
Qu'il ait fini,
Que nous ayons fini.
Que vous ayez fini,
Qu'ils aient fini,
Plupsrfeot,
Que j'eusse fini.
Que tu eusses fini,
Qu'il eat fini,
Que nous eussions fini,
Que vous eussiez fini,
Qu'ils eussent fini.
Rem. — We omit inserting the negative and interrogative con-
jugations. The preceding models, with parler, are deemed suffi-
cient to enable the student to form them himself.
DiOTftB 11.
1. J'ai fini mon ouvrage. 2. Avez-vous fini le v6tre? 3. Je
finissais le mien, quand on m'a appele. 4. Je le finirai demain.
5. Les charpentiers finiront notre maison, la semaine prochaine.
6. lis la finiraient cette semaine, s'ils avaient du bois. 7. Qu'a-
vez-YOus choisi? 8. Ohoisissez-vous quelque chose! 9. Nous
choisissons ces ^ventails. 10. Nous ne choisirons rien. 11.
Nous choisirions ces tableaux, si nous avions de Pargent. 12
162 THIRD CONJUGAnON.
Nous aurion« choisi plnsienrs choses, si no*. 6 avions en de Tar-
gent 18. Qui b4tit cette raaisonf 14. On a b&ti plusieurs
belles maisons dans cette rue. 15. On b&tissait cette grande
maison, I'annee derniere, quand j^etais ici. 16. Hier nous fitit-
mes notre ouvrage de bonne beure. 17. Quand nous eumes fini
uotre ouvrage, nous sorttmes. 18. Finissez done, je vous en
pne (pray). 19. Je veux que vous fiuissiez de parler. 20. Que
voulez-vous que je choisisse? 21. Je suis bien aise qu'il finisse
de faire cela. 22. Je serais bien content qu*il en fintt.
Aiae, adj. glad ; &btr, a. v. to build ; donCf conj. then ; SvenktU^ n. m. fan.
Third Conjugation in om — ^Recevoir, to receive*
§ XLIV. — ^Affirmatively.
• INFINITIVE MOOD.
PBB9BMT. Past.
Bepevoir, to rtoaioe. Avoir re^u, to hoot neewed.
PABTICIPLES.
Priskrt.
Past.
Beoevant, rteekring.
Be9u,
received.
CoMPOunD.
Ayant re^u,
having received.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbhiht.
Vasi iMDOiNrra.
Je re^ois, Ireeeke.
Tu re9oi8, thou reoekftd.
11 rejoit, he receives.
Nous recevons, w reeeive.
Vous recevea, you receive.
Ds refoivent, they receive.
J'ai re^u,
Tu as re^u,
H a reju,
Nous avons re^u,
Vous avez re9u,
lis ont re^u,
T hove received,
thou hoit received,
he hoe received,
we hetve received,
you have received,
they have received.
iMFntnoT.
Plufebfbot.
Je reoevais, I woe receiving,
Tu recevals, thou wad reoewing.
H recevait, he teae reeetving.
Nous recevions, tve were receiving,
Vous receviez, you were receiving.
lis recevaient, they were reoemng.
J' avals re$u,
Tu avais re9U,
n avait re9U,
Nous avions re9u
Vous aviez reju.
Us avaient re9U,
/had received.
thou hadtt received,
he had received.
, we had received.
you had received,
titey had received.
THIRD CONJUOATIOK.
16d
FAsn Definitb.
Je TOfus,
Tu rejus,
II re9ut,
Nous reyftmes,
Yous re9&te8,
lis reyurent,
Irecmved,
thou recewedtt.
he received.
we received.
you received.
■ihei/ received.
FOTUSE.
Je recevrai,
Tu recevras,
n recevra,
Nous recevrons,
Vous recevrez,
Us recevront,
I shall receive.
{houwiU receive.
he will receive,
we thaU receive,
you win receive,
they wiU receive.
. Past Antbriob.
J' eus reyu, / had received,
Tu eus re(u, thou hadst received.
II eut reyu, he had received.
Nous eilkmes reyu, we had received.
Yous elites reyu, you had received.
lis eurent reyu, they had received.
Future Anterior.
J' aurai reyu, / ehaU have ]
Tu auras reyu, thou toiU have -^
U aura reyu, he will liave \ I
Nous aurons reyu, we shall have
Yous aurez re^u, you vnll have
Us auront reyu, Viey will have
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present.
Je recevrais, I should receive.
Tu recevrais, thou wouldst receive.-
n receyralt, he would receive.
Nous recevrions, we should receive.
Yous recevriez, you would receive.
Us recevraient, ^icy would receive.
Past.
J'aurais re$u, I should^
Tu aurais reyu, ihou toouldst
II aurai t reyu, he would
Nous aurions re^u, we should
Yous auriez re(u, you would
Us auraient reyu, they would
Becois,
Qu il re^oive,
IMPEKATIYE MOOD.
Becevons, let us receive,
receive (thou), Becevez, receive {you).
let him receive. Qu'ils reyoiventy let them receive.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
Que je rejoive,
Que tu regoives,
Qu'il regoive.
Que nous recevions,
Que vous receviez,
Qu*ils regoivent,
iHPBRracrr.
Que je regusse,
Que tu regusses,
Qu'il reyftt,
Que nous re^ussions,
Que vous regussiez,
Qa'ils reyussent,
Past.
thatl^
that thou
thathe
that we
that you
thatihey^
that I
thai thou
thathe
that we
thatyou
thatthey^
Que j'aie refu, that /'
Que tu aies regu, that thou
Qu'il ait regu, that he
Que nous ayons regu, that we
Que vous ayez regu, that you
Qu'ils aient reyu, that they
Pluperfect.
Que j'eusse reju,
Que tu eusses regu,
Qu'il eftt reju,
Que nous eussions re^,
Que vous eussiez reyu,
Qu'ils euBsent regu,
164 third conjugation.
Remarks on the Verbs of the Third Conjioation.
1. There are only seven verbs of the third conjugation, end-
ing in evoir^ that are regular ; viz. apercevoir, to perceive ; con^
cevoir, to conceive ; deeewnr^ to deceive ; devoir^ to owe ; perce-
voir, to collect duties ; redevair, to owe again.
2. The c, in the verbs ending in cevoir^ takes a cedilla (f ) be-
fore and u.
3. Devoir (to owe) and redevoir (to owe again), take a circum-
flex accent over the u of the past participle, in the masculine
singular ; as, dit, redd.
DiOTftE 12.
1. tTai rei?u Yotre lettre. 2. Avez-vous regu la mienne? 3.
Nous avons regu des recompenses. 4. Je recevrai des lettres
cette semaine. 5. Nous recevrons des nouvelles aujourd'hui ou
demain. 6. lis recevront du monde ce soir. 7. Si je recevais
de I'argent, j'acb^terais quelque chose. 8. Vous recevriez un
prix, si vous aviez 6t6 studieux. 9. lis recevraient des recom-
penses, s'ils avaient bien travaill^. 10. Ne devriez-vous pas aller
trouver ce monsieur? 11. N'auriez-vous pas dQ lui dire que
nous ne serous pas a la maison ce soir? 12. Avez-vous jamais
du de I'argent k cet homme ? 13. Je lui ai pay 6 tout ce que je
lui devais. 14. Je re^us votre lettre la semaine demiere. 15.
Nous re^Qmes cette marchandise le mois dernier. 16. lis re^u-
rent leur paie lundi. 17. II est temps que je reqoive la mienne,
que nous recevions la n6tre. 18. Je ne crois pas qu'ils requs-
sent la lettre a temps, si vous la leur envoyiez. 19. Je ne con-
pois pas cela. 20. Avez-vous aperqu quelque chose ?
AUer trouiver, to go to ; <qterceooiiry a. v. to perceive ; eonceooir^ a. v. to
conceive ; hrndi^ n. m. Monday ; jpaity n. f. pay ; prix, n. m. price ; r^
compenHf n. f. reward.
XLIV.—l. How many verba of the third ooq) agation ire regalar ? How do they end f
2. When does the c of verba in eevoir take the cedilla? & What is to be remarked
-with regard to the past participles of the verbs dewdr and radeeoirt
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
165
Jfov/rth CoTijv^ation in re — ^Vendbe, to sell.
§ XLV. — Affirmatiyelt.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PBraNT. Pact.
Vendre, to adl. Avoir vendu, to have told.
PARTICIPLES.
Pbuint. Past.
Yendant, tdlmg. Vendu, told,
CoMPOvm).
Ayant veDdu, having sold.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbesknt.
Je vends,
Tu vends,
II vend,
Nous vendons,
Vous vendez,
Us vendent,
Past iMDsnNiTE.
Itdl.
thousdlest.
he tells.
we tell.
youtdl.
they tea.
J'ai vendu,
Tu as vendu,
II a vendu,
Nous avons vendu,
Vous avez vendu,
lis ont vendu.
I have told.
thou host told.
he hat told.
we have told.
you have told
they havetold
Impeefect.
Je vendais,
Tu vendais,
n vendait,
Nous vendions,
Vous vendiez,
Bs vendaient.
Iwat teUing,
thou watt ttUing.
he was telling.
we were telling.
you were tdUng.
they were telling.
Past Definitb.
Je vendis,
Tu vendis,
II vendit,
Nous vendtmes,
Vous vendites,
lis vendirent,
Itold.
thoutoldett.
hetold
we told.
you told.
they told.
FUTCBB.
Je vendrai,
Tu vendras,
n vendra,
Kous vendrons,
Vous vendrez,
lis vendront,
IthdUtdl.
thou wilt tdl.
hewiUtdl.
wethaUteU.
youwOlteU.
they wW, tdl.
Plupebfect.
J'avais vendu, / had told.
Tu avais vendu, thou hadtt told.
II avait vendu, he had told.
Nous avions vendu, we had tdd.
Vous aviez vendu, you had told.
Us avaient vendu, thof had told.
Past Anterior.
J'eus vendu, I had told.
TvL eus vendu, thou hadst told.
II eut vendu, he had told.
Nous eiimes vendu, we had told.
Vous etiteB vendu, you had told.
lis eurent vendu, th^ had told.
Future Amterior.
J'aurai vendu, IthaU
Tu auras vendu, ihou wilt
11 aura vendu, he will
Nous aurons vendu, ice thall
Vous aurez vendu, you wiU
lis auront vendu, th^ will ^
166
rOUBTH CONJUOATICir.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Fbuknt.
Past.
Je vendrais,
Tu vendrais,
n vendrait,
Nous yendrions,
Yous vendriez,
Ik vendnient,
Vends,
Qu'il vende,
lihoMtdl,
thou teouldd aell,
he would mU,
tee should aeU.
you tpouldaell.
they would tell.
J'aurais vendu, I should'
Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldsl
U aurait vendu, he would
Nous aurions vendu, we should
Yous auries vendu, you would
lis auraient vendu, they would
IMPERATIYK MOOD.
Yendons,
9dl{thou). Yendez,
let him sell. Qu'ils vendent,
SUBJUNCTIYK MOOD.
letus sdl.
eeaipou).
let them sdl.
Fessdit.
Que je vende, that I may sell.
Que tu vendes, that thou mayst sell.
Qu'il vende, thai he may sell.
Que nous vendions, that vfe may sell.
Que vous vendlez, that you may sell.
Qu'ils vendent, that they may seU.
PSKTEOT.
Que j'aie vendu, that /
Que tu ales vendu, that thou
Qu'il ait vendu, ^at he
Que nous ayons vendu, thai we
Que vous ayez vendu, that you
Qu'ils aient vendu, that they
iKPKKFaCI.
Pluperfect.
Quejevendisse, that T
Que j'eusse vendu,
Que tu vendisses, that thou
t
Que tu eusses vendu,
Qu'il vendit, that he
Qu'il eftt vendu,
Que nous vendissions, that toe
1
Que nous eussions vendu.
Que vous vendissiez, that you
Que vous eussiez vendu.
Qu'ils vendissent, thai they ,
Qu'ils eussent vendu,
E
hQTt& 13.
« K,
1. Notre voisin a vendu sa maison. 2. Nous avons vendu
notre voiture. 3. Ces fermiers ont vendu leur froment au meu-
nier. 4. Le meunier vendra la farine k ses chalands. 5. Nous
vendrons la marchandise que nous avons. 6. Ces jardiniere ven-
dront leurs legumes aux habitants de la ville. 7. Si ce marchand
vendait sa marchandise, il paierait ses dettes. 8. Si ces paysans
vendaient leur grain, ils acheteraient du cafe et du sucre. 9.
On vous a attendu longtemps, 10. On vous attendra. 11. On
ne vous entendra pas, si vous ne parlez pas plus haut. 12. Nous
YOUS entendrions, si vous parliez plus haut 13. Hier, j'^tais il
CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VSRBS. 167
New York; on y attendait avec impatience rarriv6e du b&timent.
14. Nous vous auiioDs attendu, si nous avions eu le temps. 15.
Je lui rendis ses livres la semaine derniere. 16. Dimanche der-
nier, nous entendlmes cette beile musique que vous admirez taut
17. Hier, quand vous les appel&tes, ils ne vous entendirent point.
18. Attendez que je finisse ceci. 19. II est temps que vous me
rendiez ces livres. 20. Faut-il qu'il attende? 21. Je n'airae pas
qu'il m'entende dire cela. 22. Je n'aimerais pas qu'il m'entendit
dire cela.
Chalandf n. m. customer ; dette, n. f. debt ; dimanehe, n. m. Sunday :
fromenif n. m. wheat ; ^ratn, n. m. grain ; habiiofUf n. m. inhabitant ;
hautj adv. loud ; lonfftemja, adv. a long time.
§ XLYL— Conjugation of Passive Verbs.
1. The passive verb, or voice, is formed with the auxiliary itre
and the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. (P. II , 90, a.)
2. The past participle of a passive verb agrees in gender and
number with the subject. (P. IL, 90, b.)
INFINITIVE MbOD.
Present. Past.
fctre aimd or aim de, I , r j ^ Avoir ^t^aimd or aim^e, | to Aowftewi
aimfe or aim^s, ) ^ ^ *^*^* aim^s or aim^es, f loved.
PARTICIPLES.
Present. Past.
£tant aim^or aimtfe, ) j^^,^, 6t^ aim^ or aimde, ) ^^ ^^
aim^ or aim^s, f ""'^v""^- aimfe or aim^es, f
Compound.
Ayant €ti aim£ or aim^e, aim^s or aim^es, having been loved.
Te suis ] aim6
rii es > or
11 or elle est ) aimde,
KoiiR sommes j aimds
Vous Stes >■ or
Tls or elles sont ) aim^es,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present. Past Indefinite.
•* J'ai 6U I aim£
I Tu as €te y or
r II or elle a ^t^ ) aim^e,
^ Nous avons ^t^ J aira^s
Vous avez e't^ > or
r lis or elles ont 4i6 ) aimdes,
168
CONJUGATION 09 PAS6IVB VERBS.
J'^tais
Tu^taiB
II or elle ^talt
Nous ^tioQS
YouB ^tiez
Impufiot.
) aim^
f ^
) aim^e,
or
lis or elles dtaient ) aim^es,
Plufbrfect.
J'avaiB ^U ) aim^
Tu avals M > or
II or elle avait 6t€ ) aimde,
Nous avions 6t6 ) aim^s
VouB aviez M > or
lis or elles avaient €t^ ) aim^es,
Jefus
Tufus
II or elle fut
Nous fiimes
Vous ffttes
lis or elles furent
Past Definitb.
aim^
or
aim^,
aim^
aimies,
Fdturb.
Je send
Tu seras
II or elle sera
Nous serous
Vous seres
lis or elles seront
Past Autbbiob.
J'eus M
Tu eus M
II or elle eut it4
Nous edkmes 6t6
Vous e(!ktes 6t6
? Us or elles eurent €t6 ) aim^es,
aim^
or
aimde,
FuTUEB Perfect.
J' aural 4ti
Tu auras ^t^
II or elle aura 6t6
Nous aurons 6i4
Vous aurez ^t^
lis or elles auront M ) almdes, ^
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Je serais
Tu serais
II or elle serait
Nous serious
Vous seriez
Present.
) alm^
f ^
) aim^,
I alm^
lis or elles sentient ) aim^es, ^
Past.
J'aurais 6t€ ) aim^
Tu aurals 6t6 > or
II or elle aurait €t^ } aimde.
Nous aurions 4t6 \ aim^s
Vous auriez 6t6 > or
lis or elles auraient et6 ) aim^es.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Sols ] aim^
Qu'il or elle > or
soit ) aim^,
he (thou) loved.
letkimoTherbe
loved.
Soyons
Soyez
Qu'ils or elles
Solent
aim^s
let U8 be loved.
be (you) loved.
aim^es ^ <^ **
^™^*' loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
Que je sols
Que tu sols
Qu'il or elle soit
Que nous soyons
Que vous soyez
Qu'ils or elles solent
aim^
or
aim^e,
aim ^8
or
aimdes,
Perfect.
Que j'aie 6t^ ] aim($
Que tu aies 6t6 Y or
Qu'il or elle ait 6i€ \ aim^e.
Que nous ayons 6t^ j aim^s
Que vous ayez 6te r or
Qu'ils or elles aient ^t^ ) aim^es.
CONJUGATION OF PASSIVB VKBBS.
160
Que je fuBse
Que tu fusses
Qu'il or elle fdt
Que nous fussions
Que YOUB fusnea
Qa'ils w elies fussent
XhFKBTBCT. FLUPKBnOT.
fQue j'eusse k\Jk
Que tu eusses k\k
^ Qu'il or eUeeftt^U
^«|* Que nous eussions i\k
or ? ^ Que voua eussiez M ^
aim^ ST Qu'ils or elles eussent M ) um^es.
aim^
or
aim^,
aim^s
aim^
cr
aim^e.
aim^s
DlCT^E 14.
1. Mon frere, yoos avez 6t6 blim^, parce qae vous avez 6te
negligent 2. Ma soeur, vous avez 6t6 bl&m^, parce que yoob
avez 6t6 negligente. 3. Mes amis, vous avez 6t6 bl&m^s, paroe
que vous n'avez pas 6t6 diligents. 4. Mesdemoisellesi vous avez
6t6 bl&m6es, parce que vous n'avez pas M diligentes. 5. Cea
6l^ves ont et^ loues par le mattre, parce qa'ils ont 6t6 studieuz
et obeis8ant». 6. Mes amis, vous serez estim^ si vous vous
comportez bien. 7. Ma fille, vous serez rdcompeos^e, si vous
^tes industriense. 8. Mes enfants, vous serez punis, si vous dtes
d^sob^issants. 9. Ces enfant^ 6taient aim^ de tout le monde,
parce qu'ils 6taient dociies, obeissants et studienx. 10. Made-
moiselle, vous seriez aim6e, si vous 6tiez plus docile. 11. Vous
auriez ete recompens^e, si vous aviez ^t^ plus industrieuae. 12.
La semaine demiere cet enfant fdt puni, parce qu'il avail 6t6
d^sob^issant. 13. Ses fr^res furent recompenses, parce qu'ils
avaient et^ studieux. 14. Nous trouvons bon, mes amis, que vous
soyez punis quand vous ne vous comportez pas bien. 15. On
serait ^tonn^ que vous fussiez recompenses quand vous negligez
V08 devoirs.
DM>im(mt^ adj. disobedient ; cbdZe, adj. docile ; HonM^ p. p. aston-
ished ; nigUgery a. v. to neglect ; oMiiaant, adj. obedient ; punir^ a. v. to
punish ; r^oon^pmur, a. v. to reward ; troitcer fton, to approve.
8
170
CONJUGATION OF NECTSR VERBS.
§ XLVII. — Conjugation of Neuter Verbs.
Arriyer, to arrive — auxiliary itre ; see § xxviii., 3, (2).
The past participle, joined to the verb itre^ agrees, like an ad-
jective, with the subject of the verb. See P. II., 89, b.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Fbbint.
Arrlver,
Fast.
£tre arriv^ or arriv^,
arrives or arriv^es,
[tokavear-
rkmd.
PAKTI0IPLE8.
Pbisdit.
Paw.
Arrivant,
j^,i„i^, Arrive or arriv^, ) ^, .,- >
^'"^'^' Arrivfo or arrivte, f **™^-
(yOMPOUMp.
£tant arriv^ or arriv^, arriv^ or arrirfies, havmg arrwed.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbxsbnt. Past Indbfinitb.
J'arrive,
I arrwt.
Je suis
arrive
Ta arrives,
thouanriveat.
Tues
• or
11 arrive,
he arrives.
11 or elle est
arriv^e,
Nous arriyons,
wearrwe.
Nous sommes
arrive
Vous arrives,
you arrive.
Vous etes
or
Us arrivent,
theyarrwe.
lis or elles sont
arriv^es,
Imfkrfect.
Plupkrfeot.
J' arrivals,
I was arriving.
J'^tais
arrive '
Tu arrivals,
thou vHtst arriving.
Tudtais
or
11 arrivait.
he was arriving.
11 or elle ^tait ^
arriv^e.
Nous arrivions.
we were arriving.
Nous ^tions
arrivfe
Vous arriviez,
you were arriving.
Vous ^tiez
• or
lis arrivaient,
they were arrimng.
lis or elles ^talent
arrive, ^
Past Dsfinitb.
Past Antkrior.
J' arrival,
I CBrrvoed,
Je fus
arrive
Tu arrivas,
Tufus
or
11 arriva.
he arrived.
11 or elle fut
arrivfe,
Nous arriv&mes,
Nous f Ames
arrive
Vous anivfttes,
Vous fates
or
Us arrivferent,
they arrived.
Us or elles furent
arriy^es,
^\
COKJCGATION OF KEGTER VERBS.
FUTCKB. FVTUBB AkTKRIOB.
J'arriverai,
Je serai
arrive
Tu arriveras,
thou wiU arrive.
Tuseras
or
11 arrivera,
he will arrive.
11 or elle sera
aniv^,
Nous amverons,
llous serons
arrives
Vous arriverez,
Vous serez
• or
lis aniveront,
lis or ellcB seront
arriv^es,
171
3.1
n
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Fbksemt.
J'arriverais,
Tu arriverais,
II arriverait,
Nous arriverions,
Vous arriveriez,
Us arriveraient,
I should arrive.
thou wouldst arrive.
he would arrive.
we should arrive.
you would arrive.
they would arrive.
Past.
Je serais
Tu serais
II or elle serait
Nous serious
Vous seriez
lis or elles senuent
Arrive,
Qu'il arrive,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Arrivons, Id us arrive,
arrive (thou). Arrivez, arrive (you).
Id him arrive. Qu'ils arrivent, Id them arrive.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Pbessnt.
Que j 'arrive, that I may '
Que tu arrives, that thou mayd ^
Qu'il arrive, that he may |
Que nous arrivions, H^ we may ' ^
Que vous arriviez, that you may '
Qu'ils arrivent, that they may ^
Impkrfbot.
Que j'arrivasse, that /'
Que tu arrivasses, that thou
Qu'il arriv&t, that he
Que nous arrivassions, thai we
Que vous arrivassiez, thai you
Qu'ils arrivassent, thai they
Past.
Que je sois
Que tu sois
Qu'il or elle soit
Que nous soyons
Que vous soyez
Qu'ils or elles soient ) arriv^es,
Plufbrtect.
Que je fuBse
Que tu fusses
Qu'il or elle ftit
Que nous fussions
Que vous fussiez
) arrive
\ or
) arrive.
\ arrives
Qu'ils or elles fussent ) arrivto.
172 CONJUGATION OF NEUTKR VSftBS.
Rbm. 1. — The following are a few of the neuter rerhft th&t are
conjugated with itre in the compound tenses (for complete list)
seep. 363;:
(ThoMpriBtodiiiMiMUMpltidavwimigalMrTtfta: SMfLYUL)
Aun, to go. Somm, to go out.
ArrweTf to arrlTe. Vmber, to fiUl.
JBtUrer, to enter. Ybiu, to ooma
Paetix, to start. Birmm, to oome back.
Rem. 2. — Entrer^ partir^ and wrtir^ are also conjugated with
avoir; see 117.
DicTftu 16.
1. Mon pdre est arrive hier au matin. 2. Ma tante est arri-
ve hier au soir. 8. Mes cousines sont arrivees avec elle* 4.
Elles sont allies a T^gitse. 5. Nous sommes venus ce matin.
6. Mes soeurs sont venues avec nous. 7. Elles sont sorties. 8.
Elles sont allees faire des emplettes (to Bhap), 9. Les enfants
sont entr^ dans le jardin. 10. L'arm^ est entree en campagne.
11. Vos amis seront partis quand vous arriveres. 12. Kous par^
tirons demain matin. 18. Nous serions d^jit partis, si nos pa-
rents ^taient venus plus tot. 14. lis aeraient venus hier, si nm
soeur n'avait pas et^ malade. 15. Mes soeurs sont revenues. 16.
Mes amis sont retournes cheK eux. 17. Mon oncle partit poor
TEurope Tan dernier. 18. Quand il fut parti, ma tante tomba
malade. 10. Quand nos amis furent partis, nous retourn&mes k
la maison. 20. Aussitdt que nous fDmes arriv^ nous allAmes
chez votre ami. 21. II 6tait sorti. 22. Je suis bien aise que
vous soyez tomb^s d'accord. 28. Je aenm 6tonn6 qu'il fQt tom*
b6 dans une telle erreur.
JEbyfaMe, n. f. purchase ; ei4ftr m tmi ^ pagm, to take the field ; erreeir,
n. f. error ; mistake ; Uotmi^ p. p. astonished ; jtm Uky adv. sooner ;
Umber makukf to be taken sick ; tombtr ttaonrd, to come to an agreement.
CfOHJlTGATION OF RBFLKOTIVX TKBBS.
178
CoNJuoATioK ov Befutctitb (Pronominal) Ykrbs.
1. The compound teuses of reflective verbs are formed with
the auxiliary itre: see § zxviii., 3, (1).
2. The past part, of a reflective verb agrees with the reflective
pronoun, when it is the direct object of the verb. (120.)
§ XLVIII. — Se Lever, to rise — Affirmatitelt.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PsraiiT. Past.
8e lever, ioriae. S'^tre lev^^s^o tohaiteriam.
PARTICIPLES.
Pbunt.
Past. Ck>MFOVHD.
8e levant, rmng.
Lev^, riten, S'^tant lev4-^, having H
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PuEsrar.
Past iNBiriinxB.
Je me l^ve,
Tutel^vvs,
11 se Idve,
Nous nous levons,
Vous vous levez,
Us se Invent,
/Wk. Je me suis }ey6,^
Ihou riaoL Tu t'es lev^,
he rim, 11 s^est levtf,
we riee. Nous nous sommes lev^,<^
you fue. Vous vous &tes lev^,
they rite. Us se aont lev^,
iMPKBnOT.
Je me levais, Iwaa ridng,
Tu te levais, thou wad ritmg,
11 se levait, he woe rimng.
Nous nous levions, we were rinng,
Vous vous levies, you were rmng.
Us se levaient, they wi
Past Detiniti.
Je me levai, Iroae.
Tu te levas, thou didtt riee,
II se leva, he rote.
Nous nous levftmes, we rote.
Vous vous lev&tes, you rote.
lis se lev^rent, they rote.
YVTVKM.
Je me l^verai,
Tu te l^verss,
n se Ifevera,
Nous nous l^verons,
Vous vous l^verez,
Us se Ifeveront,
r
i
PUJFUmCT.
Je m' ^tals lev£, / had t
Tu t' ^tais lev^, thou hadd i
11 s' ^tait levi, he had riten.
Nous nous ^tions lev^, we had riten.
Vous vous £tiez lev^, you had riten.
Us s' ^tident lev^s, they had riten.
Past AinKEioa.
Je me fus lev^, I had riten.
Tu te fus lev^, thou hadd riten,
U se fut lev^, he had riten.
Nous nous flimes lev^s, we had riten,
Vous vous flites lev^, you had riten.
Bs se furent levte, Aey had riten.
FuTUBa Abtkrior.
lehaU rite. Je me seiai lev^, IthaU'
thou wilt rite. Tu te seras lev^, thou wiU
he will rite. II se sera lev^, he wQl
we thaU rite. Nous nous serons lev^s, we thall
you wiU rite. Vous vou8 serez levds, you wiU
they wiUrite. lis se seront levds, &ey will
* When the rofleotiTe prononn lefen to a snl^eet of the feminine gender, the past
pertielple assnmeB the fsminine termination ; sing, levity plar. Ie9iet.
114
OOHJUGATION OV REFUBOTITJE YKRBS.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Past.
Je me IfeveraiSf I should rim.
Tu te l^verais, thou wouidtt riu.
II 86 l^verait, he would rise.
Nous nous l^verioQB, we should rise.
Vous you8 Ifeveriez, you tPoiUd rise.
Us se l^reraient, they would rise.
Je me seFais lev^,
I'u te seraia lev^,
II 86 serait lev^,
Nous nous serious Jev^,
Vous vous series lev^,
lis 86 seraient lev^,
L&ve-toi,
Qu'il 86 tove,
IMPEBATIVE MOOD.
Levons-nous,
rue (thou). Levez-vous,
let hm rise. Qu'ils se invent,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
let us rise,
rise (you).
let them rise.
Past.
Que je me l^ve, that /'
Que tu te l^ves, that thou
Qu'il se 16ve, that he
Que nous nous levions, that we
Que vous vous leviez, that you'
Qu'ils 86 Invent, that they ,
iMPUriOT.
Que }e me levasse,
Que tu te levasses,
Qu'il 86 lev&t.
Que nous nous levassions,
Que vous vous levassies,
Qu'ils 86 levassent,
si
Que je me sols levd,
Que tu te sois lev^,
Qu'il se soit lev^,
Que nous nous soyons levte,
Que vous vous soyez levds,
Qu'ils 86 soient lev^,
Plupxbfbct.
Que je me fusse levd,
Que tu te fusses lev^,
Qu'U 86 fftt lev^,
Que nous nous fussions lev^,
Que vous vous fussiez levte,
Qu'ils 86 fussent levds,
r
s
§ XLIX. — Negatively.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Febsdit. Past.
Ke pas 86 lever, not to rise. Nes'Strepaslev^, not to htwe risen.
PABTIOIPLES.
Compound.
Nes'^tantpaslev^, not having risen.
Pbhiht.
Ne 86 levant pas, not rising.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Je ne me I^ve pas, I do
Tu ne te l^ves pas, thou dost
II ne se l^ve pas, he does
Nous ne nous levons pas, we do
Vous ne vous levez pas, you do
lis ne se Invent pas, they do
Past IivniFiNm.
Je ne me suis pas lev^,
Tu ne t'es pas lev^,
II ne s'est pas lev^,
N. ne nous sommes pas lev^
Vous ne vous Stes pas lev^s,
lis ne se sont pas lev^,
^1
CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS.
175
Ihperfbct.
Je ne me levais pas,
Til ne te levais pas,
U ne se levait pas,
Nous ne nous levions pas,
Vous ne vous levies pas,
lis ne se levaient pas.
Past Dbfinitk.
Je ne me levai pas,
Tu ne te levas pas,
II ne se leva pas,
Nous ne nous lev&mes pas,
Vous ne vous Icv&tes pas.
Us ne se lev^rent pas,
FuniBB.
Je ne me l^verai pas,
Tu ne te l^veras pas,
n ne se l^vera pas,
Nous ne nous l^verons pas,
Vous ne vous l^verez pas,
lis ne se l^veront pas,
«•!
^1
Pluperfect.
Je ne m'^tais pas lev^,
Tu ne t'^tais pas lev^,
n ne s'^tait pas lev^,
Nous ne nous ^tlons pas levds,
Vous ne vous ^tiez pas levds,
lis ne s' ^talent pas lev^s.
Past Anterior.
Je ne me fus pas lev^,
Tu ne te fus pas leve,
II ne se fut pas lev^.
Nous ne nous f Qmes paslev^s,
Vous ne vous fiites pas leves,
lis ne se furent pas lev^s.
Future Anterior.
Je ne me serai pas lev^,
Tu ne te seras pas lev^,
II ne sera pas lev^,
Nous ne nous serons pas le v^
Vous ne vous seriez pas lev^s,
lis ne se seront pas levds,
Present.
Je ne me l^verais pas,
Tu ne te l^verais pas,
II ne se l^verait pas.
Nous ne nous l^verions pas,
Vous ne vous l^veriez pas,
lis ne se l^veraient pas.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Past.
Je ne me serais pas lev^,
Tu ne te serais pas lev^,
II ne se serait pas levd,
N. ne nous serions pas lev^s,
Vous ne vous seriez i)a8 lev^s.
Us ne se seraient pas lev£s,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Ne nous levons pas, let tu not rite.
Ne te Ifeve pas, rite (thou) not, Ne vous levez pas, rise (you) not.
Qu'il ne se l^ve pas, let him not rise. Qu'ils ne se Invent pas, let thannotrise.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.
Que je ne me l^ve pas,
Que tu ne te l^ves pas,
Qu'il ne se 16 ve pas.
Que nous ne nous levions pas, ^^
Que vous ne vous leviez pas, •
Qu'ils ne se Invent pas,
iMPBRfEGT.
Que je ne me levasse pas.
Que tu ne te levasses pas.
Qu'il ne se lev&t pas.
Que nous ne nous levassions pas.
Que vous ne vous levassiez pas.
Qu'ils ne se levassent pas.
Past.
Que je ne me sols pas lev^.
Que tu ne te sols pas lev^.
Qu'il ne se soit pas lev^.
Que nous ne nous soyons pas lev^s.
Que vous ne vous soyez pas levds.
Qu'ils ne se soient pas lev^.
PUTPERFEOT.
Que je ne me fusse pas lev^.
Que tu ne te fusses pas lev^.
Qu'il ne se flit pas levd.
Que nous ne nous fussions pas lev^.
Que vous ne vous fussiez pas leves.
Qu'ils ne se f assent pas lev6s.
176
OOVJUGAnOK or RSFLBCTIVX TXBB8*
§ L. — ^Intxrrogativelt.
Meler^Jef
Tel^ves-tuf
Sel^ve-t-iir
Nous levons-nonsf
Yotu levea-vous f
Se l^vent-ilgf
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Past InDmHin.
do I tin f He suis-je lev^ T
dodtlumrmf Vw-iu leytf f
domkeruef S'est-U lev<$ f
doweriaef Nous sommes-noiw lev^s f
do you rtM f Yous Ites-yous lev<£B f
do ihijf riuf Se 8ont-ils ley^ t
^^
Me levais-je f tpof / ritmg f
Te levais-tu f vfoal Uum ritmg f
Belevait-ilf wuheritingf
Nous levions-nous f were we ritmg f
Yous levies- vous ? uwv you rifM^ t
Se levaient-ilsf nwv tft<y riting f
Past DmNm.
MeleTai-jef did I rue f
Televas-tuf dkkl thou rieef
Seleva-t-iir did he tin f
Nous levAmes-QOUs ? did we rite f
Yous lev&tes- vous f did you riee f
Se ler^rent-ils f did th^ rite f
FUTUBB.
Me l^verai-je r MU I rite 9
Te l^veras-tu f wHt thou rite f
Sel^vera-t-ilf will he rite f
Nous 16 verons-nous f jAott we rise f
Yous I^verez-Tous f irtU you rite f
Sel^veront-ilsf will they rite f
PLUFSBraOT.
M'^tais-jelev^r hadr\
T ^tais-tn lev^ f ktukt thou
8'<$ta]t-illev«r had he
Nous dtions-nous lev^ f had we
Yous ^tiez-TOus lev^ f had you
S'<$taient-ils Iev6i ? hadth^
Past Amteeiob.
Mefus-jeleydf Aof/
Te fus-tu lev^ ?
Sefut-illevd? had he
Nous fftmes-nous lev ^ f had we
Yous ffttes-vous lev^ f Aoii you
Se furent-ils lev^ f had they
Fotubb Antebiob.
Me serai-je lev^ ? «AaS /'
Te seras-tu lev£ ? wilt thou
Se sera-t-il lev^ ? wHl he
Nousserons-nouslev^s? thallwe
Yous serez-vous lev^ t will you
Se seront-ils lev^ r will they
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Pbibbht.
Me l^verais-jef thouldlritef
Te 16veiais-tu f wouldtt thou rite f
Se 16verait-il f would he rite f
Nousl^verioDs-nous? thouldweritef
Yous l^veriea-vous f would you rite 9
Se l^veraient-ils f imwU t&iy hm f
Me serais-je lev^ ?
Te serais-tu levtf ?
Seserait-illev^f
Nous serions-nous lev^ ?
Yous seriez-YOUs lev&s?
Se seraient-ils lev^ f
COHJUGATION OF REFLKCnVB YXRBB.
IW
§ LI. — Interrooatiyslt and Neoativelt.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pkisdit.
Ke me lev^-je pas f do I'
Ne te 1^ ves-tn pas ? doat thou
Ne Be l^ve-t-il pas f doet he
Ne nous levons-nous pas ^ dowe
Ne vous levez- Yous pas 7 do you
Ne Be l^vent-ils pas f do they ^
iMFKBnCT.
Ne me levais-je pas f
Ne te levais-tn pas?
Ne se levait-il pas ?
Ne nous levions-nous pas f
Ne vous leviez-vous pas f
Ne se levaient-ils pas ?
Past Dkfikitb.
Ne me levai-je pas f
Ne te levas-tu pas ?
Ne se leva*t-il pas f
Ne noQs lev&mes-nous pas?
Ne vous levAtes-vous pas ? ^
Ne se ley^re&t-ils pas ?
FVTUSB.
Ne me 16verai-je pas?
Ne te I^veras-tu pas ?
Ne se l^vera-t-il pas f
Ne nous l^verons-nous pas f
Ne vous l^verez-vous pas ?
Ne se 16veront-il8 pas f
^i
I:
n
Past iNDnriNin.
Ne me suis-je pas levd f
Ne t'es-tn pas levd ?
Ne s'est-il pas lev^ ?
Ne nous sommes-nous pas lev6i ?
Ne vous Stes-vous pas lev^ f
Ne se sont-ils pas lev^s ?
Pluperfect.
Ne m'^tais-je pas lev^7
Ne t'^tais-tu pas lev^ f
Nes'^tait-ilpaslev^?
Ne nous dtions-nous pas lev^T
Ne vous ^tiez-vous pas lev^f
Ne s'^taient-ils pas lev^f
Past Antbriob.
Ne me fus-je pas lev* ?
Ne te fus-tu pas lev* ?
Ne se f ut-il pas lev<$ ?
Ne nous fftmes-nous pas lev^f
Ne vous ffttes-vous pas lev^f
Ne se furent-ils pas lev6if
FuTURB Antbriob.
Ne me serai-je pas lev^f
Ne te seras-tu pas levd f
Ne se sera-t-il pas levd ?
Ne nous serons-nous pas lev^f
Ne vous serez-vous pas lev^f
Ne se seront-ils pas lev^f
CONDrriONAL MOOD.
▼ Ne me l^verais-Je pas f
Ne te l^vends-tu pas f
Ne se l^vendt-il pas f
Ne nous l^verions-nons pas?
Ne vous l^veriez- vous pas ?
Ne se l^veraient-Us pas ?
Pabt.
Ne me seniis-je pas Iev6f
Ne te serais-tu pas lev* ?
Ne se serait-il pas lev*?
Ne nous serions-nous pas lev*8 ?
Ne vous seriez-vous paH lev^ ?
Ne se seraient-ils pas lev^f
8»
178 CONJUGATION OF RBTLXCTIYX VXRBB.
DictAs 16.
1. Vous 6te8-vou8 lev6 de bonne heure t 2. Je me sais leve k
cinq heures. 3. Les enfants se sont lev^s i six heures. 4. lis
se sont couches. 5. lis sont alles se coucher. 6. Mon frere
s^est brills. 7. Ma soeur s'est couple. 8. Nous nous sommes
lav^s. 9. Les enfants se sont chauffes. 10. Comment vous
portez-vous? {Sow do you dof) 11. Comment se porte mon-
sieur voire pere ! 12. Madame, comment vous ^tes-vous port^e !
13. Comment les enfants se sont-ils comport4s ? 14. Oik vous
6tes-vous promen6 1 15. Je me snis promen6 dans le jardin.
16. Mes soeurs s'y sont promen^es avec moi. 17. EUes sont
allees se promener. 18. Elles se promeneront cette apres-midi.
19. Condnisez-vous bien. 20. Conduisons-nous Men. 21. Ne
vous levez pas trop tard. 22. Je suis charme que vous vous
portiez bien. 23. Ces parents 6taient 6tonn6s que leurs enfants
se fussent mal comport^s.
CharmS, p. p. pleased ; glad ; wu^er (ae), to lie down, to go to bed ;
ooi^Mr (ae), to cut one's self; Uver (ae), to rise ; parttr («), to be, to do (of
health) ; yrmnmer («), to walk.
conjugation of impersonal verbs. l79
Conjugation of Impersonal (Unipersonnel) Verbs
§ LII. — ^Y AVOIR, to be there,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
PaBsiirr. Past.
Y avoit, to be there. Y avoir cu, to have been there.
rARTICIPLES.
PsESKNT. Compound.
Y ayant, being there, Y ayant eu, having been there.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbuent. Past Indbfinitb.
n y a, there it (or are), II y a eu, there hat (or have) been.
Imperfect. Pluperfect.
n y avaity there woe (or were), II y avait eu, there has (or have) been.
Past Definite. Past Anterior.
n y eut, there woe (or were), 11 y eut eu, there had been,
FuTURR. Future Anterior.
n y aura, there teiU be, H y aura eu, there wU have been.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Present. Past.
11 y aurait, there would be, H y aurait eu, ihere would have been.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Qu*il y ait, Ut there be,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. Past.
Qu'il y ait, thai there may be. Qii'il y ait eu, that there may have been.
Imperfect. Pluperfect.
Qu'il y etlt, that there might be. Qu'il y eti eu, thatthere might havf been
180 OOKJUGATION OF IMPKBBONAL VERBS.
§ LIII. — ^Falloir, to be necesBary,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Fbibdit. Pact.
Falloir, io be fuemarjf. Av<^i: fidlu, U hme bem neeesBor^
PABTICIPLES.
Pact. CaMPOUKD.
Fallu, been neeesaarjf. Ayantfidlu, kavkig been neeeeaary.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pbisirt. Pact Indiiuiiti.
Il&Qt, it it neeeseary. UafiUlu, it hcu been neeeetcay.
iMPBRracrr. Plupbrfiot.
II falliuty it teae neceeeary, JX avait fallu, it had been neeeetary.
Pact Diiinits. Pact Aktebiob.
n fallut, it woe neceeeary. H eut fallu, it had been neceeeary,
FUTURB. FUTUBB AmTBBIOB.
TLfymdxA, it tnU be neceeeary. UwmtaliUf itwiUhavebeenneeeeeary
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
Pbbsbnt. Pact.
Bfaudrait, it would be neeeeeary, H aundt fisklla, it would have been
neceeeary,
IMPEKATIVE MOOD.
Qa'il faille, let it be neceeeary.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Pbbsbnt. Pact.
Qii'il faille, that it. may be neceeeary. Qa*il ait &llu, that it may hope bmtk
iMPKBLnot, Plufeefbct.
Qii'il Callftt, that it might be neceeeary. Qu'il eftt fallu, that it might have beem
neceeeary.
FORMATION OF TXHSKS. 181
Rem. — Falloir is often to be rendered into English by must.
In ihis case, the persop to which the impersonal verb falloir re-
fers, becomes the subject of the verb muM, In French, it is ei-
ther the indirect object (prep, a) ; as, il LVi faut y aller^ he must
go there ; or, it is the subject of the next verb, introduced by the
conjunction que ; as, il faut que vous partiez aujaurcThuiy you
must start to-day. After ilfaut que, the verb is put in the sub-
junctive : see 167, 8d.
DictAe 17.
1. II y a quelqu'un dans le salon. 2. H y a plosienrs person*
nes dans ie jardin. 8. II n'y a personne qui soit plus savant que
lui. 4. II y avait beaucoup de monde au concert hier an soir.
5. Y a-t-il beaucoup de fruit cette ann^e ! 6. Y a-t-il eu bean-
coup de p6ches Tannic demi^re ? 7. II n'y en a pas eu beau-
coup. 8. II n'y aura pas beaucoup de fruit cette ann6e-ci. 9.
II y en aurait eu beaucoup, s'il n'avait pas gele au mois de mai.
10. II faut qu'il y ait dans ce monde des riches et des pauvres,
des grands et des petits. 11. II a fall u que j'y allasse moi-m6me.
12. II fallait que ces hommes fussent bien m^chants pour faire
cela. 13. II faudra que vous alliez voir ce monsieur. 14. II
faudrait que vous fussiez plus diligent. 15. II m'a fallu attendre.
16. II nous a fallu faire cela. 17. II leur faudra travailler da-
vantage. 18. Oroyez-vouB qu'il faille fiiire celat
Bavantajfe, adv. more; miehant, adj. wicked; minuj adj. self; talon,
n. m. parlor.
§ LIY. — ^FOBMATION OF TsNBXS.
1. Tenses are Primitive or Derivative. Primitive tenses are
those from which the others are formed.
LIY.--1. How are the lenses of a yerb diitiiiiiiiAed, with tefMd to their fiMnuttont
Whet eve primitfTe tonaee f
182 FORMATION OF TXN8XS.
2. The Primitive Tenses are
Infin. Pbe8. I Prbbbht Pabt. I Past Pabt. | Indic. Pbbb. | Iast Diror.
3. The Derivative Tenses formed from these, are
Future.
(hndUional.
Indie. Prta.fiur,
Imperftd.
Subf'undive Pra.
AU
Compound
Taua.
In^peraHoe. I SiuJl^undwe
I Iii^peffect.
4. The future is fonned from the infinitive, by changing r, re,
oiV, into rat, ras, ra^ &c.; as, aimer^ f aimer ai ; finiry je Jinirai ;
recevoir,je recevrai; vendre^ je vendrai.
5. The condiiumal is formed from the infinitive, by changing
r, re, otV, into raU^ rats, rait, &c. ; as, cUmer, faimerais ; finir^
jefimrais; recevoir, je recevrais ; vendre, je vendrais,
6. The three persons plural of the indicative present are formed
from the present participle, by changing ant into ons, eg^ent; as,
aimant, notis aimons, vous aimez, ils aiment; Jinissant, nous
finissonSy vaus finissez, ils finissent ; vendant, nous vendons, vous
vendez, ils vendent. But the verbs of the third conjugation
change evant, for the third person plural, into oivent; as, rece-
vanty nous recevons, vous recevez, ils regoivent,
7. The imperfect of the indicative is formed from the present
participle, by changing ant into ais, &c; as, aimant, faimais ;
Jinissant, je finissais ; recevant, je recevais ; vendant, je vendais.
8. The present of the subjunctive is formed from the present
participle, by changing ant into e, &c. ; as, aimant, que faime;
finissant, que je finisse ; vendant, que je vende. But the verbs
of the third conjugation change evant into oive ; as, recevant^
queje regoive.
9. The compound tenses are formed by joining the past parti-
ciple to the corresponding simple tense of the auxiliary (avoir or
itre).
10. The imperative is formed from the indicative present, by
omitting the subject, and by suppressing, for the verbs of the first
2. Which are the primitive tenses? 8. Which are the deriv»tlTe tenses? 4. Iloir
is the futare tense fonned? 6. How Is the conditional mood fonned? 6. How are
the three persons plural of the Indicative present formed? 7. How is the imperfect of
the Indicative formed ? 8. The present of the satjoc ctive f 9. How are the compound
tenses formed?
REMARKS ON FORMATION OF TEN8BS. 188
conjugatioD, the final S'of the second person singular; as, tu
aimesj aime ; nous aimona, aimons ; vans aimez^ aimez ; tu finis^
finis ; nous finissons^ finissons ; vous finissez, finissez^ &c. The
third person singular and plural of the imperative, are like the
third person singular and plural of the subjuuctive present.
11. The imperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the past
definite, by changing at into asse^ d^c, for the first conjugation,
and by adding se^ kc^ for the three others; as, faimai, quefai-
masse ; je finis^ queje finisse ; je regtts, queje regusse ; je vendis^
queje vendisse.
§ LV. — Remarks on the Formation of Tenses.
We shall now present the tenses in their nsnsl order, polht ont some practical resolts
of the above rales, and show how fkr their application extends with r^^rd to the irreg-
ular verbs.
IvmoATvrw Present—To the formation of the first person plaral, from the present
particifile. by changing ant into ons^ there are only three exceptions ; viz. awdr {% XXX.X
Ure (XXXIV.). navoir ($ LVI , 20). The second person plaral has the ending Us^ in the
verbs Ure^ dire^fiiire, and their compoands. Fonr verbs have, In the third pers. plar.
being monosyllabic, the ending ont instead of ent; viz. awdr^ Ure^ allerj/aire; OfU,
eon<, vont^Jbni, For the terminations of the singular, see P. IL, 74
Impeirfisot— The imperfect and the flrst person plural of the present, being formed
on the Mime root of the prt«ent participle, the endings ai»^ riis, ait^ Ji(c, of the imperfect
may equally well be substituted f<>r the eniing one of the flrst pers. plur. of the present
Paia I}ejtnite.—TMB is a primitive tense.
JV«lifr«.— The ftiture is formed tmm the infinitive, by the addition of ai^ as^a, oxs,
es, ont In the fourth conjugation, the final e is dropped ; in the third, the ending wir
is oontraeted into vr: aimer^ faimerai ; Jlnir^ Je/tnirai; reeewir^je recevrai;
vendre^Je Dendrai, There are fifteen exceptions to this rule, which are found, § LYL
under the nambers 1, 2, 8, iS^ 8, 9, 18, 15, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 28, and 84.
CoHDrrioNAL Present —This tense is always regularly formed from the future, by
changing ai^ ae^ a, Ac., into die, aia^ ait^ Jec.
Imprratttb.— The second person singular is like the second person singular of the in-
dicative present, exeept that the verbs ending in e«— as, tu paries^ tu offre%—^to^ the
a in the imperative, and so does the verb oiler; as, tu «<m, tmper. «<i. The flrst and
second persons plural are lllce the flrst and second plural of the present Indicative. The
third singular and plural, lilce the third singular and plural of the present suljunctive.
SuMUNOTiTB iVesent— This tense Is best formed from the third person plural of the
indicative present, by striK. *«r off the final nt, which will leave the flnt person singnlar
of the subjunctive ; as, iU /tnieeent, que Je jlnisee ; Us re^oivent^ que Je refoive ; Us
visnnent, que Je vienne. This rule has only nine exceptions; viz., avoir^ itre^ and ihe
verlis marlved I, 16, 18, 20, 21, 28, a.. ^ 84, in the list § LVI.
Imper/eet.'-'The rule given above for the formation of this tense has nu exceptions.
lOi How Is the imperative mood Ibrmed ? 11. The imperfect of the subijunctivef
184
XBRSOULAB CONJUGATIONS.
§ LVL— MODEL VERBS OF THE
(In the followliis lilt oT Irrafuter Ttrlw, tiM prlmitlye pMts only urn
FIBST
INFINlTrnL
PASncIPLES.
INWCATIYE.
"PMMKWn,
Fsannr.
Paml
Psanv.
1. Allbb (6tr«X
togo.
•Uant
alM.
tiiTat,
BOOB allona,
▼ooaallei,
lltTOBt
S. SwroTn,
nwofWL
•nTO]r6.
renyeli,
SECOND
& AoqiriMB.
•oqnteni
•OHOilL
taaoqaienb
ilaoqniert,
▼ooa aoqa^rei,
Uaacqattront
4 Boiriixns
to too.
bOUlIUDt
bouillL
Jebooa.
taboos
11 Wat,
llab«Nilllent
to rim.
eimnuit
eoaro.
Jeeoora,
toooon,
lleoim.
Uteonreot
C CiriciLUB,
toflpaM^r.
eneUlut
oaelllL
Jeoneille,
tu euellleSk
11 coeiliek
nona coef 1Iob&
TooaoneUlei,
ila cueiUent
1 1>0SMIB,
to«l0^
doraumt
donni.
Jedo«,
tadon,
Udort,
Ua dormant
toJlM.
Ibyant
feL
llfUt,
noua ftiyoBs,
▼ona ftayei,
Oafbient
9. HoinoB («tre),
to<Ktf.
monnuit;
mort
Jemenn,
tnineon,
11 meart,
riirsr'
IOl OmiB,
toqffiur.
offlrant
offnt
J'oflfre,
taollirea,
Uofte,
Toaaolfrei,
Uaoftent
IL PAniB(«tr«X
toM<0««.
IMTtant
ptftL
Uipen,
Upwt,
Boaapartonsk
▼ona partes,
llapartent
1S.8EBVXB,
MTTUlt
Mnri
Jeaen,
taaen,
llaert,
BoaaaenroB8k
Tooaaerveii
llaaarvent
la V»irai (6tre).
tooomA
Tenant
reno.
11 Tient,
Toaa Tenei,
11a vlennent.
li. Vfiiiit,
to«toMA
▼6tuit
▼«tci.
JeT«t^
tavAta,
Booa Tfttoni^
▼ooa vdtflB,
llaTttent
IRBBUULAR CONJUGATIOK8.
185
IRREGULAR CONJUGATIONS.
^ven, and those derivative tenses wbieb are AOt regalarly derived.)
CONJUGATION.
IMPERATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Past Dviniix. Futubc* Pbibbiit.
fallai.
J'inJ,
j'envoyai, j*eDTerraI,
alions, qaej^aille.
Tft, allez, qae tu A\\\e»,
qail allle,
(lee Rbxakk, p. 191.)
que nous alliona,
que VOI18 alllez,
qa'ils aillent.
CONJUGATION.
J*aioqiii8k J^aoqoeml,
Je bottiUia,
qae J*aoqoldra, que noas aoqa^rionii
joetu acquldrea, que vous a«qtteii«i,
qall acqnidre, qa'lls acqnldrent
Jecoarufl,
Jeeoarral,
j« CQelUta,
JeeaeUlenl,
iedormU,
jeftite.
Jemoarua,
Jemoomi,
folfrte,
Jepartta,
Jeaervte,
je Vina.
Je Tiendral,
Je vfttl*.
qae Je meore, qae noos mourloni,
qae to meorea^ que voua rooariex,
qaUl meure, qa'ila mearent
qae je vienne, qne nona venfona,
que tu vifones, que vous veniez,
qu'il vienne, qu'ils vlenm-nt.
* For the formation of the Cunditiunal, see | LV., p. 18&
186
IRREGULAR GONJUGATIONB.
THIKD
INFINITIVK
PABTIOIPLSa.
INDICATIVE.
PUBXMT.
Pbmbht.
Pam.
PBaunr.
16. Falloib,
lUltt.
U&at
le. HOUTOIB,
mooTint
mo.
jeroeoa»
tameoa,
Ument.
noas inouYona,
Toos moovex,
lb meavent
IT. PLnrron,
torain^
plraTant
pill.
U pleat
18. PouTon,
toleabU,
poaTUt
pn.
jepeas,orpala»
tttpeaz,
BOOS poavona,
▼008 poavez,
Ua peuvent
t^MMJUli
•Mia.
Jem^aMieda^
taraMiedi.
Ua'aaded,
noua noas aueyona,
Tous Toaa aaseyea.
Via 8*asBelent
90. SATon,
toimow.
mirhint,*
ML
ilaait
Boaa aavona,
▼oaa aavez,
Us Bavent
St Yalob,
▼alint
Tain.
JeTaax.
tavaaz,
ilvaat,
noaBTaloBfl,
▼oaa vales,
Ua Talent
SS. Yon,
wojmt.
▼n.
11 TOit,
Boas Toyons,
TOUS Toyes,
11a voieoL
88, Yoiru>nL
▼oalaat
Toala.
Je Tear,
ta yeaz,
il Teat,
▼oas Toalez,
ila vealent
FOURTH
S4.BATTB&
to beat
tettant
iMttO.
iibST
noos battens,
vooa battel,
lis battent
85l Bozbi,
todHnJb,
baTuit
Ira.
Jebota,
taboia,
ilboit,
nous bavons,
▼008 bnvez,
lis boivent
S6. OoiroLirBi,
to conduds.
oonclaaat
ooncla.
Je ooodaa,
ta ooneloa,
il ooaclut,
noas conclaona,
▼oas oonclaez,
lis concluent
27. GoirDUiBS,
to conducts
oondaiBaot
condait
Je oondali,
ta conduis,
11 coadalt.
nons condaisons,
▼oas condaisez,
ils condaisent
28. OOUDBK,
coosant
ooasa.
Jeooada,
ta oottda,
Ilooad,
noas coasons,
lis consent.
89. CBAiin>BS»
to/ear.
cnlgnant
eraint
Jecraina,
ta craini,
11 oraint,
noaa craignona,
ils craignent
80. Cboxbs, oroyftDt
tob€Hev0.
era.
Ac
tacroia^
ilcrolt,
▼oas croyes,
iiscroient
IRBBOUULB OONJUOATIONg.
CONJUGATION.
Past Definite. Futubk.
187
IMPEBATIVS.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Fbbsbkt.
il fallQL
il randra.
Jemiu,
Uplut
Jepna,
jo ponrr»«.
Je mWU.
Je m'assieni,
je sua, je saurai,
je valiia, je vaudrnt,
je vis, je Terrai,
je Toalas, je voodral,
CONJUGATION,
je batUs,
qu^il fkille.
que je pnisse, que noas paissions,
que ttt pniiisea, que voas paissiez,
qii^il puisse, qa'ils pnissent
sachons, qne je sache, que nous pacfiions,
sache, sachez, que tu sachea, q :e vons sacliiez,
qu'il itaciie, qu'ils saclient
que je vaille, que nous valions,
que tu vAlllea, que vous valii'S,
qa'il vaille, qn'ib vaillent
que je venllle, qne nous vouHofis,
veaillez, que tu veiiilles, que vous youllez,
qa'il veuille, quMIs veuillent
jebus.
Je oonclu,
je oondulais,
je cottsls,
Je craignia,
Jecrasi
que je boive, que nous buvions,
que ta boives, quo vous buviei,
qn'il boive, qu'ils buivent
188
IBBXOUULR CONJUOAnOHB.
INFINITIVK.
PABTIOIPUCa.
INDICATITE.
PSMSNT.
Pbmsiit.
Pan.
Pbmknt.
81. CboItbk.
togrtna.
eroiasut
era.
Toaa croiaaei,
UserotaaeDt.
«. Diu,
to •ay.
dtaant
dlt
UdlC
now diaoDSi
▼OUBditM.
ilsdiflent
8a ioBIBB.
touHU,
4eriT»Bi
6crtt.
Tout terivM,
11» teriTent
81 Faiu, flteat
Mi
fcSS;
UlUt,
▼oufaltea*
ilslbot
8fi.LiEi.
torMKl
llMlt
la.
uut»
WHMltaon^
▼onsllMi,
Ikliient
topul
BMCUnt
ndiw
Jemeta,
tiimeta»
illMt,
nou mettooB,
ilsmeOfiDt
87. MovDBl^
moiilMit
monlo.
Jemoad^
ta moods
11 mood,
lift monleat
8S. NAlrai, (6ti«>
SSL Fuaam,
to '
Bl
pl«.
10. PuHDBi^ prtaant prta.
totak4.
liMt
Jepl«K
tnplftiit
II plait,
j«prend|S
tn preadai
11 prand,
to laugh.
dSLSvmuL
toJUlom,
MaTBBt
nlTi
44.TEAIBIB.
to mat.
tnjtti
tnit
4& Yainobi,
toeonqu&r.
▼alnqnant
Talneo.
IoKm.
irlTUit
Tteo,
tortaoiMk
Urteoot,
flrlt,
JesvK
taaal%
ilMdt,
JetmK
tatraiak
atrmlt,
Je Tftlnea,
to vainca,
llTBlnc^
JeTte,
tnvta,
II lit,
llapUiaent.
BouaprMioM)
vooa prenes,
Ua prennent
BooarteolTOM^
▼ooa rtaolTM,
Uaitedvent
nonarloM)
▼ooaiieii
liarlMit
BooaavlvoDi^
Tooa aoivei^
Ua aalvank
BooatmyoBi^
▼ooa trayei,
Uatndent
BOOS Tafiiqaon%
▼oua vainqoez,
ila vatnqaent
BoiiaTlvoii%
ToaaTiveii
Ua TlTrnt
IRREGULAR OONJUQATIONS.
IMPEEATIVB. StJBJUNCTIVK.
Past Definitb. Futubk.
FftBSKMT.
Je cruB,
Jedfcs
j'Acriyta,
Jefls. JelVMfiil,
fklMUSt quejeltaMi qt» nous tessloBN
Mi, MtsB. qneblfttteBy qtie votis raMiec,
qaHlltaMS qaMlsfaasent
Jelns,
Jetnim
i0moiiltl«»
jeniiqa^
Jepl«S
Jeprt^
que |e prennok qne noun preniona,
qtle ttt prviitaes, que Voos prenlei,
qnM! prenne, qn'lU prennent
Je r^lul,
•
Jerti.
JeralTta,
Je TblnqatBt
100 IRRSOULAR VERBS.
§ LVn. — ^DxrEOTITE, OR BUOHTLT IrRXGULAR, YkRBS.
Second Conjuffatum.
4t7. Btmu has two Ftot Fartidples : bSni, blessed ; Umt, consecrated ;
otherwise reg^ilar.
48. D&rAiLLiR, to fiiil, is used only in the plural of the Indicative Pres-
ent, fMwt HfmOau; Imperfect, Jt d^fmUau; Fast Definite, y'€ di-
/aiilu, and the Infinitive.
49. Faiuib, to fiiil. FaiUani. IhUU. Je fma, tufaux, Ufaia, nomftOr
2ofM, vomfailla, iUfmUaU. Jt faiUaia. Je faUUa. Je faudrai. It
is used principally in the Infinitive, the Fast Definite, and the
Compound tenses.
60. FArir, to stril&e, is used only in tone coup/irir.
61. FuEVBni, to blossom, is regular : in the sense of toflourishf it has the
Imperfect, florisaaUf and the Fresent Bartidple, floritaani.
62. O&siR, to lie {Ul or dead)^ has only : U ffU, nam ffiaoru, votu gitez, tZt
ffiaenl; Imperfect, ye^iMu; Fresent Participle, ^inml.
63. HaIb, to hate, has no dissreds on the t in the singular of the Frewnt
Indicative and Imperative.
64. Quia, to hear. Of this verb, only the Inilnitive, and Fast Farticiple«
okI, are used.
66. QuAbir, to fetch, is used only in the Infinitive.
66. Sailur, to project, to jut out, conjugated like cueUlir; the third
person and the Fresent Participle only are used.
67. SuBQiR, to arrive at, is used only in the Infinitive.
Third Cfmjugation,
68. Choib, to fiill ; Fast Participle, chu ; no other part is used.
69. DiOHOiB, to fiill away, follows the model of voir, except in the Podt
Definite, je dkhm, Fresent Participle, Imperfect, and Imperative
are wanting.
60. tiOHoiB, to chance to be, to become due, only used in the third per-
son ; follows dichoir, except Present Participle, MAtrU,
61. FOUBVoiR, to provide, follows voiff except Fast Definite, >«/N>i<rvw;
Future, Je pounwirai,
62. Fb^voib, to foresee, follows «otr, except Future, jeprhxitai.
68. Sboib, to become, is used only in the third person Fresent, U tied,
iUaSent; Imperfect, Ue^aU; Future, Ueiera.
64. BioiB, to be seated, has only Present Bartidple, ekaUj Fast Parti-
ciple, m.
66. SovLoiB, to be accustomed, used only in the Imperfect, Je aoulait.
66. SuBSKOiB, to suspend, follows voir, except Future, Je tmwoirm; Fast
ParUdple, i
XRRIGULAR VERBS. 191
Fourth Conjugation,
67. Absoudbk, to abfiolve, see rUoudre; has no Past Definite ; Past Par-
ticiple, abuuSf fern. (AtmUe.
68. AooBOiRi is only uwd with /aire. Taxrt aecroin, to make believe.
69. Bbaisb, to bray ; Present, U braU, ih braknt; Future, U braira.
70. Bbuisi, to roar; Present Participle, bruyant; Present, U hruU; Im-
perfect, U hruyaU,
71. CiBOONdiLB, to circumcise, follows dirt, except second person of the
Present, wm drooncua ; Past Participle, dreoneU,
72. Clors, to close ; Present, ye doa, iu dot, Udot; Future, Je dorai; P&st
Participle, dot.
78. CoMTRKDiRB and the following compounds of dirtf viz. dSdirtf to un-
say ; interdire, to forbid ; mSdiref to slander ; pridirt, to foretell,
have, in the second person of the Present, dka instead of dUet,
74t. D^ooNTiBi, to discomfort ; Past Participle, dieoi^.
75. £cL0BB, to be hatched, follows dort; is used only in the third
person.
76. FuRB, to fry ; Present, Je frUf iu frU, U frit ; Future, je ftirai ; Im-
perative,/!^; Past Participle, /rt^.
77. Maudibb, to curse; Present Participle, mauditaarU; the double t is
retained in the parts derived from the present participle ; in oth-
er respects it follows dirt,
78. BoMPBB, to break, has U ron^ in the third person singular of the in-
dicative present ; otherwise it is regular.
79. SurriBB, to suffice; Present Participle, tuffitant; PBst Participle,
tuffi ; the derived tenses are formed regularly.
80. TisTBB, to weave ; Past Participle, titau.
Remark. — The following remark applies to all verbs in which
the letter i or y occurs before a part that is subject to inilectioo.
Between two vowels, the latter of which is a silent e, use t
and not y ; between two vowels, the latter of which is not a si-
lent e, use y and not t.
192
nUUOULAE TBBU.
§ LVni. — List of Irregular Verbs.
(The flgnres afUr Hm Terbt in thit liBt* tefer to Um m«del ymtU, $ LVL, or | LYII.;
after which these ere eot^ogited. Thoee wUeh ere not Vefeired to • model retts will
be fooBd under | LYL or | LYII.)
Abattre, 24.
CoQstrnire, 27.
Kbonimr,4.
Abeoadre, 41, «7.
8*Absteiiir, 18.
Contonir, 18.
Sohoir, 60.
Contraindrs, 29.
Eelore, Ti.
Abstraire, 44.
Cootredire, 8% 78*
Boms.
Aoeoarlr, 6.
Contrefaire, 84.
Blire, 85.
Accroire, 68.
Contrevenif, 18.
Bmboire, 25.
Accroittre, 81.
CoDvainore, 45.
Emondre, 87.
Aocueiiltr, 6.
Conveair, 18.
Emoavoir, 16.
AOQOiBIB.
Gorromprei 78.
Emproindre, 29.
Adtnettro; 81
CO0DBB.
Enoeindre, 29.
Allkr.
COUBIB.
Endore, 72.
Apparaltre, 81.
Coavrir, 10.
Encourir, 5.
Ap|>arteiur, 18.
Cbaimobb.
Endormir, 7.
Apprendre, 40.
CttOtBB.
Enduire, 27.
Enftoindre, 29.
AmuiiUir, 6.
CBOtTBB.
Asseoir, 19.
CVBILUB.
Enfair, 8.
S^Absboib.
Astreindre, S9.
Cairo, 27.
Emoindre, 29.
S*£nqa^rir, 8.
Atteindre, 89.
D^battr«, 24.
S'Ensuivre, 48.
Attraire, 44.
D^choir, 22, 59.
S^Entretnettre, 86,
Avenir, 18.
D^clore, 72.
Entr^oavrir, 10.
Atoib.
Diconfire, 88, 74.
Entreprendre, 40.
D^adre, 28.
Entretenir, 18.
BATnn.
Ddcoovrir, 10.
Entrevoir, 22.
B^nir, 47.
I>ecrire, 83.
Emvotbb.
Bonn.
IMorottra, 81.
Eqoivaloir, 21.
BOUILUB.
Se D4dire, 82, 78^
Eteindxe, 29.
Braire, 69.
I^daire, 27.
Bibb.
Bruire, 70.
D^faillir, 48.
D^fkire, 84.
D^oindre, 29.
Extraire, 44.
Geindre, 29.
FaiUir, 49.
Choir, 68.
Ddmentir, 11.
Circoncire, 82, 71.
Giroonvemr, 18.
mplair«, 89.
Fallod.
IXsappreiidre, 40.
Feindre,.99.
F^rir, 50.
Caoro, 72.
Desservir, 12.
Combattre, 34.
D^teindre, 29.
Flenrir, 51.
Commettre, 86.
mtenir, 18.
Fordfira, 72.
Ck)mpara!tre, 81.
IWtruire, 27.
Frire, 76.
Coniplaire, 89.
Devenir, 18.
Fun.
Comprendre, 40.
Se mv^tir, 14.
Compromettre, 86.
DiBB. «
G^ir, 62.
CONOLUBB.
Disconvenir, 18.
Concourir, 6.
Disoourir, 5,
Hair, 58.
CONOUIBE.
Disparattre, 81.
Confire, 82.
Dissoudre, 41, 67.
Indnire, 27.
Conjoindre, 29.
DiBtraire, 44.
Inacrire, 88.
Oonnaltre, 81.
DOBMIB.
Instraire, 27.
Gonqn^rir, 8.
Interdire, 82, 78.
GonaeDlir, 11.
Sbattre,24.
Interrompre, 78.
IRBXOULAR VXRB0.
19a
Intervenir, 18.
Introduire, 27.
Joindre, 89.
XORB.
Luire, 27.
Maintenir, 18.
Maadire, 82, 77.
M^connaitre, 81.
M^dire, 82, 78.
Jdentir, 11.
Se Meprendre, 40.
Mesavetiir, 18.
Messeoir, 63.
Mkttbb.
HoupRiB.
MOURIB.
MOUYOIB.
NaItjub.
Kuire, S7.
Obtenir, 18.
Offkib.
Oindre, 29.
Omettre, 86.
Omr, 64.
Oayrir, 10.
Faftre, 81.
Paraltre, 81.
Parcourir, 6.
Pabtib.
Parvenir, 18.
-Peindre, 29.
Permettre, 86.
Plaindre, 29.
PLAIBB.
Plbuvoxb.
Poindre, 29.
Poursuivre, 48.
Pourvoir, 22, 61.
PoDvonu
Pr^dire, 82, 78.
PRXNDBX.
Prescrire, 88.
Preasentir, 11.
Pr^valoir, 21.
Pi^Tenir, 18.
Pr^voir, 22, 62.
Produire, 27.
Promottre, 86,
Promouvoir, 16.
Prosorire, 88.
Provenir, 18.
Qu^rir, 66.
Babattre, 24.
•Kapprendre, 40.
Basseoir, 19.
Kebattre, 24.
Beboire. 25.
Bebouiliir, 4.
Beoondaire, 27.
Beoonnaftre, 81.
Beoqnqa^rir, 8.
Becoudre, 28.
Beooarir, 5.
Becoavrir, 10.
B^crire, 88.
Becrottre, 81.
BeoaeiUir, 6.
Becaire, 27.
Bedefaire, 84.
Bedevenir, 18.
Bedire, 82.
Bedotmir, 7.
B^dnire, 27.
Re^Ure, 85.
Befleanr, 51.
Beluire, 27.
Bemettre, 86.
Bemoadre, 87.
Benattre, 88.
Se Bendonnir, 7.
Bentraire, 44.
Bepattre, 81.
Bepartir, 11.
Se Kepentir, 11.
Beprendre, 40.
Bequ^rir, 8.
Bfi^OUDBB.
Beaseutir, 11.
BesBOuveair, 18.
Bestreindre, 29.
Betenir, 18.
Betraire, 44.
Bevaloir, 21.
Bevenir, 18.
Bevdtir, 14.
Bevivre, 46.
Bevoir, 22.
Bibb.
Bompre, 78.
Boavrir, 10.
Saillir, 6, 56.
Satisfaire, 84.
Savoib.
Seconrir, 6.
S^duire, 27.
^entir, 11.
Seoir, 68, 64.
Bbbvib.
Sortir, 11,
Souffrir, 10..
Souloir, 66.
Soumettre, 86.
Sourire, 42.
Sousorire, 88.
Soastraire, 44.
Soatenir, 18.
Souvenir, 18.
Subvenir, 18.
Suffire, 79.
Suivbb.
Surffir, 67.
Surtaire, 84.
Surprendre, 40.
Saneoir, 22, 66.
Sarvenlr, 18.
Survivre, 46.
8e Taire, 89.
Teindre, 29.
Tenir, 18.
Tistre, 80.
Traduire, 27.
Tbaibb.
Transcrire, 88.
TraDsmettre, 86.
Tresaaillir, 6.
Vainobb.
Valoib.
Vbiob.
VAtib.
ViVBB.
VOIB.
VOULOIB.
§
104 IRRSOULAR YBRBS.
DlCTftK 18.
(The DiotationSf from 18 to 27, are on the irregnlar verb& We give, at the lead of
each exercise, the verhe which the exerche is intended to contain. The mode verhs
(List, I LYI.X In small capitols; those that are oonjagated after them (List, | LVIILX
In italics. The student should state their tense, mood, person, and number.)
1. Allcb, to go ; 4. Bovillir, to boil.
SCen aUer, to go away. 6. Courir, to run ;
2. Snyoter, to send ; Aeoourir, to run up ;
Renvoyer^ to send back. Pareounr^ to run oyer ; to look
8. AoQuiRiR, to acquire ; over ;
OonguMrj to conquer. SeeouriTf to assist.
1. tPallaJB ^crire k mon oncle quand il est arriv6. 2. J^irai
V0U8 voir ce soir. 3. J'irais me promener, si j'avais le temps.
4. lis sont alles k la ville. 5. Je m'en vais. 6. lis s'en sont
alles. 7. Je vous enverrai des fleurs. 8. Je vous enverrais des
roses, si j'en avais. 9. II nous renverra le cbeval demain. 10«
Get horn me acquiert des biens lous les jours. 11. Vous acquer-
rez des cooDaissances utiles, si vous ^tudiez. 12. Nos voisins
out acquis de grands biens. 13. Les Etats-Unis conqnirent lenr
liberty par la bravoure et par la perseverance. 14. L^eau ne
bout pas, mais elle a bouilli. 15. Si vous courez, vous arriverez
a temps. 16. Si vous couriez, vous arriveriez a temps. 17. Vous
courriez, si vous 6tiez presse. 18. J'ai parcouru ce livre; il est
interessant. 19. lis out parcouru tout le pays. 20. lls.ontse-
couru les pauvres. 21. La foule accourut de tous les cotes. 22.
II faut que j^aille a la poste. 23. II faut que je coare. 24.
Allons-noua-en.
Bierif n. m. property ; bravoure, n. f. bravery ; cormmssemeey n. f. knowl-
edge ; e6Uy n. m. side ; JEtaU-Vhis, n. m. pi. United States ; fouie, n. f.
crowd ; Ubertif n. f. liberty ; penhhcmce^ n. f. perseverance ; pressi, p. p.
hurried ; itre presU, to be in a hurry ; rote, n. f. rose ; ^ernpf, a wnps^ in
time.
IRREGULAR TKRB8. 195
DlCTfiE 19.
6. CuBiLLiR, to gather ; 8. Fuir, to flee ;
AccueQUr^ to receive, to wel- S*'et\fuir^ to flee, to ran away.
come ; 9. MouRni, to die.
RecueUhTf to reap, to collect ; 10. Oftrib, to offer ;
TresaaUlir, to start ; to leap. Soiiffrir, to suffer ;
7. DoRMiR, to sleep ; Ouvrir, to open ;
S'endormvry to fall asleep. Couvrvr^ to cover.
1. 11 cueille des fleurs. 2. Nous en cueillerons aussi. 3. 11
n'a point recueilli le fruit de ses travaux. 4. Je dormais quand
vous etes entre. 6. Je n'ai pas dormi. 6. Je m'endors. 7. lis
se sent endormis. 8. Nous fuyons le vice. 9. lis ont fui. 10.
11 s'enfuit. 11. lis se sont enfuis. 12. On souflTre et Ton meurt
partout. 13. Nous roonroBs tons les jours. 14. Nous monrrons
tous; Tun aujourd*hui, Tautre demain. 15. On entend dire a
chaque instant, *' 11 est mort, il mourut hier ; elle est morte ce
matin; ils sont morts.^' Quand le dira-t-on de nous? 16.
OflTrons nos prieres au Ciel pour tous ceux qui souffrent. 1 7.
Avez-vous ouvert la porte du jardini 18. Je I'ouvrirais, si j'a-
vais la clef. 19. Je couvrirai ces plantes a I'approche de Thiver.
20. Je lui offris votre lettre. 21. Elle nous accueiliit avec bien-
veillance. 22. Elle tressaillit de joie. 23. Je ne crois pas qu'il
dorme. 24. Croyez-vous qu'il meure ?
Approche, n. f. approach ; bimvedlanee, n. f. kindness ; dd^ n. m. heav-
en ; hweTf n. m. winter ; itutantt n. m. instant ; jok^ n. f. joy ; dejoie^ for
joy ; pritrtf n. f. prayer.
DiOTiEK 20.
11. Partir ( 116 ), to start ; Deomir ( 157 ), to become ;
Sfniiir ( 117 ), to go out ; Parvenir ( 171 ), to succeed ; to
Sentir\ to feel, to smell ; reach ;
QmterUir, to consent. Tenitf to hold ; to keep ;
12. SsRvnt, to serve. Appartemr, to belong ;
13. Vknir ( 116), to come. Oontenir, to contain.
Oonvmir (itre), to agree ; 14. VftriR, to clothe ;
(hnvenir {avoir)^ to suit ; Revitir, to invest.
1. Ma soeur est sortie, et je sortirai k Tinstant. 2. Je ne seii-
tAis pas le froid. 3. Consent-il k faire cela? 4. 11 n'y consen
Id6 mRBOOLAB TJUBB.
tira jamais. 5. II faut bien qa'il y consente. 6. Get homme p.
bien servi son pays. 7. II servait autrefois dans Tarmde ; au-
jourd'hai il sait dans la manne. 8. Que vous servirai-je? 9.
Viendrez-Yoos me voir oe soir ? 10. Je serais veDU« si j'avais eu
le teraps. 11. Coovient->il de ceia? 12. II en est convenu. 13.
L'affaire ne loi a pas convenu. 14. Vous ites deveuu grand.
15. Vous parviendrez, si vous vous comportez bien. 16. Voire
lettre ne m'est pas parvenue. 17. Ces hommes sont devenus
riches. 18. lis tcnaient un mag*asin autrefois. 19. Cettemaison
leur a appartenn. 20. Ces caisses contiennent mes hardes. 21.
lis sont tr^s-bien y^tus. 22. Le President est revStu du pouvoir
supreme.
ArmUf n. f. army.; autrrfau^ adv. formerly ; fivid, n. m. cold,; harda^
n. f. pi. clothing ; marmt, n. f. nayy ; jiouvoir, n. m. power ; jprkident, n.
m. president ; auprime, ady. supreme.
DiOTiK 21.
16. Monvoia, to move ; 20. Satoir, to know.
MnouvoiTf to move, to affect. 21. Yaloir, to be worth.
17. PuBUTOia, to rain. 22. Voir, to see ;
18. PouvoiR, to be able. iSwpcr, to see back or again.
19. S'assboir, to sit down. 28. Youloir, to be wilUng.
I. Le r^cit de yos malheurs Fa 6ma. 2. J'ai pa y aller, mais
je n'ai pas voulu. 3. II a plu toute la matinee. 4. Vous n'avez
pas su voire le^on. 5. Quand j'ai vu voire fr^re, il ne savaii pas
que vous 6tes venn. 6. II voulait venir, mais il ne pouvait; il
pleuvait. 7. Cela ne vaut rien, et n'a jamais rien Yalu. 8. £lle
s^assied k la orois^e pour voir dans la rue. 9. Je me snis assis
aupres du feu, parce que j'ai froid (lam cold, P. IV. 95.). 10. Je
m'assierai oil vous voudrez. II. Ponrrez-vous faire cela I 12.
Je ne pourrai. 13. Je orois qu'ii pleuvra. 14. Nous verrons.
15. Je saurai eela quand je vous reverrai. 16. Cela ne vaudra
rien. 17. II faudra le voir aujourd'hui. 18. Je voudrais bien le
voir. 19. Groyez-vous qu'il puisse le &iref 20. Croyez vous
qu'il le sache! 21. Je ne pense pas qa'il veuille partir. 22. Si
IllRBilMJfiAK V1BBBBI. 107
je pensais qu'il voulut partir. 23. Hier, je vis voire oncle ; il
vint nous voir.
Aupria de^ prep, near ; maZAeiir, n. m. misfortune ; rkit^ n. m. recital.
DiotAb 22.
24. Battri, to beat ; Produire, to produce ;
Se baUre, to fight ; T^aduin, to translate.
AbaUn, to throw down ; 28. Counai, to sew.
CombaUrej to fight. 29. CaAiMUBEf to fear, to be a&aid ;
26. BoiRB, to drink. Fmuhe, to feign ;
27. CoNDUiRB, to conduct'; Peindre, to paint ;
Oonstrwret to construct ; Seplamdn, to complain ;
InMtrmnj to instruct ; Mndrt, to j<^.
1. La pluie abat (layi) la poussiere. 2. Le vent a abaitu ces
arbres. 3. lis se battaient. 4. Nous combattrons a pied. 5.
J'ai bu UD verre d^eau. 6. Je boirai tantot un verre de limonade.
7. Les Allemands buvaient de la biere. 8. Je voas conduirai
chez vous. 0. On constrait de beaux b4timents en Amerique.
10. Nous vous instniisons. 11. Autrefois ces terres produisaient
des grains en abondauce. 12. Le mois dernier, nous traduislmes
une histoire du frangais en anglais. 13. Ma soeur coud lous les
iours. 14. £lle a consu ce matin. 15. £ile cousit hier, et elle
coudra demain. 16. Je ne crains paa de le dire. 17. II n'a
pas craint de le faire. 18. Je craignais de Toffenser. 10. J^ai
peint un paysage. 20. L'an dernier, je peignis un tableau d'his-
toire. 21. II feignit, Tautre jour, de ne pas savoir cela. 22. II
se plaignait de vous. 23. Je vous joindrai au coin de la rue.
24. Croyez-vous qu'il craigne cela, qn'il se condiv&e bien f 25. Si
je pensais qu'il se plaignit de moi
Ahondance^ n. f. abundance ; AUemand, n. m. German ; cadrrfois, ad\.
formerly ; bdlment^ n. m. vessel ; gram, n. m. grain ; histoire (d'), histor-
ical ; Umonade, n. f. lemonade ; offeruer, a. v. to offend ; paytagty n. m.
landscape ; pied^ n. m. foot ; a pied, on foot ; phne, n. f. rain ; poumire-
n. f. dust ; tableau^ n. m. painting ; vent, n. m. wind.
198 IRRiaULAR TSRB8.
DiCTiE 23.
30. Cboibk, to believe. 38. J^crirb, to write ;
81. CboItrb, to grow ; DScrire, to describe ;
QmnaUre^ to know ; Preserire, to prescribe ;
PixraUre^ to appear ; Pwacrvrt^ to proscribe.
BeoonmAlre^ to recognize. Souaerire, to subscribe.
82. DiBB, to say ; to tell ; TroMcnre^ to transcribe.
OoiUredire (73), to contradict.
1. Je croyais que voue 6tiez parti. 2. Ila fous croient k
Boston. 3. Avez-vous era oela ? 4. Get enfant a cru rapide-
ment. 5. Ces herbes croissent dans les bois, 6. Tent croftra
bien apres la pluie. 7. J'ai connu iin monsieur de (6^) ce nom.
8. Je le connaissais quaud nous demeurions dans Pautre inaison.
9. Hier, je le reconnus aussitot que je le vis. 10. Vous parais-
sez 6tre mecontent. 11. Que disiez-vous tan tot? 12. Je n'ai
rien dit. 13. Je vous dirai cela une autre fois. 14. Ne me
contredisez pas. 15. Avez-vous 6crit k votre oncle? 16. Je lui
^crivais quand vous ^tes entr6. 1 7. Nous faisons ce que la loi
nous prescrit. 18. Les Atheniens proscrivireut Aristide. 19.
Je ne souscrirai pas k cela. 20. J'ai transcn't mon exercice.
21. Hier, ces Aleves dirent leui-s lemons, 6crivirent leurs themes,
et ensuite partirent. 22. II faut que je vous dise quelque chose.
23. II a fallu que je lui ^crivisse une seconde fois.
AtkSttiai, n. m. Athenian ; auatUoi ^u€, conj. as soon as ; /ou, n. f.
time ; herU, n. f. herb ; grass ; loiy n. f. law ; nom, n. m. name ; pbde^
n. f. rain ; rajndanaU^ adv. rapidly ; tantot^ adv. by and by ; a little
while ago ; tout, n. m. every thing.
IBREOULAR VISRBB. 199
DlCT^E 24.
84. Faibk, to make, to do ; AdmOtre, to receive '
Contr^aire^ to counterfeit ; CommeUre, to commit ;
DkfaxTt^ to undo ; Omettrtj to omit ;
R^axrt^ to make anew ; Permettre, to permit ; to allow ;
Surf aire, to overcharge ; FromeUre, to promise ;
Saka/aire, to satisfy. Semettre, to put back ; to put
85. Lire, to read ; off ; to deliver ;
EUre, to elect. SoumeUre, to submit ;
86. M^iTfts, to put ; • »• TranmOire, to transmit.
1. Que faisiez-vous quand je suis enti6? 2. Je lisais le jour-
nal. 3. Men frere mettait ses papiers en ordre. 4. Mes fioeurs
faisaient de la musique. 5. Get article a et6 contrefait. 6.
Pourquoi avez-vous defait ceci? 7. Je le referai. 8. Je vous
satisfferais, si je pouvais. 9. Dans les fitats-Unis, on 6lit un
Douveau President tous les quatre ans. 10. Le President Bu-
chanan fut elu en mil huit cent cinquante six. 11. Get ouvrage
a ete mis au rang des livres classiqaes. 12. L^avez-vous lu?
13. Je le lirais, si j'avais le temps. 14. Gette excuse ne sera
pas admise. 15. Je ne vous permettrai pas de rep6ter cela. 16.
Je ne vous promettrais pas d'y aller, si je n'avais pas Pintention
de le faire. 17. Remettez chaque chose a sa place. 18. J'ai
mis voire lettre a la poste, et je remettrai votre billet ei mon
oncle. 19. Nous remettrons ce voyage a la semaine prochaine.
20. 11 commit une faute 16gere, qui eut des suites fUcheuses pour
lui. 21. Hier, nous lumes toute la matinee. 22. Vous files
mal. 23. Ne voulez-vous pas qu'ou lisef 24. Que voulez-vous
qu'on fasse? 25. J'aimerais mieux qu'on fit autre chose. 26.
En France, la loi ordonne qu'on soumette ses opinions a la cen-
sure, avant de les pubiier. 27. N'avez-vous rien omis dans ce
memoire t
Clamque, adj. classical ; emmrt, n. f. censorship ; excuse^ n. f. excuse ;
fdcheux, adj. grievous, disagreeable; faute, n. f. fault; Uger, adj. light;
slight ; /ot, n. f. law ; memoire, n. m. bill, account ; ordonner, a. v. to
order, to command ; ordre, n. m. order ; opinion, n. f. opinion ; pubUer,
a. V. to publish ; rang, n. m. rank ; number ; suMe, n. f. consequence ;
toyage, n. m. journey.
200 IRRBOOLAIt VERBS.
DiCTtE 25.
87. MouDRK, to grind. Entr^endre^ to undertake ;
88. NAlnufc, to be bom. Beprendrt^ to take back ; to
89. Plaibb, to please ; resume ;
SepUure, to delight in ; to like Surprendre, to surprise.
to be; 41. RAsotrDBS, to resolve.
Se (aire, to be silent. 42. Bibs, to laugh ;
40. Pbbmdbb, to take ; Souring to smile.
Ajjprendn, to learn ; 78. Rongnre, to break.
Oonifrendrt, to comprehend ; IvUrromprt, to interrupt.
1. On a moulu une partie de voire grain, et I'on moudra le
reste demain. 2. L^instant oil nous naissons est un pas vers la
mort. 3. OOi ^tes-vous d6 \ 4. Cette demoiselle est n6e a Lyon.
5. Comment ce livre vous plait-il ? 6. Gela ne lai a pas pla.
7. Ces dames ne se plaisaient pas 4 la campagne. 8. Taisez-
vous done. 9. Avez-vous pris la peine de faire oela ? 10. Je
pvendrai des renseignements sur son compte. 11. U prit conge
de nous hier. 12. II appreuait lentement. 13. Je n^ai pas
compris cela. 14. N'entreprenez pas tant de choses ^ la fois.
15. II a repris T^tude de Talleniand. 16. lieprenez votre ar-
gent. 17. Beprenons notre histoire. 18. lis fnrent snrpris et
tallies en pieces. 19. La question n*a pas et6 r^solue. 20. De
quoi riez-vous? 21. Je n'ai pas ri. 22. Vous riiez, et elle son-
riait. 23. U rira de cela, qnand il I'apprendra. 24. Je veux
bien qu^il en rie. < 25. La pais fut rompue par les Anglais, qui
surprirent notre camp pendant la nnit 26. Ne m'interrompez
pas, je vous en prie (i>^ay).
A la foiSf adv. phr. at once ; at the same time ; allemand, n. m. Ger-
man ; eampf n. m. camp ; eompte^ n. m. account ; score ; eongi^ n. m.
leave ; donct conj. then ; fnort^ n. f. death ; od, adv. when, in which ;
paixt n. f. peace ; partie^ n. f. part ; /m», n. m. step ; peine, n. f. trouble ;
pendanif prep, during ; question^ n. f. question ; renuignemait, n. m. infor*
mation ; prendre dm renteignementa tur ton compte, to take information con
oeming him ; reste, n. m. rest ; tet22er, a. v. to cut ; vere, prep, towards.
IRRXO0LAR VBKBS. 201
Diot£x 26.
48. SuiYRK, to follow ; Survwre, to outlive.
Poursuwre^ to pursue. 47. BhUr^ to bless ; to consecrate.
44. T&AiaB, to milk ; 61. Fleurir, to flourish ; to blos-
Extrairet to extract. 8om.
45. Vaimcbb, to vanquish ; 53. BcAr^ to hate.
Oonvamere, to convince. 54. Oidr, to hear.
46. ViVBB, to live ; 79. Suffire^ to suffice.
1. Le repentir suit le p6ch6. 2. Nous suivons voe instruc-
tions. 3. Yons n'avez pas suivi mes conseils. 4. Les chasseura
poursuivirent le cerf, I'atteigDirent, et le tuerent. 5. Le marbre
qu*on extrait de cette carriere est d'une belle quality. 6. Alex-
andre vainquit les rois de PAsie, mais il ne snt vaincre ses pas-
sions. 7. Apres avoir vaincu ses ennemis k la guerre, il fut
vaincu lui-m^me par Pintemp^rance. 8. II v^cut dans le qua-
trieme siecle avant J^sus Christ 9. II vivra ^ternellement dans
Phistoire. 10. Aristide vivait du temps de Th^mistocle ; ils
6taient rivaux. 11. Caton ne surv^cut pas longtempe k la li-
berty de son pays. 12. Ces drapeaux ont 6t6 b^nits. 13. lis
ont b^ni le Oiel qui leur a donn6 un roi si digne de leur amour.
14. Les arts florissaient k Rome sous Auguste, et k Ath^nes sous
Pericles. 15. II bait le travail, et nous halissons la paresse. 16.
J^ai oul dire cela. 17. Peu de bien suffit au sage. 16. Cette
somme a suffi pour tons nos besoins.
Amour, n. m. love : art, n. m. art ; Ane, n. f. Asia ; adUjandrt, a. v. to
attain ; to overtake ; ftefotn, n. m. want ; Hen, n. m. wealth ; carriire,
n. f. quarry ; eeif, n. m. stag ; chasteur, n. m. hunter ; emteil, n. m. ad-
vice ; digne, adj. worthy ; drapeau, n. m. flag, standard ; ennani, n. m.
enemy ; mstrubtion, n. f. instruction ; inUmpiremee, n. f. intemperance ;
jforeue, n. f. laziness ; pamon, n. f. passion ; pkhi, n. m. sin ; qualiti, n.
f. quality ; tepenixr, n. m. repentance ; riwH, n. m. rival ; roi, n. m. king ;
mgL, n. m. wise man ; «^ n. m. age ; Mfnind, n. f. sum, amount ; Uur,
a. ▼. to kill.
9«
202 THE FARTIOIPLK.
§ LIX.— The Participle.
1. There are two participles; the present, and the past
2. The -present paiticiple denotes continuance of action. It al-
ways ends in a»^, and remains invariable ; as, ten k^mme limntj
a man reading ; des femnus Itsant, women reading.
3. The past participle expresses completed action, and is suscep-
tible of yariations for gender and number ; as, des enfants ckMs,
beloved children ; des personnel estimees de tout U monde, per-
sons esteemed by everybody.
DioTix 27.
(Point out the Participles in this Szerdse.)
1. Un jeune homrae connaissant ses int^r^ts, ^tudiera ses le-
mons. 2. Uae m^re aimant ses enfants, les ^levera dans la
crainte da Seigneur. 3. Mon pere lisait le journal, en se pro-
menant dans ie jardio. 4. J'ai rencontre votre frere, en allant
[when J was going) k la poste. 5. J'ai rencontre votre frere,
allant (going) k la poste. 6. Les enfants bien ^lev^s, ob^issent
a leiirs mattres, sans murmurer. V. Ces themes^ faits sans re-
flexion, sont remplis de fautes. 8. Des le90U8 apprises a la h4te,
sont bient6t oubli^es. 0. Ces compositions, ecrites avec soin,
scront couronn6es par le maitre. 10. Des nations soumises de-
puis longtemps a un pouvoir arbitraire, sont iucapables de se
gouverner elles-m^mes.
Arbitraire, adj. arbitrary ; couronner, a. v. to crown ; crtdnUf n. f. fear ;
d^ms, adv. since, for ; Sleoer^ a. v. to raise, to bring up ; faute, n. f mis-
take ; gouverner f a. v. to govern ; hdte, n. f., d 2a hdUy in baste, in a hur-
ry ; incapable, adj. incapable ; intirei, n. m. interest ; kngUmpe, adv. a
long time ; moAire, n. m. master : murmurer, n. v. to murmur, to grum-
ble ; nation, n. f. nation ; cheir, n. v. to obey ; oublier, a. v. to forget ;
pouvoir, n. m. power ; riflexion, n. f. reflection ; remplir, a. v. to fill ;
reneontrer, a. v. to meet ; sans, [>rep. without ; Seigneur^ n. m. Lord ;
toin, n. m. care ; toumeltre, a. v. to subject.
LIX.— 1. How manj participles are there ? 2. What does the present participle de-
note ? Does it vary ? 8. What does the past participle express ?
THB ADVERB. 203
INVARIABLE WORDS.
§ LX. — The Adverb.
1. Adverbs raay express manner, place, time, order, quantity
comparison, affirmation, negation, or doubt.
2. The adverb, being equivalent to a preposition and its ob-
ject, can have no complement ; its sense is complete without it,
A few adverbs, however, retain the regimen of the adjectives
from which they are formed ; as, cor^ortn^ment, anterieurement^
<fec. ; conjbrmement a la loi^ conformably to law ; anterieurement
au deluge previously to the deluge.
3. A few adjectives are sometimes used as adverbs : cher, dear ;
court, short ; haut, high ; jastej just, are some of them ; as, cod-
ter cher, to cost dear ; couper court, to cut short ; parler kaut, to
speak loud ; chanter juste, to sing in tune.
4. Several words together, performing the part of an adverb,
are called an adverbial phrase {locution adverbiale) ; as, li Pin-
9iant, a present, au contraire, en general, tout-a-rheure, <fec.
List of Adverbs that are frequently used.
5. (a.) A Vinstant, apres, a present, assez, au contraire, au-
jourd*hui, aussi, autant, beaucoup, bien^ bientdt, combien^ comment,
de bonne heure, d'abord, dija, demain, encore, ensemble^ ensuite,
fort, guere, id, jamais, la, maintenant, mal, mieux, fnoins, ne, oil,
partout, pas, point, peu, plus, que (ne que), quelquefois, souvent,
tantdt, tard, toujours, tout, tout-a-Pheure, tres, volontiers, y.
These have been given in Part Second.
0. (ft.) AUleurs, elsewhere. Davaniage, more.
Alors, then. Dedans, within.
Auparcmanty before. Dehon^ without.
Aumtot^ immediately. JMtomuUa, henceforth.
AtUr^oiff formerly. Deswus^ under.
Autrement, otherwise. Desms^ upon.
LX. — 1. What may adverbs express* 2. Can an adverb have a oomplement? 8. Are
there any adjectives that are used adverbially ? 4. How do yon call several words per-
forining the part of an adverb ? 5. Name some of the adverbs that have been given ic
Part Second.
204 TBM ADYXBB.
Dartnawud^ henceforth. PbutM^ sooner.
Enfin, in fine, at last. Platdt, mther.
Bia-y yesterday. Preaquey almost.
Jaditf of old. Seulemenif only.
LoiUy far. Si, so.
Mhney even. Tim/, so much.
7. A great many adverbs are formed from adjectives, by the
addition of the syllable ment. When the adjective ends with a
vowel, ment is added to the masculine, when it ends with a con«
sonant, to the feminine, termination of the adjective ; as,
PoUt polite ; poUmaUy politely.
Frot, tme ; vnmneniy truly.
DouZf douee, soft ; doueemeniy softly ; mildly ; gently.
FhtnCy franchet frank ; franehementy fnuikly.
Prenuer^ prmdirt^ first ; premhemady first, in the first place.
8. Adjectives ending in n^, change nt into mment ; as,
Prudent^ prudent ; prudanmady prudently.
Except:
Lenty slow; lerUemerUy slowly.
PrSterUf present ; prSsentemaU, presently.
DiCTtE 28.
(Point oat the Adverbs in this Ezerobe.)
1. Autrefois je travaillais peu, maintenant je travaillo davan-
tage, et je suis plus content. 2. Dorenavant je serai moins
confiant. 3. Je vous permets de jouer, mais faites votre devoir
auparavant. 4. 11 faut premierement faire son devoir ; secondc-
ment, il ne faut prendre que des plaisirs permis. 5. J'ai seulc-
ment voulu vous dire quMl ne faut pas commettre d'exces. 6.
Les yeux admirent d'abord la beaute ; ensuite les sens la desi-
rent ; le coeur s'y livre apres. 7. Non-seuleraent cela, elle nous
enivre, elle nous egare. 8. Voici la lettre ; Targent est dedans.
9. Avancez la table, et mettez votre cahier dessus. 10. VoiU
votre ch≤ vos gants sont dessous. 11. Enfin,nous voila prets
& YHuX iB the meftning of aUl&urit fte. 7. How are adverlMi fonned from a^Jec*
tlTes ? 8l How is the ending nt changed ?
THE PRSPOSITIOlk* 2011
d partir. 12. Je ne lui ai pas parle; je ne I'ai pas m«nie vu.
13. Yous paiiez si haut qu'on vous entendrait dans la rue. 14.
Vous avez pay 6 eel a trop cher. 15. Croyez-vous qu'elle chante
juste? 16. Je vous dis franchement que je n'en sais rien. 17.
11 faut lui parler poliinent, doucement. 18. Doncement! vous
allez trop vite.
Avanoer^ a. y. to advance, to bring forward ; (MU^ n. m. shawl ; eon-
fioml, adj . confident, sanguine ; confiding ; kgca-er^ a. y. to mislead, to
lead astray ; miwer^ a. v. to intoxicate ; to excite ; exch^ n. m. excess ;
jouefi n. y. to play ; Uvrer (m), pr. y. to give one's self up ; permia^ p. p.
permitted ; that ate allowed ; prH^ adj. ready ; unSj n. m» i
§ LXI. — ^Thb Preposition^
1. The preposition, expressing the relation between two words,
must necessarily be followed by a word which is the object of
the preposition. The preposition and its object form what is
called an indirect object {complement indirect).
2. Several words together, performing the function of a prepo*
sition, are called a prepositional phrase [locution prSposHive),
List of Prepositions that are frequently used*
3. (a.) Af apres^ avant, avec^ cheg, dans, de, derriere, devant,
en, par, pour, sous, sur. These have been given in Part Second.
4. (&.) ^eau««<2e, on account of. ^mnron, about.
A c6U A, by the side of, by. Ihccqai, except.
A VSgard A, with regard to, Faute de, for want of.
Auprit de, near, close by. Bora, out.
Autour de, around. Jutque, till, until, as far as.
Oontre, against. Mcdgri, in spite of.
D^puis, since. Poanm, among.
D68, from. Par rapport a, with regard to.
Durant, during. Pendant, during.
Enfaoewr de, by favor of. Pres de, near, close by.
Entre, between. Qucmi d, as to.
Envers, towards. Sans, without.
LXL— 1. By what mnst a preposition be followed? How do yon call the preposition
•nd the word that follows it? 8. What name do yon give to several words, performing
the function of a preposition ? 8. Name some of the prepositions that bare been given
iQ P. XL 4. What is the English for d cause det See,
206 THB OONJUNOnON.
f*V [wcordingto. Fer. towarf.
SuhaU, ) . Fw-a-vu, opposite.
DiCTftB 29.
(PotBt oat the Prepoeitions in this Bxereise.)
1. La teire tonrne antour du soleil, et la lune tourne autour
de la terre. 2. Je n^ai pas voulu sortir avec lui. 3. Depuis ce
jour, il croit que je suis l&che conire lui. 4. A cause <le cela, il
ue vient plus ici. 5. Eotre uous, je n^en suis pas flu^e. 6. Panni
tons ces gens-li^ je n'ai pas un seul ami. 7. Voire ami s^est tres-
bien comport^ en vers nous, d. II est venu nous voir pendant
Tet^. 9. Durant Tet^ nous sommes rest^ a la campagne. 10.
II demeure hors de la ville. 11. Autrefois il demeurait aupr^
de la banque. 12. Je I'ai rencontr^ ce matin pres d^ici. 13.
Son frere demeure vis-a-vis de Fhdtel de ville. 14. Nous de-
meurons k c6t6 de P^glise. 15. Ne sortez pas sans parapluie.
16. Le vent a tourne vers Touest; il va pleuvoir. 17. Suivant
votre avis je ne devrais pas y aller. 18. Par rapport a cela, je
n'ai riei^i vous dire. 19. II faut d^penser selon ses moyens.
20. Soyez ^conome cbez vous, prodigue envers les indigents, et
fiddle a regard de vos amis.
Avis, n. m. opinion ; advice ; diperuar^ a. & n. v. to spend ; Sconome, adj.
economical ; <^, n. m. summer ; fdeh^^ adj. angry ; vexed ; sorry ; genx^
n. m. pi. people ; hotd de vilUy n. m. city-hall ; mdigenlf n. m. poor ; lune,
n. f. moon ; moifen, n. m. means ; cueat, n. m. west ; prodigue, adj. prodi-
gal ; unsparing ; reRcmdrer, a. v. to meet ; toteU, n. m. sun ; toumer^ a. &
n. V. to turn.
§ LXIL — The Conjunction.
1. Conjunctions are copulative, adversative, disjunctive, ex-
planatory, circumstantial, conditional, causal, transitive, or de-
terminative.
2. Several words together, performing the part of a conjunc-
tion, are called a conjunctive phrase {locution conjonctive) ; as,
jxjirce que^ aussitdt qtie^ he,
LXIL— 1. What kind of conJanoUons are there ? 8. What name do yoa give to Bey<
eral word^ performf ng Uie part of a conjunction ?
THE OONJUNOTION. 20*1
List of Oonjunctions that are frequently used,
3. (a.) (7ar, et^ mats, ni^ ou, parce que^ paurquoi, qtuind, que,
. These have been given in Part Second.
4. (6.) Jfin que, in order that. Ju»qu*d ce que, until.
Atntif thus. LorsquCf when.
Ainti que, i ^^^i og NianmonUy nevertheless.
Ausii bim que, ) Pendant que, while.
A moma que, unless. PourtarU, however.
Aussitdt que, as soon as. Pourvu que^ provided.
Avant que, hefore. Puuque, since.
Bien que, although. Quoique, although.
appendant, however. Sane que, unless.
jigmis que, since. Tani que, as long as.
Die que, as soon as. Ibndie que, while.
DiCTfiE 30.
(^otnt oat the Gonjnnciions in this Ezerciae.)
1. Je me suis trorap^ ainsi que vous, cependant j'espere r6*
parer ma faute. 2. Lorsqu'on est jeune, on est confiant. 3. U
faut parti r, car I^heure est arriv^e. 4. Je ferai comme vous vou-
drez. 5. Neanmoins j'attendrai jusqu'^ demain, si vous )e desi-
rez; afin que votre ami puisse veuir avec nous. 6. Aussitot
qu'il sera venu, noua parti rons. 7. D^s que nous serous arrives,
nous irons trouver ces personnes. 8. Lisons pendaut que nous
attendons. 9. £tudiez tandis que vous etes jeunes, quand vuus
serez grtinds, vous n^aurez peut-^tre ni le temps, ni les in§mes
occasions que vous avez a present, de vous livrer a Tetude. 10.
Bien que vous soyez instruit, vous ne serez pas recherche a rooins
que vous ne soyez utile et m^me necessaire. 11. Je le ferai,
puisque vous le voulez.
Omfiant, adj. confiding ; presumptuous ; espirer, a. v. to hope ; inatruit,
p. p. informed, learned ; Ikn-er (««), pr. v. to apply to ; nSeeasaire, adj. ne-
cessary ; occanon, n. f. opportunity ; persmne, n. f. person ; peut-Stre, adv.
perhaps ; rechercher, a. v. to seek after ; to desire ; to solicit ; rSparer, a. v.
to repair ; to redeem ; to make amends for ; tromper (m), pr. v. to he
mistaken, to make a mistake ; utile, adj. useful.
8. Name some of the eonJaneUoDS that haTe been giyen in P. IL 4 What Is the
Knglfsh for ajtn que t kc
208 WORDS coimoN to both lanouagks.
§ LXIIL— Trb Ihtxrjkctiok.
The principal inteijectioiis are
Bal hal expreBsingsurpriM. ^J«/[«lencell toimposesileiica
^ / ah ! ) Ckut I ) hist ! ) ^
AU I oh \ V denoting grief. HOd / hallo ! to call.
BUat ! alas ! ) Bk him I now then ! to interrogate;
^y, ""W \ admimtion. Ja Wen / weU tiien I [ *^ ^""^'^
Ah! ah! ) ) bi
HI fyl aversion.
surprise.
§ LXiy. — Words that are comhon to both Languages.
Many words (principally derived from the Latin) are common
to both the French and English languages. These are generally
transferred from the former to the latter, either without altera-
tion, or with such slight changes as are necessary to conform
them to the English oithography. We shall indicate the most
important of these, and give the English only when it differs from
the French.
It mut not be Inferred that aU noani bavlng any of the tenntnatlons here indicated
in the one langaage, are the Bame in the other. It la the eaae to a great extent; neTer-
theleoa, there are many ezoeptitms.
1. Nouns ending in affe ; as,
Age, m. age. Herbage, m. Page, m. k f. Ragey f.,
Cbge, f. Image, f. Plumage^ m. and many others.
Oourage, m. Manage^ m. marriage. Potage m.
Rem. — ^The nouns in a^e are masculine, except capey image^
page (of a book), plage^ rage.
2. Nouns in sion^ xion, ction^ tion ; as,
Pennon^ f. Fktiony f. SUuaHon, f.
JUJUxkm, f. reflection. Omdition, f. Station, f.,
Faetion^ f. NaUon, f. and many others.
Rem. — The nouns in ton are feminine, except bastion (a mili-
tary term).
3. Nouns in ance^ anse, ence, ense ; as,
LXIY.— 1. Name some of the nonns in age^ that are common ta both languages. Of
what gender are they? 2. Name some of the nouns in ioti, that are common to both
langaagea. Of what gender are they ?
WORDS COMMON TO BOTH LANGUAGES; 209
Bdkmeey f. Dcaeue, f. dance. Silence^ m
Oiroonstance, f. circumstance. Qmtcience, f. Di/ense, f. defence,
Omstancef f. constancy. Patience^ f. and ma ty others.
Kem. — These noiins are all feminitie, except silence.
4. Nouns in ant and ent ; as,
Ascendant, m. PSdani, m. pedant.
Gnrespondant, m. correspondent. 6bn/i(ien^, m. confidant.
Bependanif m. dependant. PrStidentj m. president, and many others.
Rbm. — ^These are masculine, except dent^ tooth ; mrdent, ir-
regular tooth ; jument, mare, and gent, race.
5. Nouns in a^t«, changed into acy ; as,
Arutocratiet f. aristocracy. Diplomaiie^ f. diplomacy.
Dhnoeratie, f. democracy. ThSoerdUie, f. theocracy.
Rem. — ^These are feminize.
6. The terminat^D ^ is often changed into ty ; as,
BeauU^ f. beanty. Bofdk, f. bounty. QuahU, f. quality.
Rem. — ^These are feminine, excepf p&te, Stdy cdtSy comite, thS^
traits, comtS.
1. The termination re is changed into ^r; as,
Chambre, f. chamber. Dhastre^ m. disaster. Tigre^ m. tiger.
Chartre^ m. charter. Ordre, m. order.
Rem. — ^These are mostly masculine.
8. Nouns in eur have changed eur into or ; as,
Ardeur, f. ardor. Homuur^ m. honor. Vigueur^ f. vigor.
C^mdlez^*, f. candor. Liqueur^ f. liquor.
Rem. — Nouns in eur are feminine, except bonheur, happiness ;
malkeur, misfortune ; labeur, toil ; honneur, honor ; dishonneur,
dishonor; cceur, heart, and pleurs, tears: and those denoting
male beings ; as, docteur, auieur, Ssc.
9. Nouns in sme or ste, drop the finail e ; as,
OaUchiane, m. catechism. Artiste^ m. artist.
GathoUeismej m. Catholicism. OcUickiste, m. catechigt^
Paganisme, m. paganism. T^errorMte, m. terrorist.
8. Name Bome of the noiuis in <ineet an$e^ anoA, tfn««, tbat are oommon to both Ian-
gaagM. Of what gender are they ? 4. Name some of the noans in ant and «n^ that are
eomnaon to both langu(«e& Of what gender are they? 5. How is the French termina-
tion atU changed in English ? Of what gender are these nonns ? 6. How is the termi-
nation U often changed ? Of what gender are these nouns ? 7. How is the terminatioQ
re changed ? Of what gender are they? a How is the termination eur changed ? 0«
what gender are tbey ? i^. What becomes of the French terminations iwne and ietef
810 WORDS COMMON TO BOTH LAIWUAOES.
Rem. — These are masculine, except liste^ list ; batiste^ camlric
10. Nouns in al / as,
Ogtoralt m. corporal. Cbrdinal, m, GhiSral, m. general.
Rem. — These are masculine.
11. Adjectives ending in French in eZ, iel, ien, often end in
English in a/, ialj ian; as,
hemd, eternal. Permmnd, personal. Mutkien, mofiician.
FraUmdj fraternal. EmnUd, essential.
Palemdf paternal. ItaUm^ Italian.
12. Adjectives in ant and ent; as,
OanMant. PatiaU. Prvdtnt.
13. Adjectives in able and ible ; as,
OapdbU, htdupenuhU. OorrupUbU, PombU,
The ending able is often changed into ible ; as,
FaiaabUy feasible. RapoiuabUj responsible.
14. The ending if is changed into ive ; as,
AUmttfj attentive. '^n^f, active.
15. The ending eux is changed into ous ; as,
Cowrageux^ courageous. Fameux, famous. Laborieux, laborious.
16. The French ending &tre is equivalent to the English ush^
added to the names of colors ; as,
SUmekdlrej whitish. Brundlre, brownish. Rougedire^ reddish.
Bleudlre, bluish. Jaundlre, yellowish. Verddtre, greenish.
11. The English termination less, is often expressed in French
by the preposition sans^ without; as.
Sans aryenl, moneyless. SoMfruU, fruitless.
Sam eapoir^ hopeless. 8an» secours, helpless.
18. The adverbial termination ment is equivalent to ly : (see
§ LX, 7.)
or what gender are these noana f 10. Name some of the noana in al that are common
to both lui^agea. Of what gender u>e they ? 11. How are the terminations «£, id, ien.^
changed in English f 13. Name some of the adjectives in a^t and enl, that are common
to both la.ngUHge8. 18. Name some adjectives in able and ihle^ that are common to both
languages? 14. How is the a^J^ctive ending (^clianged in English? 10. What becomes
of the adjective ending €U06 1 IS. What is the Frencli a<\jective ending Atre equivalent
to in English ? 17. How is the En^r^ish at^. termination feaa, often expressed In French f
RULES FOR USING THR ACOBNTS^ 211
DiCTftE 31.
(Point oat, in tbe following Ezercise, the words that come under f LXIY., and refer
Itch word to its proper bead.)
1. II n'y a gu^re de difference entre spn age et le mien. 2.
La prudence gagne plus de batailles que la valeur. 3. La
patience est aussi n^cessaire au general que le courage. 4. Le
silence vaut souvent mieux que Teloquence. 5. C'est une re-
flexion bien juste. 6. La condition de cette nation est d^plora-
ble. 7. Les circonstances sont avantageuses. 8. Votre corres^
pondant est un pedant. 9. En Angleterre, le pouvoir de la
couronne est tempore par Tinflnence de I'aristocratie. 10. Le
tigre royal est un animal tres-feroce. 11. Votre ami est affable.
12. L'affabilite est une quality estimable. 13. La bonte du
cceur vaut mieux que la beauts. 14. Get artiste est italien ; il
est bon musicien. 15. Vous ^tes courageux, mais vous n'Stes
pas prudent. 16. La prudence est indispensable k celui qui veut
reussir. 17. C'est une chose essentielle. 18. Ce que vous dites
n'est pas possible. 1 9. La chose n'est pas faisable. 20. II est
d'un teint janndtre. 21. Quand on est sans amis, sans argent,
sans espoir, la vie paralt un fardeau excessif et insupportable.
BatmUe^ n. f. battle ; couronne, n. f. crown ; entre, prep, between ; es-
potTy n. m. hope ; fardeau^ n. m. burden ; firoce, adj. ferocious; gagner,
a. V. to gain ; nicessaire, adj. necessary ; pouvoir, n. m. power ; rhusir,
n. y. to succeed ; teint^ n. m. complexion ; temperer, a. v. to temper ;
valoir mieux, n. v. to be better ; vie, n. f. life.
§ LXV. — Rules for Using the Accents.
1. The Ojcute accent (') is placed over the e,
(1.) When, at the end of a syllable, or before final 8 added by
inflection^ it has the sound of the English a ; as, repeie, verite^
repeteSy verites. But in pied^ clef, chantez, donner, the e, though
sounded like the English a, has no accent.
Rem. — E, forming a syllable by itself, is always sounded like
5, and thus always has the acute accent; as, epi, icu^ reelu,
LXV.— 1. When U the acate accent used, in tfao first place ? When is tbe e always
■oanded like a, and what accent moat It have then?
212 RULBS FOR UBINe TfiS ACCRHTB.
(2.) When it is followed by e ; aa, /«e, ^^, creej crei.
(3.) When it precedes ^ ; aa, />i«^, cwte^,
2. The yrav0 accent ( ^ ) ^^ ^^9
(1.) Over e^ preceding any comonaRt (except ^), followed by
e unaccented ; as, Ihfe^ mk^ ehdre ; also before two consonants,
when both belong to the nnaecented syUaUe ; as, f^^<.
(2.) Over the e of the temination et, when the « is an essen-
tial part of the word ; as^ aprU^ exei9 : to disdngaish it from
the accidental terminatioji €$; as^ le« Upres, to chantei,
(3.) To distinguish
A, to, atj from a, has ; ot, where^ from ou, or ;
lA, therty from la, the^ her ; j>tSy/rom, from dks, of the.
(4.) Over fo, c'^pc^ ^^^^ holhy voila,
3. The eireumfiex accent ( "" ) is used over a long vowel, after
which a letter baa been suppressed ; as in dffe^ epitre^ tite^ for-
merly written aage^ epiatre, teste.
Rbm. — No dot is placed over the i having the circumflex acceoti
but the dieresis takes the place of the circumflex accent in hav-
meSj haites,
DiCTtK 32.
Plaoe the required eooente over the Towele Ib the followtng worda, aeoordliif to th*
preceding rales. The italio e bae the eoand of an Engliah a; e^ marked short {(i\ ia
unaooented.
* D«c«l«, * deced^r, * penttre, * p^nf tr«r, ■ penetre, • c\e, ' clc^
•d^, Me, "des, "des, »d«, »cl<«, '^ete, "ebene, "blf, *Mude,
"diudicr, "«tudif, ^rtudi^z, ** clever, "elev*-, "clevcz, •*cleve,
••deves, "elevent, *^«peler, "cpel«, "epelle, ** premier, '^pre-
miere, ** amenera, " acheterez, •* manegS, •* epitre (epistola),
"•fete (/e«/Mm), " naitre (mr^cere), " pate ( jxwto), "pate, ^patee,
*^ agree, *'cree, ^pensee, **proce8, **apre8, ^progres, *^ protege,
"^0X1 (where), ^ou (or), ••la(Aer), "la(<Aere), "a(Aa«), "a (to),
"pres, "pre, **pres, " pretre (/)re«6y<er).
When Is the acute accent need. In the second place? In the third? 2. When la the
grave accent used. In the flrat place? Intheaeoond? In tlie third? Inthefoarth?
a When is the circumflex accent used ?
PART FOURTH.
PROGRESSIVE LESSONS CONTINUED.
83. TRENTE-TEOISIEME LE^ON.
95. The following are Idioms, in wbich to be is rendered bj
avmr, and the English adjective expressed by a noun, before
which the article is omitted.
To BB iDOmif eoldj hungry, thirsty, Atoir ehaud, froid, fam, toifi aom-
deqfy, afraid, aahamed, right, torong. . meil, peur, honie, raiton, tort.
What i* the matter with gou f ) j^* m
WhataiUyoat | «u««o,MM.^
NolMng u the matter tpith me, Je tCai Hen.
Are you cold f A vea-vons i frold ?
I am neither cold nor warm. Je n'ai ni froid ni chaud.
I am very sleepy. J'ai bien* sommeil.
He is hungry and thirsty. II a £aim et self.
Are you afndd of the dog 1 Avez-vous peur du chien 1
Am I right in saying tliat ? Ai-je laison de dire cela? (xcri.)
You are wrong to say so. Vous ave£ tort de le dire.
96f The French say ^^he has the hair hlack,^ for
ffi8 hair it Uatf'., 11 a Us cheimtx noirs.
Her eyes are blue. Elle a les yeuz bleus.
^ BefbN a noim, bieik (Joe 82) Is iiB«d, ud not trU,
214
tiuemte-troisiAme LE9OK.
(a<) 7b have a pain or a tore.
I have a pain in my eye.
What Ik the matter with your hands ?
My hands are cold.
They are sore.
I have a headache, the headache.
The toothache.
A sore throat.
(b.) Jh hurt^ to pom 9onubody.
To do good to wmebody.
My fingers pain me.
We do good to those that hurt as.
Avoir mat (ri).
J'ai mal It I'ceil.
Qu'avez-vous aux mains?
J'ai froid aux mains.
J'y ai mal.
J'ai mal k la tete, le mal de t^te.
Mal aux dents, le mal de dents.
Mal It la gorge, le mal de gorge.
iFaire mal k quetqu^un.
Fnre du mal d quelqu'un.
Faire du hien a qudqviun.
Les doigts me font mal.
Nons iaisons da bien It ceux qui
nous font du mal.
VOCABULAIRB 33.
Cold.
Heat.
Le froid.
Le chaud.
Le sommeil.
Kvil. Le mal.
Wrong. Le tort.
A hair. Un cheveu.
The hair. Les cheveux.
The eye, the eyes. L*oeil, les yeux.
The arm. Le bras.
The finger.
Bight.
Ledoigt.
Hunger.
Thirst.
Fear.
Reason ; right.
Shame.
The head.
The tooth.
The throat,
llie hand.
Droit ifldj.) Left.
Lafi&im.
Lasoif.
Lapeur.
Laraison.
La hontc.
Ltttate.
La dent.
La gorge.
La main.
Gauche (oefr .)
Analyse 33.
1. Elle a les cheveax noirs. 2. J'ai froid aux mains. 3. .Ty ai mal.
EXKRCICE 33.
1. Qu'avez-vou8 f 2. J'ai faira et soif. 3. Qu'a votre fr^re ?
4. II a froid. 5. Avez-vous sommeil ? 6. Je n'ai pas sommeil,
mais j'ai chaud. 7. Ce jeune homme a-t-il honte de parlert
8. H n'a ni peur ni honte. 9. Ai-je tort de dire celaF 10.
trskte-troisiAme UE9ON. 215
V0U8 avez raison de le dire. 11. Votre oncle a-t-il les cheveux
Doirs? 12. II a les cheveux gris. 13. Votre cousine a-t-elle
les jeux brans ? 14. Elle a les yenx bleus. 15. Qu'avez-vous
k Tceil gauche? 16. J*y ai mal. 17. Qu'avez-vous aux mains?
18. J'ai froid aux mains. 19. Les doigts vous font-ils mal ? 20.
lis me/oDt mal. 21. Qu'a votre ami? 22. II a mal k la tete.
23. Cette petite filk a-t-elle le mal de gorge ? 24. £lle a mal
aux dents. 25. Avez-vous peur de cet homme? 26. Je n'ai
pas peur de lui. 27. Vous fait-il du mal ? 28. Au contraire,
il me fait du bien.
Th£:me 33.
1. What ails you? 2. Nothing at all. 3. Are you hungry?
4. I am thirsty. 5. I am too warm. 6. Is your brother cold ?
7. He is very sleepy. 8. Is he ashamed to say so ? 9. He is
neither ashamed nor afraid. 10. He is right 11. Yon are
wrong to speak of it. 12. That child's hair is too long. 13.
My niece's eyes are blue. 14. What is the matter with your
right hand? 15. I have a pain in it. 16. My left arm pains
me also. 17. My fingers are very cold; I cannot write. 18.
Has your sister a headache ? 19. She has the toothache. 20.
My aunt has a sore throat. 21. Why are you afiaid of that
man ? 22. You are wrong to be afraid of him. 23. He does
not hurt anybody. 24. He does good even (meme) to those that
hurt him.
DiCTiE 33.
(See Prefhce, p. 6. For tbe meBniog of the Frencb words in these ExtreiSes, the sta-
dent is referred to the Yocabalsiy at the end of the book.)
De la Creation du Monde,
Dieu a cr66 le monde eh six jonrs. D'abord, il fit de rien la
mati^re ; puis, il en forma les difii^rentes parties qui composent
I'univers.
Le premier jour, il dit : " Que la lumihre s<nt faite^ et aussi
t6t la lumiere fut faite.
216 TRRNTJE-QUATBlftMS LB^ON.
Le deuxieme jour, il fit le firmament, auquel il doima le nom
de ciel.
Le troisieme jour, il nuuembla dans un mtme lieu lea eaux qui
couvraient la terre, et il donna a oe grand ainas d^eau le nom de
fner ; ensuite, il commanda que la terre produii^t des plantes et
des arbres de toute esp^ce.
Le quatri^me jour, il fit le soleil et la iune, et tous les astres
du firmament
Le oinqui^me jour, il crea les oiseaux qui yolent en Pair, et les
poissons qui nagent dans les eauz.
Le sizieme jour, api^ avoir produit les animaux terrestres, il
fit Adam, le premier homme, ^ son image et a sa ressemblance.
Dieu, voulant donner k Adam une compagne semblable a lui,
forma Eve, la premiere femme et la mere de tons les hommes.
84. TBENTE^QUATBliiME LEgON.
Wt To BB NBCB88ART, MUR. FaLLOIB, tTT^tnip. V. (P. III. § Uli.)
Rem. — The subject of the verb must becomes the indirect ob-
ject of the Yexhfalloir
He must go there. II lui fiaut y aller.
What must I do ? Que pae faut-il £Eure ?
What must one do in order to be Que faut-il fidre pour ^tre respeo-
respectedf t^f
98t To BB THBBB. Y AVOIR, tTT. imp, V. (P. HI. § lit.)
Ib there anyhody in the parlor ? Y a-t-il quelqu'un d^ns le jaloa f
There is nobody. H n*y a per«>nne.
What is in that barrel f Qu'y a-t-il dans oe baril ?
There is nothing in it. B n'y a rien dedans.
What is the matter yonder f Qu'y a-t-il llt-bas ?
VV0 Sbvbbal. Plusibcbs.
There are several ladies in the par- II y a plusienrs dames dans le sa-
lor. Ion.
TBEKTE-QUATRlftME LE^ON.
217
There are several.
Several of your friends.
Sons, A FEW.
Are there a few more pencils ?
There are still a few.
There are onlj a few more.
Scmewhtre.
NMien^ not anywhere.
Are yon going anywhere?
I am not.
like, at.
like that.
Have yon a ring like this one f .
I have one like it.
As you say.
Rem. — Asy after a comparative
by comme^ but by que.
As early as usual.
Earlier than usual.
n y en a plusieurs.
Plusieurs de vos amis.
QUBLQUX, QUBLQUn.
QUKLQUXS-VKSf/ent. qvblquxs-umbi.
Y a-t-il encore quelques crayons ?
n y en a encore quelques-uns.
II n'y en a gu^replus, or plus gu6re.
(^udguepari.
Ne nuUejHirt,
Allez-votts quelque part f
Je ne vais nulle part.
Comme cela.
Avez-vous xine hague oomme oell»>
df
J'en ai une pareille.
Comme vous le dites.
adverb, most not be rendered
D'aussi bonne heure qu')i rordt-
naire.
De meilleure heure qu')i Tordinaire*,
YOOABULAIRE 34.
The parlor.
The reading-
room.
The arm-chair.
The painting.
The picture.
The parasol.
Thefitn.
To he necessary.
Must.
Some, a few.
Somewhere.
Like, as.
Quiet, still.
As usual.
Within, in it.
Le salon.
I Le cahinet de
I lecture.
Le fiiuteuil.
- Le tahleau.
Le parasol.
L'^ventail.
The dining-roouL La salle k manger.
llie library. La biblioth^ue.
The chest of [i^^^^de.
drawers. )
A print. Une estampe.
An engraving. Une gravure.
A finger-ring. Une bague.
[ Falloir (trr. tngj.) To be there.
) Quelque (adj.)
Quelques-uns (p.)
Quelque part.
Comme (adv.)
Tranquille (adj.)
A I'ordinidre (adv.) Usually.
Dedans (adv.) Tonder.
10
Several.
Only a few more.
Nowhere.
Like; similar*
Usual.
Y avoir (trr. twip.)
Plusieurs (a. ^/w.)
Ne..gufereplus.
Ne.. nulle part.
Pareil, lie (adj.)
Ordinaire (adj.)
Ordinairement.
Di-bas (advJ)
218 TRKNTS-QUATRlftBfB LE^OK.
Analyse 84.
1. II Ini &ut travailler *
2. T a-t-il qnelquea crayons dans le t roir?
8. n y en a qaelqaes-ans.
EZERCICE 84.
1. Que me fant-il fairet 2. II vons faut travailler. 8. Oh
lui faut-il aller f 4. B lui faut aller chercher du papier. 5. Faut-
il enyoyer chercher de Tencre f 6. II faut en envoyer chercher.
7. Que faut-il &ire pour apprendre le fran^ais f 8. 11 iaut etu-
dier beaucoup. 9. Y a-t-il du monde dans le salon ! 10. II y
a plusieuTS de vos amis. 11. Y a-t-il des fauteuils dans la salle
i, manger? 12. II y en a plusieurs. 13. Qu'y a-t-il dans cette
commode? 14. II n*y a rien dedans. 15. Y a-t-il de beaux
tableaux dans cette ^glise ? 16. II y en a quelques-uns. 17. Y
a-t-il de belles estampes dans le cabinet de lecture ? 18. II y en
a quelques-unes. 19. Allez-vous quelque part? 20. Je ne vais
nulle part. 21. Avez-vous plus d^un eventail? 22. J'en ai plu-
sieurs. 23. Yotre soeur a-telle un parasol comme celui-ci ? 24.
Elle en a un tout pareil. 25. Avez-vous une bague comme la
mienne ? 26. J'en ai une pareille a la votre. 27. Venez-vous
d'aussi bonne heure qu*ai Pordinaire ? 28. Je viens de meilleure
heure qu'a I'ordinaire.
ThAme 34.
1. What must I do? 2. You must remain still. 3. What
must he do ? 4. He must learn his lesson. 5. Must I go any-
where? 6. You must go to the bank. 7. Yon must go there
earlier than usual. 8. In order to be respected, one must behave
well. 9. There is some one in the parlor, who wishes to see you.
10. There are several fine engravings in the dining-room. 11.
Is there more than one arm-chair in the reading-room? 12.
There are several. 13. Are there a few prints in that chest of
* /? l8 the apparent, and travailUr^ the real, sahject
TRBNTS-OIVQUlftME USgON. 219
drawers! 14. There are a few in it. 15. There are a few ^ue
paintings in that church ; you should go and see them {il faut
alter les voir), 16. Have you a few more fans like this one?
17. We have still a few. 18. We have but a few more. 19.
Have you a ring like that one? 20. I have one like it. 21.
My sister^s parasol is like that one. 22. Does your brother go
anywhere this evening? 23. He usually goes to the library in
the evening, but he does not go anywhere to-night. 24. Do you
come later than usual ? 25. We come at the usual hour.
DiOTftB 34.
DSsobeissance de nos Premiers Parents.
Adam et Eve furent places dans un lieu d61icieux, nomm6
Paradis terrestre. Dieu leur permit de manger de tons les fruits
qui s'y trouvaient, except^ de ceux d'un seul arbre, auquel il leui
defendit de toucher.
Cre^s dans I'^tat d'innocence, ils devaient y goflter un bonheur
pur, mais ils perdirent leur bonheur par leur desobeissance. Lu-
cifer, prince des demons, pr^cipite du ciel, en punition de son
orgueil, et jaloux du bonheur de nos premiers parents, r^lut de
les perdre avec leur post^rit^. II se cacha sous la figure d'un
serpent, et persuada a Eve de manger du fruit defend u, lui pro-
mettant la science du bien et du mal. £)ve mangea du fruit fa-
tal, et en offrit k Adam, qui partagea sa desobeissance. Aussi-
t6t Dieu les chassa du Paradis terrestre, et les condamna au tra-
vail, aux mis^res, aux maladies et k la mort.
86. TRENTE-CINQUlilME LEgON.
lOOt (a.) Ce (P. II. 66) is used as the subject of the verb
itre, in the sense of that person^ or that thing ; as.
Who is that ? Qui est-ce ?
He is a relative of mine. C'est nn de me8 parents.
220 TRENTK-CINQUlftUB LE9ON.
Are those yoar couaiiig t Soni-oe vos cotuinB f
They are. Ce sont eux
Is that your book f Est^oe votre livre ?
It is. Ce rest. (P. U. 68.)
(6.) Ce is also used before itre^ instead of the personal pronouns
t/, elle, when itre is followed by a nonn, or word standing in the
place of a noun ; as,
I know him ; At is a respectable Je le connais ; e'est nn homme
man. comme il faut.
Take this book ; U is the best. Prenes oe livre, c'est le meillenr.
101* (a.) Bit-ce que^ placed before the subject of the verb,
forms an interrogative sentence ; as,
Do I say that f Est-ce que je dis cela ?
(6.) This interrogative form is generally used when the verb is
in the first person of the indicative present ; and necessarily so,
when the verb, in the first person, has only one syllable, or ends
in^tf.
Do I speak ? Est-ce que je parle ? (or Parli$-je f )
Do I read ? Est-ce que je lis f
Do I eat ? E8t>ce que je mange ?
What do I see ? Qu' est-ce que je vois ?
Whom do I see ? Qui est-ce que je vcns ?
Rem. — The following eight verbs are exceptions : aller^ avoir^
devoir, dire, itrej pouvoir, eavoir, voir. These may be constmed
either way; as, JSst-ce queje vaie? or Vais-jef &c.
102* Imperatiyx Mood, Second Person. (P. lU. § Hv. 10.)
(a.) In the imperative mood, second person, the subject is
omitted, and the objective pronouns, when the sentence is af-
firmative, are placed, with a hyphen, after the verb, in the same
order as in English. Instead of me and te, moi and toi are used,
which elide the vowels before eiu
Hand me the bread. Passez-moi le pain.
Hand it to me. Fassez-le-moi.
Give me some. Give him some. Donnez-m'en. Donnes-lui-en.
TBKNTE-OINQUIJfeMS LK9OV.
221
Go there. Allez-y.
Go and tell him (Go to tell him). Allez lui dire.
Come and see me (Come to see me). Yenez me voir.
(6.) When the sentence is negative, the pronouns stand before
the verb, as in the indicative ; as,
Po not tell me of it. Ke me le dites pas.
Do not speak of it to me. l^e m'en parlee pas.
(c.) Reflective verbs retain the reflective (objective) proix>nns.
Warm yourself. Chauffez-vous.
Do not bum yourself. Ne vous brftlez pas.
103a HEasis.
Here is your cane.
There is bread.
Thbbkis.
Here it is.
There is some.
Voici (prep.)
Voici votre canne.
Yoilk du pain.
VoiiA {p*ep.)
La voici.
En voilk.
YOOABULAIRE 35.
The husband.
ILe marl.
L'^poux.
The relative. Le parent.
The parents. Les parents.
The grandfather. Le grand-p^re.
The father-in-law. Le beau-p^re.
The brother-in-law. Le beau-fr^re.
The roof. Le toit.
To play.
Near, by.
To the right.
On the right.
Here is.
Jouer (fi. V.)
)Prte de (prq>.)
Auprisde (/»*<.)
) A droite (adv. fy
f prq>.)
Voici (prtp.)
The wife.
{La femme.
L' Spouse.
The relative. La parente.
The family. La fiunille.
The grandmother. La grand'm^re.
The mother-in-law. La belle-m^re.
The sister-in-law. La belle-soeur.
The chimney.* La chemin^e.
To hand.
By the side of.
Next.
To the left.
On the left.
There is.
Passer (a. v.)
Ac6t4de(j?r^.)
A c6t^ (ad9,)
(A gauche (adv.
if prep.)
Voilk (prep.)
Analyse 85.
1. Est-ce laf votre manteau? Ce n'est pas le mien.
2. Voild mes gants, a c6t6 de votre cbapeau ; donnez-les-a oi.
3. Est-ce que je ne dis pas cela ?
* Alio mantei-pitce.
t L^ in thlB sentenoe. Is an ezplettva
222 ntBNTS-CIKQDlftMX LE9OK
EXERCICE 35.
1. Qui est-ce? 2. C'est nn de mes parents. 3. Qui est la
dame k laqnelle il donne le bras? 4. C'est soa 6pouse. 5.
Est-ce la votre beaa-fr^re qui leur parle? 6. Non, M.; c'est le
mari de la dame qui est k droite de la cherain^e. 7. £st-ce que
vous jouez ? 8. Je ne joue pas ; je travaille. 9. Qu'est-ce que
j'enteDds? 10. Vous entendez le bruit du vent. 11. Qu'est-ce
que je vois sur le toit de yotre maison, pres de la cheminee?
12. Ce sont des oiseaux que vous voyez. 13. Qui est-ce que je
vois venir Ik-bas? 14. Vous vojez venir mon grand-pere et ma
grand'mere. 15. Qui est cette dame k cdt6 de votre beau-pere ?
16. C'est ma belle-mere. 17. Passez-moi cet eventail, s'il vous
platt 18. Le voici. 10. Voild le parasol de ma belle-soeor;
portez-le-lui. 20. Donnez-le-moi ; je vais le lui porter. 21.
Voila des crayons sur la table a gauche ; donnez-m'en deux ou
troisT 22. Les voici; prenez-en quelques-uns. 23. Qu'estrce
que vous m'apportez ? 24. Je vous apporte une lettre de vos
parents. 25. Montrez-moi la bague que vous avez. 26. La
voici, mais ne la cassez pas. 27. Y a-t-il du feu dans la cham-
bre k cdte? 28. Oui, M.; entrez-y et chauffez-vous, si vous
avez froid.
Th^mb 85.
1. Who is that to the left of the window f 2. That is my
brother-in-law. 3. Who is the lady next to him ? 4. She is
his wife. 5. Who is she who is speaking to your grandfather !
6. She is a relative of ours. 7. Do I play well ? 8. You play
very well. 9. What do I see on the roof of the church ? 10.
I do not know what it is. 11. Whom do I hear playing on the
piano (du piano) ? 12. It is my sister-in-law who is playing.
13. There is my fan, near your hat; hand it to me. 14. Here
it is. 15, There are your grandmother's gloves. 16. Give them
to me. 17. Bring me a little warm water. 18. Here is some.
19. Bring the carriage before the door, we will start. 20. Are
your parents in the next room (a edti) ? 21. Do not call them«
trbnts-sixi6me LE90N. 223
22. Do not tell them that I am here. 23. Walk in (entrez) to
the right and warm yourself. 24. Do not barn yourself.
DiOTftB 35.
Formation des Peuples,
L'homme est n6 pour vivre en societe : la multiplicity de sea
besoins, la longue faiblesse de son enfance, le tardif developpe-
ment de son intelligence, tout doit le rendre sociable.
D'abord, chaque famille vivait r^unie, le pere en etait le chef;
on suivait ses conseils ; on ob^issait a ses lois. Les families etant
devenues trop nombreuses pour vivre ensemble, on se separa ;
alors il y eut plusieurs chefs, et par consequent plusieurs conseils,
plusieurs lois.
Peu k pen le besoin de se secourir mutuellement rassembla un
grand nombre de ces families qui etaient eparses : c'est la I'ori-
gine de la formation des peuples et des ^tats.
La necessite d^agir d'apres une seule volont6, fit naitre Tid^e
de mettre dans les mains de plusieurs hommes ou d'un seul
homme le sort de ce concours d'individus: c'est Torigine des
gouvemements. .
86. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON.
104« Some verbs govern the infinitive (P. II. 70) directly; some
govern it by means of the preposition a ; and some, by means
of the preposition de,
(a.) The following are some of the verbs that require no prep-
osition before the next verb in the infinitive : aimer mieux^ aller^
compter, croirey devoir, entendre, envoyer, faire, falloir, laisier^
oner (to dare), pouvoiry savoir, venir, voir, vouloir, &c.
I am going to see your brother. Je vais voir votre fr^re.
I see your brother coming. Je vois venir votre fr^re.
^^24 TBENTB-SUlftME LE90X.
(6.) The following are a few of the verbs that require the prep
osition d before the next verb in the infinitive : aimer ^ appren-
drey avoir y chercher^ commencerj dormer^ mettre^ penser^ rester, &c.
I like to work. J'aime a travailler.
He learns to read. H apprend a lire.
We have much to do. Kous avons beaucoup a £ure.
Give my linen to be mended. Donnez mon llnge a raccommoder.
Put my cloak to dry. Mettes mon manteau d sdcher.
I think of going to France. Je pense d aller en France.
Stay and dine with us. Bestez d diner avec nous (102).
(c.) The following are a few of the verbs that require the prep-
osition de before the next verb in the infinitive : cesser (to cease),
ehoisir, conseiller (to advise), rftVe, finir^ <fec.
It stops raining. II cesse de pleuvoir.
I advise your brother to do that. Je conseille k votre fr^redle Mre cela.
Tell him to come. Dites-lui de venir.
I finish wilting. Je finis d: ^rire.
105« The objective pronouns, accompanying two verbs closely
connected, are placed immediately before the verb by which they
are governed ; as, (P. V. § Ixxxiii, 3.)
I am going to see him. Je vais le voir,
I see him coming. Je U vou venir.
Rem. — ^The objective pronouns are always placed before the
first verb, when it is one of the following : apercevoir (to per-
ceive), ecauter (to listen), entendre^ envoyer^ faire^ laisser^ mener,
regarder (to look), sentir (to feel), voir,
2h have made^ to get made, Fairefaire,
7h have tposhed. Faire hver,
7b have mended, Faire racoommlbder,
7h have dried. Faire ekher. «
Are you having a coat made ? Faltes-vous faire un habit ?
I am. J' en fais faire un.
Have, or get that linen mended. Faites raccommoder ce linge.
I get it washed before I get it Je le fais laver avant de le fiiire
mended. raccommoder.
Dry it. Faites-le s^her.
TBXMTB-SIXlftMX LE9ON.
223
Do not let that child go out.
Do not let him go out. •
2b wi$h to %ay^ to 1
What does that mean ?
Ih haoejud,
I have just heard that.
I have just been told so (they i
jud, &c.)
I have just seen him.
To tptak the truth.
Ke laissez pas sortir oet enfiint.
Ne le laissez pas sortir.
VouUriT dirt.
iQue veut dire oela ?
Qu'est-ce que cela veut dire?
Venir de.
Je viens d' entendre dire cela.
On vient de me le dire.
Je viens de le voir.
Dire la vtfrit^.
The word.
The sense.
The meaning,
The linen (treo?^
ing appard,)
The chest. Le ooffre.
VOOABULAIRE 36.
Le mot. The sentence.
>- Le sens.
' I- Le linge.
The truth.
The leather.
Lecuir.
To beg^n.
To cease.
To stop.
To dry.
To dry.
To have dried.
To have made.
To get made.
To dare.
)Ck>mmencer (a. v.)
(d or de).
(Cesser (a. if n, v.)
ide).
S^her (a. v.)
[ Faire sdcher.
i Faire faire.
Oaer (a. «.)
La phrase.
La v6rit^.
The linen (doth). La toUe.
Lamalle
[ La peau.
The trunk. La malle.
The skin.
The leather.
To continue. J Coniinuer (a. t,.)
( (a or de).
ToadTise. j CoweiUer (». •.)
To mend. Baccommoder<a.o.
To have or get ( Faire raooommo-
. mended. ( der.
Voulolr dire.
Venir de.
Toi
To have just.
Analtbe 86.
1. Je V0U8 conseille de^ partir.
2. J'aime mieuz rester ici. J'aime a* travailler.
* The preposlUon ia ofled for euphony; the infinidve ia ttie direet otijeet of the pre*
owUngverh.
10<»
226 trents-bixiAmx lb^on.
ezbrgigb 36.
1. Qa^apprenez-vous ? 2. Nous apprenons k par.er franQais.
8. Commencez-vous k le parler? 4. Je conamence a le com-
prendre. 5. Avez-vous quelque choee k faire? 6. J^ai beaa-
coup k faire. 7. Ces ouvriers continuent-ils i travailler toate la
journ^e ! 8. lis cessent de travailler k midi. 9. Que nous con-
seillez-vouB de faire? 10. Nous vous conseillons de partir. 11.
Voolez-Yous dire au gargon d'apporter le coffre que je viena
d'acheterf 12. Je vais lui dire de I'apporter. 13. Faites-vous
faire une malle de cuir, comme la mienne ? 14. J'en fais faire
une pareille k la vdtre. 15. Youlez-yous faire raccommoder vo-
tre nianteau de toile ? 16. Je veuz le faire laver avant de le faire
raccommoder. 17. Faites-vous laver voire linge avant de partir f
18. Je vais le donner k laver aujourd^hui. 19. Que faut-il dire
au domestique ? 20. II faut lui dire de faire secher ces gants de
peau. 21. Oomprenez-vous le sens de cette phrase? 22. Je ne
sais pas ce que ces mots veulent dire. 23. Que veut dire celaf
24. Oela ne veut rien dire. 25. Savez-vous que notre ami vient
d'arriver? 26. Je le sais; je viens de le voir. 27. On vient de
me dire que vous avez I'intention de partir; est-ce vrai? 28.
C^est la v6rit6 ; je pense k partir dans quelques jours.
THftMB 36.
1. We like to come here. 2. You teach (apprendre) us to
speak French. 3. I begin to read it. 4. My sisters learn to
play on the piano {du piano), 5. We have much to do. 6.
The professor gives us every day several sentences to learn by
heart. 7. Does it stop raining ? 8. It continues raining very
hard {bien fort), 9. Stay and play with us this afternoon. 10.
I dare not do it (79, Rem.) 11. Tell the servant to bring my
leather trunk. 12. Put that chest to dry. 13. Give my leather
gloves {de peau) to be mended. 14. I think of going to the
country to-moiTow. 16. I advise you to wait a few days. 16.
Are you having a linen coat made ? 17. I am having one made
like yours. 18. I will have my linen mended before I start.
TRENTX-SSPTltlME LE(ON. 227
10. Do you know the meaning of this word? 20. I do not
know what that word means. 21. What does that sentence
mean ! 22. This is (void) what it means, " Always speak the
truth." 23. My grandfather has just arrived. 24. I have just
been told so. 25. I have just seen him pass.
DiOTibB 36.
Dm Gauvemements.
Le gouvernement est Tapplication des lois, faites dans IMnt^r^t
de la soci^td, pour sa conservation et sa prosp6nt6.
Dans Forigine des soci^t^s, le gouvernement 6tait patriarcal
ou th6ocratique : patriarcal, lorsque les chefs de famille ^taient
maitres, souverains ; thdocratique, lorsque les ministres de Dieu,
les pr^tres, r6gnaient snr le temporel et le spirituel.
Aujourd*hui, il y a deux formes g^nerales de gouvernement :
le gouvernement r6publicain et le gouvernement monarchique.
Dans une r^publique, le peuple a la souveraine puissance. II
nomme ses deputes, qui concourent k la formation des lois ; et il
61it ses magistrats, qui veillent avec lui a leur maintien.
Dans une monarchic, le gouvernement est dans les mains d'un
seul homme, qu'on nomme roi ou empereur. S'il est ind6pen-
dant des lois, la monarchie est absolue ou autocratique ; si le
pouvoir du monarque est limits par une charte, on loi fondamen-
tale, la monarchie est constitutionnelle.
37. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON.
The Past Indefinite, or Perfect Tense.
106* The past indefinite is the compound tense conesponding
with the present. It represents the action as completed, either
now or long ago.
228 TRIHTX-BSPTlftMB LE9ON.
Ihaoefwmd, or Iffmnd, Tax truuvS.
I received your letter. J'ai refu Yotre lettre.
He sold his horse. II a vendu son cheval.
They finished that work. lis ont fini cet onvrage.
107* (a.) The particle ne, and the pronouns which stand, in
simple tenses, between the subject and the verb, stand, in com-
pound tenses, between the subject and the auxiliary. The nega-
tives pas, point, rien, &c., and short adverbs, generally, stand be-
tween the auxiliary and the past participle.
I did not dance. Je n'ai pas dans^.
She sang well. Elle a bien chants.
Did you give him the note ? Lui avez-vous donnd le billet 7
I did. Je le lui ai donn^.
(5.) Adverbs of several syllables stand after the participle ; as,
I spoke to him frankly. Je lui ai parl^ franchement.
(c.) Adverbs of time relative stand after the participle. Those
of time absolute, may, for emphasis, be placed before the subject
We worked late. Nous avons travaille tard.
I spoke to him about it yesterday. Je lui en ai parl^ hier.
Yesterday, I spoke to him about it. Hier, je lui en ai parl^.
108* The past participle of an active verb agrees, in gender
and number, with its direct object, when the direct object pre-
cedes the past participle.
Have you found your pen f Avez-vous trouvtf votre plume ?
I have. Je I'ai trouvSe.
Did you receive the letters? Avez-vous reyu les lettres ?
I did. Je les ai refuea.
The letters which I received Les lettres que j'ai revues.
How many letters did you receive ? Combien de lettres avea-vous rs-
guesf
I received three. J' en ai re^u trois.
Observe that the participle does not agree with en, because en
is an indirect object
TRBNTE-SBPTI&MB LB^OM,
229
109t To havcy p. p. had.
Avoir, p. p. eu.
Have you had
my spectacles ?
Avez-vous eu mes lunettes f
I have not.
Je ne les ai pas eues.
lb be,
p. p. been.
Mre, p. p. iU,
Where were you last night f
Od avez-vous ^t^ hier au 3oir ?
I was at the play.
J'ai 6t6 au spectacle.
Once, twice, three times.
Unefirie, deux/ois, trm/oit.
Several times.
Plusieurs fois.
Three times a
year.
Trois fois^wr an.
VOCABULAIRB 3Y.
The play.
Le spectacle.
The comedy. La commie.
The scissors.
Les dseaux.
The spectacles. Les lunettes.
The carpet.
Le tapis.
The oil-cloth. La toile dr^.
The clap.
The blow.
• Le coup.
Once. Une fois.
To decline.
To refuse.
I Refuser (de), (a.v.)
To forget. Oublier (de), (a.v.)
To find again.
Retrouver (a. v.)
To lose. Perdre (a. v.)
During, for.
Pendant (prqf.)
^longtime. l^'^^VS^^'^
Yesterday.
Hier (adv.)
Daybeforeyes- ) ^^^^j^.^^ (arf„.)
terday.
Yesterday
Hler au matin.
Hiermatm.
Last night. JHierausoir.
( Hier aoir.
morning.
Analtsb 37.
1. Voici la lettre que j'ai reijue.
2. L'avez-vous montr6e a votre ami ?
3. J'ai oublie de la lai montrer.
EXBRCICB 37.
1. Avez-vous apport^ cette musique ? 2. J'ai oubli6 de I'ap*
porter. 3. Votre soeur a-t-elle dechire sa robe? 4. Elle I'a
brOlee. 5. A-i-on lav6 la toile cir^et 6. On Fa lavee hier. 1.
230 TBBNTB-SEPTlftMB LE^ON.
Avez-vouft retrouY^ les ciseaux f 8. Je les ai retrouv6s dans ma
cbambre. 9. Oil avez-vous perdu vos lunettes ? 10. Je les ai
perdues dans le jardin. 11. Quels tapis avez-vous choisis? 12^
J'ai choisi ceux que je voas ai montres. 13. Quand avez-vous
reQU la lettre de votre onclet 14. Je I'ai re^ue avant-hier. 15.
Avez-vous enteudu les coups de tonnerre pendant la nuit? 16.
Je ne les ai pas entendus. 17. Avez-vous eu ma plume ? 18.
Je ne Fai pas eue. 1 0. Yotre frere a-t-il 6t6 chez le libraire ?
20. II n'y a pas 6t6. 21. A-t-il refus^ d*y aller? 22. II n'a
pas refu86, mais il n*a pas eu le temps, d'y aller. 23. Avez-vous
jamais 6t6 au spectacle f 24. Nous y avons et^ plusieurs fois.
25. M'avez-vous attendu longtemps hier au soir? 26. Nous
vous avons attendu pendant une demi-heure. 27. Avez-vous
6tudi6 cette le^on longtemps ? 28. Je Tai 6tud]6e pendant une
heure et demie.
ThAmb 87.
1. Have you taken my torn coat to the tailor's? 2. Has he
taken the horse to the stable! 3. Why have you taken the
flowei's from your bonnet ! 4. Have they brought the carpets I
bought yesterday f 5. Have they brought the carriage ? 6.
Where is the oil-cloth which my sister has chosen ? 7. Have
you lost your spectacles ? 8. Have you not found them again ! '
0. Where did you lose them? 10. Did your cousin refuse to
come with you? 11. Did you show him the letter you received
the day before yesterday? 12. I forgot to show it to him. 13.
Have you had the scissors? 14. I have not 15. Who has had
them? 16. The children have had them. 17. Was your friend
ever at the play ? 18. He was there last night for the first time.
10. We have been there several times. 20. We go there two
or three times a year. 21. Did you wait long at the depot {au
depdt) ? 22. We waited there for two hours. 23. We heard
several claps of thunder during the night ; did you hear them ?
24. Last night I studied this lesson for more than (P.IL 64, Rbm.)
an hour.
TREiraE-HUmilCK LB9ON. 231
DictAe 37.
Des Divisions de VHistoire,
L'histoire est le r^cit des 6venements qui o..t eu lieu sur la
terre. Un auteur am6ricaiii I'a compar6e k un vieillard de plu-
sieurs milliers d'ann^es, qui a 6t6 pariout, qui a vu tout, et qui
raconte tout ce qui est arrive depuis la creation du monde.
On donne k Thistoire diff6rents noms. On nomine
Histoire sacr^ celle qui traite des 6v6nements religieuz ;
Histoire civile ou politique, celle qui rapporte les faits appar-
tenant k I'^tat ou au gouvernement d'un pays ;
Histoire litt^raire, celle qui rappelle Torigine et les progres
des arts et des sciences ;
Histoire natnrelle, celle qui a rapport auz ph^nom^nes terres-
tres et aux phenomenes celestes ;
Histoire particuliere, celle qui traite d'un seul peuple, d'une
seule province, ou d^un seul personnage ;
Histpire universeile, celle qui traite de tous les peuples ;
Histoire gen^rale, celle qui embrasse, d^un seul coup d'oeil, lea
ovenements qui se rapportent a plusieurs nations, lides entre
elles par de grands inter^ts.
On divise I'histoire, par rapport au temps, en histoire ancienne,
en histoire du moyen-&ge et en histoire moderne.
38. TRENTE-HUITlfiME LEgON.
Irregular Past Participles.
no.
To conduct, to take, p.p. eondudtd. Gonduire,
p. p. wnduU.
To say ; to tell,
uttdy told. Dire,
da.
To write,
wriUm, :^crire,
ecnt.
To extinguish,
tleinL
To do ; to make,
done, made, Faire,
faU.
To offer.
<ffered. Offrir,
<g«i.
To put, to lay,
jna, laid. Mettre,
fflU.
To take,
taken. Prendre,
pni.
282
TRBNTX-HUmiMX LX^Oir.
111.
Jb make am apreunt of a tkmg.
This is the &n he made me a pres-
ent of.
7b do with (to dispose of).
What has he done with the letter f
He burnt it
Who told you that f
He did.
Did yoti tell your father of it ?
I did not.
Where did you put the slate ?
I put it under tike bench.
Fairepriaeni or ijdeau ieqq.ch.d qqik
Void r^rentail dont 11 m'afait ca
deau.
Faire de,
Qu'a-tril lait de la lettre f
n I'a brftlie.
Qui votts a dit oela f
II me I'a dit.
L'avez-vous dit k votre p^f
Je ne le lui ai pas dit.
Od ayea-Yous mis Tardoisef
Je I'ai mise sous le banc.
112« VponU, Under U.
Did you put it upon it ?
I put it under it.
Where did you take that napkin
from?
I took it out of your room.
7b strike ; to knock.
They have knocked at the door.
I have heard two Imocks at the
door.
7b ring, to etrike.
Has the bell rung ?
It has rung twice.
Deesue (adv.) Iktaout (adv.)
L'avez-vous mise dessus ?
Je I'ai mise dessous.
Oh avez-vous pris cette serviette 7
Je I'ai prise dans votre chambre.
Frapper.
On a f rapp^ k la porte.
J'ai entendu frapper deux coupe )k
la porte.
Sonner.
A-t-on 8onn£ ?
On a 8onn6 deux fois.
YOGABULAIRE 38.
The present. Le cadeau.
The penknife. Le canif.
The candlestick. Le chandelier.
The towel. L'essuie-mains.
The promise. La promesse.
The slate. L'ardoise.
The lamp. La lampe.
The napkin. La serviette.
To strike.
To knock.
To offer.
T«,fo^tMto)p^.^^^^
dispose of). )
[Frapper (a. ^n.v.) J^^; [ Sonner (a. ^ n. r.)
rur-s /• N rr^r>^^^i^^ j PTomcttre (de), (tTf .
Offrir (trr. a, v.) To promise. < s
I a. V,)
dispose (
Upon it.
Dessus (ado.)
To accept.
Under it.
Accepter (a. v.)
Dessous (adv.)
TRBNTB-HUrrilfeHS LB^fON. 23S
Analyse 38.
1. Lui avez-vous dit de venir ?
2. J'ai trouv^ votre ardoise sous la table ; je Tai mise dessus.
EXBRGIOB 38.
1. Oi]l avez-TOUs conduit yos soeura? 2. Je les ai conduites
chez ma tante. 3. Quand avez-vous 6crit k votre oncle ? 4. Je
lui ai 6crit hier. 5. Avez-vous eteint la chandelle ? 6. Je Tai
6teinte. 7. Qu'avez-vous fait du chandelier? 8. Je I'ai mis
dans Tarmoire. 9. Votre tante vous a-t-elle promis quel que
chose? 10. Elle m'a promis quelque chose, mais je crois qu'elle
I'aoublie. 11. Qu'avez-vous offert k ces dames? 12. Je leur
ai offert des fleurs. 13. Les ont-elles refus^es? 14. Elles lea
ont acceptees. ^ 15. OCi est Je joli canif dont votre oncle vous a
&itcadeau? 16. Je Tai perdu. 17. Qu'avez-vous fait de mon
ardoise ? 18. Je Pai pr^t^e a Charles, et il I'a cass§e. 19. Vous
a-t-il dit cela? 20. Son frere me I'a dit. 21. Oti avez-vous pris
cet essuie-mains ? 22. Je I'ai pris dans la chambre k c6t6. 23.
Avez-vous mis les serviettes sur la table ou dessous ? 24. Je les
ai mises dessus. 25. Avez-vous entendu frapper k la porte ? 26.
Je viens d'enteudre frapper deux coups k la porte. 27. A-t-on
sonn6 plus d'une fois? 28. On a sonne deux fois, et personne
n'a ouvert la porte.
THftMB 88.
1. Did you tell the girl to bring me a napkin ? 2. I told her
of it 3. Where is the letter which you have written ? 4. I
laid it on the table. 5. Some one has put the slate upon it 6.
Raise (levez) the slate ; the letter is under it 7. What did you
do with the lamp ? 8. I extinguished it 9. 1 put it on the table
in the other room. 10. Who told you that I was at the play ?
11. Your brother told me of iU 12. Did you tell it to any one 1
13. 1 did not. 14. Have you taken tea ? 15. Have you learned
your lesson? 16. I did not understand it 17. Did your friend
234 TRBNTK-NXUTlftMX LE^ON.
promise to come! 18. Did he forget bis promise? 19. Did
yoa not accept what they offered you? 20. What have you
done with the fan which your aunt made you a present of? 21.
I heard a knock at the door. 22. The bell has rung twice.
DiOTte 88.
Le9 Deux Yeux de rSistaire,
D y a deux sciences qui sont indispensables & celui qui veut
6crire ou 6tudier Thistoire : c'est la giographie et la chronologie.
On les appelle avec raison Us deux yeux de rhistoire^ puisqu'elles
y repandent beaucoup de lumieres, et qu'elles en 6cartent toute
confusion. *
La geographic est la science qui nous &it connaitre la situa-
tion de tous les pays de la terre, 1& uns a Tegard des autres ;
elle nous apprend ce que chaque pays contient de remarquable,
en d6crit le climat et les limites.
La chronologic est la science qui nous enseigne les diff(§rentes
divisions du temps ; elle nous fait connaitre les eres, ou points
fixes, d'ou chaque peuple commence a compter ses annees.
On appelle synchronisme le rapport des faits arrives dans le
m^me temps ; et Ton donne le nom d*anachronisme k une &ute
faite contre la chronologic**
39. TRENTE-NEUVlilME LEgON.
Irrboular Past Partioiples oontinuxd.
113.
To drink, p. p. drank.
Boire,
p. p. bu.
To know, known.
Connattre,
connu.
To run, run.
Courir, .
couru.
To believe, bduved.
Croire,
cm.
To be necessary, hem neoesmry.
Falloir,
faUu,
To read, nad.
lire,
b$.
TRENTB-NSUVlftliS LB90N.
285
To rain, p. p. rained.
Heuvoir,
p.p.;**.
To be able, been abk.
Pouvoir,
pu.
To know, known.
Savoir,
su.
To hold; to keep, held;kqft.
Tenir,
tenu.
To see, teen.
Voir,
vu.
To be willing, beenvnilmg.
Vouloir,
voulk
111* 7b eweq». Ih dean.
Have you had the floor swept ?
Have you had the snuffers cleaned ?
Bdietytr. NdOoyer.
Avez-vous fi&it balayer le plancher f
Avez-Yous fldt nettoyer les mou-
chettes?
Rem. — The past participle of the verb fairt^ when it precedes
the infinitive, is invariable ; as,
I had them cleaned.
The shoes which I had made.
Je les ai/off nettoyer.
Les souliers que j'ai/oit faire.
115* Torteogfnxu.
Did you recognize that lady ?
7b look at tome one.
I did not look at her.
7b luten to tome one.
Listen to me.
7b answer tome one^ a note.
What did yoo answer him ?
Did you answer the note f
I did.
Have they taken the spoU out of
that piece of furniture f
They have not been able to do it.
Why did you not keep your word ?
I wished to keep it, but I could
' not.
I was obliged to go somewhere.
Beeonnaitre (irr. a. v.)
Avez-vous reconnu cette dame f
Regarder quelqu*un (a. v.)
Je ne I'ai pas regard^e.
Heouier qudqu'un (a. v.)
£coutez-moi.
Rkpondre d qudgu*%ai^ a un biUet.
Que lui avez-vous r^pondu f
Aves-vous r^pondu au billet?
J'y ai n$pondu.
A-t-on 6t£ les taches de ce meuble f
On n' a pas pu le £Edre.
Pourquoi n'aves-vous pas tenu vo-
tre parole 1
J'ai voulu la tenir, mais je n'ai pas
pu.
H m'a follu aller quelque port.
The speech.
The discourse.
The copy-book.
VOCABITLAIRB 39
[ lie discours.
Le cahier.
> La parole.
The word.
The speech.
The composition. La oompositioa
>!86
TBINTB-HSUVlfiMS UB^OK.
The blackboard
The apron.
The piece of fur- tj^^^^^j^
Le tableau noir.
Le tablier.
uiture.
The furniture.
To answer.
To Bweep.
To wipe.
To wipe off.
To wet.
To loolL at.
'■!■
Les meubles.
B^pondre (n. v.)
Balayer (a. v.)
y Efisuyer (a. v.)
Mouiller (a. v.)
Begarder {a, v.)
The chalk.
The Bponge.
The spot.
The snuffers.
Lacraie.
L' Sponge.
La tache.
Les mouchettes
Beconnaitre(trr xv.)
Nettojrer (a. v.)
Toreoognise.
To clean.
To rub out. JEffi^r(^,.)
To wipe out.
To dictate.
To listen to.
Dieter (a. v.)
£couter (a. v.)
Analyse 39.
1. J'ai lu la leQOD ; je Tai sue ; je I'ai oubli^e.
2. J'ai re^u la lettre, et j'y ai repondu.
3. Les soaliere qu*il m'a ^its ; ceux que j'ai fait faire k Paris.
EXERCICB 39.
1. Qu'avez-vous ba? 2. J'ai bu un verre d'eau. 3. Avez-
voos era les nonvelles que vous avez lues ? 4. Nous De les avona
pas crues. 5. Avez-Yous lu ce discours ? 6. Je ne I'ai pas lu, je
n'ai pas eu le temps de le lire. 7. Ces Aleves ont-ils su leurs le-
90ns? 8. lis ne les ont pas sues. 9. Avez-vous ecrit votre
composition? 10. Je I'ai 6crite; voici mon cahier. 11. A-t-il
plu pendant la nuit? 12. 11 a plu toute la nuit 13. Pourquoi
votre ami n'a-t-il pas tenu sa parole ? 14. 11 n'a pas pu la tenir.
' 15. Avez-vous vu votre belle-soeur? 16. Je I'ai vue ce matin.
17. Avez-vous fait balayer la chambre ? 18, Je I'ai fait balayer.
19. Pourquoi avez-vous mouilie I'eponge? 20. Je I'ai mou'Uee
pour nettoyer le tableau noir. 21. Qu'avez-vous efface! 22.
Je n'ai rien efface. 23. A-t-on essuye les raeubles ? 24. On les
a essuyes. 25. Avez-vous reconnu cette dame ? 26. Je ne Tai
pas reconnue ; car je ne I'ai pas regard^e. . 27. M'avez-vous
ecoute ? 28. Je vous ai ^coute. 29. Quand avez-vous repondu
k la lettx'o que vous avez re^ue f 30. J'y ai repondu aujourd'hui.
TRBNTB-KBUVlftME LE^ON. 237
TedME 39.
1. We read the news, but we did not believe it 2. I wished
to write a composition, but I could not do it. 3. I left my copy-
book at home. 4. I knew that lesson this morning, but I have
forgotten it. 6. Why did you not keep your word ! 6. I could
not; I was obliged to go somewhere for my father. 7. It has rained
all the morning. 8. Did you recognize the lady who just passed ?
0. I did not look at her. 10. Your aunt is here ; I saw her this
morning. 11. Why do you not answer me? 12. Why do you
not listen to me, when I speak to you?- 13. Did you answer
that note ? 14. I answered it immediately. 15. Have you had
the floor swept? 16. Did you wipe the table with your apron ?
17. Gould they not take the spots out of this piece of furniture?
18. Have you had the blackboard cleaned? 19. I have wet the
sponge to do it. 20. Take the chalk and listen to me. 21.
Write down what I am going to dictate to you. 22. Do not
rub out what you have written. 23. Have you had the carriage
cleaned ? 24. I had it washed ; it is not dry yet.
DidTftE 39.
Du Caractere des differenta Peuples.
Les Fran^ais sont polls, spirituel?, actifs, vaillants, gais et hos-
pitaliers ; ils ont Hmagination vive ; lis sont habiles k la guerre
et industiieux dans la paix, et ils cultivent avec succes les arts et
les sciences.
Les Anglais sont braves, industrieux ; ils ont Fimagination p6-
n^trante, sont grands politiques et habiles navigateurs ; la haute
classe est honn^te et gen^reuse, la basse est grossi^re.
Les Americains sc^nt polis, actifs, braves et gen^reux ; ils ont
I'imagination ardente, et sont capables d'entreprendre et d'ex6cu-
ter les plus grandes choses.
Les AUemands sont grands^ robustes, sinceres, laborieux, mais
*)eu sobres ; la haute noblesse est jalouse de ses titres.
Les Suisses sont robustes, fiddles k leurs promesses, droits*
288 QUAKANTlftUB XE^OV,
oaift» de moetirs simples, fort attaches k leur patrie, et capables
de sapporter les plus grrandes fatigaes.
Les Rosses sont de taille mojenne, forts, robustes, bons soldats,
assez spiritnels, mais d'une humenr servile.
Les Italiens sont civils, spirituels, aptes aux sciences, bons mn^
siciens, de uKBars doaces, mais dissimul^s et vindicatift.
Les Espagnols sont sobres, patients, bons navigateursi mail
fiers, vindicatifii et fort paresseuz.
40. QUARANTlilME LEgON.
116« The compound tenses of the neuter verbs, aller^ arriver,
entrer, renirer, partir, rester, retoumer, venir, revenir, sortir, tomber^
and of some others, are formed with itre, (P. IIL § xxviii. 3, (2).)
I have gone, or went. Je suis aUS, m. oUfc (P. n. 90, b.)
8he has come home. Elle est rentr^.
We remained. Nous sommea rei^, r
You came. Vous Stes oemi, venue;
They started. Us sont partis.
117* (a.) Sortir and some other verbs are sometimes con-
stmed with ktre^ and sometimes with avoir. With Hre^ to ex-
press state or situation ; with avoivy to express action ; as,
X went out this morning. J'ai 8orti<> oe matin.
My sister has gone out. Ma soeur est sortie.
She has passed ; she passed by here. Elle est pass^ ; elle a pass^ par Id.
(6.) Instead of the past indefinite of aUer^ the past indefinite
of etre is used, when the past tense of to go has the meaning of
have been ; as,
I went to the theatre last night. J'ai 6%^ au th^4tre hier au soir.
* Tbe Mizilfauy aieoir is slwtys vmA in the past tanaes of «orf<r, when it maaiu to
hoMheenovL
QUARANTlftME LE^Oir.
239
118* Bow long.
How long did yoa lire in that
city?
Bowhng,
How long did yoa remain in the
country ?
We staid there till Monday.
Bow Umffy untU what time,
nil midnight.
Bow far.
As far as his house.
As far as the end of the street.
As fiir as France.
ComiAm de ianps.
Combien de temps avez-vous de
meur^ dans cette ville ?
Jutqu'd quand.
Jusqu'li quand Stes-vous restes k
la campagne ?
Nous y sommes restes jusqu'd lundL
Jiuqiid qudU hmre.
Jusqu'li minuit.
Jwqu^oii.
Jusque chez lui.
Jusqu'au bout de la rue.
Jusqu'en France.
119* The days of the week are of the masculine gender.
They are
Bunday, Monday ^ Tuudaiy, Wednet- Dvmanthe^ Umdi^ mardiy mereredif jeu-
day^ Tkunday, Friday^ Saturday* di^ vendredi^ tamedi.
Rem. 1. — On, before the days of the week, is not expressed in
French; as,
I will go to him on Tuesday. Je vais le voir mardi.
Rem. '2. — ^The article is used before the days of the week, to
indicate the periodical return of something on a certain day ; as,
I go to the dandng-school on Tues- Je vais k I'^cole de danse le mardi.
days.
VOCABULAIRE 40.
An American.
A European.
A German.
The end (the ex-
treme point).
Un Am^ricain.
Un Europden.
Un Allemand.
Le bout.
America.
Europe.
Germany.
The end (the
conclusion).
L'Am^rique.
L' Europe.
L'AlIemagne.
[Latin.
To beg ; to ask. ) p^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^ Toaccompany. f Accompagner,
To pray. ) ^ ' ^ To go with. ) (a. v.)
_ . „ .« , , . To let fall. ) Laisser tomber,
TolWl. Tomber (n.»,) ^odrop. f {a. v.)
240 QUABANTltia LB^OBT.
To quit. \ To come in. }
To leave. V Quitter (a. v.) To reenter. > Beotrer (a. v.)
To part with. ) To come home. )
TUl^ntil. ^Jvaqueipnp.) How far. Jugqu'oti.
How long. Juaqu'i quand. How long. CombiendetempB.
About («fc.) j?*^^*^- i^"'?*'- srT/"**\
^ (Apeuprte. Nearly. Pri8de(jM^.)
Analtbe 40.
1. lU ont qoitt^ la ville; ib sont partis k dix henres.
2. NoQs Ig8 avoDS quitt^ aa village ; ils y ont laisB^ lear voitorek
EXBRCICB 40.
1. Qnand ^tes-voos arrive? 2. Je snis aiTiv6 mardi; ma
tante est venue avec moi. 3. Est-elle sortie ? 4. Eile est all^
k r^glise. 5. Jusqu'i quand 6tes-vous rest^s k la campagne?
6. Nous y sommes rest^ jusqn*k lundi. 7. Jusqu'a quelle heure
6tes-vous rest^ au th6&tre ? 8. J*y suis reste jusqu'ik la fin de la
pi^ce. 9. A quelle heure ^tes-vous rentr6 ? 10. Je suis rentr^
k onze henres. 11. Combien de temp avez-vous demeur^ k
Londres? 12. Nous y avons demeur^ environ deux ana. 13.
Jusqu'oOl avez-vous accompagn6 ces dames? 14. Je les ai quit-
tees au bout de la rue. 15. Quand vos amis sont-ils partis pour
TEuropef 16. Ils sont partis mercredi. 17. Quand madame
votre mere estrelle revenue de la campagne? 18. Elle est reve-
nue samedi. 19. Votre onde est-il retonm6 chez lui ? 20. U
est retoum6 vendredi; il nous a pri^ d'aller le voir. 21. Pour-
quoi ces Allemands sont-ils venus en Am^iique ? 22. Ils sont
venus ici pour voir le pays. 23. Pourquoi ces Am^ricains sont-
ils ali^ en AUemagne? 24. Ils y sont alles pour apprendre
I'allemand. 25. fites-vous tomb6 ? 26. Je ne suis pas tomb^
mais j^ai laisse tomber mon crayon. 27. Avez-voua presque fini
d'ecrire ? 28. J*en suis a la derniere page.
QUARAKTiftME LE$ON. 241
THftME 40.
1. My brother has gone to the oflSce. 2. The children hare
gone to school. 3. My sister has entered (dans) the garden. 4.
We went to the concert last night. 5. We staid there to the
end. 6. From there we went to my grandmother's. 7. We
came in at midnight. 8. My cousins came to town with my
aunt. 9. They have gone out. 10. My father has not been out
this morning. 11. My uncle left on Monday. 12. He begged
my father to accompany him. 13. Father went with him as far
as the village. 14. He came back on Tuesday. 15. Those Ger-
mans returned to Germany. 16. Those Americans started for
Europe on Thursday. 17. How long did you reside in Germany f
18. I resided there about two years. 19. How long did you
remain in the country? 20. We remained there till Friday.
21. How late did you remain at the office ? 22. I left the office
at five o'clock.. 23. How far did you accompany your friends?
24. I left them at the end of the village. 25. Gather the leaves^
that have fallen from those trees. 26. I let fall my clasp
(agrafe, f.), and cannot find (retrouver) it. 27. Wait a moment;
I have almost finished.
DlOT^E 40.
Du Caracthre des differents Peuples (suite).
Les Turcs sont, en general, graves, sobres, polis entre eux,
mais fiers envers les Strangers ; ils sont indolents et i^gligents
dans le commerce et dans la culture des arts et des sciences.
Les Grecs autrefois si cel^bres, sont aujourd'hui pen instruits,
mais actifs, enjoues et tr^s-jaloux de leur liberte.
Les Pei-ses sont spirituels, aptes aux sciences, bons soldats,
mais fourbes, menteurs, fiers et cruels dans leurs vengeances et
dans Texercice de la justice.
Les Chinois ont le visage large, les oreilles grandes, les yeux
petits, le nez court, le teint olivatre ; ils sont sobres, industiieux,
excel lerits cultivateurs, mais tr^s superstitieux.
Les habitants de I'iuterieur de I'Afrique sont presque tons de
11
242 QUARANTE JET UNlftME LE^ON.
conlear noire, de moeurs sauvages, et d'une cruaute Irutale ; ccax
qui habitent les c6te8 ont le teiat moins Doir, ou seuVement basa-
n6 ; leurs moears sont adoucies par les rapports que ces peuplcs
ont avec les mardiands europ^ens.
41. QUARANTE ET UNliiME LEgON.
Compound Tenses of Reflectiye Verbs.
ISO* The compound tenses of reflective verbs are formed with
itre. (P. III. § xxviii. 3, (1).) The past participle of a reflective
verb agrees, like the past participle of an active verb, with the
direct object, when it is preceded by it ; as,
I burned myself. Je me aula bHOS, mi. bHUie.
She washed herself. Ella s'est km^.
•They warmed themselves.. Us se sont c/ua^is.
121 • (a.) When an operation is performed upon a person, the
part aflected by the action of the verb is the direct, and the per-
son the indirect, object ; as,
The hair-dresser cut his hair. Le coiffeur lui aooup^ les cheveux.
(6.) When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself
the part acted upon is the direct, and the reflective pronoun the
indirect, object; as,
She washed her hands. ISlle s'est UwS les maiM.
She washed them. Elle se Ut est to^es.
The past participles and their direct objects are in italics.
122t To rise, Seleoer.
To lie dawrif to go to bed. Se ooucher. AUer ae eouther,
I rose very early. Je me suis lev^ de grand matin.
We went to bed at ten o'clock. Nous nous sommes oouch^ k dix
heures.
QUARANTE ET UKIAMB LE<;0N.
243
(a.) The sun rose, set {action).
(6.) The sun has risen, is down {tit-
uation). '
7b Uj to do {of one" 8 heaUh),
How do you do ? How are you ?
How are they at home ?
llitfy are all well.
To walkf to take a VHilk,
To take a ride.
To take an airing, or a drive.
Have you taken a walk t
My sister took an airing.
We have taken a ride.
Le soleil s'est lev6, s'est couch^.
Le soleil est lev€, oouch^.
Se porter.
Comment vous portez-vous ?
Comment se porte-t-on chez vous ?
Tout le monde se porte bien.
Sepromener.
Sepromener a ekeval.
Sepromener en voUure.
Vous etes-vous promen&^
Ma soeur s'est promen^e en voiture
Nous avons 4lt^ nous promener )i
cheval.
123.
To travel on foot, in a carriage.
To go on a journey.
To walk, go, ride, or travel a mile.
To walk a mile.
To ride a mile.
Which way did you go {walking) f
We went towards the river.
Voyager k pied, en voiture.
Faire un voyage.
Faire un mille.
Faire un mille k pied.
Faire un mille k cheval.
De quel c6t^ vous dtes-vous pro-
men ^s ?
Nous avons 6tk du c6t^ de la riviere
YOCABULAIRE 41.
The mile,
llie journey.
The sun.
The arsenal.
To rise.
To be : to do.
To meet.
To meet with.
On foot.
Absent.
Which way.
On this side.
This way.
Sunrise.
Le mille.
Le voyage.
Le soleil.
L' arsenal.
The league. La lieue.
The absence. Uabsence.
The moon. La lune.
The university. L' university.
Se lever ir^. v.)
Se porter (r^. v.)
To go to bed.
To walk.
[ Bencontrer (a. v.) To travel.
A pied.
Absent {adj.)
De quel c6t^.
Secoucher(r^ v.)
Se promener (r.r.)
* De ce c6t4-ci.
Le lever du soleil.
Voyager (n.
On horseback. A cheval.
Indisposed Indisposd (adv.)
On the side of. I u„^j^^^
Towards. )
On that ride. [ pe ce cOt^-lk.
That way. )
Sunset. \ ^ ^^"^^'^^ <^^ «^
( leU.
244 ^UARANTE ET UNlftME LEgON.
Analyse 41.
1. II sW brdl6 les doigts; il se les est brtiiles.
2. Nous avons beaucoup march^ ; nous avoDS fait dix niilUs L pied,
d. Nous sommes alles au village; nous nous sommes prciLenes
jusqu'au village.
EXERCICB 41.
1. Yotre s(Bur sVst-elle lev^e de bonne heure? 2. Elle s'est
lev6e avant le lever du soleil. 3. Vous 6tes-vou8 couches tard
hier au soir ? 4. Nous nous sommes couches a Theui^ ordinaire.
5. A quelle heure )a lune s'est-elle levee ? 6. Elle sW levee a
huit heures. 7. Qui a G0up6 les cheveux k cet enfant ? 8. La
bonne les lui a coupes. 9. Vous 6tes-vous chauffe les pieds?
10. Je me les suis cbauffes. 11. Comment vous ^tes-vous port^
pendant votre absence? 12. Je me suis bien port^. 13. Made-
moiselle yotre soeur s'est-elle bien portee? 14. Elle a 6te indis-
pos^e pendant le voyage. 15. Avez-vous fait un long voyage?
16. Nous avons 6te absents pendant trois mois. 17. Combien
de lieues avez-vous faites? 18. Nous avons fait plus de deux
cents lieues. 10. Vous 6tes-vous promenes ce matin ? 20- Nous
avons 6t6 nous promener k cheval. 21. Oii avez-vous rencontre
mon fr^re? 22. Je Tai rencontr^ pres de Tarsenal. 23. De
quel cdt6 est-il all6 f 24. II est all6 du c6t6 de Tuniversite. 25.
De quel c6t6 de la rue Stes-vous venu ? 26. Je suis venu de ce
c6te-ci de la rue. 27. £!tes-vous venu en voituref 28. Je suis
venu k pied ; j'ai fait six milles k pied.
THftMB 41.
1. Did you rise eaily? 2. I rose at sunrise. 3. I always
rise early when I am well. 4. The children have gone to bed.
5. The moon went down at nine o'clock. 6. Rise, the sun has
risen (122, b) long since {depuis longtemps). 7. Who cut youi
hair ? 8. My aunt burned herself. 9. She warmed her hands.
10. She washed them. 11. How have you been during youi
QUARAKTB XT UNlftMB LE^ON. 245
absence? 12. How has your mother been during the journey ?
13. She has been indisposed, but she is well now. 14. Have
you taken a walk? 15. We have taken a ride. 16. My sisters
took an airing, and I accompanied them on horseback. 17. Last
year I went on a journey with my uncle. 18. We travelled in
a carriage. 10. We travelled more than a hundred leagues.
20. 1 rode ten miles this morning. 21. We walked more than
six miles. 22. Which way did you go ? 23. We went towards
the village. 24. I met the professor near the arsenal. 25. He
lives now on this side of the university. 26. Look that way ; do
you know that lady ?
DlOT^E 41.
Du Commerce,
Le commerce est la source pi-incipale de la pro8p6rit6 et du
bien-^tre des peuples modernes ; il emploie des milliers de bras
daus toutes les parties du monde ; il couvre la mer de vaisseaux,
qui portent les produits de I'industrie du nord aux peuples des
pays chauds, et rapportent, en ^change, les produits du sud aux
habitants du nord ; il encourage les arts et les sciences, et repand
la civilisation des peuples 6claires parmi les peuples barbares ; il
donne T^lan aux grandes entreprises, et fournit les moyens de les
executer ; il contribue plus que toute autre chose au maintien de
la paix et de la bonne intelligence entre les nations de la terre.
Les peuples les plus com merman ts sont les Anglais, les Ameri-
cains et les Franqais. Les navires de ces trois nations travei'sent
Tocean dans toutes les directions ; ils vont en Amerique, en
Afrique, en Asie, en Australie ; ils visitent la Chine, la Perse,
r^gypte, la Turquie, I'Espagne, le Portugal, la Russie, la Su^de,
le Danemarck, I'Ecosse, I'Irlande, <fec.
Les Americaitts envoient en France du coton, du sucre, du ta-
bac, du riz, du froment, de la farine, du ma'is, &c. ; ils en reqoi-
vent des vins, des draps, des modes, des chapeaux, des soieries et
des 6toffes de toute espece.
246 QUARANTE-DBUZlftHE LE^OV.
42. QUARANTE-DEUXltlME LEQON.
124. (a.) It t>, used with reference to distance or time, is ex-
pressed by il y a. After H y a, «t»cf, followed by a verb, is ren-
dered by qu€,
„ , . .^^ ^ ^ ^. .^ CQuelle distance ya-t-iUd'ici 4 la
How far is it from here to the aty. j ^^y^^^^ y ^,^-,1 \ ^u^ ?
Is it far from here to the city f T a-t-il loin d'ici k la villef
How long is it since he started ? Combien de temps y a-t-il qu'il est
parti?
(6.) Ago is ex^iressed hj ilya, placed before the period of time.
A fortnight ago. II y a quinze jours. «
Two hoars ago. II y a deux heures.
125* When il y a OT depuis, since, refers to the beginning of a
state or action which is still continuing, the verb expressing this
state or action is put in the present.
How long have yon been learning Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous
French ? apprenez le frangais ?
I have been learning it these six H y a six mois que je Tapprends.
months.
Have you been here long f T a-t-il longtemps que vous etes id?
j Dqmis (prep. & adv.)
^*^- J Dqmia que (conj.) -
How long have you known that ? Depuis quand savez-vous cela f
Since Monday. Depuis hmdi.
This great while. Depuis long^mps.
Since you started. Depuis que vous Stes parti.
Rem. — After depuia que and il y a, 9t€ is used before the verb
in the past indefinite, when we speak with reference to the inter-
val of time between an event or action and the present. In this
case, the negative might be used in English, without altering the
sense; as, •
How have you been since I saw Comment vous etes- vous portd de-
you ? puis que je'w vous ai vu ?
It is long since I saw him. II y a longtemps que je ne I'ai vu.
• A fortnight 1b expressed by quints Jourt; a period of a week, by huitJour»,
QUARANTE-DEUXI^MS LB9ON.
24)
126* 2h hear nem,
2b hear qf.
To hear from,
I Have just heard. . . .
I have just been told. . . .
It is long sinoe I heard of him.
Have you heard from your brother
lately?
Since I arrived.
On my return.
The day before I started.
The day sEfter I arrived.
Apprendre dee nouveUee.
Entendre parler de.
Recevoir dee nouveUee de.
CJe viens d* apprendre. . . .
<Je viens d' entendre dire. . . .
( On vient de me dire. . . .
n y a longtemps que je n'ai enton-
du parler de lui.
Avez-vous re^u des nouvelles de
votre frfere depuis pen.
Depuis mon arriv6e.
A mon retour.
La veille de mon depart.
Le lendemain de mon arriv^e.
Thedeparture.Le depart.
The return. Le retour.
The day after. Le lendemain.
YOCABULAIRE 42.
rhe distance. La distance.
The arrival. L'arriv^e.
The day before. La veille.
To hear.
To learn.
To hear of.
Only.
Ago.
Lately.
I Apprendre (trr. a. v.) To hear (s. b. say).Entendre dire.
Entendre parler de. To hear from. J Recevoir des nou-
* { velles de.
Settlement {ado.) Far. Loin (adv.)
nya. Since. » Depute Or. *«fo)
■' ( Depuis que (eai^.)
Depnispeu. Long since. Depuis longtemps.
Analyse 42.
1. n y a trois milles d'ici k la ville.
2. II y a six mois que j'^tudie le franqais.
3. II y a longtemps que je ne Pai vn.
EXERCICE 42.
1. Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici au d6p6t du chemin de fer?
2. II y a environ deux milles. 3. Y a-t-il loin d'ici chez vous ?
4. II n'y a pas loin ; je demeure pres de Tuniverait^. 6. Y a-t-il
248 QUARANTE-DBUZItME LK^ON.
longterops que vons y demenrez f 6. J^j demeure depuk troie
ans. 7. Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous avez quitte votre
pays? 8. II y a environ dix ans. 9. Y a-t-il longtemps que
vous 6tes ici? 10. II y a pres de deux heures. 11. Depais
quand savez-vous que le m^decin est parti? 12. Seulement de-
pais ce matin. 13. U y a longterops que je n'ai entendu parler
de votre ami; est-il parti? 14. U est parti pour Paris, il y a
trois mois. 15. Avez-vous requ des nouvelles de lui depnis son
depart? 16. J'ai reqn une lettre de lui depnis pen. 17. Je
viens d'apprendre que M. B . . . . est tr^s-malade ; Tavez-vous su ?
18. Je I'ai entendu dire ce matin. 19. Avez-vous vu le profes-
seur depuis votre retour de la campagne ? 20. On m'a dit qu^il
est parti pour la Havanne, le lendemain de men arrivee. 21.
Avez-vous vii mon cousin avant son depait? 22. II est venu
me voir la veille de son depart. 23. Quand pensez-vous a aller
k la campagne ? 24. Je compte partir k Parrivee du navire
que nous attendons.
Th^me 42.
1. How far is it from here to the harbor {le port)^ 2. It is
about three miles. 3. Is it far from here to the river ? 4. How
many miles is it from Paris to Rome ? 5. How long is it since
your sisters started ? 6. They started two hours ago. 7. How
long have you been waiting? 8. I have been waiting these two
hours. 9. I have just seen your uncle ; how long has he been
here? 10. He has been here since Monday. 11. How long
have you known that the minisfer is going to leave? 12. Only
since noon. 13. I have just heard it. 14. It is long since I
heard of the old professor; where is he now ? 15. He started
for Europe, a fortnight ago. 16. I saw him the day before he
started. 17. My uncle started the day after I arrived. 18. Have
you heard the news? 19. Have you heard from home lately?
20. I have not heard from home since I started. 21. I am wait-
ing for the return of my brother. 22. On his return, I intend
to leave for the country. 23. How have you been since I saw
you ? 24. I heard you had (in French, have) been sick.
QUARANTB'TROISI&ME LB90K.
249
DiCTftE 42. "
Le Legislateur de Lacedimone,
Lycurgue voulant reformer le gouvernement de Lac^deraone,
C0D9ut le hardi dessein de bannir le luxe et la mollesse de la
ville. II fit doDC des lois austeres mais sages, qui devaient ren-
dre les Laced6moniens vertueux, sobres, robustes et actifs, et par
consequent, braves, independants et heureux. Celle qui r6glait
les repas et ordonnait a tous les citoyens de manger ensemble,
d^plut fort aux riches, et lui suscita beaucoup d'ennemis, qui se
plaignirent hautement de la severity du legislateur. Cependant
celui-ci n'^tait pas moinsdur pour lui-m6me que pour les autres ;
car il resolut de mourir volontairement afin d'obliger ses conci-
toyens a garder ses ordonnances.
Get homme, si severe lorsqu'il s'agissait du bien de l'£tat,
montrait, dans sa vie priv^e, un esprit doux et conciliateur,
comme le prouve le trait suivant
Dans une ^meute populaire, un jeune homme, d'un caractere
violent et emport^, nomm^ Alcandre, lui creva un oeil d'un coup
de b&ton. Le peuple, indign^ d'un tel outrage, remit le coupa-
ble entre ses mains. Voici comment Lycurgue s'en vengea. II
le traita avec tant de bont^ et de douceur, qu'il le rendit, en peu
de temps, tr^s-mod^r^ et tres-sage.
43. QUARANTE-TROISlfiME LEQON.
Future Tense, Indicative Mood.
127. (a.) The future tense of all French verbs ends in rat,
r<w, rcr, ronsy reZy ront ; as (see P. III. § liv. 4),
AvoiB, irr.
fentE, irr.
Alleb, irr.
Envotxb, irr.
Fut Taurai,
Je terai,
Tirai,
J*enverrai^
Jkt auras,
Tuaeraif
lUiras,
Tu enverras,
11 aura,
Utera,
Ilira,
Henverra,
Nous aurorUj
Mu8$eron8f
Jiousinms,
Jiout enverroTUf
Vhmaurm,
Vouttera,
VcmireZf
Vou8 enoerrez,
lUauront.
Ibterora,
IlsiroiU.
Ih mwrrnrU,
n^
250
QUARANTB-TROISlftME LE9ON.
(6.) The future anterior m formed of the simple future of the
auxiliary aud the past participle of the verb ; as,
I shall have finished.
We shall have started.
They will have gone to bed.
J'aurai fini.
Nous serons partis,
lis se seront oouch^
Use of the Future.
128t The future tenses are used after quand^ aussitdt que, as
soon as, d^c, when the verb expresses a future act or event ; as,
I will give it to you when I (shall) Je vous le donnerai quand je Vau-
have it. rot.
I will go as soon as he is (will be) J'irai aussitdt qu'il aera de retour.
back.
I will send it to you when I (shall) Je vous Tenverrai quand je Vauran
have received it. re^u.
Rem. — After «t, if, the verb is in the present, when the leading
verb is in the future ; but after n, whether, the verb is put in the
future, when it is to express future time ; as,
I will go, if you will go with me. J'irai, si vous voulez venir avec m<».
I do not know whether I shall go Je ne sals si j'irai ou non.
or not.
139t To lake can.
Will you take care of that f
I shall take good care of it.
Th pay attention.
Pay attention to what I tell you.
To call on.
I shall call on the jeweller when I
go to the post-office.
Avoir aom.
Aurez-vous soin de cela f
J' en aurai Men soin.
Faire aUention a.
Faites attention k ce que je vous dis.
Passer chez.
Je passemi chea le bijoutier quand
j'irai k la poste.
The jeweller.
The painter.
The porter.
The care.
YOCABULAIRE 43.
Le bijoutier. The milliner.
-. . . The painting.
Lepemtre. The ^ttire
Le commissionnaire. The errand.
Le soin. The attention.
La modiste.
y La peinture.
La commissioii
L'attention.
quarante-tboisiAmb lb^ob. 251
To take care of. Avoir aoin de. '^^ti^ to^^^^'^ } ^^^^^ a*<«n*ion k.
To call on. Passer chez. Back. De retour (aij;,/)A.)
. . .... , . . After to-mor- ) Apr^s-demain
As soon as. AussitAtqueCotm;.) ^^^ \ (ad^.jphr.)
Analyse 43.
1. Je repondrai k la lettre aussit6t que je I'aurai regue.
2. Nous partirons qaand nous nous seroDs chaufl^s.
EXERCICE 43.
1. Le doinestique aura-t-il soin de notre cheval ! 2. 11 en aura
bien soin. 3. Serez-vous de retour de bonne heure ? 4. Nous
serons de retour avant ce soir. 5. Quand irons-nous voir votre
tante? 6. Nous irons la voir quand elle sera de retour de la
campagne. 7. Enverrez-vous quelqu'un i la poste ? 8. J'y en-
verrai le domestique. 9. Aurez-vous votre chapeau aujourd'hui f
10. La modiste me Tenverra cette apr^s-midi. 11. Passerez-
vous chez le bijoutier? 12. J'y passerai quand j'lrai au bureau.
13. £tudierez-vou8 quand vous serez k la campsgne? 14. Nous
n'aurons pas le temps d'^tudier. 15. Quand le peintre finira-t-il
votre portrait? 16. II le finira quand il se portera bien. 17.
Votre ami me repondra-t-il, si je lui ^crisf 18. II vous r^pon-
dra au8sit6t qu'il aura recju votre lettre. 19. La recevra-t-il de-
main, si je la lui envoie aujourd^hui ! 20. Je ne sais sMl la rece-
vra demain ou apres-demain. 21. Partirez-vous demain s'il fait
beau-temps ? 22. Je partirai aussitot que mon fr^re sera arriv6.
23. i^crirez-vous quand vous vous serez chauff<§ ? 24. Quand je
me serai chauffe, je lirai le journal. 25. Faites-vous attention k
c€ que je dis ? 26. J'j &i8 attention.
Th£me 43.
1. Shall we have much fruit this year? 2. We shall have
but little. 3. Will you take care of my hire's during my ab*
252 quarantb-tboibiAme lb^on.
•
sence? 4. I will take good care of them. 5. When fthall you
be back ? 6. I shall be back the day after to-inorrow. 7. Shall
you'^go to the milliner's! 8. I shall call there when I ro to the
jeweller's. 9. Whom shall we send to the bookseller's ? 10. We
8hall send the porter there. 1 1 . He has gone on an (en) errand
for my father, bnt he will soon be back. 12. Shall you go out
when you have finished writing? 13. When I have done wri-
ting, I shall carry my letter to the post-office. 14. Will the
painter answer you soon 9 15. He will answer me as soon as he
has received my letter. 16. Shall you buy that painting? 17.
I shall not, for I have no money. 1 8. Shall you call at the office
when you have finished ? 19. I do not know whether I shall
have time. 20. Shall you take a walk when you have wanned
youi-self ? 21. I shall go to bed, for I am very sleepy. 22. My
friends, you shall not learn much, if jon do not pay attention to
what I tell you.
DiCTfiE 43.
Beaux Jours iTAthenes.
Themistocle eut I'ambition de vouloir rendre sa pa trie supe-
rieure k Laced6mone ; il tourna I'attention des Atheniens vers la
mer, et fonda une nouvelle puissance, en creant des forces na-
vales. Gimon les mit en usage par ses expeditions maritimes
contre les Perses. Aristide fournit aux d^penses de la guerre
par la sage Economic avec laquelle il administra les deniers pu-
blics. Pericles maintint et augmenta par sa prudence ce que les
autres avaient acquis. Ainsi, la politique de Themistocle. I'acti-
vite de Cimon, le desint^ressement d'Aristide, et la sagesse de
Pericles concoururent k I'^levation et k la grandeur d'Athenes.
A cette epoque, l'6mulation parmi les beaux espiits, excit6e
par des recompenses et des distinctions, porta les arts et les
sciences k une perfection jusqu'alors inconnue.
Deux peiiitres c^lebres, Parrhasius et Zeuxis, entrerent en lice
pour se disputer la palme. Celui-ci avait represente dans un
tableau des raisins qui ^taient si ressemblants, que les oiseaux
vinrent les becqueter ; Tautre, dans le sien, avait peint un rideau.
QUARAMTS-QUATRlftHE LE90K.
258
Zeuxis, fier du suffrage des oiseaux, dit d Parrhasius : *^ Tirez le
rideau, afin qu'on voie votre ouvrage/' Ayant reconnu son er-
reur, il avoaa iDgeDument qu'il etait vaincu, disant : ^ J^ai tromp^
des oiseaux, mais voos m'avez tromp^ moi-m^me."
44. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON.
130* The following, besides the four verbs (127) in the pre-
ceding lesson,
(P. III. § Iv.)
To come.
To be able.
To know.
To see.
To be willing.
To do or make.
with a few others, are irregular in the future.
ItihaU or vnll come, &c. Yenir. Je viendrai^ &c.
IfhoUl or tnU he abUf &c, Pouvoir. Jepoumd, &c.
I shall or will know, &c. Sayoir. Je taurai, &c.
ItikaU or wiU tee, &c. Voir. Je verrai, &c.
lehaU or vriU be wQling, &c. Youloir. Je voudrai^ &c.
IthaU or wiU do^ &c. Faire. Je/erai, &c.
You will do as you like.
I sball do what I can.
He may say what he likes.
I shall see him when he comes.
I shall know it when you return.
Yous ferez comme vous Youdrez.
Je ferai ce que je pourrai.
n dira ce qu'il voudra.
Je le verrai quand il viendra.
Je le saurai quand vous reviendres.
131. Whatday<,faenwnthi.Uf \^^'!^f'^'''''>'''^*
I Quel jour du mou eet-ee f
Rem. 1. — The cardinal numbers are used for the days of the
month, except for the first.
It is the first. Kous avons, or C'est, le premier.
It is the second, third, &c. Nous avons le deux, le trois, &c.
It is the eleventh. G'est le onze.
Rem. 2. — MiUe^ a thousand, is written mt7, in the ordinary
computation of years.
One thousand eight hundred and Mil huit cent soixante.
sixty.
New York, the 20th of July, 18-. New York, le 20 juillet, 1&-.
254 WARAHTX-QirATRltlfK LS^OV.
January, Febrnaty, ICarch, April, Janvier, f^vrier, noais. avril maij
May, June, July, August, Sep- juin, juillet, ao(it, eeptembre,
tember, October, November, De- octobre, novembre, d^cembre.
cember.
7b taheplaoe. Avoir lieu.
When will the festival take place. Quand la fete aura-t-elle lien f
It will take place m the 10th of Kile aura lieu le dix octobie (119,
October. Roi. 1).
VOCABULAIRB 44.
To please. I Falre plaWr k. To keep one ) Faire attendre
To oblige. ) waiting. ) quelqn'nn.
To be obliged. £tre oblige (de) To be in a hurry. £tre preset (de)
To dress (o. s.) 8'habiller (rrf, v.) To make haste. Se d^pScher (de).
To hope. Esp^rer (a. v.) To take place. Avoir lieu.
Beady (to). Pr€t (k), (adj.) And then. Puis {eonj.)
Then. Alors {enh.) Then. Done {eot^\)
That is to say. C'est-k-dire. In short, at last. Enfin (ado. )
Analyse 44.
Je r^pondrai k la lettre aassit6t que je Taarai re^ue.
n m'a dit qu'il viendra s'il fait beau tempe.
ExxRciCE 44.
1. Yiendrez-vous me voir ce soir ? 2. Je ne pourrai ; je serai
oblig6 de rester k la maison. 3. Quand reviendrez-vous ici ?
4. Je reviendrai le dix juillet 5. Quand saurez-vous si voire
frere viendra ? 6. Je le saurai quand je recevrai sa letti-e. 7.
Et s'il ne vient pas ? 8. Alors j'irai le voir le premier juin. 9.
Quel jour du mois avous-nous aujourd'hui ? 10. Nous avons
aujourd'hui le vingt-cinq mai. 11. Yous irez done le voir la se-
maine procbaine ! 12. C'est-iL-diresMl ne vient pas. 13. Quand
verrez-vous le peintre? 14. Je le verrai aujourd'hui. 15. Que
fera-t-il du tableau que vous lui avez rendu? 16. II en fera ce
qu'il voudra. 11, Quand la fete aura-t-elle lieu? 18. EUe aura
lieu demain. 19. Irez-vous au concert ce soir? 20. JVai pour
QUARANTE-QtJATRlftME LByOK. 255
faire plaisir k ma niece, qui desire y aller. 21. Quand vous ha-
billerez-vous ? 22. Je m'habillerai quand je me serai chaufFe.
23. J'espere que vous ne me ferez pas attendre longtemps. 24.
Je me d^p^cherai. 26. fetes-vous press6? 26. Je suis pre8s6
de retourner chez moi ; on m'y attend. 27. Sonunes-nous enfin
pi6ts k partir? 28. Nous ie sommes; je prendrai mon man-
teau, puis nous partirons.
ThAme 44.
1. Shall you return soon ? 2. I shall return as soon as I can.
3. When shall you see your friend ? 4. I shall see him as soon
as he arrives. 5. Shall you be able to do ^hsit I told you ? 6.
I shall see. 7. I shall know it to-night. 8. I will do it in order
to oblige you. 9. We shall see you then to-morrow ? 10. That
18 to say, if my uncle does not come. 11. If he comes, I shall
be obliged to remain here. 12. Then I shall go to town on the
first of August. 13. When did the festival take place? 14. It
took place on the fourteenth of July. 16. Shall you be ready
soon ? I am in a hurry to start 16. I shall dress, and then we
shall start 17. Make haste then, pray (je vous en prie). 18. I
shall not keep you waiting long. 19. Has your brother dressed ?
20. He is dressing. 21. Tell him to make haste. 22. He will
make haste. 23. Here we are at last, ready to start 24. I hope
we shall arrive in (a) time.
Diot6e 44.
Beaux Jours de Ht^hes.
Sparte dominait sur la Grece, et Thebes 6tait fiiible et au pou-
voir d*Archias, qui etait dans I'inter^t de Lac6d6mone, lorsque
deux Th^bains r^ussirent, par leur courage et par leur prudence,
k delivrer la ville du joug des tyrans; ils abattirent ensuite le
pouvoir formidable de Sparte, et porterent leur pa trie au nlua
haul point de gloire. Ces deux Thebains furent Pelopidas et Epa*
niinondai>. Tant quMls v6curent Thebes brilla au premier rang
266 QUARANTB-CINQUlftME LE9ON.
parrai les villes de la Grece ; son pouvoir et sa sagesse lui valu
rent de la pai*t des £tat8 voisins rhommage et le respect que le
faible rend au fort, et que nul ne peut refuser au succes eclatant,
k la vraie gloire. A la mort de ces deux grands hommes, la
gloire de Thebes s'^teignit.
lis moururent tous les deux en combattant pour la patrie. Pe-
lopidas pay a de sa vie la t6m6rit6 avec laquelle it poursuivit le
tyran de Ph^res, qui fuyait devant lui. £paminondas tomba a
la bataille de Mantin^e, perc6 d*un javelot, dont le fer lui resta
dans la poi trine. Les m^decins d6clarerent qu'il expirerait des
qu'on 6terait le fer de la plaie, nmis le heros de Leuctres ue fut
inquiet que sur le sort de la bataille. On vint lui dire que les
Tfaebains Tavaient gagn6e. '^Alors," r6pondit-il, ** j'ai assez veeu ;
arrachez le fer."
45. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON.
132t Thhavenetdf^, ) j • r - j
To want, lobe in want <^. ^ ^ww doom &.
Do you want any thing ? Avez-vous besoin de qq. ch.
What do you want ? De quo! avea-vous besoin f
I want gloyes. J'ai besoin de gants.
To want. FaOoir (97).
What do you want ? Que vous faut-il ?
I want gloves. II me faut des grants.
What do you want for your trouble ? Que vous faut-il pour votre peine f
TohepUaatdwUh. I i*_ . ^ j
ToheBaiuJkdwiih, ^ Btn content de.
Were you pleased with those gloves f Avez- vous ^t^ content de ces gants ?
I was. J'en ai ^t^ tr^s-content.
Are you pleased with this work- £tes-vou8 content de cet ouviier ?
manf
I am. Je suis content de lui (58).
133. To BB WOBTH. ValoiBj in. n. v. (lvi.21), p.p. wdu
How much is that worth ? Combien cela vaut-il ?
That is not worth much. Cela ne vaut pas grand' chose.
QUARANTB-CINQUlftHB LE^ON.
261
It is worth a dollar.
It is not worth more.
How much are these gloves worth ?
They are worth a dollar a pair.
7b be worth wkUe,
Is it worth while to speak of it ?
It is not worth while.
IbbebeUer.
My horse is not hetter than yours.
The one is not much hetter than
the other.
Jti8 better.
Gela vaut une piastre.
Gela ne vaut pas davantage.
Combien ces gants valent-ils ?
lis valent une piastre la paire.
Valoir la peine.
Cela vaut-il la peine d'en parler ?
Cela n'en vaut pas la peine.
Valoir mieux,
Mon cheval ne vaut pas mieux que
le v6tre.
L'un ne vaut gu^re mieux que
r autre.
II vaut mieux (imp. v.)
Rem. — Than^ before the infinitive, is expressed by qiie cfe.*
It is better to stay here than to go II vaut mieux rester ici que da
out. Bortir.
I like better to stay than to go out. J'aime mieux rester que<> sortir.
The price.
The need.
The necessity.
The thread.
VOCABULAIRE 45.
Le prix. The dozen. La douzaine.
[Lebesoin SjT''':, [Lapeine.
S The trouble. I *
L' aiguille.
Lefil.
The pain.
The trouble.
The needle.
lAvoirbesol.ide. To be pleased [ fjtre conten de.
of. \ with. I
To want.
To have need <
To want. Falloir (tr.tm.t;.) To be worth Valoir (try. n. v.)
To show. Faire voir. To send for. Faire venir.
More. Davantage.f At most. Tout au plus..
Not much. Pasgrand'chose. Nothing else. Rien autre chose.
Analyse 45.
1. Avez-vous ce qu'il vous faut?
2. J'ai tout ce dont j^ai besoin.
* Z>0 is sappressed after aimer mietutf when it denotes preference of taste ; as, J'aime
mieua lire qttejauer.
t Davantaffe cannot precede a depending noun or word, bat is preferable to plus at
tbe end of a sentence.
258 WARANTB-OINQUlftMB JJtgOV,
EXERCICE 45.
1. Avez-voufi besoin de quelque cboee ? 2. .Pai besoin de bas.
8. Vous faat-il des bas de fil ? 4. II me faat des bas de coton.
5. Quel est le prix de ces bas ? 6. lis valent cinquaDte sous la
paire. 7. CombieD de paii'es vous en faut-il ? 8. 11 m'en faut
quatre paires. 9. Corobien de mouchoirs faut-il d mademoiselle
voire soeur? 10. II lui en faut une demi-douzaine. 11. N^avez-
vous pas besoin de fil, mademoiselle ? 12. II m'en fiiut, et il me
faut aussi des aiguilles. 13. Ne vous faut-il rieu autre chose ?
14. G*est tout ce qu'il me faut pour aujourd^huL 15. Madame
voire taute a-t-elle M conteuie de la den telle que je lui ai eu-
voy6e! 16. EUe en a 6t6 trds-coutente. 17. £tes-vous content
de vos Aleves! 18. Je suis tr^s-conient d'eux. 19. Combien
ce tableau vaut-il ? 20. U vaut tout au plus vingt piastres. 21.
Ne vaut-il pas davantagef 22. II ne vaut guere cela. 23.
Vaut-il la peine d*aller voir les tableaux qui sont dans cette
^glise ? 24. n faut y aller ; ils en valent la peine. 25. Vaut-il
mieux aller voir les tableaux que d^^crire mes lettres ? 26. II
vaut mieux aller voir les tableaux k present ; vous ^crirez vos
letti-es apres. 27. Voire domestique vaut-il mieux que le notre!
28. VxLU ne vaut guere mieux que Tautre.
THftHB 45.
1. What do jou want ? 2. I want thread. 3. Do yon want
needles ? 4. I want some too. 5. Does your brother want any
thing? 6. He wants handkerchiefs. 7. How many does he
want ? 8. He wants a dozen. 9. Do you want nothing else ?
10. I want gloves, if you have good ones. 11. We have : you
will be pleased with them. 12. How much is that fan worth ?
13. It is worth three dollars. 14. Is that picture worth any
thing? 15. It is worth five dollars, at most 16. That is not
much, but it is not worth more. 17. If your hand pains you, I
will send for the physician. 18. It is not worth while. 19. If
you are not satisfied with this dress, I will make you another.
QUARANTE-CINQUlftME LEgOK. 269
2C 1 will show you the stuff I speak of. 21. It is not worth
while to show it to me, for I have no mind to buy it. 22. Is it
better tc read than to work ? 23. It is better to work than to
read, but I like better to read than to work. 24. Is this boy bet-
ter than his brother ?
DlOT^E 45.
Empire sur JSoi-rnhne,
Une pauvre femme avait souvent, mais en vain, demande au-
dience a Philippe, roi de Macedoine, pour certains torts dont elle
se plaignait Le roi, dans un moment d'impatience, lui dit qu'il
n'avait pas le temps de Tecouter. "Non !" s'ecria cette femme;
" vous n'avez done pas le temps d'etre roi !" Philippe, qui ue
s'atteudait pas a cette apostrophe, fut confondu ; et, ayant pese
ces paroles en silence, il permit a la femme de s'expliquer. 11
se fit ensuite une loi d'ecouter attentivement tons ceux qui sV
dresseraient 4 lui.
Alezandre-le-Grand, marchant k la conqu^te de Funivers, tra-
versait en Asie ud grand d6sert de sable. Ueau vint a manquer ;
il u'en restait qu'une petite quantite, qu'un soldat prit dans son
casque et offrit au roi. Mais Alexandre, voyant ses soldats alteres
aussi bien que lui, s'ecria : ^ Moi, je boirais seul !'' Et il r^pandit
I'eau our la terre. Remplis d'ad miration pour un prince qui sa-
vait ainsi commander k ses besoins, ses soldats s'ecrierent tous a
la fois : *^ Marchons ! nous ne sommes pas fatigues ; nous n'avons
pas soif ; nous nous croyons plus que des mortels sous la con-
duite d^un si grand roi.'*
260
quarahte-sduAme UC9ON.
46. QUARANTE-STXlilME LEgON.
131« To BIT DOWN.
Fray, be seated.
She sat down at the window.
To be sitting.
She is sitting at the window.
To 00 AW AT.
Are yon going away f
Have they gone f
I shall go away.
Go away.
S'asseoib, iiT. (Ivi. 19), p.p. a«i
iAsseyez-vous, je vous en prie.
Prenez la peine de vous asseoir.
Elle s'est assise k la fenetre.
Elrtattu,
Elle est assise k la fenetre.
S'km allkb, trr. (Ivi. 1.)
Yoos en aHes-vous f
S'ensont-ilsall^r
Je m'en irai.
Allez-vons-en.
ISSt lb (urnue cne*8 teff.
To be weary, to want anuuemenL
Do you enjoy yourself here f
I am tired of being here.
I do not enjoy myself here.
7b spend onis time (tn).
To spend money (in).
How do you spend your time ?
Yous amusei-yons id f
> Je m'ennuie id.
JS*amuaer (a).
Passer U temps (d).
Dipenser de V argent (d).
X quoi passes- vous le temps?
I spend the time in playing on the Je m' amuse k jouer de la flftte.
flute.
Rem. — Jouer takes de before a musical instrument, and a be-
fore the names of games.
To play upon the violin. Jouer du violon.
To play at cards. Jouer aux cartes.
136« To PLBASB.
Are you pleased with this book f
I am much pleased with it.
What is your pleasure ?
What do you wish ?
I beg your pardon ; what did you
say?
To delight (in), to be pleased, to like.
Are you pleased in the country ?
I like to be here.
She takes pleasure in horticulture.
Plairb (X), trr. n. r. (Ivi. 39.)
Ce livre vous pla»t-il ?
II me plait beaucoup.
I Que vous platt-il f
Plaf t-il ?
Seplaire (a).
Vous plaisez- vous k la campagne f
Je me plais ici.
Elle se plait k 1' horticulture.
QUARANTB-SIXllSMB LB^ON.
261
VOCABULAIRE 46.
The pattern. Le dessin.
The ioBtrument. L' instrument.
The violin. Le vlolon.
The game. )j^.
The play. J *'
Card-playing. I ^e jeu de cartes. The aocietv
Pack of cards, f ^ J«" "« "^'«»-. 1 He society.
The color.
The (evening)
party.
The flute.
The card.
La couleur.
!- La soiree.
Laflate.
La carte.
La soci^t^.
To sit down. S'asseoir (ref. v.) To go away.
To amuse o. s. S'amuser {rtf. v.) To be weary.
To gain, to earn. Gagner (a. Sen, v.) To spend.
To please. Plaire (k), (». v.) To delight (in).
S'en aller {rrf, v.)
S'ennuyer {ref. v.)
D^penser (a. v.)
Se plaire (k), (r.v.)
Analyse 46.
1. n est assis sur le sofa ; elle s'est assise a c6te de lui.
2. Elles ne se sent pas plu ^ la campagne.
EXBRCICE 46.
1. OOl voulez-vous vous asseoir? 2. Je m'assi^rai pres da
feu, 3. OOi votre frere s'est-il assis ? 4. II s'est assis k c6te de
ma soeur. 5. OCi votre soeur est-elle assise ? 6. Elle est assise
a la fenetre. 7. Ponrquoi vons levez-vous? 8. Je me l^ve,
pai'ce que je veux ra'en aller. 9. Votre ami s'en va-t-il? 10. U
s'en est deja all6. 11. Vous 6tes-vous amus6 k la soiree? 12.
Je m'y suis ennuye. 13. A quoi passez-vous le temps? 14. Je
passe le temps k 6tudier. 15. Que faites-vous le soir? 16. Le
soir je m'amuse a faire de la musique. 17. De quel instrument
jouez-vous? 18. Je joue du violon. 19. Jouez-vous aux cartes?
20. Je n'aime pas le jeu de cartes. 21. Depensez-vous beau-
coup ? 22. Je d^pense presque tout ce que je gagne. 23. Com-
ment trouvez-vous cette 6toffe ? 24. Elle est belle, mais ce des-
sin ne me plait guere. 25. Plait-il k votre soeur. 26. La cou-
leur ne lui plait pas. 27. Vous plaisez-vous ici? 28. Je me
plais beaucoup ici.
262 QCTARANTE-SmftMB LX9OK.
THftME 46.
I
1. Sit dowQ on the sofa ; I shall sit down by 70a. 2. My fa
ther has sat down at the window. 6. My mother is sitting at
the fire. 4. I have no time to sit down, I am in a hurry to re-
turn home. 5. Why is he going away ? 6. He is going away,
because he does not enjoy himself here. 7. Are you going
away ? 8. We are not ; we enjoy ourselves very well here. 9.
I never am tired of being in the society of my friends. 10. Have
you spent much money? 11. I have not spent much. 12. Did
you play cards? 13. Did your cousin gain in playing (aujeu) ?
14. He lost. 16. How do you spend your time in the country?
16. I spend my time in reading and in playing on the violin.
17. When I am tired of being in the house, I go to take a walk.
18. How does your sister like to be in the country? 19. She
does not like it much. 20. She is soon tired of being there.
21. Does this pattern please you? 22. Does it please your sis-
ter ? 23. That color does not please us. 24. I like to ramble
(courir) in the woods.
DiCTftE 46.
Le Fondateur de Rome.
Rome 6tant fondee, il s'61eva une dispute entre Romulus et
Remus, et Romulus, dans un moment de colere, tua son frere.
II fit ensuite la guerre avec succes, et agrandit et fortifia la
ville de Rome, par la sage politique d'y incorporer les nations qu'il
vainquit. Dans le long cours de son r^gne, qui dura trente-sept
ans, Romulus, par ses exploits pei'sonnels et par ses frequentes
victoires, inspira a ses sujets I'esprit belliqueux et conquerant,
dont il etait lui-m^me anim^. Cet espnt se conserva dans le
peuple romain, et le mena plus tard k la conqu^te du monde.
Un jour, Romulus passait son armee en revue pres du marais de
Capra ; il s'6leva une temp^te accompagn^ de grands coups de
tonnerre, et Romulus disparut anx yeux de ses soldats, qui furent
frappes d'^tonnement Le peuple crut quMl ^tait mont^ au ciel.
QUARANTK-SE^TlftMB LSgON.
263
Proculus, d'une famille noble, accr^dita ce bruit. Une sedition
s'^tant 61ev6e, Proculus s'avan^a dans Tassemblee du peuple, et
affirma que Romulus lui 6tait apparu, et que ce piince recom-
mandait aux Romains d'6viter les seditions et de pratiquer la
verta. Ainsi Romulus reput les honneurs divins sous le nom de
QuirinuB.
47. QUARANTE-SEPTlfeME LEgON.
Imperfect Tense, Indicatiye Mood. (liv. 7.)
137t The imperfect always ends in ais, ais, ait^ ions^ iez^ aient.
It may be formed from the first person plural of the indicative
present, by substituting the above terminations for the ending
<m8. To this rule there is but one exception, which is the im-
perfect of the verb Ure^ to be.
Avois.
Alubr.
Fl»IR.
ferRB (Kxc.)
Avons.
Allons.
FiniBsons.
Bommes.
Imp Taoait,
J'aUais,
JefinisscMf
J'itaU,
Taavais,
TudUau,
TufiniMOMy
TaHcan,
llavaU,
IlaUaU,
Jljmistait,
IliUat,
Nam aviorUf
NousaUiofUy
NimfinmwM,
Vouaaviez,
VbusaUiaj
Vouafinitsia,
Vouiitia,
Ilaavaient.
Ibaliaient.
lb finisaaient.
IleStaient.
Use of the Imperfect.
138* The imperfect is used :
1st. As a simultaneous past, when it corresponds with was
and the present participle in English ; as,
I was writing while yon were read- J'^crivais pendant que tous lisies.
ing.
He said that he wais going to write. II disait qu'il allait ^crire.
2d. To express customary or repeated action, when it corre*
sponda with tued^ or did tue^ and the infinitive in English ; as^
264
QUARANTS-SEPTIAmE LSgON.
I used formerly to read a great Je lisais beauooap autrefois.
deal.
Did you use to study in the even- £tudiiez-vous le soir f
ingr
3d. To describe what was, or existed, in past time ; as.
His fiither was formerly a merchant. Son p^re ^tait n^^ocian t antrefois.
lliat city did not then exist. Oette ville n'existait pas alors.
lS9t So (to such an extent). Si (ado.)
SoMuoH ** •« TAOT(ato.)
Rem. — Si and tant express extension, and aussi and autani
(P. II. 92), comparison. Si and aussi are used with adjectives and
adverbs, and tant and autant, with substantives and verbs.
He was so rich that he did not
know what to do with his money .
He used to read so much that he
had no time to do any thing else.
To go hunting.
To go fishing.
To do business.
To do a large business.
n ^tait si riche qu'il ne savait que
figdre de son argent,
n lisait tant qu'il n'avait pas le
temps de taire autre chose.
Aller k la chasse.
Aller k la p^che.
Faire des affiures.
Faire de grandes affiiires.
VOCABULAIRE 47.
A clerk.
Un commis.
Anaffidr.
A business.
I Une aflfidre.
A merchant.
Un nigodant.
Business.
Desaffidres.
A hunter.
Un chasseur.
Hunting.
La chasse.
A fisherman.
Un pScheur.
Fishing.
LapSche.
To weigh.
Peser (o. ^ n. v.)
To measure.
Mesurer (a, v.)
To contain.
Contenir (a. v.)
To exist.
Exister (». v.)
When.
Lorsque (eory.)
Since.
Puisque (eof^*.)
Formerly.
Autrefois {adw,)
WhUe.
Pendant que (eof|;.)
So.
Si(«to.)
So much.
Tant {adv.)
QUARANTE-SBPTlftME LE9OK. 265
Analyse 47.
1. Elle etait si bonne que tout le monde Faimait.
2. II gagnait tant d'argent qu'il ne savait qu^en^ faire.
ExBRCics 47.
1. Oh 6tiez-yous quand je suis entr^? 2. tT^tais dans ma
chambre ; je m'habillais. 3. Aviez-vous le livre quand je le
cherchais ? 4. Je Fayais, mais je ne savais pas que vous le cher-
chiez. 5. Quelle heure etait-il quand vous ^tes rentr6 ? 6. II
6tait dix Jieures, 7. D'oii veniez-vous? 8. Je venais de chez
mon oncle. 9. Neigeait-il? 10. II pleuvait. 11, Y avait-il
quelqu'un dans le salon ? 12. Ma mere et mes soeurs y etaient.
13. A quoi passiez-vous le temps lorsque vous 4tiez 4 la cam-
pagne? 14. Nous allions k la chasse ou k la p6che. 15. Que
faisaient vos soeurs ? 16. Elles s'amusaient k lire ou k faire de
la musique. 17. Yotre oncle s'y plaisait-il? 18. II s'y ennuy-
ait; ii voulait toujours revenir k la ville. 19. Est-il negociant?
20. II Tetait autrefois ; il a quitt6 les affaires, et maintenant il
est rentier.! 21. Que faisaient les commis ce matin? 22. Les
uns pesaient des caisses, et les autres mesuraient des pieces de
drap. 23. Que contenaient les caisses ? 24. Elles contenaient
du Sucre. 25. Faisait-il froid pendant que vous attendiez au
d6p6t ? 26. II faisait si froid que j'etais oblig^ de mettre mon
mantean. 27. Lisiez-vous beancoup lorsque vous 4tiez jeune?
28. Je lisais tant que je n'avais pas le temps de faire autre chose.
29. Pourquoi n^avez-vous pas voulu regarder cette ^toffe? 30.
II n'en valait pas la peine, puisque je n'avais pas envie de Tacheter.
TnftME 47.
1. Was your brother writing when you were in his room ? 2.
He was dressing ; he said that he was going to write. 3. Was
your sister in the parlor? 4. She was sitting by the fire, and
* Qu\ for qiie^ is an absolute pronoan (p. 85, note *),
t Henti^r, one who lives on his money, who does nothing.
12
266 QUARANTE SBPTlftMB LE9ON.
wa8 reading. 5. Were you cold wheu you came 11.? 6. We
were cold, hungry, and thirsty. 7. Did you study while you
were in the country ? 8. We did not study much ; it was too
warm. 9. My fEither used to go hunting formerly, but he does
not now. 10. He used to travel (P. III. xlii. 1) a great deal when
he was young. 1 1. We then lived down town {dans le has de la
ville), 12. This part of the city did not exist ten years ago. , 13.
Those men were merchants formerly. 14. They did a large
business. 15. They gained so much money that they did not
know what to do with it 16. They had several clerks, several
servants, and several horses. 17. Now they are so poor that
they have neither clerk, nor servant, nor horse. 18. When we
were at school, we used to read so much that we forgot some-
times to study our lessons. 19. You did wrong (jnal), 20. I
will go fishing with you, since you wish it, but I believe it will
rain. 21. Were the clerks measuring the cloth? 22. What
did the boxes contain which they were weighing? 23. Those
men were formerly fishermen ; now they are hunters.
DictAe 47.
Combat entre lea Horaces ei Us Curiaces.
Sous le regne de Tullius Hostilius, la guerre 6clata entre les
Romains et les Albains. II y avait dans Tarm^e des Romains
trois freres jnmeaux nommes Horaces, et dans Parm^e des Al-
bains trois autres freres jumeaux appel^s Curiaces. II fut d6cide
que les destinees des deux pcuples seraient confines a ces deux
partis. Le trait6 portait quails combattraient chacun pour sa pa-
trie, et que IVmpire appartiendrait k la nation dont les champions
remporteraient la victoire. Les Horaces et les Curiaces, animes de
part et d'autre du courage des grandes kmes, prirent les armes et
s'avancerent au milieu des deux armies. On donna le signal et le
combat commenga. Aussitdt deux Romains tomberent expirants
I'uu sur Tautre ; mais les trois Albains etaient bless^s^ Us entou-
r^rent le seul Horace, qui 6tait sans blessure. Le Remain feignit
de fiiir pour les attaquer s6par6ment. Dej^ il 6tait assez loin de
QUABAKTE-HUmftMS LSgOK. 267
I'endroit od le combat fht livr^, lorsqne, toarnant la t6te, il vit
an des Cnriaces pres de lui. II revint sur celui-ci de toute sa
force et le tua. II coarnt an second et le toa de m6me. II ne
restait plos de chaque c6t4 qu'un combattant, mais leur esp^-
ranee et leurs forces n'6taient point ^gales. L'un, fier d^une
double victoire, n'avait pas 6t6 atteint par le fer. L'autre, affai-
bli par le sang quMl avait perdu et 6puis6 par la course, pouvait
k peine soutenir ses arines. Aussi ce ne fut pas un combat. Le
Romain acheva I'Albain et ensuite le depouilla. L'armee romaine
re^ut Horace avec joie, et le reconduisit chez lui en tiiomphe.
48. QUARANTE-HUITlilME LEgON.
Pluperfect Tense, Indicative Mood.
140» The pluperfect is the compound tense that corresponds
with the imperfect; as,
I had apokm, &c. tTavais parlS, &c.
Ihadwme, &c. J'HcMvmu, &c. (xxviii. 8, (2).)
/ had dressed, &c. Je m'koxs habOU, &c. (xxvUi. 8, (1).)
1 4 1 • To pay for something. Payer qudque chose.
Ih pay somd)ody for something. Payer qudque chose d qudqu*un.
Rem. 1. — When the thing paid for is not expressed, the person
becomes the direct object of the verb ; as,
7b pay somebody. Payer quelqu'un.
How much did you pay for that f Combien aves-vous pay tf cela ?
I paid the baker for the bread. J'ai pay^ le pain an boulanger.
Rem. 2. — For or at^ used before the price of a thing, with the
verbs to buy and sell, is generally not expressed in French ; and
a or an, limiting the unit of weight or measure by which any
thing is bought or sold, is rendered by the article.
I buy this coffee at twenty cents a J' achate ce caf^ vingt sous la livre.
pound.
He sells the flour at ten dollars a II vend la ferine dix piastres le ba*
barrel . ' ril.
268
QUARikNTE-WITltliV L«90K.
142.
7h go up, to eome i^, to oioeml
7b go down^ to eome down.
He went up nimbly.
He came down nimbly.
He has gone up to bis room.
She has come down.
He went up the stain.
He came down the mountain.
To ride.
To dismount.
I ride on horseback eveiy day.
I ride to the Tillage.
MoiUer, a. k n. t. (117 )
JDescmdre, a. & n. ▼. (1x7.)
n a mont^ lestement (action).
n a desoendu lestement "
n ett mont^ k sa chambre {t&aationy
Ella mt desoeadue **
Ua^mont^ 1' escaUec (xxviiL 2, (1).)
n a desoendu la montagne ( " )•
Uonter h cbeval. Aller k cheval.
Descendre de cheval.
Je monte h cheval tons lea Jonre.
Je vais au village h cheval.
US* Tof
ToUe,to deqf.
I slept in the next room.
I did not sleep well.
7h fall tuieqt,
Ibtpoke.
7h awake.
If I fall asleep, wake me.
I awoke early.
DouiiE (irr. n. v.) (Ivi. 7.)
(hueher (n. v.)
J'ai couchtf dans la chambre k obXL
Je n'ai pas bien dormi.
S'endonmr (irr. ref. v.) Gvi. 7.)
JSoeUler.
S'iveiaer.
8i je m'endoTB, ^veilles-moi.
Je me suis tfveill^ de bonne henro.
VOCABULAIRK 48.
The staini. L'escalier. The mountain.
The meter. Le m^tre. The elL
ThekilognrammcLe Idlogramme. The pound.
To pay.
To go up.
To come up.
To ascend.
To go down.
To come down.
To sleep.
To wake.
Fteyer (a. v.) To cost.
>-Monter(a. 4rfi. 0.)
To go up
again.
La montagne*
L'aune.
Lalivre.
Goikter (». v.)
(Bemonter (a. 8f n.
V.)
[Descendre (a. if n.
V.)
Dormir (trr. n. v.)
Eveiller (a. v.)
Upstairs; above. En haut {ado* jffh.)
To lie^ to sleep. Coucher («. v.)
To fall asleep. S'endormir (rrf.v.'\
To awake. 8' Eveiller {rtf. v.)
iEnba8(adp.pAr.)
Down stairs
Below.
Analyse 48.
1. J'ai paye la farine dix piastres le baril.
2. U est moQte sur la montagne. II a moiit6 la montagne.
EXBROIOB 48.
1 Aviez-votts fini d'6crire quand je suis eiitr6 ? 2. Je n'avais
pas commence. 3. Votre frdre avait-il re^ la lettre quand vous
I'avez vu? 4. II Favait re<?ue, et il y avait rdpondu. 6. Avait-
il pay6 les tableaux ? 6. II ne les avait pas pay^s quand je Fai
quitt6. 7. Avez-vous pay6 le m^decinf 8. Je Pai pay 6. 9.
Votre soeur a-t-elle paye les fleurs k la modiste? 10. £lle les
lui a payees. 11. £tait-el]e sortie quand je suis venu? 12.
Elle 6tait montee k sa ^ambre. 13. Est-elle encore en haut?
14. £lle est descendue. 15. O^ est le gar^on? 16. II est des-
cendu dans la cave. 17. N'est-il pasremont^? 18. II est en-
core en bas. 1 9. Montez-vous sonvent i cheval ? 20. Je monte
tous les jours k cheval. 21. Pourquoi Stes-vous descendu de
cheval ? 22. J'avais oubli^ de prendre mon fbuet. 23. Od
avez-vous couch6? 24. Nous avons couche an village. 25
Avez-vouA bien dormi ? 26. Je n'ai presqne pas dormi ; il fai-
sait si chaud. 27. Vous 6tiez-vous endormi? 28. Je m'6tais
endormi ; j'avais bien sommeil. 29. Vous ai-je 6veill6 9 SO. II
6tait temps de m*6veiller.
TntME 48.
1. Had yon sent the letter when your friend arrived ? 2. I
had sent it, bat he had not received it. 3. Had your brother
paid the workmen when you saw him ? 4. He had not paid
them then, but he has paid them since. 5. How much did you
pay for these engravings ?> 6. I paid five dollars apiece for them.
7. Did you pay the bookseller for the paper ? 8. I did.. 9. I
bought this painting for twenty-five dollars. 10. He sells that
cloth at two dollars an elL 11. This sugar costs twelve cents a
f
2(rO QUAIULNTB-HUITlftME LE9OK.
pound. 12. Is your aunt up stairs? 13. She has come down.
14. She is down stairs. 15. My brother went down, but he
has come up again. 16. We went up the mountain yesterday.
17. When I was in the country, I used to ride on horseback
every day. 18. I went every day on horseback to the village,
to ask if there were any letters for my father. 19. I slept
in the room next to yours. 20. It was so warm that I could
not sleep. 21. I believe I shall Ml asleep. 22. If you fall
asleep, I shall wake you. 23. Let me sleep till five o^clock. 24.
Wake me, if I do not awake before five o^ciock.
DiotAb 48.
Mvouement d la Patne,
Uexpulsion des rois et P^tablissement de la liberty a Rome,
est un 6v6nement k jamais memorable. Les causes qui Pame-
nerent, iuspiii^rent aux Romains une haine irr^conci liable contre
la royaut^ et un ardent amour de la liberty. Ces sentiments
porterent tons les cceurs k Ph^roi'sme : le devonement a la patrie
ne coDuaissait plus de bornes.
Pors^ua marchait vers Rome pour retablir les Tarquins. Un
>ont de bois sur le Tibre allait lui ouvrir un passage. Horatius
Oocl^s se plaqa k la t^te du pont, et soutint seul le choc des en-
nemis, jusqu'a ce qu*on eQt coup6 le pont derriere lui; alors,
s*6lanQant dans le Tibre, il se sauva k la nage.
Pendant que Porsena tenait Rome assi^gee, Mucius Scevola
demanda au S6nat la permission de passer chez I'ennemi. II en-
tra dans le camp de Pors6na et s'arrSta pres du tribunal du roi.
Od 6tait occup^ a donner la paie aux soldats ; le secretaire da
roi etait assis pres de lui. Mucius se trompa et tua le s^r^taire
au lieu du roi. II fut arr^t^, et conduit devant Porsena. Mu-
cius alors mit sa main droite sur un brasier allum^, pour panir
cette main, qui s'^tait trompee dans le choix de la victime. II
declara au roi que trois cents jeunes gens comme lui avaient jur6
sa mort. Porsena, effray^, accorda la paix aux Romains.
QUARAKTS-NSUYlftME LE^OK.
271
49. QUARANTE-NEUVlilME LEgON.
144* lb happen,
A great misfortune has happened.
What has happened to your friend ?
Arriver (aux. Hre).
II est arrivd un grand malheur.
Qu'est-il arrivd k votre ami f
Rem. — It is expressed by cela^ Yfheu it refers to a preceding
sentence, and by t^ when it has no antecedent.
He has met with a misfortune.
He broke his arm.
He hurt his arm.
Where did it happen f
Ihmit,
Does it suit you to do that f
It does not suit me.
Did the coat suit your brother f
7h agree.
Have you agreed about the price ?
What have you agreed upon ?
IbfiL (tveU)
How does this hat fit me ?
Does the coat fit your brother ?
n lui est arrive un malheur.
II s'est cass^ le bras.
II s'est fait mal au bras.
Oti cela est-il arrive?
Oonvenir {deX (aux. avoir).
Yous convient-il de faire cela f
Cela ne me convient pas.
L' habit a-t-il convenu k votre fr^re f
Oonvenir (de)^ (aux. Stre).
£te8-vou8 convenus du prix ?
De quoi etes-vous convenus?
AUer. AUer bim.
Comment ce chapeau me va-t-il?
L'habit va-t-il bien k votre fr^ref
145* lb be tired.
lb be gladf very glad,
lb be torry/or.
Jb be angry with.
I am tired of walking.
I am very glad to see you.
I am sorry to hear that.
T am sorry for it.
Are you angry Mrith me ?
7b make angry.
To get angry.
To offend.
To take offence at.
Do not get angry.
I did not mean to offend you.
He took offence at that.
MrefatiguS (de).
Etrebim aite (de).
UtrefdchS de.
Etrefdchi conire.
Je suis fatigu^ de marcher.
Je suis bien aise de vous voir.
Je suis f&ch^ d'apprendre cela
J 'en suis fUch^.
£tes-vou8 Bjch6 centre moi f
Fdeher.
Se/deher (de).
Offenaer.
S'offenter (de).
Ne vous £lchez pas.
Je n'ai pas voulu vous offenser.
n s'est offense de cela.
272
QUARANTB-NSUYltMS LB9OK.
VOCABULAIRB 49.
To suit.
Convenir (tr. n.r.)
To i^ee.
Convenir [ir. n. v.)
To happen.
Arriver (n. v.)
To fit.
Allcr bieu (n. v.)
To keep.
Garder (0. v.)
To pinch.
To pat away.
Serrer.(a. v.)
To make angry
. FAcher (a. v.)
To get angry.
Se ficher (re/, v.)
To offend.
Offenser (a. v.)
To take offence. S' offenser (re/, v.)
Tired.
Fatigue (de),(drfy.)
Glad, very glad. Bien aise (de), (a.)
Sorry, vexed
F&ch« (de), (adj.)
Angry (with).
F&ch^ (contre),(a.)
Fine.
Fin(arfy.)
Gemmon, coarse. Oommnn (adj.)
Wonderfully
A merveille (ado,
1 phr.)
A small matter
' Pen de chose.
well.
little.
In &ct, indeed
En effet.
Indeed.
En Y^rit^.
Analtsb 49.
1. Que lui est-il arriv6 ?
2. n s'est cas86 le bras.
ExEROics 49.
I. Qn^efit-il arrive ? 2. U est aniv6 un grand malheur i, men
ami. 8. Qne lui est-il arrivd ? 4. II est tombe de cheval, et
s'est cass^ le bras. 5. Quand cela est-il arriv6 ? 6. Cela est ar-
rive 11 n'y a pas une demi-heure. 7. Get habit vous conyient-il ?
8. II ne me convient pas. 9. Ne voas va-t-il pas bien ? 10. II
me va assez bien, mais le drap ne me plait pas ; il est trop com-
mun. 11. S'il vous convient d^attendre, je vous en ferai un de
drap plus fin. 12. Cela ne me convient pas; il me faut un habit
pour ce soir. 13. Voulez-vous mettre cet habit pour voir s'il
vous va bien? 14. Celui-ci me va bien; je le garderai. 15.
Garderez-vous les souliers que je vous ai envoy 6s ? 16. Je ne les
garderai pas; ils me serrent les pieds. 17. Iltes-vous convenns
du prix del'habit? 18. Nous en sommes convenus. 19. De
quoi etes-vous convenus ? 20. Nous sommes convenus d'atten-
dre ici jusqu'a rarriv^e de la voiture. 21. fites-vous fatigues ?
22. Nous sommes fatigues de marcher; nous avons fait deux
milles k pied. 23. Vous serez bien aise de monter en voiture ;
QUARANTS-NXUYltMB LX^OK. 2?3
n'est-ce pas } 24. En e0et, je serai biep aise de m'asseoir. 25.
Ce moDsieur est-il f$cke cootre vous ? 26. Je crois qu'il s^est
offens6 de ce que j'ai dit. 27. N'6tes-vous pas £liche de Tavoir
offens^ ? 28. J'en suis bien fache.
ThAme 49.
1. Has any thing happened to your friend? 2. H^has met
with a misfoi-tune. 3. He fell and hurt his arm (hurt himself
in the arm). 4. Where did it happen ? 5. It happened near
here. 6. I. Am very i^rry to hear it. 7. Does this cloth suit
you ? 8. It* does not ; it is too coarse. 9. Will it suit you to
wait till to-morrow ? we shall hare finer. 10. It does not suit me ;
I leave the city to-night. 11. Did those shoes suit your aunt?
12. They did not; they pinch her feet. 13. These boots fit
me; I will keep them. 14. Does this dress fit me? 15. It fits
you wonderfully well. 16. I shall keep it, if we can agree about
the price. 17. What have you agreed upon? 18. We have
agreed upon going in the cacriige. 19. We are too tired to
walk. 20. I am glad to be here. 21. Indeed, it does not suit
me to walk. 22. Are you angry with me ? 23. Have I offend-
ed you? 24. Do not get angry, pray. 25. I am not angry
with you. 26. When shall you be ready to start? 27. I shall
be ready when I have put away my papers.
DictCe 49.
FemriM9 Bomaines ^ VEpoque de VExpuUUm des BoU..
A Rome, la vertu n'^tait point on vain nom, une ombre sans
'r6alite ; c'6tait quelque chose qu^on estimait an dessus de la vie,
et qui portait les vieillards, lea femmes m^me k sacrifier leurs
jours k I'honneur et k la patrie.
Lucrece s'^tait donn^ la mort, la pr6f4§rant k une vie fl^trie.
• A In tlili eat^doM not refer to » prMeding sentonoe; tt repreaenti the noon €iMh,
120
274
OINQnANnftMB LB90K.
Son ezemple avait montr6 et 1e danger auquel la verta pent quel
quefois ^tre expos^e et le remede qui reste k une &me noble con*
tre la disgr&ce et la fletrissure.
Clelie, jeune fille d'une famille noble, se trouvait parmi les
otages que Pon^na emmeuait, apres avoir fiut la paix avec Rome.
Le camp du roi etait pr^ des bords du Tibre. Gillie, ayant
tromp^ ses gardes, sortit pendant la nuit, prit on cbeval que le
basard lui offrit, et traveiva le fleuve. Pon^na, inform^ de cette
Evasion, envoya des ambassadearB k Rome pour la r^clamer. Les
Remains la Ini rendirent, selon les conditions du traite. Le roi
alors admirant le courage de la jeune fille, la combla d^eloges, et
lui dit de cboisir un certain nombre d^otages, qu'il lui permit de
ramener k Rome. EUe cboisit les jeunes gar^ons et les jennes
filles qu*elle savait 6tre le plus en danger, k cause de leur fige, et
retourna avec eux dans sa patrie.
♦ »»
60. CINQUANTTEME LEfON.
146* TOBlBOBir.
Where were you bomf
Where was she bomf
How old are yon ?
I am twelve years old.
I am two years older than you.
To DIB.
She died in spring.
Spring.
Summer.
Autumn.
Winter.
In spring.
In summer.
In autumn.
In winter.
Naite«, trr. n. v. (P. HI. § Ivi. 88.)
Ob 6tes-vouB ni f
iOd M<-elle n^ f (when tAe it Umng.)
Ob kaU-elle n6e 1 {wkm the w dead.)
Quel ftge aves-vons t
J'ai douze ans.
f Je suis plus ftgtf que vous de deux
} ans.
[J'ai deux ans de plus que voos.
MouEim, trr. n.
Elle est morte
Le printemps.
L'tft^.
V. (P. m. § ivi. 9.)
au printemps.
\
L'automne.
L'hiver.
Au printemps.
En6t«.
Dans le printemps.
Dans V4i4.
En autonme.
Dans Tautomne.
Enhiver.
Dans l'hiver.
CINQUANTliMfi LE9ON.
275
147* How high is that church ? Combien cette dglise a-t-elle de
hauteur ?«
JDe quelle hauteur est cette ^glise ?
Quelle est la hauteur de cette eglise ?
£lle a soixante pieds de hauteur,
line table de quatre pieds de lon-
What is the height of that church ?
It is sixty feet high (in height).
A table four feet long.
My room is sixteen feet by fifteen.
What is your size ?t
I am five feet six inches.
I am two inches taller than you.
gueur.w
Ma chambre a seize pieds aur quinze .
Quelle est votre taille f
J'ai cinq pieds six pouoes.
( Je suis plus grand que vous de deux
} pouces.
( J'fd deux pouces de plus que vousf
148* JbdeeeiDe.
To he muslaken^ to deoeioe <m£e adf.
I am mistaken, I am wrong.
I am. mistaken in the house.
I took the wrong road.
Tromper (a. v.)
Se tromper (ref. v.)
Je me trompe.
Je me suis tromp^ de maison.
Je me suis tromp^ de chemiil.
Rem. — ^Many active verbs, used intransitively or passively, in
English, are rendered, in French, by the reflective form of the
verb; as,
Glass breaks easily.
That door does not open.
Fruit sells (is sold) well.
That is seen at a distance.
How is that done ?
In what manner ?
In this manner.
That is the way it was done.
Isthatitf
There is no means of doing it oth-
erwise.
Le verre se casse &cilement.
Cette porte ne s'ouvre pas.
Le fruit se vend bien.
Cela se voit de loin.
Comment cela se fiut-ilf
De quelle mani^re ?
De cette mani^re.
C'est ainsi que cela s'est fiut.
£st-ce comme cela?
II n'y a pas moyen de le £ure au-
trement.
* Nonns of dimension are fbnned from the ac(Jective8, by adding w to their feminine
endings ; as, havi^ haute^ hauteur ; long^ Umgtte^ lonffueur^ Ac They are of the fem-
inine gender.
t The word «Am is variously expressed, according to the adjective which the object
■^qalres: Un grand animal; la grandeur de ranimal. Une groeee pierre; la grot*
»eur de la pierre.
276
CINQUANTlftMS LX9OV.
YOOABULAIRB 50.
The age.
The inch.
.The step, pace.
The means.
Every thing.
L'&ge.
Le pouce.
Lepas.
Le moyen.
Tout.
The size (person'
The height.
ITie length.
The manner
A walk.
To he bom.
To deceive.
Aged, old.
Dear.
II1118, BO.
Kattre (trr. n. v.)
Tromper (a. •.)
Ag^(ady.)
Cher {adv,)
Ainsi {adv.)
To die.
To he mistaken.
Elder; eldest.
Cheap.
Otherwise.
La hauteur.
La longueur.
La mani^re.
Une all4e.
Mourir (tr. n. v.)
Se tromper (r.i?.)
Atn^ {adj\)
IX bon march6,
{adv. pkr.)
Autrement {ad.)
Akaltsb 50.
1. Une table de* quatre pieds de^ loogaeur.
2. Je suis plus grand que vous def deux pouces.
3. Oette maison se voit de loin.
EXEROICB 50.
1. Oii etes-vous ii6 ? 2. Je buis ne a New York. 3. Oik cette
demoiselle est-elle ii6e ? 4. Elle est n^e k Paris. 5. Quel &ge
avez-vous? 6. J'ai quatorze ans. 7. fites-vous plus jeune que
voire frere ? 8. Je suis plus Itge que lui de deux ans. 9. Quel
&ge a l'aiu6 de vos cousins ? 10. II a ua an de plus que moi.
11. Quand votre oncle est-il mort? 12. II est mort I'automne
dernier. 13. Od 6tait-il n6? 14. II 4tait ne a Bordeaux. 15.
Irez-vous en France cet biver? 16. J'irai au printemps. 17.
Combien votre maison a-t-elle de hauteur? 18. Elle a quarante
pieds de hauteur. 10. Combien cette all^ a-t-elle de longueur?
* Observe that one noon cannot be Joined to another noun witbont a preposition be-
tween them, to express the relation in wbich they stand to each other; onleas they both
mean the same things
t The qnantity expressing the diiferenoe in size between two things oompared, most
be preceded by the preposition de.
CINQUANTI&MB LB^ONt 2l1
20. Elle a deux cents pas de loDgueur. 21. Quelle est voire
taille? 22. J'ai cinq pieds deux pouces. 23. fites-vous plus
grand que voire cousin ? 24. II est plus grand que moi de deux
pouces {or, II a deux pouces de plus que moi). 25. Ne vous
trompez-vous pas? 26. Je ne me trompe pas. 2*7. L'avoine se
vend-elle k bon march6 a present ? 28. Tout se vend cher dans
ce moment 29. De quelle maniere cela s'est-il &it ? 30. Cela
s'est fait de cette maniere-ci. 31. Est-ce ainsi que cela s'est fait ?
32. (7est comme cela : il n'y a pas mojen de le faire autrement.
TniME 50.
1. Where was he bom? 2. He was bom in this city. 3.
How old is he ? 4. He is ten years old. 5. He is a year older
than his brother. 6. He is the eldest of the children. 7. Hen-
ry is an inch taller than he. 8. What is your size ? 9. I am
'five feet and three inches. 10. You are an inch taller than I
am. 11. I am a year older than you are. 12. When did your
grandfather die ? 13. He died in autumn. 14. My grandmo-
ther died in the spring. 16. They were born in France. 16.
How high is that table? 17. It is two feet and five inches. 18.
I want a table two feet and six inches high and six feet long.
19. My room is fourteen feet by twelve. 20. This walk is one
hundred and eighty paces (§ xx. 6) long. 21. Are you not mis-
taken? 22. I am not mistaken; I measured it several times.
23. I have taken the wrong book. 24. You have taken the
wrong road. 25. Is fruit cheap now? 26. Every thing sells
dearer in winter than in summer. 27. In what manner is this
done ? 28. This is (void) the manner in which it is done. 29.
It is so, and there is no means of doing it otherwise.
278 CINQUANTK ST UNlftMB LB^OK.
DiOTtB 50.
Aulua Po9thumiu8y Premier Dicktteur.
Tarquin, cha8s6 de Rome, s'^tait r6fagi6 chez son gendre Ma-
milius, habitant de Tuscukm. Oelui-ci, voulant r^tablir son
beau-pere sur le trdne, souleva le Latium en sa faveur et d^</lara
la guerre aux Romains. Rome, agit^e par les dissensions entre
le peuple et les patriciens et serr^e de pres par Pennemi, se trou-
vait dans une situation critique. C'est alors qu*on eut recours a
Texp^dient de cr6er une nouvelle dignity, sup^rieure i celle du
consulat, et qui fut appel^e dictature. Le dictateur avait une
puissance absolue pendant six mois, au-deli desquels il ne pou-
vait garder sa dignity. Aulus Posthumius, ajant 6te rev^ta de
cette charge, prit le commandement et engagea le combat pres
du lac Regille. Oomme la victoire balanpait, Posthumius or-
donna au g6n6ral de cavalerie de faire dter le mors k tons les
chevaux, afin que rien ne pQt arr^ter leur impetuosity. Par \k
les Romains taillerent en pieces Parm^ des Latins, et s'empar^
rent de leur camp. Mamilius resta sur le champ de bataille, et
Ton dit que Tarquin se retira ensuite k Cumes, oii il mounit ac-
cable de chagrin et de vieillesse.
61. CINQUANTE ET UNlfeME LEgON.
Past Definite Tense, Indicativb Mood.
149« The past definite is a primitive tense (§ liv. 2). Its ter-
minations are:
In the ;fr<t conjugation, at, as, a, dmes, dUt^ ereid.
In the ieoond bx»A fourth, is, u, t^, fmet, Ite, ireni.
In the third, tit, ut, itf, Amef, Utta, ureU,
OINQUANTE ST UNI&MB LE9ON. 279
(a.) Past Definite of the Four Conjugations.
Je parlai, I spoke, iu partas, U parla^ noua parldmes^ wms paHdUs^ Us pdrUrent.
Jitjinis^ I finished, tujinis, iljtnity fumsjinvmes, vousJInUes^ ilsJlnirerU.
Je refftia, I received, Iu reffut^ il reffui, nau» re^me*^ tfaus rec&te»^ iU reQurent.
Je vendis, I sold, tu ^oendis^ U 9&ndit^ noua wndUne^ mm$ tendiUSt iU wndirenU
(6.) Past Definite of Avoir and £)tre.
tTtfiM, I bad, tu €U8y il eut, noua aAtneat voua eAtea^ ila eurent,
«^/m, Iwas, fufua^ Ufuif nouafufnesy wjuaf&Ua^ ila/urent
(c.) Pa^t Definite of the verbs in knib, such a>s Venib.
Ja 9ina^ I oame, tu «tn«, U 9int^ noua 9\nmaa^ 9oua 9\mUa^ Ua vinrent
Rem. — There are thirty-three other irregular verbs which have
the past definite different from the regular verbs of the conjuga-
tion to which they belong. They will be found in the List, P.
III., § Ivi., under the numbers 3, 5, 9, 16, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 36, 36,37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 46, 46.
Use of the Past Definite.
150* The past definite is used to express what occurred in a
time entirely past, and of which the present day forms no part.
In this case, either the jpast definite or the past indefinite may
be used \* as,
I spoke to him yesterday, last ( Je lui parlai ) hier, le mois der*
^onth. ( Je lui ai parM ) nier.
I received the letter the day before j Je re^us I la lettre la veille de men
I started. (J'aire^uf ddpart.
* In conversation, the post indefinite is often nsed, wlien the pest definite would be
equally correct ; bat when we assume the narrative style, in speaking or writing, we
should use the past definite. There is this difference between the two tense^ that the
past definite has reference to the action, and the past indefinite to the result of the ac-
tion ; the one represents it as an action, the other, as an accomplished Ihct Hence the
t»a8t definite is nsed in historical writing, because it represents events as going on be-
fore tiie mind. Therefore, also, the compound of the past definite is used after the con-
*unctive adverbs, auaaitdt q^ue^ A«., because after these the verb always expresses action.
For the same reason, the past definite of Sire cannot be used for the past definite ot tU*
iar ; noi^ Ja/ua trow>er mon ami^ for, faUai trouvar mon ami.
280 qiHQUANTS BT UNlftMS LB^ON.
Rem. — When the time referred to has not entirely elapsed, or
does not necessarily exclude the present day, the past definite
ciiuuot he used.
I received a letter this year. J'ai re^n une lettre oette aun^.
Past Antsriob.
151 • (a.) The past anterior is the compound tense, cone-
sponding with the past definite.
I had tpokm^ ka. J'euiparUt kc,
I had comet &c. Je/ut venu, &c.
(&.) It is used to express an action which took place immedi*
ately before another action ; the latter being expressed by a verb
in the past definite. It is generally preceded by a conjuncttve
adverb, such as aumldt que, dhs que, apres que^ hreque, quand^
a peine.
As soon as I had arrived, I went to Aussitftt que je fua arrivd, j'aUal
mj friend. trouver mon ami.
Scarcely had I risen, when he en- A peine me fus-je levd, qn'il entia.
tered.
Rbm. — Observe that after h peine, que has the sense of when.
YOOABXTLAIRB 51.
To have a cold, fetre enrhum^. To catch cold. | fiSl^'froid!^' ""'^
m UA ^ / V Togoto(aper-jAller trouver
To chat. Causer (».,».) aon). 1 {a,v,)
^*^"' ISLi^^tque. Scaieely. lpeine(a*.pftr.)
Analysb 51.
1. Hier nous partimes pour la campagne.
2. A peine eiimes-nous quitt6 la ville,qu*il commen^a de pleuvoir
OIKQUANTK ET UNllSHE LSqON. 281
EZBRCICE 51.
1. Oii allites-vous bier quand vous me quitt4tes. 2. J^allai
chez moi. 3. Ne futes-vous point au th^4tre bier au soir ? 4.
Je n^ fus point; je restai aupres de ma soeur, qui est enrhumee.
5. Ou B^est-elle enrhum6e ? 6. Elle prit froid a Feglise, diman-
che dernier. 7. Que fites-vous pour passer le temps ? 8. Nous
Idmes et nous caus&mes. 9. Votre oncle vint-il jeudi au soir?
10. U ne vint pas jeudi ; il arnva le lenderaain. 11. Retouma-
t-il chez lui hier? 12. 11 n'est pas encore retourne. 13.
ReqQtes-vous des nouvelles de votre cousin la semaine demiere ?
-14. Je re^us une lettre de lui luadi, et j'y repondis le mSme
jour. 15. Lui ^crivltes-vous ce qui est arriv6 ? 16. Je lui ecri-
vis toutes les nouvelles. 17; Quand arriv&tes-vous au village?
18. Nous y aniv&mes le soir* 19., Yi tea- vous mea cousins?
20. Des que nous fumes arrives, iu>us allames les trouver. 21.
Allttes-vous a la p^he avec eux ? 22. Nous partimes pour aller
k la p^cLe, mais k peine eumes-nous quitte le village, qu'il com-
menqa de plenvoir, et nous fumes obliges de revenir. 23. Vos
soeurs furent-elles a la campagne la semaine derniere? 24. Elles
y furent; elles revinrent samedi. 25. Virent-elles ma tante?
26. Elles pass^rent la soiree de jeudi avec elle. 27. Vos freres
firent-ils un voyage T^te dernier ? 284 lis partirent au printemps,
et voyag^rent tout I'^te.
ThAmb 51.
1. I wad at your bouse yesterday. 2. I saw your sister; sbe
told me tbat you were in the country. 3. I went to tbe country
last Monday, and (I) returned last night. 4. Did you see my
cousins? 5. I went to them as soon as I arrived. 6. I spent
tbe evening at your uncle's. 7. Next day, your cousins went
bunting. 8. They asked me to accompany them. 9. I could
not, and I was sorry for it. 10. I was obliged to remain at home,
for I bad a cold. 11. When did you catch cold ? 12. I caught
cold tbe day before. 13. Did those pupils come to school yes-
terday? 14, They came and said their lessons, as usual {comfne
282 OINQUANTB ST UNlftMB LE^ON.
^ordinaire), 15. They did their exercises and wrote tbeir
compositions. 16. When they had finished, they read for
some time, and then they went away. 17. Did you go out
last night f 18. We put on our cloaks to go out, but scarcely
had we descended the stairs when we heard the rain, and we
went up again to our room. 19. We had (faire) music, and
spent the evening in chatting. 20. Charles came in (came tc
see us) during the evening. 21. He staid till eleven o^clock.
22. When be bad left, we went to bed.
DiOTftK 51.
Au milieu des divisions qui r6gnaient entre les patriciens et les
pl6b6ien8, Cincinnatus se distingua par sa prudence, par sa justice,
et par la noble simplicity de ses mceurs. Suivi de son epouse, ce
Romain se retira dans une petite m^tairie, qu'il possedait au de-
\k du Tibre. lA il coulait ses jours en paix, uniqueraent occupe
k cultiver son champ. L'ann^e suivante, Tennemi tenait cenies
le consul Municius et son arm6e ; la consternation fut grande a
Rome. On fut d*avis de nomroer un dictateur, pour remedier
au mauvais 6tat des affaires. Cincinnatus fut proclam^ d^un
consentement universe!. Les d6put^ qu'on lui envoya, le trou-
vdrent sans robe, occup6 4 labourer. II se fit apporter sa robe
de la chaumiere, par son dpouse, Rucilia, afin de recevoir, dans
uo costume decent, les ordres du s^nat. Ay ant ^t6 salu6 Dicta-
teur, il se rendit a Rome. Le lendemain il partit, d^fit rennemi,
et d^livra Tarm^e romaine. II rentra triomphant a Rome ; et,au
bout de seize jours, il se d6mit de la dictature, qu'il avait re^ue
pour six mois ; et ce cultivateur, combl6 des honneurs du triom-
phCf retouma 4 sa charrue.
OINQUAirrX-DEUZlftMS LXyON.
283
62. CINQUANTE-DEUXI^ME LEQON.
Conditional Mood.
152* The conditional has two tenses: the present and the
past (§ Iv.)
(a.) CondHional Present (P. III. liv. 5.)
•/"'troM,
JefimrtM,
h reoevrais,
JevendraUf
Tuirait,
TufaUrais,
Iki receoriMf
TuvendraU^
II iraU,
J I fininiU^
11 rtceorcntf
IlvendraU,
NomirwM,
Nou8 fiuriarUf
NoM receorioM,
Nous vendriorUf
Vouairiez,
VousfatHa,
Voiu TeeeoTtttf
VoMvendnex,
Ibiraunt,
Ilsfinirment.
lis recevraierU.
lis vendraimt.
(6.) Conditional Past. (P. III. liv. 9.)
I should haoe had, kc. J*aurais eu, &c
I should heme comet &c. Je serais venu, &c,
I should have risen, &c. Je me serais koS, &c.
Use of thb Conditional Tenses.
153* The conditional mood is nsed to express what would take,
or would have taken, place, if a certain condition were, or had
been, fulfilled. The condition, when expressed, is introduced by
the conjunction si, with the verb in the imperfect or pluperfect.
I would pay you, if I had money.
I would do it, if I could.
[ could have done it, if I had been
willing.
Je vous paiends, si j 'avals de Tar-
gent.
Je le ferais, si je pouvais.
J'aurais pu le fidre, si j'avais vou-
lu.
151« The tenses of the conditional are connected with the
imperfect and pluperfect, in the same manner as the future tense
is connected with the present.
He will come, if he can. H viendra, s'il pent.
He would come, if he could. H viendrait, s'il pouvait.
He would have come, if he had H serait venu, s'il avait pu.
been able.
284
OWQUAim-DXUXlAMB UI(ON.
Rem. — ^The cooditional tenses are not used after si, if^ but may
be used after si, whtQut, (1^8, IUm.)
If he should oome. 8'il yenait.
I do*not know whether I should Je ne sais si j'irais, s'il m'inyitait,
go, if he invited me.
155. I will do my best.
I will do all I can.
I would at least try to do it.
I have not the means to do it.
I cannot afford it.
I would lather take this painting. Je prendnds do prdf^renoe^ oe tar
blean-ci.
Je ferai de mon mieuz.
Je ferai tout mon possible.
J'essaierais du moins de le Aire.
> Je n'en ai pas les moyens.
To build.
To employ.
To use.
Undoubtedly.
Certainly.
Bfttir (a. «.)
[Employer (k),
(fl. « )
SauB doute.
Certainement (ad )
YOOABULAIRE 52.
To try.
In a short time. En peu de temps.
Perhaps. Peut-6 tre (a*. />. )
In time. A temps (a<lv./>A.}
To invite.
Bather.
In preference.
I^eft.
At least.
All I can.
In my place.
EB8ayer(de),(a.v.)
InviterQi), (a. o.)
!De pr^f^renoe,
Bereste {ado. ph.)
Du moins {ado. p.)
ITout mon poesi-
ble {ado. phr.)
A ma place.
Analyse 52.
1. U viendrait si rien ne reinp^cbait.
2. Je Yondrais Uen savoir s'il viendrait, si je rinvitais.
EXERCICB 52.
1. Acbeteriez-vous quelque cbose, si vous ayiez de Fargent de
reste? 2. J 'ach^terais peut-^tre un ou deux de ces tableaux. S.
Choisiriez-vous ces deux-ci ? 4. Je prendrais de preference cea
deux-la. 5. Si j'envoyais cette lettre k votre cousin, la recevnut-
ClNQUAKTJB-DSUXlftME LS^ON. .285
il k temps? 6. Si vous }a lui envoyies aujonrd'hui, il 1« reoerrait
demain. 7. Si vous aviez de Targent, remplpieiies-vlus k b&tir
ane inaison ? 8. Je Peraploierais a faire un voyage. 9. Oii iriez-
Tousf 10. JVais en Europe. 11. Iriez-vous a Paris ? 12. Sans
doute; je verrais Paris et Rotne. 13. Voudriez-vous accompa-
gner voire tante? 14. Si elle m'invitail k i'accQmpagner, je le
ferais. 15. Si vous alliez en Europe, combien de temps y reste-
riez-vous? 16. Je voudrais y rester un ou deux ans. 17. Ap-
prendriez-vous le fraiiQais ? 18. Je ferais tout mon possible pour
I'apprendre. 19. L'auriez-vous appris, si vous aviez ^te k ma
place? 20. J'aurais du moins essay 6 de le faire. 21. Vaudrait-
il la peine d^y aller pour un on deux mois ? 22. Cela n'en van-
di*ait pas la peine. 23. Combien dVgent faudrait-il pour faire
le tour de Pfiurope f 24. Je ne sais ; il en faudrait beaucoup.
25. Seriez-vous parti ce matin, s'il avait fait beau temps ? 26.
Je me serais lev6 de bonne heure, et je serais parti.
TflftMB 52.
1. Would you send a letter to Henry, if you were in my place ?
2. I would wait till to-morrow. 3. If I should write to him to-
morrow, would he receive itay letter in tiine ? 4. Would he have
time to write before the departure of the steamer ? 5. What
would you do, if you were in my place? 6. I would study. 7.
Would you learn French ? d". Undoubtedly : I would learn all
I could. 9. I should know French in a short time, and I should
speak it. 10. I would do it, if I could. 11. You could do it,
if you would. 12. I would at least try to do it. 13. I would
do my best 14. Would you travel, if you had the means to do
it? 15. If I had money, I would employ it in building a fine
house. 16. Would you go to the party, if they should invite
you? 17. I do not know wheUier I should have gone, if they
had invited me. 18. Would your sisters come, if they oould?
19. They would certainly have come, if it had not rained, 20.
Do you prefer this picture to that one? 21. I would rather t«ke
that one. 22. Should we be happy if we had much money ?
288 CIKQUAKTC-TROlSlliMB LX^OV.
23. We should perhaps be neither happier nor more contented
than we are now (50).
DiOTtB 52.
Apohffue (TAgrippcL.
Le penple romain, m^content du s^nat, s^^tait retir6 de Rome,
disant qu'il ne pouvait seal supporter et les imp6t8 et le service
miiitaire. M^n^uius Agrippa, homme Eloquent, fut choisi pour
r^tablir Pharnionie. Ayant 6t6 introduit dans le carap, il adressa
au peuple I'apologue suivant : " Un jour les membres dn corps
humain, voyant que Pestomac restait oisif, se s^parerent de loi,
et oonvinrent entre eux que les mains ne porteraient plus les
aliments k la bouche ; que la bouche ne les recevrait plus ; et
que les dents ne les broieraient plus. Mais en voulant assuj^tir
Testomac, ils d6p6rirent eux-mdmes, et le corps entier tombs
dans une langueur extreme. Par 1^ on vit clairement que lea
fonctions de Testomac ^taient bien r^elles, et que c'^tait lui qui,
apr^s avoir requ la nourriture, la distribuait k tons les membres.
£n consequence on rentra en grfice aveo lui. C'est ainsi que le
peuple et le s6nat, qui ne forment qu'un m^me corps, p^rissent
par la desunion, et se fortifient par la bonne intelligence/'
Agrippa, par cet apologue, apaisa les esprits irritds, et le peu-
ple rentra dans la ville.
58. CINQUANTE-TROISlfcME LEfON.
GONDFTIONAL MoOD CONTINUED.
156* (a.) Might is generally to be rendered by the conditional
of pouvoir / and ought, or should used for ought, expressing mora?
obligation, by the conditional of devoir ; as.
He might hear it. II pourrait I'apprendre.
He ought to (should) do it. 11 devralt le ffidre.
OIKQUANTE-TROISlftMB LEQOK.
287
(6.) Might or could have^ and aught or should have^ fol owed
by the past participle, are to be rendered by the past of the
conditional, and the past participle by the infinitive.
He might have done it.
He could have done it.
He ought to have done it.
He should have done it.
n aurait pu le &ire.
n aurait dt le faire.
(c.) Wishj followed by the inaperfect, is rendered by the con-
ditional of vouloir.
I wish I knew (I should like ).
I wonder why he does not come.
Je voudrais bien savoir.
Je voudrais bien savoir pourquoi U
ne vient pas.
(d,) The conditional present of savoir is used, only negatively,
for the indicative present ofpouvoir.
I cannot prevent it.
iJe ne saurais I'empecher, or
Je ne puis I'empdcher.
157* Ih change ; to exf^ange.
The weather is going to change.
Change this bill for gold.
To change.
To change one's place.
To change sides.
To change o.'s mind, o.'s conduct.
Will you change your coat ?
I will.
7b become.
What will become of you ?
What has become of him ?
What has become of those children ?
IbmaJx.
Changer (a. v.)
lie temps va changer.
Changez ce billet pour de Tor.
Changer {de), (n. v.)
Changer de place.
Changer de parti.
Changer d'avis, de conduite.
Changerez-vous d' habit ?
J' en changerai.
Deoenir (irr. n. v.)
Que deviendrez-vous ?
Qu'est-il deyenu ?
Que sont devenus ces en&nts?
Rendre,
Rem. — To make must be translated by rendre, when it ex-
presses a change of condition, that is, when it is followed by an
adjective; as,
Misfortune makes us wise. Le malheur nous rend sages.
288
OIXQUANTS-TROISltliS LC^OK.
VoCABULAIRil 68.
Toong people. Lea jennes gens.
The opinion. L'avls.
Theparty. \j^^^^
The side. ( *^
HappinesB. iLebonhenr.
A person. Une peisonne.
The conduct La condoite.
Good fortune.
Misfortune.
To change.
To exchange.
To permit.
To allow.
To forward.
Wise.
Proud.
Le malheur.
The seat.
Wealtti.
Laiiness.
1
Laplace.
La richesse.
Les richesses.
Laparesse.
I Changer (a. tfn, «.) To become. Bevenir (irr. n. r.)
To prerent.
IPennettre fde),
(trr. a. v.)
Faire tenir.
8age {adj.)
Fier {atff.)
Steady.
I4eamed.
Lasy.
)Emp8cher (de),
Bangd (a4r.) .
Savant {adj.)
Paresseux (adj.)
Analyse 53.
1. Yoas avez chang^ d^avis. Vous ^tes bien chang^.
2. Que sont devenos ces hommes, qui 6taient si fieni
ExsRCiCB 53.
1. Ne devriez-TOus pas aller voir voire oncle? 2. Je devrais
aller le voir, mais je n'en ai pas le temps. 3. N^auriez-vous
pas dQ lui 6cnre ? 4. J^aurais du le faire. 5. Ne poiirriez-vous pas
le faire k present? 6. Je pourrais, mais je ne sais comment Im
faire tenir ma lettre. 7. N'aariez-vous pas pu la lui envoyer par
votre cousin ? 8. tPaurais pa faire cela, si j'y avals peos^. 9.
Changerez-vous d'habitf 10. J^en changenu avant de sortir.
11. Ce'jeune homme a-t-il chang6 de condoite? 12. II en a
change; il est devenu sage et rang6. 13. Votre tante a-t-elle
chang6 d'avis ? 14. Je crois qu'elle en a change. 15. Qa^est
devenu votre ami, le peintre? 16. Je ne sais ce quil est de-
venu. 17. Que deviendront les jeunes gens stud ieux ? 18. Us
deviendront savants. 19. Que deviendrions-nous, si nous ne tra-
vaillions pas ? 20. Nous deviendrions pauvres. 21. La richesse
CINQUANTE-TROISlftME LE^ON. 289
nous rend-elle sages ? 22. Elle ne nous rend ni sages ni savants.
23. Permettez-vous k voire neveu de sortir seul le soir ? 24. Je
ne saurais Temp^cber. 25. Je voudrais bien savoir ou il va ; le
savez-vous ? 26. Si vous le lui aviez demands, il vous aurait dit
quHl va passer la soir6e avec ses amis.
THfiiMB 53.
1, I wonder why your cousin says that. 2. I would not al-
low him to speak thus. 3. I cannot prevent it. 4. You ought
to tell him that he is wrong. 5. You ought to have told him so.
6. He might take offence at it^ 7. He might have taken of-
fence at it. 8. I should like to know what he means by that
(par Id). 9. Why did you change your seat? 10. He has
changed sides. 11. I should like to see him change his conduct.
12. There are persons who change their minds as they change
coats. 13. What will become of me ? 14. What has become
of that young lady? 16. She has become Mrs. B 16.
Young people who do not study, will not become learned. 17.
Wealth makes us neither learned nor better. 18. Good fortune
often makes us proud, and misfortune often makes us wise. 19.
Laziness will undoubtedly make us unhappy. 20. I wonder why
you tell me so; I am not lazy. 21. I hope you may (will) nev-
er become so.
DiotAe 53.
Generosite de Scipion.
Scipion 6tant parti pour PEspagne, prit d'assaut Carthagene
le jour m6me de son arriv^e. Panni les prisonniers, on lui ame-
na une jeune fille d'une rare beaut6. Ayant appris qu'elle etait
d'une famille distinguee parmi les Celtiberiens, et qu^elle 6tait
promise en manage k un jeune prince de ce pays, Scipion fit ve-
nir ses parents et le pr^tendu, et la leur rendit. Les parents de
la jeune fille, qui avaient apport^, pour la racheter, une somme
d'or assez considerable, priaient Scipion de vouloir bien recevoir
13
290 OIHQUANTB-QirATBlftMB LK9ON.
cet or de lean mains. Scipion le fit d^poser k ses pieds, et
ajant £Eiit appel^ le fatur ^pouz, il Ini dit : ^ J'ajoute ce pr^sePt
de noces 4 la dot que voiu devez recevoir de votre beaa-pere '^
En m^tne temps il ezigea que le prince prtt Tor et qu'il le gard&t.
De retour dans son pays, ce prince, pour t^moigner sa reconnais-
sance i Scipion, fit entrer les Celtib6riens dans le parti des Ro-
54. CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON.
158* Reflective verbs, with regard to their construction, may
be divided into five classes.
(a.) Reflective verbs having the reflective pronoun for their
direct object ; as, se chauffer, se porter, se promenery &c.
(6.) Reflective verbs having the reflective pronoun for their
direct object, and governing besides an indirect object, by means
of the preposition ^ ; as,
7b apply one* a tdf to titudy. S'a^ppUquer a VUude.
To apply to wim one, S'adreuer a qudgpi'tm.
(c.) Reflective verbs having a noun for their direct object^ and
governing the reflective pronoun indirectly, by means of the
preposition h ; as,
To reeoUect wmdhmg. Se rappdar qudque ekote.
To hurt one's e^. Sefaire mcH.
To warm one' e fed. 8e etumffer les pieds,
(d,) Reflective verbs, formed fix>m neuter verbs, governing the
reflective pronoun indirectly, by means of the preposition a; as,
7b be pleased. SepUdre.
Jb resemble one another. 8e ressembUr.
Rem, — This last is a reciprocal verb. Reciprocal verbs follow
the same construction as reflective verbs.*
• P. L S zL 4, and note t.
CINQUANTE-QUATRlftMB LB^ON.
291
(<».) Heflective verbs having the reflective pronoun for their
direct object, and governing the indirect object by means of the
preposition de ; as,
To remember something,
lb refoice at any thing,
lb me something.
To do without a thing.
To go or come n&xr.
To go or come away.
Se eouvenir de qudque chose.
Se rifouir de quelque chose.
Se servir de qudque chose.
Se passer de qudque chose.
S^approcher de.
S^tkigner de.
159* Examples on the reflective verbs under (&.)
He applies himself to drawing.
She applied herself to it.
Those men applied to me.
Examples on (c.)
I recollected those words.
I did recollect them.
I recollect having seen him.
She hurt her hand.
Examples on {d)
They did not like to be in the coun-
try.
They do not resemhle each other.
Examples on (e.)
We remembered that.
Bemember it.
I rejoiced at that.
They rejoiced at it.
Did you use my book?
Use it.
I can do without it.
I go near the fire.
I withdraw from it, because it is
not light there.
11 8* applique au dessin.
Mle s'y est appliqude.
Ces hommes se sent adress^s li moi.
Je me snis rappel^ ces mot?.
Je me les suis rappel^s.
Je me rappelle de Tavoir vu.
Elle s'est fait mal k la main.
Elles ne se sont pas plu )i la cam-
pagne.
lis ne se ressemblent pas.
Nous nous sommes souvenus de
cela.
8ouvenez-vous-en.
Je me suls r^joui de cela.
Us s'en sont rc^jouis.
Vous fetes- vous send de mon livre f
6ervez-vous-en.
Je puis m'en passer.
Je m'approche du feu.
Je m'en ^loigne, parce qu*il n'y
fait pas clair.
292
OINQUAKTE-QUATRlftllB LSgON.
The event.
Drawing.
To apply o.' 8 8.
To resemble )
(8. o.) I
To recollect.
To hurt o.'8 8.
To use. I
To make use o£ )
To go near. )
To come near, i
Clear, light.
YOOABULAIRE 54,
L'^Y^nement.
Lede8rin.
The conversation. La conversation.
Les math^mati-
ques.
Mathematics.
1'
8'appliqaer (k).
Bessembler (k
qqn.)
Serappelerqq.ch.
Se fidre mal.
To apply to. S'adresser (k).
Toresembleone^g^^^^^l^^
another.
To remember.
To rejoice (at).
Se servir (de). To do without.
S'approcher (de).
dair (<R{f. Sf aekf.)
To go or comQ
away from.
Fbrticularly.
[Sei
Se souvenir (de).
Se rdjouir (de).
Se passer (de).
[ S'Aoigner (de).
Farticuli^rement
Analtbb 54.
Nous nons Bomtnes rappel6 06b mots.
Us s'en 8ont souvenuB.
EZBRCICE 54.
1. YouB appliqaez-Yous 4 l'6tude des langaes? 2. Je m'y
applique, mais je m'applique plus parti culi^rement anz math6-
matiques. 8. Yotre soeur s'est-elle appliqu^ au dessin f 4. Elle
s'j est appliqu6e. 5. Yous 6tes-vou8 adresse an n6gociant pour
SHvoir cela? 6. Je ne me suis pas adress^ 4 lui; je me snis
adre8s6 k Pavocat 7. Yous ^tes-vous rappel^ la conversation
que nous avons eue ensemble ? 8. Je me la suis rappeI6e. 9.
Yous 6tes-you8 souvenu de cet 6v6nement? 10. Je m'en snia
souvenu. 11. Yos soeurs s'en sout-elles sonvenues? 12. Elles
s^en seraient sou venues, si je leur en avais parl6. 13. Se sont-
elles plu k la soiree f 14. Elles s'y sont ennuy^es. 15. Ot vous
etes-vous fait mal f 16. Je me suis fait mal au bras. 17. Yos
deux consines se ressemblent-elles ? 18. Elles ue se ressemblent
point. 19. Yos parents se sont-ils r^jouis de cette nouvelle?
20. lis s'en sont r^jouis. 21. Qui s'est servi de ma plume? 22.
OINQUAm'S-QUATJUlSMB LEgOlT. 293
Je m'en suis servi pour 6crire mon billet. 23' Pouvez-vc as vons
passer de ce livre? 24. Je puis m'en passer. 25. Pourquoi
8*est-elle approch^e du feu ? 26. EUe s'en est approchee, parce
qu*elle avait froid. 27. Pourquoi vous en ^tes-vous eloign^?
28. Je m'en suis 61oign6, parce que j'arais trop chaud.
Th&mb 54.
1. To what do you apply yourself? 2. I apply myself to
drawing. 3. He applied himself to the study of mathematics.
4. Did that gentlefhan apply to you ? 5. I do not recollect hav-
ing seen him. 6. I believe he applied to my brother. 7. I had
a conversation with him, but I do not recollect what I told him.
8. Did your sisters recollect those words ? 9. They did not rec-
ollect them. 10. I recollect that this event took place the day
before I started. 11. I remember it very well. 12. Those ladies
remembered it, when 1 spoke to them about it. 13. Did you
hurt yourself ? 14. I hurt my foot. 15. My brother Henry does
not resemble me. 16. He and my eldest brother resemble each
other. 17. Do you rejoice at this event? 18. We all rejoiced
at it when we heard it. 19. I should like to use your scissors,
if you can do without them. 20. Use them, I can do without
them. 21. Will you come near the fire! 22. I went away
from the fire, because it is not light enough there to read. 23.
Leave the table wheFe it is, I will come near it.
DiortE 54.
Mort de Cesar.
Les guerres civiles 6tant termin^es, C6sar, nomm6 dictateur k
vie, commenqa k se conduire avec hauteur. Le s6nat 6tant venu
le trouver, il le recjut assis, et jeta un coup d'oeil d'indignation
sur quelqu'un qui I'avertissait de se lever. Antoine lui ayant
mis sur la tSte un diad^me, dans un moment oi!i il 6tait assis de-
vant la tribune aux harangues, O^sar ne parut point desapprou-
204 OINQUAKTE'OIKQUlftME LB^OV.
ver cette action. D^s ce jour, plus de soixante citoyens, ayant
a leur t^te Cassius et Brutus, conspirereDt contre Ini. Cesar
6tant done venu prendre place au S^nat, le jour des ides de
mars, les conjures Pentourerent comroe pour lui faire leur cour ;
tout-a-coup, Pun d'eux s'approcha de lui, sous pr6texte de lui de-
mander une grdce, et, sur son refus, lui tira la robe de dessus les
^paules. C^sar s'^cria : '^ On me fait violence." Au mSme in-
stant, Cassius lui porta un coup de poignard au dessous de la
gorge. C6sar saisit le bras de Cassius, et le perga de son stylet ;
il voulut s'enftiir, et regut une seconde blessure. Brutus, qu'il
regardait corame son fils, s'^tant jete sur lui, il lui dit : ** Et toi
aussi, mon fils!*' Enfin, apercevant de tous les c6tes les poi-
gnards dirig6s contre lui, il s'enveloppa la t6te dans sa robe, et
tomba, perc6 de vingt-trois coups.
56. CINQUANTE-CINQUlilME LEgON.
Imperative Mood.
160* In the second person singular of the imperative,^ the
form of the verb is the same as in the first person singular ol
the indicative present. In the first and second plural, it is the
same as in the first and second plural of the indicative present.
In the third person singular and plural, it is the same as in the
third singular and plural of the subjunctive present. See the
four conjugations, P. III.
(o.) The exceptions are, in the first and second persons,
Oo (thou). Ya (la and 2d plural regular).
Have (thou). Let us have. Have. Aie. Ayons. Ayez.
Be. Let us be. Be. Sols. Soyons. Soyez.
Know. Let us know. Know. Sache. Sachons. Sachez.
Be willing. Please. Veuillez (tfte other pert, are waatmff),
(6.) In the third person, there are nine exceptions; see 16d, 6.
OINQUANTB-CINQUlftME LE9ON. 295
161* In the imperative mood, used affii-matiTely, the objective
pronouns are placed after the verb ; see 102.
Let us rise. Levons-nous.
Rem, 1. — ^When two verbs in the imperative follow each oth-
er, connected by et or <m, the pronoun which is the object of the
second verb may precede it ; as,
Polish and repolish it. Polissez-le et le repolisses.
Rem. 2. — When we say, came and see me, go and tell him^ (fee,
the first verb, in French, governs the second in the infinitive
(70) ; as, venez me voir, allez lui dire, <fec.
Rem. 3. — When the second person singular of the imperative
ends with a vowel, * is added before y, and before en (pronoun).
Go there. Yas-y.
Offer some to your sisters. Offres-en k tea soeurs.
162* (a.) When a verb is accompanied by two objective pro-
nouns, both representing persons, the indirect object is placed
with its preposition after the verb ; as,
I will introduce you to him. Je vous pr^senterai k lui.
He applied to me. H s'est adress^ k moi.
(6.) The pronouns h moi, a toi, <fec (53), are used with certain
neuter verbs ; as, oiler, venir, eourir, penser, &c.
I go to her. He comes to me. Je vais k elle. II vient k moi.
HimtBLr, HSBSKLF, iTBBLF. 8oi (pers.^gTon. § zzii. 7).
Rem. — When applied to persons, sot is used only with refer-
ence to an indefinite subject.
Everybody thinks of himself. Ghacun pense k soi.
1C3« Of the adjective m^me, self, and the pronouns moi, toij
&C., compound pronouns are formed, which are used to designate
persons more expressly ; as,
296
OINQUANTB-OINQUlfiME LB^ON.
I saw it myself.
Ihej did it themselves.
ITie ladies themselves.
One does not like to flatter himself.
Each othse,
They love each other.
They are pleased with one another.
Je Tai vn moi-meme.
Us Tent fait eux-memes.
Les dames elles-mSmes.
On n'aime pas k se flatter soi-meme
L'vN l'autrb (ind^.pron. § xxvi.)
Us s'aiment I'un Tautre.
lis sont contents I'un de 1' autre.
Rem. — L^un Pautre, representing more than two persona, is
pat in the plural.
Hen deceive each other. Les hommes se trompent les pns
les autres.
164* Whai f (snbj. of a verb).
What astonishes you ?
''^^^ *» *^** ' j Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela f
Qu*at-ee qui f
Qu'est-ce qui vous dtonne?
cQu'est-ce que c'estP
It is not my fiiult,( I cannot help it.)
Whose fault is it?
I know nothing of it.
Kor I either.
Nor he either.
Ce n'est pas ma faute.
A qui en est la faute t
Je n'en sals rien.
Ni moi non plus.
Ni lui non plus.
YOCABULAIRE 55.
To bring near, j
To astonish.
To go (to come) )
to meet s. b. )
Bather.
Each, every.
Himself, herself.
Each other.
Approcher qq. ch.
(de).
Etonner (a. v.)
AUer (venir) an
devant de qqn.
Plut6tlHv.)
(}haque (adj.)
Soi (pen.pron.)
L'un Tautre (ind.p.)
To present. j
To introduce, j
To frighten.
First, before. ]
Previously. J
Sooner.
Each one. |
Every one. j
Self.
What? (subjed).
Fr^Benterqqn.(k)
Ef&ayer (a. v.)
Auparavant {ado.)
Plus t6t {ado.)
Chacun {wd. pr.)
'ilL^me{a^\8rado.)
Qu'est-ce qui ?
Analyse 55.
1. lis se sont fait des ennemis.
2. A qui en est la faute ?
cinquante-cinquiAmb LE90N. 297
EXBRGICF 55.
1. Partons ; il est temps de nous en aller. 2. Ne soyons pas
presses, il n'est que trois heures. 3. Attendons ici jusqu^^ trois
heures et demie. 4. Asseyons-nous aupr^s du feu. 5. Ayez la
bonte d'approcher la table. 6. Approchons-nous plutot de la
fen^tie ; il y fait plus clair. 7. Veuillez me presenter k votre
tante quand elle viendra. S. Je vous pr^senterai k elle, aussit6t
qu'elle sera venue. 9. La voila qui vient k nous. 10. AUons
au devant d'elle. 11. II est trois heures et demie, levons-nous et
partons. 12. Sachons auparavant si la voiture est pr6te. 13.
Qui a cass6 I'ardoise de Charles? 14. II I'a cass^e lui-m6me.
15. Qui vous a dit que ces demoiselles vont partir? 16. Elles
me Pont dit elles-m^mes. 17. Ne sont-elles pas contentes I'une
de I'autre ! 18. Au contraire, elles s'aiment beaucoup I'une Fau-
tre. 19. Qu'est-ce qui vous ^tonne? 20. C'est votre maniere
de parler qui m'etonne. 21, Qu'est-ce qui vous efifraie? 22. II
n'y a rien qui m'effraie. 23. Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? on
est mecontent de vous. 24. Ge n'est pas ma faute. 25. A qui
en est lafaute? 26. Je n'en sais rien. 27. Etvous? 28. Ni
moi non plus. 29. Ne partirez-vous pas avant lundi ? 30 Je
partirai plus tdt, si le temps change.
THftMB 55.
1. Bring the table near the fire. 2. Let us sit at the window.
3. Have the kindness to shut the door. 4. Please lend me your
book, if you do not use it. 5. Lend it to me, or sell it to me.
6. Rather than (133, Rem.) sell it to you, I will give it to you.
7. Let us make haste to start. 8. Do not be in a hurry. 9. Let
us know first whether every thing is ready. 10. There is my
uncle; let us go to him. 11. He is coming to meet us. 12. I
will introduce you to him. 13. I ought to have introduced you
to him sooner. 14. Every day we learn something. 15. Every
one works for himself. 16. One does not like to speak of him-
self. 17. Those two young ladies are displeased with one an-
other. 18. They said so themselves. 19. What astonishes your
13«
298 onrQUAKTXHSizitia ls^ok.
Bister? 20. What frightened her? 21. I know nothing of It.
22. Nor I either. 23. What is that? 24. I cannot help it.
25. Whose fault is it ? 26. You are to blame for it (the fault is
yours). 27. Take (thou) care of thy books. 28. Be (thou) quiet,
and listen to me. 29. Take (thou) this fruit, and give some to
thy sisters. 30. Go (thou) home ; go there immediately.
DiOTftB 56.
Auguste recompeme un Poite Grec.
Un po^ grec, tr^8-m6diocre, ayait ooutume de presenter k
Auguste, lorsquMl descendait de son palais, une petite piece de
▼ers en son honneur. U Tavait souyent fait, mais en yain. Au-
guste voyant qu^il allait faire une nouyelle tentative, 6crivit de
sa main une 6pigramme grecque fort courte, et Fenvoya au poete,
qui venait au devant de lui. Celui-ci k mesure qu'il lisait Fopus-
cule, en faisait P^loge et t^moignait son admiration par sa voix,
par son air et par ses gestes. finsuite s^^tant approch^ de la li-
ti^re d' Auguste, il mit la main dans sa poche mal garnie, et en
tira quelques deniers qu'il pr^senta an prince, en disant qu'il au-
rait donn6 davantage^ 8*il avait ^t6 plus riche. Tout le monde
se mit k rire ; Auguste appela le poete et lui fit compter une as-
sez grosse somme d'argent
56. CraQUANTE-SIXlilME LEgON.
Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense.
IKt (a.) The present of the subjunctive ends in e, e<, e^ iotis^
iez, ent (§ Iv.)
Subjunctive Present of Parlkr, Venir, Recevoir, ^crirk.
It Is neceflsary that I speak, come, receive, write— 72/zu< qu6
Jeparl^ tuparlM, Uparle^ now pcwlionSy wnu parity ilsparletU.
Js Vienna tuviennet^ ilvienns, noutveniona, fxtus^enim^ iUffienneat
Je re^ve, tu recoiv€9^ il recoivt^ nous rwseionty votu reO€vi€B^ Ua reQoiveni
J icrive^ tu icrivM, Uicrive^ noutierMoMy vous ierifftat^ iltieriveni.
CINQUANTS-SIXI&IIB LS90N.
299
(6.) The verbs allevj avairy itre^ faire,
vouloir, and falloir are exceptions to the
mation of the subjunctive. They have the
pouvoir, savoiry valotr^
rule (§ Iv.) for the for-
subjunctive as follows :
J'aiUe,
tuaUlMf
UailU,
noueaUioM,
9ou»aUim^
J'aie,
tuaiea,
Uaii,
ixnuaym^
ihaUmt
lasoU,
tu»aU,
U9oa,
vans toy M^
ilsmienL
JefiUM.
tujbste^
Ufcme,
4l9/b9»en4.
JejmiMe,
tupuiMM,
UpuiSMf
fxntB puiaaiMt
ilapuissent
Jeioche^
UMche,
n&usaaehiotUy
fwua aaoMegf
tiagaeheni.
JevaUU,
tuwiiUes,
atxUU^
fumawdionSy
UivaiUeni.
JevetMU,
90U9 90tUimt
166* Past Tbnss, Subjunctivb Mood.
That I may have tpokent &c.
That I may have come^ &c.
That I may have r^'okedf &c.
QuefaieparUf &c.
Queje tots venu^ &c.
Queje me sois r^'out, &c.
Use of the Subjunctivb Mood.
167* The subjunctive mood denotes doubt or indecision. It
always depends on a preceding verb or phrase, with which it is
connected by means of the conjunction que, or a relative pronoun.
It is used —
1st. After verbs and phrases that express pleasure^ paiuy vxmr
devy surprise, will, desire, command, consent, doubt, fear, and af-
ter all verbs and phrases, after which the action expressed by the
dependent verb may be considered uncertain ; as,
I rejoice that you did it.
I am glad that you are here.
What do you wish me to do P
I require you to go there.
I doubt whether he will come.
I fear that he may not come.
Je me r^jouis** que vous Tayez fiut.
Je suis bien aise que vous soyez ici.
Que voulez-vou8 que je fasse ?
J'exige que vous y alliez.
Je doute qu'il vienne.
Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas.
* When two verbs oome together, both having the same snbject, the second verb is pat
in the infinitive; as, Irt^oioe that I did U, Jems r^ouis de Pavoir Jttii. Bat when
each verb has a different subjeet, the dependent sentenoe is introdaoed by the coqjano-
tion qve^ with the verb in the sabJancUve, if the preceding verb governs the subjano-
tive. This it generally does, when in English the objective case precedes the infinitive
or present participle; as. Do you toish me to do i&att We doubt your being able to
do U. Voulett-voue quejejbuee oela t Nous douUme que voue puieaicB lefaire.
300
OINQUANTIHBIXlftMX LX9ON.
2<L After interrogatiye and negatiye sentences which imply
doobt; as,
Do you believe that he knows it ? Croyez-vous qu'ii ie sache ?
I do not think that he knows it. Je ue pense pas qu'il Ie sache.
dd. After impersonal verba and verbs used impersonally ; as,
I must go there. II &ut qne J'y aille.
It is better for us to go there. II vaut mieux que nous y allions.
It is time that we start. B est temps que nous partions.
It i8 possible that he may come. II est possible qu'il yienne.
It seems that he Is right. B semble qu'il ait raison.
Rku. 1. — ^The following are exceptions: // semble^ accompa-
nied by an indirect object, il y a, il paratt^ il resulte, U est cer-
tain^ il est vrai^ and a few other impersonal verbs, expres^ng
something positive. These require the indicative, when used af-
firmatively.
It appears that he is right. B paratt qu'il a raison.
But—
Does it appear that he is right P Paratt-il qu'il aU raison ?
It does not appear that he is right. B ne paralt pas qu'il ait raison.
Rem. 2. — ^After verbs expressing fear or apprehension, ne is
used before the dependent verb in the subjunctive, when we fear
that the action may take place.
I fear he may come. Je crains qu'il ne vienne.
Are you not afraid that the rain Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluie
will prevent his coming f ne I'empeche de venir ?
YOOABULAIRE 56.
To doubt.
To require. )
To exact. j
To regret.
To be regretted.
It is grievous. )
It is a pity. )
It seems.
Possible.
Promptly.
Douter(de), (n.v.)
Exiger (a. v.)
Begretter (a. v.)
A regretter (que).
B est f&cheux
(que).
II semble.
Possible {adj.)
Promptement (ad,)
To fear.
To be afraid.
To obey.
To wish.
To be astonished.
It is desirable. [
It appears.
Necessary.
Much.
Very much.
Craindre (de),
(«. V.)
OUii (k), (11. V.)
Souhaiter (a. v.)
S'^tonner {rtf. v.)
B est k d^sirer
(que).
B parait.
N^cessaire (adf.)
Fort {adv.)
Fortement {ado.)
OINQUANTX-SIXiftMX UC90N. 801
Analyse 56.
1. Je d6sire qut /ous ob6issiez au professeur.
2. D me semble qu'il a raison ; yous semble-t-il qu'il ait tort ?
EXERCICB 56.
1. Que voulez-vous que je fassef 2. Je desire que vous fas-
siez votre devoir. 3. Exigez-vous que j'^crive le th^me ? 4. II
vaut mieux que vous I'^criviez. 6. Vos parents veulent-ils que
vous obeissiez au professeur ? 6. lis exigent que uous lui ob^is-
sions promptement 1. N'6tes-vou8 pas fkch^ que Charles parte ?
8. Je regrette fortement qu'il s'en aille. 9. N'est-il pas k d6sirer
que son pere apprenne la nouvelle avant I'arriv^e de Charles ?
10. Je souhaite beaucoup que le professeur la lui derive a temps.
11. Ne croyez-vous pas qu*il la sache d6j^? 12. II est possible
qu'il I'ait apprise. 13. Croyez-vous que notre ami vienne ce
matin? 14. Je Grains fortement que la pluie ne I'empScbe
de venir. 15. Pensez-vous qu'il ait appris que nous sommes ici ?
16. Je doute qu'il le sache. 17. Faut-il que le commis aille k la
poste? 18. Je m'6tonne qu'il n'y soit pas d6ja alle. 19. Vou-
lez-vous que j'y aille ? 20. J'aime mieux que vous restiez ici.
21. N'est-il pas k regretter que notre cousin ait perdu la lettre?
22. II est tres-f?Lcheux qu'il I'ait perdue. 23. Ne parait-il pas
que notre ami ait raison ? 24. II semble qu'il ait raison et que
nous ayons tort. 25. Croyez-vous que nous puissions faire cela I
26. II n'est pas n^cessaire que nous le fassions. 27. N'est-il pas
temps que nous finissions ? 28. II est temps que nous nous en
allions.
THisMK 56.
1. I am glad that you are here. 2. I regret that you have
not brought the letter. 3. I am astonished that you forgot it.
4. I am afraid that it is lost. 5. It is a pity that you lost it. 6.
It is possible that I left (oublier) it on the table. 7. I wish you
may find it again. 8. What do you wish us to do f 9. I wish
802 oiKQUANTK-siziftia Lxyoir.
you to pay attention to your studies. 10. I require you to obey
your teachers. 11. Must I write this lesson ? 12. It is not nip
cessary that you write it. ' 13. You must know it by heart. 14.
Must the servant go to the office? 15. It is better for him to
finish what he is doing. 16. It is time for our fi-iend to be here.
17. Are you not afraid that the bad weather will prevent his
coming ? 18. I doubt whether he will come in time. 19. It is
very much to be regretted that he cannot be here this morning.
20. It is possible that he may come this afternoon. 21. Do you
agree that I was right ? 22. It does not seem to me that you
were right 23. Does it appear that I was wrong ? 24. It ap-
pears that you were mistaken.
DlQTtK 56.
Damon et Pythias.
Damon et Pythias 6taient uuis par les liens de la plus 6troite et
de la plus constante amiti6. Pythias ayant 6t6 condamn6 a mort
par Denys, tyran de Syracuse, demanda la gr&ce d'aller dans son
pays pour y r6gler ses affaires, promettant d'etre de retour huit
jours apres. Denys lui accorda sa demande d la condition qu'il
laisserait quelqu'un k sa place. Damon s'offrit k cet effet Tout
le monde attendait avec impatience Tissue d'un ^venement aussi
extraordinaire. Le jour fix6 approchait, et, Pythias ne paraissant
pasy chacun bl&mait Pimprudente amitie de Damon, qui, loin de
t^moigner la moindre inquietude, disait, avec la plus grande
tranquillity, quMl 6tait certain que son ami reviendrait En effet,
il arriva le jour marqu6. Son arriv6e excita Penthousiasme de
tout le monde ; et Denys m6me, 6mu d'une si rare fidelity, ac-
corda la vie k Pythias, et demanda aux deux amis la feveur d'e-
tre admis pour un tiers dans leur amitie.
CIKQUANTB-SEPTldMB LE^OK. 803
67. CINQUANTE-SEPTli:ME LEfON.
Use of the Subjunctive cpntinued.
1S8« 4tb. The subjunctive mood is used in a relative sen-
tence, limiting one of the following words : le (la or les) plus, le
mieux, le moins^ le meilleur, le pire, le moindre^ pen, le seul, le
premier, le dernier, &c.*
The richest man I know. L'homme le plus riche que je con-
The best advice I can give you. Le meilleur conseil que je puisse
vous donner.
The first that knew it. Le premier qui I'ait su.
The only one that can do it. Le seul qui puisse le faire.
There are few men who know it. II y a peu d'hommes qui le sachent.
Rem. — Instead of the subjunctive, the indicative is used, when
the verb in the dependent sentence expresses something positive *
as, De ces deux officiere, c^est leplusjeune queje connais.
169* 5th. The subjunctive mood is used in a relative sentence,
limiting a noun of an indefinite sense, which imparts a character
of uncertainty to the dependent sentence ; as,
I seek some one who may be will- Je cherche quelqu'un qui veuille
ing to render me this service. me rendre ce service.
I do not know any one who can do Je ne connais personne qui puisse
it. le faire.
Choose a retreat in which you may Choisissez une retraite oti vous soy-
be quiet. ez tranquille.
Rem. — The indicative must be used, when the relative sentence
expresses something positive ; as,
I peek the man who can do that. Je cherche l'homme qui salt feire
cela.
* The indicative mood isnsed in a relative sentence, after the above words, when the
relative elaose does not limit their sense; as, «/*<« vom prUerai mon mMlieur oheoal,
qv4 eai dans Vieurie. CetA le plusjeune dea Uives qui mmt M.
SOi
oinquahtbhsbptiAmx LSqON.
170. 6th. The subjunctive is used after quelque. . . .que*
quel que* quai que^ m . . . . que ; as,
However rich they may be. Quelque riches qu'ils soient.
Whatever riches you may have. Quelques richesses que vous ayes.
Whatever may be the p^ns which Quelles que soient les peines que
you take. -vous prenies.
Whatever you may do. ^ q^^j^^^ ^j^^^ ^^^ ^^ g^^.
Of whomsoever you may speak. De qui que oe soit que vous parliei.
171 • In^Ludrf.
Instead of giving back that coat,
you had better keep it.
Without a cloak.
Without speaking.
Without taking any trouble.
Tomooud,
He has succeeded in his studies.
The business succeeded with him.
To succeed; to rteuik.
Did you succeed in doing that f
Tour letter reached me.
TopA back; to put off; to deliver.
Put every thing back in its place.
Let us put off this business till to-
morrow.
Please hand this note to your fa-
ther. .
AuUeude (prep.)
An lieu de rendre oet habit, vous
ferez mieux de le garder.
Sam (prep.)
Sans manteau.
Sans parler.
Sans se donner de peine (61, 2d £.)
Bhum {doM before a noun, d before
the infinitive), (n. v.)
n a rdussi dans ses Etudes.
L'affidre lui a r^ussi.
Parvenir (d), (n. v., aux. itre).
£stes-vou8 parvenu k faire oela ?
Votre lettre m'est parvenue.
BemeUre (a. v.)
Remettez w^aque chose k sa place.
Remettons cctte aiSedre k domain.
Ayez la bont^ de remettre oe billet
k monsieur votre p^re.
The success.
The order.
VOCABULAIRK 67.
Le succ^s.
L'ordre.
The undertaking.
The law.
L'entreprise.
Laloi.
* Quelqttf^ before an adjective, is an adverbi, and remains Invariable. Qiidqus, before
a noun, is an adjective, and takes the » in the plaral When followed by a verb, it is
written in two words — qiul qtte ; and then quel is an adjective, and agrees in gender
and naoiber with the subject of the verb.
t Quelqus choM (quoi que\ any thing whatsoever, is feminine; quelque choee
vometbing, is mascaline.
OINQUANTB-SBFTlftME LE9ON.
30f
The future.
The place.
The succor.
Assistance.
L'avenir.
Le lieu.
' Le secours.
To succeed. Bdussir (k) (n. 0.)
To belong. Appartenir.
To live. r^T.^^;^''''
] § Ivi. 46).
Without.
Sans (prqf.)
Facile (adj.)
The uneasiness. L' inquietude.
The retreat. La retraite
The idleness. Koisivet^.
To succeed.
To reach.
To put back.
To put off.
To deliver.
Instead of.
Difficult.
(Parvenir (k), (irr.
n,v.)
> Bemettre (tr. a. v.)
Au lieu de (prq>.)
Difficile (adj.)
Analyse 57.
Quelle qne soit votre naissaDce, quelque grandes que soient vos
ricbesses, quelques dignit^s que voos possediez, aouvenez-vous
que vous ^tes mortel.
EXBBCICE 57.
1. Quel est le pn'x du plus beau drap que vous ayez? 2. Le
meilleur que nous ayons vaut quatre piastres le metre. 3. Quel
est le dernier navire qui soit venu de France? 4. Le Nep-
tune est le seul qui soit arrive cette semaine. 6. Y a-t-il quel-
qu'un qui vive sans inquietude sur l'avenir ? 6. II y a peu de
personnes qui soient sans inquietude sur Favenir. 7. Quel
est le lieu que vous choisirez pour retraite? 8. Je cboisirai
une retraite o\X je sois tranquille. 9. Quelles que soient les
peines que vous preniez, croyez-vous r6ussir dans votre entre-
prise? 10. Quel que soit le succes qui m'attende, je ferai
tout mod possible pour r6ussir. 11. Quelque ricbe que vous
soyez, croyez-vous pouvoir vivre sans travailler? 12. Quel-
ques ricbesses que j'aie, je ne vivrai point dans Toisivet^. . 13.
Etes vous parvenu k vendre votre vieille voiture? 14. J'y suis
parvenu; je Tai vendue a mon voisin. 15. Quand ma lettre
vous est-elle parvenue? 16. Elle m'est parvenue lundi dernier
3C6 OIHQVAKTB'SKPTdfclCB IM/QOV,
17. Irez*yott8 4 la campagne cette ann6e? 18. Au lieu dialler
4 la campagne, je resterai ici k travailler. 19. QuWez-vous fait
da crayon dont voos vous ^tes servi? 20. Je Fai remis a sa
place. 21. Youlez-voos remettre cette lettre k votre onclef 22.
Donnez-la-moi ; je la lui remettrai. 23. Vous convient-il de re-
mettre cette affaire k domain f 24. Puisque vous le d^irez, nous
la remettrons k demain.
ThIimx 57.
1. This is the most diflScult lesson we have had. 2. Your
brother is the first that knew it 3. He is the only one that can
do it 4. There are few men that live without uneasiness about
(sur) the future. 5. Do you know a place in which one can be
quiet? 6. Whatever retreat you may choose, you will meet with
envy {vout y trauvem Penvie), 7. Whatever may be the laws,
we must {ilfauty respect them. 8. However learned these men
are, they do not know every thing. , 9. Whatever you do, you
will not succeed without taking trouble. 10. I doubt whether
that man will succeed in his undertaking, without the assistance
of his friends. 11. Did you succeed in finishing your business?
12. I did succeed in it. 13. Did my letter reach you in time?
14. I am sorry that it reached me too late. 15. I came without
an umbrella ; can you lend me one ? 16.1 will lend you the best
I can find. 17. Instead of keeping that cloak, I will give it back,
for it does not please me. 18. This umbrella belongs to your
brother ; will you hand it to him ? 19. Will you put that book
back in its place ? 20. I shall be obliged to put that journey off
till next week.
Diot6b 57.
Sage Conseil de CinSae,
Pyrrhus, roi d'£pire, avait coutnme de dire qu'il avait pris
plusde villespar Teloquence de Cin^as, que par la force des annes.
dependant ce sage mioistre ne flattait pas I'ambition de son
maitre. Un jour Pyrrhus lui ayant deconvert ses projets dans
OINQUANTB^HUITlftMB LB^ON.
807
un entretien, et lui ayant dit qu'il voulait soumettre Fltalie a sa
domination, Cineas reprit : " Eh bien, seigneur, quand vous au-
rez vaincu les Romains, que vous proposez-vous de faire ?" " La
Sicile touche a Tltalie, et il ne sera pas difficile de s'en emparer."
" Quand vous serez maitre de la Sicile, que ferez-vous ensuite ?"
"Mon intention est de passer en Afrique." "Apres cela, que
pr6tendez-vou8 faire? "Alors, mon cher Cindas, nous nous li-
vrerons au repos, et nous jouirons d'un doux loisir." "Eh !" re
pliqua Gin6a8 ; ** que n'en jouissez-vous des d present f"
68. CINQUANTE-HUITlfiME LEgON.
TJsB OF THB Subjunctive continubd,
172. 7th. The following conjunctions always govern the sub-
junctive mood :
Afin ^, that, in order that.
A mains que^ unless.
Avant qus, before.
Bien gue, though, although.
DecrainUque, [ for fear, lest.
Au COS que, in case of.
Jutqu'd oe que, till, until.
Loin que J far from.
NonobeUmt que, notwithstanding.
Non que^ non paa que, not that.
Pour que, in order that.
Pourvu que, provided that.
Quoique, although.
Sant que, without.
Sipeu que, however little.
SoU que, whether.
Svqppotk que, suppose that.
Rem. 1. — A moins que, de crainte que, and de peur que^ require
ne before the verb.
I will start before he comes.
He will not do it, unless you speak
to him about it.
Je partirai avant qu'il vienne.
B ne le fera pas, k moins que vous
ne lui en parliez.
Rem. 2. — Que is used to avoid the repetition of a preceding
conjunction, and governs the verb in the same manner as the
leading conjunction does.
(Jnless you are diligent and take A moins que vous ne soyez diligent
pains, you will not succeed. et que vous ne preniez de la pei-
ne, vous ne r^ussirez pas.
308 CINQUANTS-HUinftMB LB^ON.
173* 8th. Qtte, used to avoid the repetition of si^ governs the
subjunctive.
If you come, and I am not in, wait Si vous venez et que je ne sois pae
for me. au logis, atteudez-moi.
9th. Finally, the subjunctive is used after the conjunctions de
fa^on que, de maniere que^ de eorie que, en sorte que, so that, in
such a manner that ; sinan que, except that ; when the result is
doubtful, and the indicative, when it is not.
Behave in such a manner that jou Conduises-vous de maniere que
may obtain his friendship. vous obteniez son amitid.
He behaved in such a manner, that H s'est conduit de maniere qu'il a
he obtuned our esteem. obtenu notre estime.
Rem. — The subjunctive is used at the beginning of a sentence,
when I pray or / wish is understood ; as,
May you be happy ! Puissiez-vous Stre heureux !
174« 7b take care. Prendre gearde {a before a nowa).
Mind your cloak. Prenez garde k votre manteaa.
2h take care not (before the infin.) Prendre garde de,
Tcike care not to &U. Prenez garde de tomber.
Rem. 1. — The verbs emp^cher and prendre garde require ne
before the dependent verb in the subjunctive.
( will prevent him from going out. J'empecherai qu'il ne sorte.
I will take care that he does not fall. Je prendnd garde qu'il ne tombe.
Rem. 2. — The verbs nier, disconvenir, to deny ; desesperer, to
despair ; dotiter, to doubt ; require ne before the following verb
in the subjunctive, when they are used negatively.
I do not doubt that he will come. Je ne doute pas qu'il ne vienne.
Rem. 3. — N'e is also required before the verb that follows que^
after plus, moins, meilleur, mieux, autre, autrement, only, how-
ever, when the preceding verb is not accompanied by a negative.
He is leRS wise than he appears. II est molns sage qu'il ne le paratt.
He speaks differently from what he U paile autrement qu'il ne pense.
thinks.
OINQUANTB-HUITlftME LE^ON. 309
Rem. 4. — Ni^ before a verb in a finite mood, must be accom-
panied by ne ; as,
He neither weeps nor laughs. II ne pleure ni ne rit.
'Rem. 6. — Ne pas, ne rien, &c., are generally placed together
before the verb, when it is in the infinitive ; as.
He is wrong not to do it. U a tort de ne pas le fure {cTj de
ne le pas faire).
VOOABULAIRE 68.
To charge (with). Charger (de),(a.».) To take charge (of ).Se charger (de).
To execute (an ) jj^dcuter (a v) ^^ execute (a ^ S'acquitter(de),
order)." I commission). J (168, e,)
To take care. ) -, , , % « x .
To mind. f Prendre garde. To be on one g ) Se temr gur sea
To beware. ) K»«^- ' «^^-
To laugh (at). Blre (de), (trr.n.r.) To weep. Pleurer (n. v.)
To^i, [cMer(«.t,.) ^o touch )ToucherO.),
Toironehaye.) To meddle (withU (a, v.)
To hurry. Se presser (de). To caixy off. Emporter (a. ».)
Analyse 68.
1. Approchez qne nous vous parlions.
2. Si yens 6te8 sages, et que vous travailliez, vous serez r6com-
EXERCICE 68.
1. PouiTez-vous ex6cuter cet ordre avant mon depart? 2. Je
ne pourrai I'ex^cuter avant que mon pere soit de retour. 3. Que
ferez-vous au cas qu'il ne revienne pas ce soir ? 4. Je lui enver-
rai cette lettre afin qu'il se presse de revenir. 6. Croyez-vous
que cet homme veuille se charger de ma commission f 6. II ne
s'en chargera pas, k moins qu'il ne soit paye de sa peine. 7. Le
domestique ira-t-il chercher mes efiets (my things) au dep6t ? 8.
II n'ira pas sans que vous le lui disiez. 9. Croyez-vous que je
810 OINQUANTX-HUITlftMS UB9OV.
pnisse finir mon onvrage avant que voire fr^re vienne? 10. Vous
pourrez le finir pourva que vous soyez diligent 11. Je crains
qu'on n'emporte ma malle pendant que je vais au bureau ; tou-
lez-vous y prendre garde! 12. Allez-y; je prendrai garde qu'oa
ne la prenne. 13. Voulez-vous emp6cher qu'on ne touche a mea
effets pendant mon absence ? 14. J'emp^cherai qu'on n*y touche.
15. Pouvez-vous me ceder une partie de voire papier? 16. Je
vous en c^derai voloniiers; j^en ai plus qu'il ne m'en faut. 17.
Vous 6ie8-vous acquitid de ma commission? 18. Je m'en suis
acquiii6. 19. Ne croyez-voos pas ce que je vous dis? 20. Je
ne douie pas que cela ne soit vrai. 21. Riez-vous de ce que je
dis? 22. Je n*en ris pas.
ThAmx 58.
1. Shall you go out before I have finished my letter? 2. I
shall wait until you have finished it. 3. I must write to my bro-
ther that he may be on his guard. 4. In case he should come
during my absence, ask {prier) him to wait for me. 5. Al-
ihough you are rich, people will not esteem you, unless you be-
have well. 6. Do not laugh ai what I say ; it is very true. 7.
I do not doubt it 8. Who took charge of my commission ? 9.
Did he execute the commission with which you charged him !
10. I do not doubt that we shall be able to execute your orders
next week. 11. Have yon more of this stuff than you want!
12. I can let you have some, if you wish it 13. Mind your pa-
pers, the wind will carry them off. 14. Will you take care that
no one (on) touches them during my absence? 15. I shall pre-
vent any one from meddling with them. 16. Take care that
the child does not take the scissors, for fear that he may hurt
himselfl 17. Take care not to bum yourself. 18. If you remain
here, and have a wish to read, you will find books in the next
room. 19. Are you studying or reading! 20. I neither study
nor read. 21. You are wrong not to study.
OINQUANTE-KBUVlftSCB USgOV.
311
DiotAe 68.
Ce qtte les Femmes ont de plv^ Pricieux,
Conrad III., empereur d'Alleraagne, assiegea Weinsberg, pe-
tite ville de I'^tat du due de Wittenberg. Ce due avait ete au
nombre des opposants k Telection de Conrad, et il se trouvait
main tenant avec son 6pouse renferm^ dans cette ville. II en
soutint le siege avec une bravoure h^roique, et ne ceda qu'a la
force. Uempereur irrit6 voulait mettre tout a feu et a sang.
Cepen^ant, lorsqu'il eut pris la place, il permit aux femmes de
sortir et d'emporter ce qu'elles avaient de plus pr^cieux. L'epouse
du due prit son mari sur ses epaules, et toutes les femmes de la
ville en firent autant. L'empereur les voyant sortir ainsi char-
gees, la duchesse k leur tete, ne put tenir contre un spectacle si
int^ressant : il c^da a I'admiration qu'il lui causait, et fit gr&ce
aux hommes en faveur des femmes.
59. CINQUANTE-NEUVlfeME LEgON.
SuBJUNOTiVK Mood, Imperfect Tense.
175* (a.) The imperfect of the subjunctive always ends in
sse^ sses^ t, scions, ssiet, asent (Hv. 11).
QueJeparlasMj
jefinieee.
je return, Je vendisse,
Que tu parlastesj
tufinisseSf
tu Ts^usseSf iu venduseSf
Qu'aparm,
afin^.
Uregiit, UvendU,
Que nous parlasmru,
nous regussionSf nous vendissionSt
Que vous parkttsiez,
fwus finissieZf
vous re^sieZf vous vendissiez,
Qu'ilsparlauerU.
tUfaassent,
ib regussent. ih vencUesent.
(b.) Pluperfect Tense.
That I might have spoken, &c.
QuefeusseparUf &c.
That I might have come
&c.
Que Jef usee venu, &c.
That I might have risen
&c.
Queje mefusse leoS, &o.
812
OIKQUAlflTB-KEUYlftMS LB^OK.
UsB OF THE ImPBRFBCT AND PlUPBBFBCT OF THB SuBJUNCTITB.
176* (o.) After one of the past, or one of the conditional, tenses,
the dependent verb is put in the imperfect of the subjunctive, to
express present or future time, and in the pluperfect, to express
past time, with reference to the first verb ; as,
I was afraid that he would do it. J'ai craint qu'il ne le fit.
He wanted me to do it. H youlait que je le fisse.
I wish you would do it. ) _ . , ^ .
I would wish you to do it. \ J« ^«"*»» V^ ^0"« »« ^««-
I wish you had done it. Je voudrais que tous reusMez fidt
(6.) The dependent verb is put in the imperfect or pluperfect
of the subjunctive, when it is accompanied by a conditional
clause, though the governing verb may be in the present ; as,
Do yon think that I oonid speak to Croyes-vous que je pusse parler k
your brother, if I should go there ? votre fr^re, si j 'y allais ?
Bbm. — ^Though the governing verb is in the perfect, the de-
pendent verb is put in the present of the subjunctive, when it
expresses something that is true at all times, or future time with
reference to the present ; as,
Gtod has granted you wealth in or- Dieu vous a donn^ du bien, pour
der that you should make good que vous en feusles un bon usage,
use of it.
177* Jh marry a eonqtle.
To marry (to give in marriage).
Jh marry (to take for husband or
wife).
Togii married.
When will you get married f
He married his daughter to Mr. B.
His son married my cousin.
They were married this morning.
The bishop married them.
7b inform of; to aeguamt with,
Th inquire about.
Did you inquire about that?
Have you informed that gentleman
of what h{is taken place ?
Marier un eoiqfU.
Marier (donner en mariage).
Se
Quand vous marieres-voosf
n a mari^ 8a fiUe avec M. B.
Son fils a ^pou86 ma cousine.
Ds out ^t^ mari^ oe matin.
L'6v6que les a mari^.
If^ormer g^. deqq. ^
S'informer de.
Vous Stes-vous inform^ de oela f
Avez-vous inform^ oe monsieur dm
ce* qui s'est pass^ ?
OINQUANTK-NKUVlftMB LE9ON.
313
Ihiakeplaee.
Tb happen, to take place.
How did it happen that you spent
all that money ?
It would be well if you were more
economical.
I suspected that that would happen.
Sepasaer.
Sefairt.
Comment s'est-il fait que vous avea
d^pens^ tout cet argent?
II serait k souhaiter que vous fussies
plus ^oonome.
Sedouter.
Je me doutais bien que cela arrive-
rait.
YOOABULAIRB 59.
The marriage. Le mariage.
The betrothed. Le fianc^.
The intended. Le futur.
Thecompamon.)Le^,^^
The mate. )
The future. L'avenir.
To marry. ICarier (a. v.)
To get married. Be marier.
To inform. J Informer (qqn.
( de qq. ch.)
To inform. ) Instruire (qqn.
To instruct. f de qq. ch.)
To take place.
To suspect.
It is fit.
The acquaintance. La connaissanoe.
The betrothed. La fianc^.
The intended.
I^e class.
The necessity.
Be passer.
Se douter.
> n est k propoB.
It is proper. r
Ancient ; former. Anden {adj,)
Shortly. Sous pen {ad. ph. )
Ia future.
Laclasse.
Lan^oeasit^.
To marry.
To consent.
To inquire about.
To give notice, j
To happen. )
To take place. )
It is desirable.
It is well that.
Economical.
At the latest.
£pou8er (a. «.)
Consentir(tr.n.«.)
S'informer de.
Avertir (qqn. de
qq. ch.)
Sefaire.
n est k souhaiter.
II est bon que.
£conome (adj,)
Au plus tard.
Akaltsb 59.
1. Je ne pense pas qne vous eussiez r^ussi sans notre secoun. ••
2. Je vous ai envoys cette lettre, afin que vous compreniez la nif-
cessit^ d'etre plus econome k Tavenir.
14
814 CINQDAKTB-NBUYltMK LE90K.
EXBRCICB 59.
1. Est-il n^cessaire que j'arertisse cet homme de notre iiten-
tioD de partir ? 2. II serait bon qu'il en fult arerti. 3. Si nous
voulioDs partir demain, ne faudrait-il pas que nous d^jeuoaasioDs
de bonne heure ? 4. 11 faudrait que nous d^jeunassions k six
heures au plus tard. 5. Ne voudriez-rons pas que nous eus-
sions du plaisir? 6. Je Toudrais que vous eussiez du plaisir et
que vous fussiez industrieux. 7. Avez-vous appris que votre an-
cien caiuarade de clasae ra se marier ? 8. Je me doutais bien
quMl se inarierait sous pen. 9. Connaissez-vous sa future ? 10.
On m'a dit qu'il doit ^ponser une demoiselle de ma counaissaiiceb
11. N'^tes-vous pas surpris que M. A.... ait consenti au ma-
nage de sa fille avec M. B. . . .? 12. Je suis vraiment surpris
qu^il y ait consenti. 13. Consentiriez-vous que votre fille 6pou-
sat un homme comme celui-la? 14. J'aimerais mieux qu'elle
ne se mari&t jamais. 15. Ne serait-il pas k propos que votre
oncle fut instruit de ce qui s'est pass6? 16. II serait k souhai-
ter qu'il eu fdt instruit. 17. Ne voudriez-vous pas Ten iofbrroer?
18. Je Ten informerai quand je le verrai. 19. Vous 6te8>you8
inform^ du vieux professeur? 20. Je me suis inform^ de lui,
mais je n'ai pas pu apprendre ce qu*il est devenu. 21. Com-
ment s^est-il fait que votre frere a perdu cet argent? 22. Je d€
saurais dire vraiment comment cela s'est fait
cv
TfitME 59.
1. Would you wish me to give notice to those persons {gens)
of your intention ? 2. It would be well that they were informed
of it. 3. In case we start to-morrow, it would be well that every
thing were ready to-night. 4. It would be necessary for us to
rise early. 5. What would you wish me to do ? 6. I would
wish you to inform your uncle of what has taken place. 7. I
^ uld like you to take care of your things {effets). 8. I wish
you were more economical. 9. Vour former class-mate is going
to marry an acquaintance of mine; have you heard it? 10. I
was introduced to his betrothed last night. 11. I suspected that
OINQUANTE-inBUTliiMV LISBON. Si 5
he intended to get married shortly. 12. The marriage viWl take
place (se/aire) next week. 13. I am surprised that their parents
have consented to the marriage ; they are still so young. 1 4. I
do not think that the parents of the lady would have consented
to it, if they had not intended to leave for Europe next fall. 15.
How does it happen that your friend has not been here? 16. I
must inquire about him ; I fear he may be sick.
Diot6r 59.
Jje SatirUie Mic&mpense*
Un lieutenant-colonel, r6form6 a la paix de 1763, ayant solli-
cit6 vainement pour rentrer an service, se vengea du refus pa&
une satire piquante centre Fr^d^ric. Ce prince promit cinquante
louis k qui lui en nommerait Fauteur. Le lieutenant-colonel se
pr^senta lui-m^me: "Punissez le coupable," dit-il au roi ; "mais
tenez votre parole, en envoyant les cinquante louis a ma femn^e
et a mes enfants, qui sont malheureux." Le roi, frappe de ce
discours, ne sen tit plus que le regret d^avoir r^duit un militaire s^
ce parti desesp^r^. Deguisant sa sensibility sous Tapparence du
courroux, il ^crivit une lettre et la remit a I'officier, avec ordre
dialler la porter lui-m6me au gouverneur de Spandau. Le cou-
pable prit tranquillement le chemin de-ia fort^resse, pensant bien
qu'il allait y demeurer prison nier. II se pr6senta au comman-
dant, et lui remit son 6pee avec la lettre du roi. Mais quelle fut
sa surprise quand ii entendit lire :
^ Je doune le commandement de la fort^resse de Spandau au
lieutenant-colonel N. . . ., porteur de cette lettre; et 4 Tancien
commandant, le gouvemement de B. . • ., pour recompense de
ses bons setTices.
^ Les cinquante louis seront remis k la femme de N . . . ., pour
Faider k aller r^joindre son mari.*^
816 BOIXANTXftMS LE^OV.
60. SOIXANTlilME LE9ON.
Infinitiys Mood.
178f (a.) The infinitive often performs the part of a notln,
and may be used as the subject of a sentence ; as,
To speak too much is imprudent Farler trop est imprudent.
It is good walking, good travelling. H fidt bon marcher, boa voyager*
(6.) The infinitive is used as a noon, when it is preceded by
the article ; as,
I do not fear death ; I fear dying. Je ne cralns pas la mort ; je cralns
le mourir.
(c.) The infinitive is used as the object of a verb, in which
case it is often preceded by d or de, for euphony ; as (104),
I advise you to start. Je vous oonsellle de portir.
(d,) The infinitive is used after all prepositions, except en;
as (72),
After warming himself, he went Aprte s'Stre chauff^, il est parti
away without mying any thing. sans rien dire.
Rem. 1. — Aprh requires the verb in the past tense of the in-
finitive, though, in English, the present participle may be used.
Rem. 2. — ^The English infinitive passive, expressing that some-
thing is to be done, must be rendered by the infinitive active,
preceded by a ; as.
She is to be pitied. Elle est k plaindre.
It is still to be done. C'est encore A faire.
A house to let, for sale. Maison k louer, k vendre.
Rem. 3. — ^The English present or past participle, after such
verbs as to see^ to hear, fo have^ to get, to make, dec., must be ren-
dered by the infinitive ; as,
I heard it read. Je I'ai entendu lire,
^e makes herself beloved. Elle se fiedt aimer.
Rem. 4. — ^The infinitive passive is rendered by the infinitive
active after to suffer one^s self, se laisser ; as.
He suffered himself to be led. II s'est laiss^ conduire.
SOIZANTlftMB LE(ON. 31 1
Rem. 6. — ^The verb fairt may be joined to the infinitive of
most verbs. The two verbs are equivalent to one active verb,
and can have but one direct object ; as,
I made the children read. J'ai fiiit lire les enfants.
I made them read their lesBons. Je leur ai foit lire leurs lemons.
Rbmarxs on thb pronoun Ce.
179» The use of the pronoun ce before the verb Hre has been
partly stated, P. IL 66, Rem.; P. IV. 100, a and 6. We now
add the following remarks.
Rem. 1. — After re, the verb Ure is put in the plural only when
followed by a plural noun or pronoun of the third person ; as,
They are Americans. Ce sont des Am^ricains.
It is they whom we see. Ce sont eux que nous yoyons.
It is we who say so. C'est nous qui disons cela.
Rem. 2. — Cfe, followed by que^ is used idiomaticaHy as the sub-
ject of the verb kire^ in interrogative sentences like the following.
In this case the verb is always put in the singular.
What are those vessels ? Qu'est-ce que ces hfttiments ?
What is Geography ? Qu'est-oe que la G^ographie ?
See 164.
Rem. 3. — Ck is used before Ure^ placed between two infini-
tives; as.
To do good to men, is to do horn- Faire du hien aux hommes, c'est
age to God. rendre hommage k Dieu.
See Izxxv, 4 d?c.
YOCABULAIRS 60.
To pity. Plaindre (trr. a. ©.) To let. Louer (a. ».;
Tooverome. [ ^aincre (trr. a.o.) To carry away. Entralner (a. t».)
To do service. Rendre service. To oblige. Obliger (a. ».)
To send word. Faire dire. To let know. Faire savoir.
Shameful. Honteux {adj.) Designing. Artificieux (adj.)
BIS SOIZAKTXtME LB^OK.
Akaltsb 60.
1. J'ai &it ^crire oes Aleves.
2. Je leur ai fait 6crire deux pages.
EZEBCIOB 60.
1. Fait-il bon voyager en FWincef 2. H y fait bon voyager
et bon vivre. 3. OiH ^teft-voos all6 apres avoir 6cnt voti^ kttre ?
4. Apres avoir fini d*6crire, je suis alI6 me eoacher. 5. fites-
vous parti bieDt6t apr^s vous 6tre Iev6 ! 6. J'ai d^jeun^ aussi-
t6t apres m'^tre leve, et ensuite je suis parti. 7. Votre maison
est-elle k vendre ? 8. Eile est i louer. 9. Les Aleves paresseor
ne sont-ils pas k plaindre? 10. lis sont k plaindre et a blamer.
11. Yotre theme est-il faitf 12. U est encore a faire. 13.
Croyez-vous qa'on se fasse aimer quand on neglige ses devoirs ?
14. Au lien de se faire aimer, on se fait m^priser en les n^gli-
geant (180). IS. Avez-vous fait dire au peiutre de ue pas ve-
Btr ce matin f 16. Je lui ai fait savoir que nous serous absents
aujourd*hni. 17. Avez-vous fait lire les enfants? 18. Je les ai
fait lire et ^rire. 19. Leur avez-vous fait reciter leur le^on d*hi&-
toire? 20. Je la leur ferai reciter mainteuant. 21. Qu'est-ce
que Thistoire ? 22. L'histoire est le r6cit de tons les evenements
qui out •eu lieu «ur la terre. 28. N'est-il pas honteuz de se kis-
ser vaincre par ses passions ? 24. II est honteux de se liosser
entrainer par le go4t des pkisirs. 25. ITest-il pas doux de ren-
dre service k ses amis ? 26. Obliger ceuz qu'on aime, c'est sV
bliger soi-m^me.
THftVB 60.
1. Is it as good living here as in France! 2. Is it good trav-
elling in this country f 3. Have those men gone away without
saying any thing? 4. They went away after warming them-
selves. 5. After reading the letter, I answered it 6. After
having answered it, I burned it. 7. Your work is still to be done.
8. Instead of doing your work you have been taking a walk {vous
SOIXANTlftME LE^ON. 319
promener). 9. Do you know that idlers (paressetix) are despised.
10. Those men are not to be blamed ; they are rather to be pitied .^^
11. They suffered themselves to be led by designing men. 12.
Did you send word to the lawyer (avocoU) that we are ready ?
13. I let him know this morning that we expect him to-day.
14. If he should send* for the papers, and I am not in, you will
find them in that drawer. 15. What is grammar? 16. It is the
art of speaking and writing correctly (correetemmt). 17. It is
more difScult to speak and write correctly than I thought. 18.
It is shameful (to suffer one's self) to be overcome by one's pas-
sions. 19. It is sweet to oblige those we love. 20. It is the
Americans that build (canstruire) those beautiful vessels.
DiOTlftE 60.
St Vincent de Paul.
Les annales du monde comntent peu de bienfaiteurs de Thu-
manit^ comme St. Vincent de Paul. II ^tait fils d'un ouvrier de
la Gascogue. A Ykge de trente ans il fut fait prisonnier et con-
duit k Tunis, ou il resta pendant deux ann^es comme esclave.
S*etant echapp^ des mains de son maitre, il retourna en France,
et entra dans les ordres pour se devouer au service des malheu-
reux condamn^s aux galeres. II all6gea leurs souffrances par ses
soins chari tables, et parvint a faire observer a ces hcnnmes de-
grades une conduite decente et resign^e : la r^forme qu'il effeo-
tua etait reellement surprenante. Un jeune homme pauvre,
ay ant et6 condamn^, pour un seul acte de contrebande, a trois
ans de galeres, d^plorait, d'une maniere si touchante, ses mal-
heurs, et la misere a laquelle sa femme et ses enfants etaient re-
duits, que St. Vincent se mit k sa place et travail la dans les ga-
lores pendant huit mois, enchatne par la jambe. Le fait ayant
ete decouvert, il fut lib^r^, mais il ressentit toujours apres une
douleur a la jambe, causee par la chaine qu'il avait port^e.
* To send for, jidrs dmnandsr.
820 BOIZANTX XT UKltMB LK90N.
61. SOIXANTE ET UNlfeME LEgON.
Fabticiplb Present.
180f The preseDt participle is inyariable (§ liz.) It is some
times preceded by the preposition en; and sometimes not.
I read while I am warming myself. Je Us en me chau£Bint.
Seeing that those men were occn- Yoyant que ces hommes ^taient oc
pied, I did not wish to disturb cup^, je n'ai pas voula les d6
them. ranger.
Peace being concluded, the army La paiz dtant conclue, I'arm^ se
withdrew. retim.
Rem. 1. — ^The present participle, preceded by en, is used only
with reference to the subject of the sentence ; the present parti-
ciple, without m, may refer to the object of the verb.
I saw him while I was walking. Je I'ai vn en me promenant.
I saw him walking. Je I'ai vu se promenant.
Rem. 2. — ^There are verbal adjectives having the same ending
as the present participle. These are variable, and express a per-
manent state or manner of being, whereas the present participle
expresses action. The latter may govern an object, like a verb ;
the former can have no object
An obliging person. Une personne obligeante (adj\)
A person obliging his friends. Une personne ohjigeant ses amis
Partioiplx Past.
181 f The past participle is sometimes variable and sometimes
not It is variable when it comes under any of the three fol-
lowing rules.
1. The past participle used as an adjective, agrees with the
noun which it qualifies. (89, 6.)
2. The past participle of a passive verb, or of a neuter verb
conjugated with the auxiliary itre, agrees with the subject of the
verb. (90, b.)
SOIZAIITK bt-ukiAmb le^on. 821
3. The past participle of an active or reflective verb agrees
with the direct object of the verb, when the direct object pre-
cedes the past participle (108).
182* Remarks on the Past Participle.
Rem. 1. — The past participle of an impersonal verb remains
invariable, because an impersonal verb can have no direct object.
When we say, il fait de la pluie, the apparent object pluie is
really the subject of the sentence, and the verbybt^ is idiomatic-
ally used as a neuter verb. Thus we say, without agreement,^
The heat there has been. Les chaleurs qu'il a &it.
Rem. 2. — When the past participle is followed by an infini-
tive, the preceding object may belong to the participle or to the
infinitive. In the latter case, there is no agreement.
I heard her sing {I heard her, she tvat Je Tai entendue chanter.
I heard it {the mmg) sung (/ heard Je I'ai enUndu chanter.
eomtbady amgmg the eong).
Thus, when the object is the person or thing that performs
the action expressed by the second verb, then it is governed by
the first.
I allowed them to start {theif darleii . Je les ai laiss^ pertir.
They suffered themselves to be Us se sent laiss^ vaincre.
overcome.
Rem. 3. — ^The past participle of the verbyatre, followed by an
infinitive, is invariable ; because, in this connection, /atr« has al-
ways for its direct object the next verb.
YOOABULAIRE 61*
The glance. Le conp d'oeil. The occupation. L'oocupation.
The danger. Le danger. The prayer. Lapri^re.
14*
922
BOIZANTK ST UVlftMK U^OST.
To glance at.
To hasten.
To distarb.
To derange.
To foresee.
To threaten.
To wound.
Occupied (hi).
Bu^.
Provident
Towards (j>Af»-
Kolfy).
I Jeter tiQ coop
d'ceU 8ur«
Be h&ter (de).
[ D^ranger (a. v.)
Pr^ydr (trr. a. ».)
Menacer (de), (a. o.)
Bleiier(a. 0.)
Occupy (k), («**.)
Frtfroyaat (oifp.)
^ Vets (fnp^)
To flee.
To turn (o. s.)
To turn away.
To avert
To obtain.
To abandon.
To cany a«»y,
DoBbtftil.
Obliging.
Towards (\
«%).
STenfuir (trr. v.)
Setoumer.
> D^toumer (a. v.)
Obtenir (ur. a. v.)
Abandonner (a. v.)
Smporter {a. o.)
Pouteux (flcff,}
ObUgeant (lUff.)
I Karm (imgp.)
Akaltsb 61.
1. Les figyptiens 6taicnt sages et pers^y^rants, entreprenant et
achevant les plus grandes choses.
2. Je les ai vos tomber ; je les ai va emporter par lean amis.
EXXRCICK 61.
1. Youlea-voos lire le journal en attendant! 2. Fy jetterat
UQ coup d'oeil en me chauffant 8. Avez-yous yu yotre ami ea
venant f 4. Je Tai rencontr6 allant k la poste. 5. N^^tes-voos
pas 6tonn6 que vos fr&res, sachant que nous devions venir les
prendre, ne nous aient pas attendusf 6. Mes Mres, voyant qn^il
allait pleuvoir et n^ayant pas de paraplui^ se seront hfit^ de
retoumer chez eux. 7. Yos amis, qui sont si pr^vojants, r6ua-
sirofit-itfl daoft cette entreprieef 9u Nos antis, pr^yoyant qn^ils
ne pouvaient y r^asarr, Pont abondoiin^e. 9. Les personnes
obligeantes ne se font-elleB pas aimer 4e tout le mcmdef 10.
Les personnes, obligeant leurs amis dans toutes les occasions, se
sont fait aimer de tons ceuz qui les connaissent 11. Avez-vous
vu ecnre ces enfants? 12. Je les ai vus 6crire. 13. Qui a vu
ecrire cette lettre? 14. Moi, je f ai vu ^ci-ire. 15. Avez-vous
laisse aortir les Aleves! 16. Je les ai laiss^ aortir. 17. Aveai-
vous Ifuase tomber yotaw montre ? 18. J« Vm kuss^e tomber aur
soixANTE £T uni£:me le^ok. 323
le pav6. 19. Ces hommes se sont-ils 1»8s6s tomberf 20. lis
se sont laiss^s tomber, comme s'ils avaient et6 bless^. 21. Se
sont-ils lais86 d6tourner de leurs occupations f 22. Us se sont
laisEiB entrainer par le gout des plaisirs.
Tatux 61.
1. I will glance at these papers while I am waiting. 2. We
ijball call at the lawyer's when we come back. 3. I saw your
fnond walking in his garden. 4. I met him yesterday, while I
was walking. 5. Those men being occupied, we did not wish
to disturb them. 6. Knowing that your friends were very busy,
and not wishing to turn them away from tlieir occupations, we
did not ask them to accompany us. Y. Those provident men
have forsaken an enterprise, the success of which {dont le succes)
is so doubtful. 8. Those men foreseeing what was to happen,
averted the danger that threatened them. 9. Your friends have
always behaved well towards me. 10. The poor woman, seeing
that she could obtain nothing by her prayers, turned towards her
children, and said to them, weeping, *'Let us depart.'' 11. Those
ladies play well; I heard them play. 12. Those airs are beau-
tiful ; I heard them executed. 1 3. Those men, seeing the dan-
ger, fled; we saw them run. 14. We saw them fall 15. We
saw them carried away.
Dict£e 61.
La Probitepour Gage.
Apres un incendie afireux qui d6vasta une des villes du Mogol,
Tun des habitants de cette ville infortunee, ayant perdu toutes
ses marchandises et tons ses papiers, sollicita sa famille et ses
amis de I'aider k relever son commerce : tous ne lui montrerent
qu'une sterile sensibilite. Reduit done a l'impossibilit6 de re-
comraencer son n^goce, il se determine k se retirer aupres de
son correspondant d'Agra, dans le dessein de lui demander de
I'emploi dans ses manufactures. Mais k peine est-il sorti de la
32i BOXZANTB-DBUXliME LB90K.^
ville, dont les tristes debris fumaient encore, qu'il le reicontre
sar le chemin. Celui-ci lui tend les bras, raccueille, Tembrasse
lea larmes auz yeux, et lui dit avec ce ton qui peint si bien la
douleur : ^ Mon paavre et cher ami ; j'ai appris ton infortane, et
je me suis hdt6 de t'apporter la quittance de ce que tu me dois.
Yoil^ en outre, six cents florins que je te remets ; prends-Ies, et
dispose de mon magasin. Tu avals de la probity ; le feu n'a
point brQ16 cet eflfet-la ; c*est mon gage et je ne t'en demande
point d 'autre.''
62. SOIXANTE-DEUXliME LEgON.
OOVSRNMBNT OF YbRBS.
18S* 1st (a.) Most active verbs, which have, besides the di-
rect, also an indirect complement, to complete their sense, gov-
ern the object directly, and the person indirectly, by means of
the preposition h.
To intrust some one with some- Goofier quelqne chose k quelqn'on.
thing.
To inspire s. o. with s. th. Inspirer qq. eh. k qqn.
To upbraid s. o. with s. th. Reprocher qq. oh. k qqn.
C Prendre qq. eh. k qqn.
To take s. th. from s. o. < Enlever qq. ch. k qqn.
(Oter qq. ch. k qqn.
To pull or snatch s. th. from s. o. Arracher qq. ch. k qqn.
To steal s. th. from s. o. Yoler qq. ch. k qqn.
To borrow s. th. from s. o. Emprunter qq. ch. k qqn.
Rbm. — Sometimes an infinitive is the direct object (178, c) ; as^
To recommend s. o. to do a th. Becommander k qqn. de faire qq. ch.
To forbid s. o. to do a th. D^fendre % qqn. de &ire qq. ch.
See also reflective verbs, 168, (c).
(6.) Some active verbs govern the person directly, and the ob-
ject indirectly, by means of the preposition de.
To accuse s. o. of 8. th. Accuser qqn. de qq. ch.
To charge s. o. with s. th. Charger qqn. de qq. ch..
SOIZANTB-DEUZlftMS LE^ON.
825
To defend / ^ ., ^^ „ ., v
m X A M- <>• (from 8. tn.)
To protect I ^ '
To congratulate s. o. upon s. th.
To thank 8. o. for 8. th.
D^fendre qqn. (de qq. ch.)
F^liciter qqn. de qq. ch.
Remercier qqn. de qq. ch.
Rem. — Sometimes an infinitive is the indirect object ; as,
To ask m heg s. o. to do a th. Frier qqn. de faire qq. ch.
See also reflective verbs, 168, (e).
2d. Some verbs are active in English and neuter in French ; to
this class belong the following:
(fl.) To obey some one.
To pardon some one.
To please some one.
To resemble some one.
To answer some one.
(6.) To abuse any thing.
To doubt any thing.
To enjoy any thing.
Ob^ir k quelqu'un.
Pardonner k quelqu'nn.
Plaire k quelqu'un.
Bessembler li quelqu'un.
B^pondre \ quelqu'un.
Abuser de quelque chose.
Douter de quelque chose.
Jouir de quelque chose.
3d. Some neuter verbs require a different preposition in the
two languages.
To profit by, to avail one's self of.
To think of.
To laugh at.
To blush at.
Profiter de.
Penser k. Songer U.
Eire de.
Bougir de.
4th. A few verbs are followed by a preposition in English,
which require none in French.
To listen to some one. £conter quelqu'un.
To associate with some one. Fr^uenter quelqu'un.
To look at some one. Begarder quelqu'un.
The secret.
The dentist.
The service.
The power.
The advice.
Le secret.
Le dentiste.
Le service.
Le pouvoir.
Le oonseil.
YOOABULAIRB 62.
The confidence.
The tooth.
The sincerity.
The opportunity.
The simplicity.
Laoonfiance.
La dent.
La sincdrit^.
L' occasion.
La simplicity.
To avoid ; toshun. i^^viter (de), («.»,) To occur.
Se presenter.
826 SOIXAKTB-iyBCJXlftMB LE^ON.
Analyse 62.
U nous a recommand^ de lui 6crire ; il nous a pri^ de le &ire.
EZERCIOB 62.
1. Avez-Tons confix voire secret k oet bomuef 2. Je ne lu*
ai rien confix, car il ne m'iBspire pas de confiance* 3. Yoos
a-t-oD pris qaelque chose! 4. On m'a pris mou crayon. 5.
A-t-OQ Tol^ quelqiie chose k cette dame ? 6. On lui a vol6 son
paraplaie. 7. Vous 6tes-vous fait arracher une dent? 8. Le
dentiste m*en a arracbe deux. 9. Get homme vous a-t-il em-
prunt6 de I'argent ? 10. II a touIu m^en empranter, mats je n'ai
pas voulu lui en prater. 11. Avez-vous recommand6 k ce jeune
homme d'^crire k son onclef 12. Je lui ai recommand6 d'aller
le voir. 13. A-t-oa d^fendu a ces ^l^ves de parler? 14. On
leur a defendu de parler dans )es classes. 15. Avez-vous £§licite
votre ami de son succ^s f 16. Je Ten ai f61icit6. 17. A-t-on
accuse cet homme d*avoir vol^? 18. On Ten a aecua^ k tort
(wrongfully), 19. Cat enfant a-t-il abus6 de votre patience!
20. II m'a d^sob^i, mais je lui ai pardonn6. 21. Votre frere
voudraitril profiter de Toccasion qui se presente pour voir le pays!
22. II ne pent ; il ne jouit pas d'une bonne sant6 en ce moment.
23. Fr6quentez*vous ces jennes geasf 24. Je ne les fr^quente
pas.
ThAmb 62.
1. Tou would be wrong to intrust that man with your busi-
ness, if he does not inspire you with confidence, although he en-
joys the confidence of your friends. 2. He has extorted [arra-
cher) a secret from me, and I am afraid that be will abuse the
power he has acquired (obterUr) over me (sur mot). 3. He bor
rowed money from me, and, instead of thanking me for the ser-
vice I rendered him, he accuses roe of ingratitude. 4. I recom-
mend you to avoid those men ; they will borrow from you all you
have. 5. My father has forbidden me to associate with them.
fiOIXANTB-DEUZlAME Lfl^ON. 32?
6. I was wrong not to obey him. 7. I always doabted their
sincerity, and (I) blush at my simplicity. 8. I will profit by
your advice, and in future I will take care that no one (on) shall
have to upbraid me with a similar act of disobedience {un pareil
acU de deiMUaaxyce)*
DiCTfiB 62.
• VArahe et son Cheual.
Un Arabe et sa tribn avaient attaqu^ dans le desert la cara*
vane de Damas ; la victoira etait complete, et les Arabes ^taient
d^ja occnp6e i. charger leur riche butin, qaand les cavaliers du
pacha d'Acve, qui venaient a la rencontre de eette caravaae, fon-
dirent k Timproviste sur les Arabes victorieux, en tuerent un
grand nombre, firent les autres prisonniei-s, et les ayant attaches
avec des cordes, les emmenerent a Acre pour en faire present au
pacha. Abou-el-Marsch, c'est le nom de cet Arabe, avait re^u
une balle dans le bras pendant le combat ; comme sa blessure
n'etait pas mortelle, les Turcs I'avaient attach^ sur un chameau,
et s'etant empar^s du cheval, emmenaient le cheval et le cavalier.
Le soir du jour oA lis devaient entrer a Acre, ils caniperent avec
leurs prisonniers dans les montagnes de Jaffa; TArabe bless6
avait les jambes li^es ensemble par une courroie de cuir, et 6tait
etecidu pres de la tente ot^ oouchaient les Turcs. Pendant la
nuit, tenu 6veill6 par la douleur de sa blessure, il entendit hennir
son cheval parmi les autres chevauz entrav^ autour des tentes,
selon Tusage des orientaux ; il reconnut sa voix, et ne pouvant
resister au d^sir d*aller parler encore une fois au compagnon de
sa vie, il se tralna peniblement sur la terre, k Faide de ses mains
et de ses genoux, et parvint jusqu^a son coursier.
(Ls saito an No. saivant)
828 BOIXANTa-TROISlftMX LE9ON.
68. SOIXANTE-TROISlfeME LEgON.
GOVERNMSNT OF AdJEOTIYES.
184* The complement of an adjective is generally a noun or a
verb, preceded by the preposition which the adjective requires.
(a.) Adjectives expressive of our feelings, and those generally
which are followed in English by of^ from^ mthj require the
preposition de.
I am glad to bear it. Je suis ravi de I'apprendre.
I am sure of finding him. Je suis silr de le trouver,
(6.) Adjectives expressing advantage^ likeness^ fitneM^ and those
generally which are followed in English by to, require the prep-
osition h.
This lesson is difficult to oompre- Cette l69on est difficile )i oompren-
hend. dre.
That is favorable (contrary) to them. Cela lenr est fiivorable (contraire).
That is hurtful to one's health. C'est nuisible 'k la sant£.
He is liable to be mistaken. II est styet k se tromper.
(c.) Some adjectives have different prepositions ; as,
Good for. Bon k. Bon pour. (Ixxvi, 4.)
Polite to. Poll envers.
(rf.) When the verb itre, used impersonally, introduces an ad-
jective followed by an infinitive, the infinitive must be preceded
by the preposition de.
It is sweet to make people happy. II est doux de faire des henrenx.
It is difficult to please everybody. II est difficile de oontenter tout le
monde.
Prepositions.
185* Prepositions are simple ; as, d, de^ pour^ &c. ; or com*
pound (prepositional phrases) ; as, auprh de^ d cbte de, &g. ; the
latter, almost all, have de for their final component part They
are principally nouns or adverbs, preceded by the preposition a;
as, a cause de, a force de, a moins de, au dessus de, <&c
SOIZAKTX-TROISlftMX LE^OV.
329
A few prepositions are followed by h ; as, attenant (a), join-
ing 5 jusque (jusqu^a), as far as ; par rapport {a), with regard ;
qtutnt (a), as to.
186* 1st (a.) The preposition h is used between two noans,
the latter of which expresses the use or destination of the former.
A wine bottle.
The wine cellar.
Una bouteille U vhi.
La cave an Yin.
Rem. — ^The article before the latter noun, in connection with
the preposition a, denotes more particularly or exclusively the
use or destination of the former.
(6.) The preposition a is used between two nouns, the latter
of which serves to describe or designate the former.
A four-wheeled carriage.
The houBe with the green windows.
TJne voiture k qoatre roues.
La moison aux fenfitres vertes.
2d. The prepositions dans and en are both used with reference
to time : dans determines the epoch ; en precedes the period of
time.
I start in a fortnight.
He travelled ten miles in an hour.
11 a fait dix milles en une heure.
VOOABULAIRK 63.
The name.
Le nom.
The will.
La volont^.
The obstacle.
L' obstacle.
The difficulty.
La difficult^.
The ground-
floor.
1 Le res-de-chaus-
S S4$e.
The wheel.
La roue.
The story.
L'dtage.
The ambition.
L'ambition.
To pronounce.
Prononcer {a. v.)
To retain.
Betenir (trr. a, v.)
To undertake.
Entreprendre(trAv.
.) To overcome.
Surmonter (a. v.)
To fill, perform. Eemplir(de),(fl.«.)
To complain.
Seplaindre (ir.r.«.)
Full of.
Plein de.
Filled with.
Rempli de.
Capable of.
Capable de.
Proud of.
Fier de.
Impatient of.
Impatient de.
Weary, tired of. Las de.
Exempt, free
from.
Exempt de.
Exact in.
Exact k.
Easy to.
Ais^k.
Difficult to.
Difficile k.
830
BOIZAKTB^rBOIBlftllS LIE9OV.
Aocastomed to.
Aoooutam^U.
8iibjecito,i^toi
Bnjetk.
Polite to.
Poll enven.
Ready to.
Prct k.
Ridiculous.
Ridicule.
Fit for.
Propre k.
Single.
Seul.
No.
Aucun (ne).
By diQt of.
1 foroe de.
Oa account of.
A cause de.
Above.
AadMHisde.
Below.
Au dessoos de.
Amaltse 63.
1. Bien n^eai plus difficile k garder quHin secret
2. 11 vow sere difficile de le surpMner.
EXEBCICB 63.
1. Croyea-vout que oet houune soit capable de &iie eelal 2.
Je Be pense pas qu'il soit capable de le &ire. 3. Ne troavez-
V0U8 pas qu*il soit fier de son argent f 4. II est fier de son ar-
gent et plein de vanity. 5. Y a-t-il quelqu*an qui soit exempt
de mauz ? 6. Nous sommes tous sujets auz maux de cette vie.
7. Ces dames soDt-elles lasses d'attendre ! 8. Elles sont impa-
tientes de partir. 9. fites-vous accoatum6 au travail ? 10. J'y
suis accoutum6 depuis ma jeunessc. 11. Trouvez-vous que ce
nom soit aise a prononcer! 12. II est aise k prononcer, mais
difficile k retenir. 13. Ce jeune komme est-il poll envers ses
camarades? 14. II est poli envers tout le monde. 15. Est-il
exact a remplir sea devoirs? 16. D est eiyet k les oegliger.
17. Comment 6tes-vous parvenu a faire celaf 18. jy euis par-
venu k force de patience. 19. Combien de temps vous a-t-il fallu
pour le faire? 20. Je Tai fait en deux heures. 21. Quand
comptez-vous partir ? 22. Je partirai dans deux jours.
TutuE 63.
1. This man is full of ambition and very proTid of his fortune.
2. His bead (He has, &c.) is filled with projects, but I do not
think that he is capable of executing a single one. 3. He is im-
patient of undertaking any (une) thing, and ready to abandon it at
SOIXAMTS-^FROISltlfl LB^OK. 381
the first diffiealty that ocgimts. 4. He is not accustomed to over-
come the obstacles be meets with in his way. 5. Such men {De
tels hommes) are not fit for great undertakings. 6. Those words
are easy to pronounce, but difficult to retain. 7. It is very diffi-
cult to perform one's duties under (dans) such circumstances.
8. It is ridiealous to hear you say so. 9. You are apt to com-
plain. 10. I wish you were more polite towards your classmates.
11. There is no obstacle which one cannot overcome by dint of
patience. 12. I live in the house with the green windows. 13.
My room is in (a) the first story. 14. My brother*s room is
above mine. 16. My mother's is on (a) the ground-floor, below
mine. 16. My brother starts in two hours, but I shall not start
to-day on account of the cold. 1 *!. 1 did this exercise in half an
hour. 18. Take this wine bottle to the wine cellar, and bring
me a bottle of wine. 19. We have bought a two-wheeled car-
nage.
DicTfeE 63.
L^Arabe et Man Cheval {stdte).
** Pauvre ami," lui dit-il, " que feras-tu parroi les Turcs ? tu se-
ras emprisonn6 sous les voQtes d'un kan avec les chevaux d'un
aga ou d*un pacha ; les femmes et les enfants ne t'apporteront
plus le lait du chameau, l*orge ou le doura dans le creux de la
main ; tu ne courras plus libre dans le desert, comme le vent
d'£gypte ; tu ne fendras plus du poitrail I'eau du Jourdan qui
rafrafchissait ton poil aussi blanc que ton 6cume ;* qu'au moins,
si je suis esclave, tu restes libre ! Tiens, va, retour ne k la tente
que tu connais ; va dire k ma femme qu'Abou-el-Marsch ne re-
viendra plus, et passe ta tete entre les rideaux de la tente pour
lecher la main de mes petits enfants." En parlant ainsi, Abou*
el-Marsch avait rong^ avec ses dents la corde de poil de ch^vre
qui sert d'entraves aux chevaux arabes, et Paniroal etait libre;
mais voyant son maltre bless^ et enchatn^ a ses pieds, le fidele et
intelligent coursier comprit, avec son instinct, ce qu'aucune langue
ne pouvait lui expliquer; il baissa la t^te, flaira son maitre, et le
aaisiasant avec les dents par la ceintnre de cuir qu'il avait autour
882
BOIZAHTB-QUATBlftia LB9OK.
da corps, il partit an galop et Temporta jusqu'd sea tentea. En
arrivant et en jetant son mattre sur le sable aux pieds de sa
feinroe et de sea enfants, le cbeval expira de fatigue. Tonte la
tribu Ta pleur^ ; les pontes Tont chants, et son nom est constam-
ment dans la bouche des Arabes de Jericho.
(LjLMAnamt Voyage m» OrimU.)
64. SOIXANTE-QUATRlfeME LEQON.
187* To be in rain.
Whatever you may say, no one will
believe yon.
To be accustomed.
To have reason, cause.
To have wherewith.
There is no occasion to.
To know a person by name, by
sight.
To know a person by his gait, his
voice.
To be a judge of.
To possess o. s. of, to seise upon.
To keep from, to refrain from.
I cannot help laughing.
To be late.
To be able to.
To be acquainted with, fitmiliar
with.
To be in the way.
To be comfortable.
To be on good terms with.
To be on bad terms with.
To be of opinion.
To be worth (money).
To incommode ; to trouble ; to
liiuiler.
To inconvenience one's self, to be
under restraint.
To be uneasy (about).
To perceive, to notice.
Avoir beau.
Yous anres bean dire, on ne Tona
croirapas.
Avoir ooutume de.
Avoir sujet de.
Avoir de quoi.
II n'y a pas lieu de.
Connaltre quelqn'un de nom, de
vue.
Ckmnattre qnelqu' un ksa ddmarcho>
k sa voix.
Se oonnattre k or en.
8'emparer de.
8'empecher de.
Je ne puis m*empdcher de rite.
Etre en retard.
£tre en ^tat de, k meme do.
£tre an fkit, an oourant de.
£tre de trop.
fitre k son aise.
fitre bien avec.
£tre brouill^ avec.
fStre d'avis. .
£tre riche de.
Gener.
Se gener.
S*inqui^ter (de).
S'aperoevoir (de).
50IXANT&-QUATHI&MB LE9ON.
333
To be of importance, consequence.
No matter. No matter what.
What does it matter ?
What is that to me ?
To enable any one to.
To acquaint any one with.
To lay the cloth.
To take away the cloth.
To sit down to table.
To take shelter, to shelter (from).
To dress well.
To make one's self comfortable.
To begin to weep, to laugh.
To take a determination.
To take some one's part.
To be pleased with one for s. th.
To stay or remain with one.
This color is fast (will hold).
To be tenacious of one's opinion.
To keep straight, standing.
To abide by.
I am satisfied with your opinion.
To find fault with.
What fault do you find with that?
I find no fSault with it.
To have a grudge against some one.
Whom do you aim at ?
What do I care about it ?
To be the question, the matter.
What is the matter ?
To care for, to be concerned for.
I do not care for that.
To go too slow, to put back (ditto).
My watch is ten minutes too &8t.
I set it ten minutes forward.
To wind up a watch.
To set it.
Importer.
N'impprte. N'importe quo!.
Qu'importe ?
Que m'importe cela ?
Mettre quelqu'un k mSme de.
Mettre quelqu'un an Mt A^^^
Mettre le convert. ^^
Oter le convert.
8e mettre li tablet
Se mettre li Tabri (de).
Se mettre \>ien.
8e mettre k son aise.
Se mettre li pleurer, k rire.
Prendre un parti.
Prendre le parti de quelqu'un.
Savoir bon gr^ li qqn. de qq. ch.
Tenir compagnie li quelqu'un.
Cette couleur tiendra.
Tenir li son opinion.
8e tenir droit, debout.
S'en tenir k.
Je m'en tiens k votre opinion.
Trouver k redire k.
Que tronvez-vous k redire k cela f
Je n'y trouve rien k redire.
En vouloir k quelqu'un.
A qui en vouless-vous ?
Qu'est-ce que cela me £edt?
S'agir de (tmp. v.)
De quoi s'agit-il ?
8e soucier de.
Je ne me sonde pas de cela.
Avancer.
Betarder.
Ma montre avance de dix minutes.
Je I'ai avancde de dix minutes.
Bemonter une mOntre.
La mettre k I'heure.
Th&me 64.
1. Whatever they may say, they will not prevent him from
marrying her. 2. When one has not wherewith to live, he is
S84 BOIZANTX-QUATRltMK LXgOK.
much to be pitied m this world. 8. Tou have no cause to com-
plain. 4. Hiere is no occasion to be nneasj. 5. I know him
by sight 6. As soon as be spoke, I knew (reconnaiire) him
bj bis voice. 7. Are you a judge of painting? 8. You have
taken poesession of my place. 9. I am late ; my watch is fifteen
minutes behind. 10. Do yon think that he is able to do that?
11. He is familiar with that business. 12. When I perceived
that I was in the way, I went away. 18. Are you comfortable ?
14. Be under no restraint 16. Make yourself comfortable. 16.
Are you of my opinion ? 17. Are you on good terms with him ?
18. I have been on bad terms with him for some time. 19. Let
us take shelter from the storm, no matter where. 20. She dresses
well ; she has a good deal of taste. 21. They began to Isug^,
and I could not help laughing too. 22. I am pleased with him
for taking your part 28. He is tenacious of his opinion. 24.
Will you stay with me ? 25. He kept standing while he spoke.
26. Do you find fault with that ? 27. I do not 28. He bears
you ill will. 29. I know it ; what do I care about it ? 80. What
is the matter? 81. I do not know what it is. 82. I do not
care about knowing it
DicrrtK 64.
1j€8 Couleurs Fran^aiseB.
Lord Chesterfield 6tant k Paris dans un cercle dont Voltaire
Caisait partie, semblait regarder les dames avec une attention
particuliere. Voltaire lui dit : ^ Milord, je sais que vous ^tes un
bon juge ; quelles sent les plus belles, les Anglaises on les Fran-
daises ?'' '* Ma foi I" r6pliqua Chesterfield, " je ne suis pas con-
naisseur en peinture." Quelque temps apr^s, Voltaire se tiou-
vant k Londres en compagnie avec Loixl Chesterfield, conversa
longtemps avec une dame extrftmement pl&tree et fard^e. Quand
la conversation fut finie, Chesterfield s'appi'ocha de Voltaire, et,
lui tapant sur I'epaule : " Monsieur," dit il, " prenez garde de vous
laisser captiver." " Milord," r^pliqua Voltaire, " je ne crains pas
d^^tre pris par un vaiseeau anglais qui porte les couleurs fran^ses."
PART FIFTH.
SYNTAX.
Syntax treats of tlie use of words in tbe formation of sentences.
§ LXVI. — Sentences. (See also § xiii. in P. I*)
1. Sentences are of two kinds : simple and compound.
2. A simple sentence contains but one subject and one finite
verb ; as, Life w «Aor^.
3r A compound sentence contains two or more simple senten-
ces combined ; as^ Zt/e, whkh is short, should be well employed,
4. A principal sentence is a sentence wbich makes complete
sense by itself; as, Life should be well employed,
5. A subordinate sentence is a sentence which makes sense
only in connection with another sentence ; as, Life, which is short,
should be well employed.
6. A relative sentence, or clause, is a subordinate sentence in-
troduced by a relative pronoun.
7. A conjunctive sentence, or clause, is a subordinate sentence
introduced by a conjunction.
8. A sentence considered gramatically has as many parts as it
contains words; a sentence considered logically contains only two
parts : the subject and the predicate. In the sentence ; The son
of the consul will send the letter which I gave him, to his father,
who is now in Paris, the logical subject is the son of the consul,
and the logical predicate will send the letter, kc, ; the parts of the
consul, letter, and to his father, are called complements, that is,
words that complete the sense ; which I gave him, is a determina-
tive clause, determining the complement (object) letter, and wh)
is now in Paris, is an explanatory clause.
386
GBHDXB or CBBTAIN NOUNS*
THE NOUN.
§ LXVIL — Gbndkr of certain Nouns*
1. A number of iioods are in one sense maacaline, and in an-
other feminine. The most common are
Aide,
Helper.
Assistanoe.
AigU,
l^\e{ih€bird).
AWH,
Alder.
BU.
Omj^
Two beings Ultimately oonnected.
Two of a sort
Oripe.
Crape.
Pancake.
Lwn,
Book.
Pound.
MmuAe,
Handle.
Sleeve.
Mhnoire.
Memoir; aoooont.
Memory.
Mode.
Mood. «»
Fashion.
Mmde.
Form, mould.
Mussel.
Mmsm.
Cabin-boy.
Foam; moss.
Page,
Page of a prince.
Bigeofabo<^
PoiU,
Stove.
Frying-pan.
PotU.
Post ; station ; employment.
Letter-post
Sourit,
Smile.
Mouse.
Tbir.
Turn.
Tower.
roue.
Veil.
SaiL
2. Delict (delight) and orgue (organ) are used either in the
singular or in the plural, with the same meaning ; in the singo-
lar they are masculine, in the plural, feminine. Amour^ love, is
masculine ; in the plural, it is feminine, when it means a/mours,
8. The feminine nouns couleur nndfoudre become masculine —
the first when it is followed by de and a noun denoting the kind
of color ; as, U couleur de feu : the second when it is used ia a
figurative sense ; as, unfoudre de guerre, a great warrior.
4« Enfant^ a child, is masculine ; when applied to a little girl
it is feminine ; as, C^eet une belle enfant^ die is a p%tty child.
In the plural, it is always masculine.
5. Hymne^ for the church, is feminine ; otherwise masculine.
LXY IL— 1. What to the meaning of aide^ matenllne f Of aide^ feminine f Of aigle
masc. ? Of aigU, fern. ? 8. Of what gender are the noans dMoe and orffuef S. When
do the finninlne noons cauleur ttad/mdre become mMcoIine? 4. What to the fen-
d«rofM^M<f 6. Of AyiiMMf
PLURAL OF CERTAIN NOUNS. 837
6. Quelque chose is masculine when it means something^ and
feminine when it means any thing whatsoever (p. 304, note f ).
V. Gens^ people, is of the masculine gender, but the adjectives
which precede it must be in the feminine, and those which fol-
low it, in the masculine, gender ; as, Les vieilles gens sont soup-
fonneux^ old people are distrustful. Tout^ tel, qtiel, certain, not
immediately preceding gens, are put in the masculine, except
when an adjective comes between them, which has a distinct
feminine termination : Tous ces gens ; tous les hahiles gens ; cer-
tains honnites gens. But : Toutes ces bonnes gens ; quelles gens.
Rem. — The compound nouns gens de lettres, gens d'affaires,
gens de bien, <fec., are not subject to the above rule. /
§ LXVin. — Plural of Certain Nouns.
Compound Nouns,
1. When a noun and an adjective form a compoand noun,
both take the plural ending ; as, Une basse-cour, a poultry-yard ;
des basses-cours,
ExcEP. — Gran^mere, grandmother; grand^messe, high-mass,
have, in the plural, grand'mkres, grand* messes,
2. When two nouns form a compound, both likewise take the
plural ending; as, Un' chef -lieu, a chief place; des chefs-lieux,
3. When a compound noun is formed of two nouns joined by
a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending ; as, Un chef-
d^osuvre, a master-piece ; des chefs-d'oeuvre,
4. In a word composed of a noun and a verb, preposition, or
adverb, the noun only takes the plural ending, provided there is
plurality in the idea; as, Un avant-coureur, a forerunner; des
avant-coureurs,
5. Some compound nouns are written the same in the plural as
6. What to the gender of q%t€iqu6 choBe t 7. In what gender are the adjectives put
that precede the mascallne noun genst State the rale with regard to tout^ tel, qud^
certain, before gens. Are the eompoiind noans gena de lettres^ dsc, subject to the same
rule as genst
LXVIII.— 1. What to the plural of a compound noun, formed of a noun and an ac^jeo-
tive? 2. Of two nouns not separated by a preposition? 8. Of two nouns joined by a
preposition ? 4. Of words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition, or adverb ?
15
338 PLURAL OF CBRTAIK NOUNS.
in the singular; as, Un tite-h-tSUj a conversation between twc per-
sons ; des Ute-h'Ute ; un essuie-mains^ a towel ; des essuie-mains ;
un pcLsse-partout, a master-key ; des passe-partout In the first
example, tits does not admit the idea of plurality ; in the second,
main is always in the plural, because it is something to wipe the
hands with ; in the third, passe is a verb, and partout^ an adverb,
two parts of speech which cannot take the plural ending.
Proper Nouns^ Fordgn Nouns^ itc.
6. Proper names of persons are not changed ; as, les deux
ComeUle^ the two Corneilles.
7. When the name of a person is used to denote a class of in-
dividuals, it becomes a common noun, and may take the plural
ending ; as, La France a eu ses Cesars et ses PompSes, France
has had its Cadsars and Pompeys.
Rem. 1. — The article les is sometimes used before the names
of celebrated individualn, for the sake of emphasis ; the name,
however, is not changed ; as, les Bacine, les Comeille^ <fec.
Rem. 2. — ^The article les is sometimes used before celebrated
names denoting a family or race : in this case the name takes
the plural ending ; as, les Bourbons^ les Stuarts,
8. Nouns adopted into French from foreign languages, gener-
ally take the plural ending; as, des albums, des operas, des pa-
noramas, des pianos, des solos, (&;c. Some are written the same
in the plural as in the singular ; as, des maximum, des post-
scriptum, des in-folio, &c.
9. Verbs, the invariable parts of speech, and the letters of the
alphabet, when used as nouns, are written the same in the plural
as in the singular ; as, les pourquoi, les on-dit, les a, <&rc.
10. Many nouns are not used in the plural : the names of
metals considered in themselves, the names of virtues and vices,
and some abstract names, such as youth, beauty, dec.
6. How Ib tite-d-tUe written in the plaral? EMuis-mains f Passe-partout t T.
When do proper names of persons take the plural ending? 8. Do the noons aU>um^
opira^ take the plural ending? Do the nouns maoflmum^ in-JbUo, take the plural end-
ing? 9. Do verbs and the invariable parts of speech Uke the plural ending? 10. What
nouns are not used in the plural ?
PLACE OF K0UN8. 839
11. The following nouns have no singalar in the sense here
given :
Arrhea, earnest money. Fum^aUlmf betrothing.
Annales^ annals. HinSraiUes, funeral.
AppaSf charms. Frait^ expenses, costs.
ArrirageBy arrears. Oaga, wages.
Arrits {itre aux), to be under arrest. Oeru, people.
Afsisesj assizes. Lunettes, spectacles.
BrouasaUUsj brushwood. MosurSy manners.
CcUacombes, catacombs. MouchdUSy snuffers.
Ciaeaux, scissors. PierrerieSf jewels, diamonds.
Ckmfina, confines. Pincdtes, tongs.
DenrSeSy vtvrety provisions. PleurSy tears. *
DScombreSf ruins. Semailleaj seedlng-time.
MrermeSf new year's presents. Tindbres, darkness.
IhwirorUf alentourSf environs. ThnaUUsy pincers.
JSntravetf difficulties. VUrauXy window-glass.
§ LXIX. — Plack of Nouns.
1. As a general rule, the noan, used as subject, precedes the
verb, but sometimes it is more elegantly placed after it. This is
often the case in a relative sentence, when the object of the verb
is either ae, qtte, or /«, or when the sentence is introduced by oik
and the verb is used intransitively ; as, Ce que pense le phihsophe
n'est pas toujours ce que diete la raieon, what the philosopher
thinks is not always what reason dictates.
2. The subject is placed after the verb, in the incidental phrase,
by which we state that we relate the words of another; as,
Heureux^ disait Mentor ^ lepeuple qui est conduit par un sage roi,
happy, said Mentor, the people who are governed by a wise king.
3. In an interrogative sentence, the noun subject is placed be-
foie the verb (P. II. 12, a). But when the sentence begins with
one of the following words : 06, que, combien, quand (P. II. 12, 6),
the noun subject may be placed before or after the verb.
11. Are there any noans which have no singular? Naofie soofie of them.
LXIX.— 1. When is the noun, naed as aabject, more elegantly pinoed after the verb
than before It? 2. In what kind of phrase is the nonn Babje(;t placed after* the verb?
8. Where is the noun generally placed in an interntgative sentence? Wtien may the
nonn subject in an interrogatiye sentence be placed after the yerb ?
840 ARTICLK BEFORE COMMON NOUNS.
4. The noun nsed as complement (object), stands after the
word to which it belongs.
5. When two nouns accompany a verb, the one as the direct,
and the other as an indirect, complement, the shorter is placed
first ; and when they are of equal length, the direct complement
must precede the indirect; as, J^enverrai Us livres a votrefrere ;
fenverrai h votrefrere lee livree quHl nCa demandee.
6. The indirect complement must precede the direct comple-
ment, when the meaning would otherwise be doubtful ; as, Td-
chez de ramener par la douceur ces esprits Spares, try to bring
back by mildness those erring spirits.
THE ARTICLK
§ LXX. — Use of the Article before Common Nouns.
1. The article is used before all common nouns employed in a
general or a particular sense ; as, Dieu a crii le del et la terre,
God created heaven and earth. Ze« femmee regnent et lee hom-
tnes ffouvementy women reign and men rule. La nature est par-
tout la mime, nature is everywhere the same. La vie de Vhomme
est courtCy the life of man is short L^automne est plus agreahle
que Vkiver, autumn is more pleasant than winter. Le mois der-
nier, last month. La semaine prochaine, next week.
2. The article, combined with the preposition de (P. IL 68, a), is
used before nouns taken in a partitive sense ; as, du papier, some
paper ; des plumes, some pens.
EzcEP. — The preposition de alone is used —
(1.) When the noun is preceded by an adjective; unless the
adjective and the noun are so closely connected in sense as to
form a compound noun. Thus : de bon papier, de bonnes plumes;
4 What is the pisoe of the noan used as oomplement? 6. When two nonns aooom-
IMU17 a verb, the one as the direct, the other as an indirect, complement, which most
be placed first? & Mast not sometimes the indirect complement be placed first, to
avoid ambiguity?
LXX.— 1. In what sense is a common noan used, when it is preceded by the article?
S. Is the article nsed before nouns taken in a partitive sense? What is the first excep-
tion to this rule ? Should we say desjeune$ gens or dejeunea gens t Why deajeunet
genat
ARTICLE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS. 341
but : des jeunes gem, dea grands hommes, young people, great
men, being equivalent to compound nouns.
(2.) When the noun is taken in a negative sense ; as, Je ne
vous/erai pas de reproches^ I will not make you any reproaches.
But the noun is not used in a negative sense in the following
sentence : Je ne vous ferai pas des reproches frivoles, because it
does not mean no reproaches, but no reproaches that are frivolous.
(3.) When the noun is governed by the preposition de, as the
indirect complement of a preceding word ; as, fai hesoin de pa-
pier, une quantite de papier^ heaucoup de papier. The article is,
however, used after la plupart, the most ; bien, many, and infi-
niment, infinitely ; as, La plupart des hommes^ most men. Bien
de la peine, much trouble.
Rem. — When a noun is limited by an adjunct or a relative
sentence, it is not used in a partitive sense, and of course the
above rules do not apply to it. Thus : Une table du marhre de
cette carriere. Un grand nombre des personnes qtiefai vties,
3. The article is put before all words used as nouns ; as, le
boire et le manger ; le beau ; le pourquoi du pourquoi,
4. The article is used, instead of the possessive adjectives, be-
fore the parts of the body and the qualities of the mind ; only,
however, when the sense clearly indicates the relation between
them and their possessor ; as, II s^ est fait mal a la main, he hurt
his hand. II se fatigue Vesprit, he wearies his mind.
5. The article is used before the unit of weight and measure
by which any thing is bought or sold ; and before fractional
quantities when their sense is limited ; as, vingt sous la livre, la
verge, twenty cents a pound, a yard ; la moitie des marchandises,
one half of the goods.
6. The article is not used before nouns placed in apposition
with, or explanatory of, other preceding nouns ; as, Louis qua*
What is the second exception to the rule? What to the third exception to the rule f
Is the article used before tiie nonn that follows one of tiiese tlyee words : la plupart^
bien^ injlniment f & Is the article used before verbs, adjectives, and prepositions,
when tliey are employed as nouns? 4. How is the article a.Hed before the parts of the
body and the qnallties of the mind ? 6. How do you say in French, ttoenty centa a
pound t one half of the goods f State tlie rule. ft. Is the article used before nouna
placed in appoeiti >n.
342 ARTIOUE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS.
tone, fih de Louis treiu^ Louis the fourteenth, the son of Louis
the thirteenth.
7. The article is not used before nouns employed in a vague
sense, to qualify or describe preceding nouns ; as, un^ maison en
bote, a wooden house; un mattre de danee, a dancing-master;
une eaUe a VMnger^ a dining-room ; un bateau a vapeur, a steam-
boat ; un moulin a vent, a windmill ; une bouteilk h vin^ a wine-
bottle ; un homme d eheveux blancs, a man with white hair.
8. The article is, however, used before the noun of designa-
tion and before the noun stating the destination or use of an ob-
ject, when their sense is limited, or when the object and its con-
tents are to be expressed ; a^ Vhomme aux eheveux blancs, the
man with the white hair. Le marche au foin, the hay-market
La bouteille au vin, the bottle with the wine.
9. The article is not used after the preposition en and the con-
junction nt, before a noun taken in an indeterminate sense ; as,
// est en ville, U va en voiture, II n^a ni argent ni amis,
10. The article is not used before a noun preceded by a prep-
osition, and forming with it an adverbial phrase ; as, avec andtie^
par intirit,
11. The article is omitted before plus and moinSy standing at
the head of a sentence ; as, Plu^ il est riehe, mains il est content,
the richer he is, the less he is satisfied.
12. The article precedes jdus, moins, mieux, when they are
used to express comparison in the highest degree, and also to ex-
press a quality carried to the highest degree, without comparison.
In the latter case, the article is invariable. Thus : JSUe est la
plus affligee de toutes ces dames, she is the most grieved of all
those ladies. Elk ne pleure pas lors mime qu'elle est le plus
affligeey she does not weep, even when she is most grieved.
13. The article is omitted in proverbial expressions and in a
rapid enumeration of individuals, to give more force to the dic-
7, 8. — How do yoQ My in French, a man with tohits hairf the man with the whits
htiir t a wiw-battle t the bottle with the wine t 9. Ib the article ased after en and ni^
before nouns taken in an indeterminate sens^? 10. Is the article used In adverbial
phrasce? 11. How do you say in Fren.h, The richer he »*, the few he is satiajled t
12. When is toe article invariable before plue, moine^ mieuat
ARTICLE BEFORE PROPER NOUNS. 343
tion ; as, Contentement pa^se richesse^ contentment is better than
riches. Citoj/ens, etrangers, amis^ ennemiSj tons le reverent^ citi-
zens, strangers, friends, enemies, all reverence him.
14. The article is omitted in a number of idioms formed of a
verb and a noun, expressing together but one idea. See § Ixxiii.
§ LXXI. — Use of the Article before Proper Nouns.
1. The article is not used before proper names of persons and
places, but it is used before proper names of countries, prov-
inces, seas, rivers, and mountains ; as, La France est homie au
midi par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee^ France is bounded on
the south by the Pyrenees and the Mediterranean.
2. The article is not used before the name of a country pre-
ceded by the preposition de^ after names of dignity, or when the
name of a country serves to qualify a preceding noun ; as, ^ rot
de Prusse, du vin de France^ dufromage d* AngUterre,
3. The article is not used before the name of a country pre-
ceded by de, in the sense of from ; as, il vient de France, he
comes from France.
Rem. — ^The article is used, in connection with the preposition
de, before the name of a country, when it is applied to the whole
of its extent ; as, la capitale de la France ; le sud de la France,
4. The article is not used before the names of countries pre-
ceded by en; as, ew France, en Angleterre,
6. The article is not used before a country that has taken its
name from some city ; as, Naples est un pays delidevLx, Naples
IS a delightful country.
6. A few names of cities are preceded by the article, among
18. Is not the article frequently omitted in proverbial expreesions and in a rapid enn-
meration of individaala, and why?
LXXI. — 1. Before what proper noans is the article need ? 2. Is it used before the
names of coontries preceded by the preposition £f«, after names of dignity, or when the
name of a country is joined to a preceding noun to qualify it? 8. Is the article used
before the name of a country preceded by de in the sense of fromt When is the arti-
cle used in connection with de before the name of a countiy ? 4. Is the article used
before the name of a country preceded by eii t 5. Before the names of which countries
is the article not u^ed ? 6. Are there any names of cities before which the article itr
usedf
844 PLACB OF THE ARTICLE.
which are, le Havre, Havre ; la Haye, the Hague ; la NbuvelU
Orleans, New Orleans.
7. The article is used before proper names of persons, pre-
ceded by a title or an adjective ; as, le president Jackson, le doc-'
teur Francois, le petit Henri.
§ LXXIL — REFETmoN and Place of the Article.
1. The article is repeated before every noun, and before every
adjective with which a noun is understood ; as, Le cosur, V esprit.
Us moeurs, tout gagn/s d la culture, the heart, the mind, the man-
ners, every thing improves by cultivation. L^histoire ancienne et
la modems, ancient and modem history. Le premier et le second
Stage, the first and second stories.
2. The article is not repeated when two or more adjectives
qualify the same object ; as, Le sage et pieux Fenelon, the wise
and pious Fenelon.
3. The article is repeated before plus, moins, mieux, qualifying
a succession of adjectives in the superlative degree ; as, Lhonime
le plus prudent et le plus fidele, the most prudent and faithful
man.
4. The article is not repeated before the latter of two nouns,
separated by ou, when it is but a different name applied to the
same object as the former ; as, Les palatius ou gouverneurs des
provinces, the palatines or governors of provinces.
5. The place of the article is before the noun ; when the noun
is preceded by an adjective, the article stands before the adjec-
tive. The adjective tout, however, and the words m^msieur, ma-
dams, monseigneur, are exceptions to the rule. The article is
placed between them and the noun ; as, tout le monde, monsieur
le president, madamc la comtesse, monseigneur rSvique.
7. When is the article used helbre proper names of persons?
LXXIL — 1. Is the article repeated hefore each noun ? Is it repeated before each ad-
jective with which a noan is understood ? 2. Is it repeated before two adjectives qaal-
ifying the same noan ? 8. Is it repeated before two or more adjectives qnalifying the
same noan, when they are preceded by pluA, moins t 4. Is it correct to say la gourd^
ou la piastre, for the dollar t 5. Where is the article placed with tout^ motMiour^ &o.
QUALIFTING ADJECTIVES.
345
§ LXXIII. — Idioms in which the Article is omitted.
Ajonderfoi, to give faith.
Avoir beaom^ to have need.
Avcir chaud, to be warm.
Avoir coutumej to be accustomed.
Avoir desaein, to intend.
Avoir diqnUe^ to have difficulties.
Avoir envie, to wish, to desire.
Avoir ajyoStUf to have an appetite.
Avoir /aim, to be hungry.
Avoir froidf to be cold.
Avoir honUy to be ashamed.
Avoir maly to have a pain.
Avoir patience, to have patience.
Avoir peur, to be afraid.
Avoir pUiS, to take pity.
Avoir raiaon, to be right.
Avoir sommeil, to be sleepy.
Avoir totf, to be thirsty.
Avoir toirtf to take care.
Avoir mjd, to have reason.
Avoir tort, to be wrong.
Ckerekerfortune, to seek one's fortune.
OMrir riaque^ to run the risk.
Danander Justice, to demand justice.
Ihmander jxtrdon, to beg pardon.
Dormer avis, f aire part, to inform.
Entendre raiUerie, to bear jokes.
Faire attention, to pay attention.
Faire bonne chere, to live well.
Faire eridit, to give credit.
Faire envie, to excite envy.
Faire honneur, to honor.
Faire horreur, to inspire horror.
fhirepeur, to frighten.
Faire mention^ to mention.
Faire naufrage^ to suffer shipwreck.
Faire place, to make room.
Faxreplamr, to oblige.
Faire present, to present.
Faire rkfiexkn, to reflect.
Faire tort, to injure.
Mettrefin, to put an end.
Meltre ordre, to arrange.
Perdre courage, to lose courage.
Porter envie, to envy.
Porter nudheur, to cause misfortune.
Prendre eongi, to take leave.
Prendre ftu, to catch fire.
Prendre garde, to take care.
Prendre haleine, to take breath.
Prendre mSdeane, to take medicine.
Prendre radne, to take root.
Rendre compte, to account.
Bendre justice, to render justice.
Rendre service, to oblige.
Rendre visile, to visit.
linir con^pagnie, to accompany.
Tenir Ueu, to take the place.
Tenir parole, to keep one's word.
Trouver moyen, to find means.
QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES.
LXXIV. — Agreement.
1. An adje6tive qualifying two nouns in the singular is put in
the plural ; if the nouns are of different genders, the adjective is
put in the masculine plural (49, d).
LXXIV. — 1. How does an a4j0<'tive, qoaiuying two noans in the singolar, agree
with them ? How, when the noans we of different genders ?
16«
846 PLACK OF THX'ASJBOTIYK.
2. When the nouns are synonymous, or when they are placed
as a climax, the adjective agrees with the last noun ; a&, Sa vie
fCest qu*un travail^ qu'une occupation continuelley his life is noth-
ing but continual labor and occupation. Lefer^ le bandeau^ la
Jlamnie eat toute prite^ the sword, the band, the flame, are all
ready.
3. An adjective following two nouns connected by ou^ agrees
with the last ; as, Uh courage ou une prudence etonnante, an as-
tonishing prudence or courage.
4. The adjective /i?tt, late, deceased, placed immediately before
the noun, agrees with it ; when separated from it, by the article
or a possessive adjective, it is invariable ; as, la feue reine^ the
late queen ; feu la reine, the deceased queen.
5. The adjectives nu, bare, and demi, hal( are invariable when
they precede the noun, and agree with it when they follow it ;
as, nu'tite, la tite nue, bare-headed ; une demi-heure, une heure
et deinie.
Rem. — The rule applies to nu only before cou, tSie^ bras, pieds^
jambes,
6. The adjectives excepts^ except ; supposS^ supposed ; passe^
past; y>compm, including; ct^otn/, annexed ; ct-tnr/u«, inclosed ;
franc-de-port^ postage free, follow the^same rule (5); as, excepte
mei amis^ mes amis exceptis ; passe eette heure, cette heure pas-
sSe ; drinclus copie de ma (ettrej les lettres d-incluses ; d-joint la
eopie, la copie ci-jointe,
7. Adjectives used adverbially are invariable; as, Ces livres
coiktent cheTf those books cost dear. Cesfleurs sentent 6on, those
flowers smell good.
§ LXXV. — Place of the Adjective.
1. The adjective is generally placed after the noun (P. 11. 68).
2. How does the adjective agree when placed after two noons that are synonymous?
4. What is the role with regard to the -tdjective feu f 6. With regard to the a4)ectivefl
nu and dami t & What other adjectives fgllow the same rale ?
LXXY.— 1. Are adjectives generally placed before or after the noun I Wliich ad-
fectives are placed before the nonn ? (P. II. 52, a and b.)
GOVERNMENT OF ADJEOTIVSS.
347
2. List of adjectives having a different meaning, according as
they precede or follow the noun.
Un bon hommej a simple man.
Un brave homme, a worthy man.
Vh certain eonU^ a certain story.
Mon char ami^ my dear friend.
D'une commune voix, unanimously.
Un cruel enfant, a tiresome child.
La demiere annee, the last year (of
a series).
Unefausae def, a false key.
Unfurieux r/wnieur, an excessive liar. '
Un galant komme.j a gentleman.
Un grand homme, a great man.
Le hold ton, a haughty tone.
Un honnite homme, an honest man.
Mauvai» air, awkward appearance.
Un mSchant Uvre, a worthless book.
Du mort bois, worthless wood.
Le nouveau vin, the fresh wine.
Un pauvre homme, a man of little
merit.
Un plaiaant homme, a ridiculous man.
Un petit homme, a small man.
Mapropret mains, my own hands.
Uh teul enfant, a single child.
Un timpU acldat, a private soldier.
Un triste homme, a pitiful man.
Un unique taijeau, a single picture.
Un vikdn homme, an ugly man.
Une vraie histoire, a mere story.
Un homme bon, a kind man.
Un homme brave, a brave man.
Une nouvelle certaine, authentic news.
Une robe chere, an expensive dress.
Une voix commune, an ordinary voice.
Un enfant ertid, a cruel child.
L'annie demiere, last year.
Une deffausse, a wrong key.
Un animal furieux, a furious animal.
Un homme galant, a gallant.
Un homme grand, a tall man.
Le ton haul, a loud tone.
Un homme honnete, a polite man.
L'airmauvaie, malicious appearance.
Un Uvre mSchant, a caustic book.
Du bole mort, dead wood.
Le vin nouveau, the newly made wine.
Un homme pauvre, a poor man.
UnhommepUnmni, an agreeable man.
Un homme petit, a mean man.
Lea mains propres, clean hands.
Un enfant seul, a child alone.
Un soldat simple, arfoolish soldier.
Un homme triste, a sorrowful man.
Un tableau unique, a matchless pic-
ture.
Un homme vilain, a sordid man.
Une histoire vraie, a true history.
§ LXXVL — Government of Adjectives.
1. On this subject, see Lesson 63, 184 ; to which we here add
lists of adjectives with the prepositions they require. Let it,
however, be remembered that adjectives constructed with Hre, as
an impersonal verb, invariably require de before the dependent
infinitive. /
2. What Is the meaning of bon, when placed beft re Its noan ? When placed after tho •
nonnf Of brave t Ac
848
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
2. List of adjectives requiring the preposition de.
Ahtent de, absent from.
Ambiiieux de, ambitious of.
Amoureuz (fe, in love with.
Avide de^ eager for.
ApprochcuU de, approaching, near.
Capable de, capable of.
OiSri tie, beloved by.
OompUce de, accomplice in.
Content de, pleased with.
Curieux de, curious to.
J)hireux de, desirous to, of.
Didttigneux de, disdaining to.
DhoU de, grieved with.
Different de, different from.
Digne de, worthy of, to.
Ermeux de, envious of.
Eloigns de, remote, fax from.
Eadave de, a slave to.
Exempt de, exempt from.
Fdchh de, sorry for.
Fatigui de, tired with, of.
Fier de, proud of.
Fort de, confident in.
Fou de, excessively fond of.
Olorieux de, proud of.
Bbnieux de, ashamed of.
Impatient de, impatient of.
Incapable de, incapable of.
Inconsolable de, inconsolable for
Indigne de, unworthy of.
IndignS de, indignant with.
Inquid de, uneasy about.
Ivre de, intoxicated with.
Las de, weaiy of.
Mecontent de, displeased with.
Parent de, related to.
Plein de, full of.
Bam de, glad to, of.
Rassasii de, satiated with.
Reootmaissant de, grateful for.
RempU de, filled with.
Bedevable de, indebted for.
Soigneux de, careful of, to.
SHar de, sure of.
Surpris de, surprised at.
Tribulttire de, tributary to.
Viciime de, victim to, of.
Vide de, void of.
3. List of adjectives requiring the preposition d.
Accessible a, accessible to.
AccouiumS a, accustomed to.
Adherent d, adhering to.
AgrSable d, agreeable to.
AJustS a, fitted for.
Anterieur d, prior to.
Aise d, easy to.
Ardent a, zealous for.
Assidu d, assiduous to.
AttenUf d, attentive to.
Bon d, good for.
Cher d, dear to.
Conforme d, similar to.
Coniraire a, contrary to.
Crud a, cruel towards.
Dijffiale d, difficult to.«
Endin a, prone to.
Etranger a, a stranger to.
Exact a, exact in.
Fhunle d, easy to.
Favorable a, favorable to.
Formidable a, formidable to.
Fatal a, fatal to.
Importun a, importunate to.
ImpSnitrable d, impenetrable to.
Indispensable d, indispensable to.
IntSressi a, interested in.
Invisible d, invisible to.
LXXVL— 2. What preposition do acyeotives govern that are expressive of our 1
ings • Name some of them.
FOSSSSSIVE ADJECTIVES. 849
Inuntible d, insensible to. Propice d, propitious to.
Naiurd a, natural to. Propre d, fit for.
NSceasaire d, necessary to. Rebelle d, rebellious towards.
Nuisible d, hurtful to. RedoulabU d, formidable to.
OcUeux d, odious to. SemblabU d, similar to.
Potthieur d, posterior to. Sujet d, subject to.
Pr^irable d, preferable to.
4. Adjectives requiring different prepositions.
Bon d, good for, fit for. Ignorant en, not versed in.
Ban pour, good for; kind towards. Indulgent pour ^ indulgent towards.
Calibre pour f par^ celebrated for. Insolent avec, insolent to.
CwU enven, polite to. P6U envert, polite to.
§ LXXVII. — Complement of Two Adjectives.
/ 1, Two adjectives may have but one complement, when both
adjectives require the same preposition ; sis, II est utile et cher a
sa families he is useful and dear to his family.
2. The complement of two adjectives, each requiring a differ-
ent preposition, must be expressed with each adjective ; as, // est
utile d sa famille, et en est chiri, he is useful to his family, and
beloved by them. Because utile requires d, and cheri, de.
DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVES.
§ LXXVIII. — Possessive Adjectives.
1. The possessive adjectives are repeated before each noun ;
as, Mon pere, ma mere et mes sosurs, my father, mother, and sis-
ters.
2. It has been said that the article is used, instead of the pos-
sessive adjectives, before the parts of the body ; if, however, the
a Name some of the adjectives that require the preposition d. 4 What preposition
does the adjective poli reqaire ? JSon f
LXXVII. — t. When two adjectives have the same complement, vriM it do to express
the complement only once? 2. Can yon literally translate the following sentence Into
French, Rie is vs^fvl to, and l>elov€d fry, hie Jiimily t
850 DSM0N8TBATIVK ADJBCTIVBB.
relation between the part and its possessor should not be clearly
indicated by the construction of the sentence, the possessive ad
jective must be used ; as, Je tfois que ma main s*enfie, I see my
hand is swelling.
3. The English expressions, a friend ofmine^ a cousin ofyours^
&c., must be rendered into French by un de mes amis^ un de vos
touHnSj &c. In jocose style, we find sometimes the same con-
struction in French ; as, Un mien cousin est jupe-maire, a cousin
of mine is judge and mayor.
4. The relation between an inanimate possessor and the object
possessed, may be indicated by son, «a, ses, leur, leurs, only when
the inanimate possessor is the subject of the sentence in which
they are used ; as, Viiude a ses ckarmes, study has its charms.
5. The relation of result or consequence, between a dependent
sentence and an object referred tq in a preceding sentence, is ex-
pressed by en ; as, Cette affaire est diiicate, le succes en est dou-
teux, that business is delicate, its success is doubtful. Cette ville
est belle, fen admire les promenades, that city is beautiful, I ad-
mire its walks.
6. Exc. — When the object possessed is preceded by a prepo-
sition, son, sa, ses, leur, leurs may be used, although the inani-
mate possessor, to which they refer, be not the subject of the sen-
tence ; as, Paris est une ville remarquahU, les itrangers admirent
la beaute de ses edifices, Paris is a remarkable city, strangers ad-
mire the elegance of its buildings.
§ LXXIX. — Demonstrative AiJjectives.
The demonstrative adjectives must be repeated before each
noun. (14 and 23.)
LXXVIIL— 2. Can the article in* all cases be need before the parts of the body instead
of the possessive at^ectlye ? 8. How are the expressions, a /riend of min^ Ac, to be
rendered into French f 4, 5. Can sofH «a, «««, Uur^ leura, be used with reference to an
inanimate object, when the possessor is not the subject of the sentence? How do you
aay, in French, the affiair is cMioate^ its 9uoce98 U doub^fidt 0. State the execptloi
to the rnle.
LXXIX.— Are the demonstrative a4Jectives to be repeated beibre each noanf
INDEFINITB ADJECTIVBS. 351
§ LXXX. — Numeral Adjectives, (xx.)
1. The numeral adjective un is used for the English indefinite
article a or an; but the indefinite article is used, in English, in
cases in which its equivalent is not used in French.
2. The French do not use the numeral un before nouns placed
in apposition with, or expianatoiy of, other preceding nouns ; as,
Athalie, tragedie de Hacine, Athalie, a tragedy of Racine. H est
fran^is^ he is a Frenchman.
3. The numeral un is however used before the explanatory-
word, when it is itself qualified or restricted by other words ; as,
Sonphre est un riche negociantj his father is a rich merchant.
4. The numeral un is not placed before a noun used as the
title of a book ; as, Grammaire Frangaise^ A French Grammar.
5. It is not used before a noun qualified by quel; as. Quel
homme! what a man ! (See P. III. xx. 11. P. IV. 109 & 171.)
6. The cardinal number, used to indicate order, is placed after
the noun ; as, Henri quatre, chapitre cinq,
7. The ordinal number generally precedes the noun; as, la
dixieme annee ; but it follows the words livrey chapitre^ article^
&c. ; as, livre troisieme^ chapitre quatrieme^ article cinquieme,
8. The cardinal numbers are used, instead of the ordinal, for
the days of the month. (131.)
§ LXXXL — Indefinite Adjectives.
1. Aucun and nul (no) cannot be used in the plural; except,
however, when they are joined to a noun that has no singular ;
as, aucunes troupes, no troops.
2. Chique must be followed by a noun ; as, Ces volumes coHt-
tent cinq francs chacun (not chaque), those volumes cost five
francs each.
3. Mime is an adjective or an adverb.
LXXX. — 1. How is the English Indefinite article expressed In French ? 2. Is the
numeral un used before noans placed in apposition? 3. When is un used before an
explanatory name? i. What is the French for A French Grammar f fi. What a
numt
LXXXL — ^1. When can auoun and n%^ be used in the plural ? 8. Can ehaque be
nMd without a noun f
852 IHDXnNITB AMBCTIVES.
(1.) Mhne is an adjective when it precedes the noun and means
same^ and when it follows a noun or pronoun in the sense of sel/^
very ; as, le mime homme^ the same man ; Us dieux eux-memeSj
the gods themselves ; ees murt mimes, those very walls,
(2.) Mime is an adverb when it modifies a verb, and when it
has the sense of cUso, which is generally the case, when it follows
two or more nouns : Je vHai pas mime pense a cela, I have not
even thought of that Les animaux, les plantes mime eku'ent au
nombre des divinitis egyptiennes, the animals, also the plants,
were among the Egyptian divinitit^s.
4. Quelque is written iu three ways :
(1.) Followed by a verb, it is written in two words : quel, an
adjective, agreeing with the subject of the verb, and que, a con-
junction ; as, Quelles que soient les lots, il/aut les respecter, what-
ever be the laws, we must respect them.
(2.) Followed by a noun, it is an adjective ; as, Quelques ri-
chesses que vous ayez, whatever wealth you may have.
(3.) Quelque is an adverb when it precedes an adjective or
another adverb; as, Quelque puissants qu'ils soient, however
powerful they may be.
6. Tel, telle, such : un tel komme, une telle femme, Tel may
be separated from the noun it qualifies, by a verb, or a verb and
its subject : Telle est la lot, such is the law. Telle qu'elle est,
such as she is.
Rem. — Such, modifying an adjective, must not be rendered by
tely but by si : Une personne si obligeante, such an obliging person.
6. Tout is a noun, an adjective, or an adverb.
(1.) Tout is a noun when it means the whole, every thing ; as,
Ce fCest pas tout, or le tout, that is not the whole. Tout perit,
every thing perishes.
(2.) Tout is an adjective when it means every, all, whole:
Tout homme peut /aire cela^ every man, any man can do tliHt.
Tous les homm^s, all men, every man. Tout Vhomme^ the whole
8. When is mhne an a4J®otl^'®* When is it an adverb? 4 When is quelqus writ-
ten in two words? When is quelque written in one word ? When is it an H(^ecttve?
When is it an adverb? 5. What is the French for nuch a tcoman, &a? What ia the
French for weK, modifying an a^Jevtive ? ft. When is toxd a noun ?
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 353
man. Tout, every thing, is an adjective when it precedes a de-
monstrative pronoan ; as, tPai tout ce quHl me faut^ I have all I
want.
(3.) Tout is an adverb when it means entirely, quite, however^
although, nothing but. II est tout malade, he is quite sick.
Tout habile quHl est^ however skilful he is. // est tout tele, he
is nothing but zeal.
Rem. — The adverb tout is varied like an adjective, when it
precedes a feminine noun beginning with a consonant or aspirate
h ; as, Elle est toute belle^ she is quite handsome. Toute hardie
qu^elle est, although she is bold.
§ LXXXIL— THE PRONOUN.
1. A pronoun stands in the place of a noun ; but ce, ceci, eela,
en, and the invariable pronoun le, may stand in the place of a
sentence. It is not correct to say : Je vous fais grdce, quoique
vous ne la mSritiez pas (I pardon you, though you do not de-
serve it), because the pronoun la has no antecedent ; the noun
grdce, being used in connection with the verh /aire, has no inde-
pendent meaning, but expresses with the verb one idea, equiva-
lent to pardonner. We may say : Je vous fais grdce, quoique
vous ne le meritiez pas.
2. When a relative clause refers to a preceding sentence, the
demonstrative pronoun ce must be used as the antecedent of the
relative pronoun ; as, II Va bien regu\ ce qui rtCa S tonne, he re-
ceived him well, which astonished me.
§ LXXXIII. — Personal Pronouns.
1. The personal pronouns, used as subjects, are placed before
the verb, except —
(1.) In interrogative sentences; when they are placed after
the verb, in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the
When is tout an afljeetive ? When an adverb f When is the adverb tout varied f
LXXXIL — 1. Which pronouns may stand in the place of a sentence? Is it oorrect
toaay: Je voit9 faia grdoe quoiquo vous tis la m^HHea pas f 2. Can a relative pru-
nonn have a preceding sentence for its antecedent?
854 PXB80NAL PRONOUNS.
participle, in compound tenses. In interrogative sentences begin-
ning with eat-ce yw (101), the subject, however, precedes the verb.
(2.) In ceilain exclamatory sentences ; as, JEst-il crtiel ! Puis-
tieZ'Vous itre keureux /
(»3.) In the incidental proposition, by which we state that we
repeat the words of another. Je ne serai heureux, disait-il,
qu'autant que voiis le serez,
(4.) When the sentence begins with aussi, peut-itre, encore^ ton-
jours, en vat'n, du mains, or au mains. Aussi est-il voire ami. Pent-
itre avez-vous raison. En vain prStendons-nous. We may also
say : Atissi il est voire ami ; peut-etre vous avez raison, &c. ; but
it is more elegant and expressive to put the subject after the verb.
2. The personal pronouns used as complements of verbs are
also placed before the verb (42, 107); except when the v^b, in
the imperative mood, is used affirmatively (102). When, how-
ever, two verbs in the imperative mood are connected by et or
ow, the pronoun object of the latter verb may precede or follow
it; as, Pretez le-moi ou me le vendez, or vendez-le-moi,
3. When a verb is governed in the infinitive by another verb,
the pronoun which is the complement of the infinitive, may be
placed before the first verb. We may say : je viens vous cher-
cher, ovje vous vienhchercher, (P. IV,. 104.)
4. Pronouns preceded by prepositions are placed after the
verb ; as, il parle de vous ; je m'adresse a ellc,
5. The disjunctive pronouns moi^ ioi, lui, elle^ &c, (xxii. 7), are
used only with reference to persons.
6. They are used to represent the indirect object of the veib,
when the direct object is a pronoun in the first or second person ;
as, R nous a recommandes a lui, he recommended us to him.
LXXXIIL— 1. When Is the pronoun snbject placed after the verb, in the first place?
When Is it placed after the verb, in the second place? In the third? In the fourth?
2. Where are the personal pronouns placed when they are used as ooinplements ?
Where are they placed when the verb is in the imperative mood? How may they be
placed with two verbs in the imperative mood, connected hy et or out 8. Where may
the objective pnmoun be placed, that is governed by an infinitive preceded by tmntber
verb? 4. Where are pronouns placed that are preceded by prepositions ? ft. Are the
disjunctive pronouns, mot, tai, Ac., used with reference to things? 6. Which pronouns
are used to represent the indirect object of a verb, whose direct object is a pronoun in
the first or second person?
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 855
*J. The disjunctive pronouns, preceded by a preposition, are
used with the neuter verbs aller^ courir, venir^ penser^ <fec. ; and
with reflective verbs, to represent the indirect object, when it is
a person ; 9&^je cours a elle ; je m^adresse a vovs (162).
8. They are used when they are separated from the verb, and
when the verb is not expressed ; as, Eux^ qui sont nos amis, nous
assisterontj they, wl^o are our friends, will assist us. Fas moi^
not I ; ni lui non plus^ nor he either.
9. They are often used for emphasis, and in exclamations ; as,
Je le dis, moi, I do say so. Moi, y aller / I go there !
10. They are also used to state, separately, the persons forming
a compound subject or object ; as, Lui et moiy nous irons, Je
vous appelle, vous et lui,
11. The pronoun en or y is used to represent the indirect ob-
ject, when it is not a person ; en, to express the relation of the
preposition de, and y, to express the relation of the preposition
a. Ne viCen parlez-vous. Faites-y attention,
12. The pronoun se has sometimes a reflective, and sometimes
a reciprocal meaning; as, lis se trompent, they are mistaken.
lis se trompent (les uns les autres), they deceive each other.
13. The pronoun soi is used only with reference to an indefi-
nite subject ; as, On a souvent hesoin (Tun plus petit que soi, we
have often need of one more humble than ourselves.
14. The personal pronouns, used as subjects, are generally re-
peated with each verb. They may, however, be omitted before
the second and succeeding verbs, when the verbs, connected by
et, ou, ni, mats, are all in the same tense, and all used either af-
firmatively or negatively. We may pay, U etudie et fait des
progres, or // etudie et il fait des progres.
15. The personal pronouns used as objects, must be repeated
7. Which pronouns are used with the neater verbs, alter, courir, venir, penner,
Ac? Which pronouns are a»ed to reprei<ent the Indirect object of a reflective verb
when It is a person? 8. Which pronouns are used when the verb is not expressed?
9, 10— In what two other cases are the disjunctive prononns often use<1? 11. Which
pronoun is used to represent the Indirect object, when it is not a person, expre^sinsr the
rehition of xhn prepitsit.on ojf Of the pre|>osition tt>f 12. State the different mean-
ings of the pronoun M. 18. How is tiie pronoun 8oi used ? 14. Are tl e persona) pro-
nouns used as subjects to be repeated with each verb? When may they be omitted
before the second and succeeding verbs ?
366 DKHONSTRATIVS PRONOUNS.
with each verb, when the verbs are in one of the simple tenses.
But when all the verbs are in the same compound tense, and
all govern the object in the same manner, the pronoun and
auxiliary verb may both be omitted ; as. Nous leg avons atta-
ques et les avons vaincua, or Nous les avons attaques et vaincus.
16. The pronouns are placed in the following order, when
the direct and indirect objects come together before the verb :
me le^ te U, nous /e, vous le, U luiy le leur, nCtn, fen, nous en^
vous en, lui en, leur en, m^p, fy, nous y, vous y, Ty, lui y, y en.
17. After a verb in the imperative mood, used a£Srmatively :
le-moi, le-luiy nCen, lui en, y-moi^ yioi.
Rem. — Instead of saying, envoyez-y-moi, &c^ it is better to
say, envoyez-moi Id.
§ LXXXIV. — P088E88IVB Pronouns.
1. The possessive pronouns must relate to a noun previously
expressed, with which they agree in gender and number.
2. The possessive pronouns are sometimes used substantively ;
as, Chacun veui le sien, everybody wishes his own. Les ndires
se sont bien hattus, ours fought bravely.
3. ifine, thine, &c., after the verb to be^ are often rendered by
h tnoi^ a toi, <fec. Ce livre eat a tnoi, that book is mine.
4. An acquaintance of mine, une de mes connaissances.
§ LXXXV. — Demonstrative Pronouns.
1. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, ceux,celle, celles, express
an indefinite idea, which must be limited by an indirect comple-
ment, or a relative clause ; as, Les defauts de Henri quatre Sfai-
ent ceux d'un homme aimable, the faults of Henry the Fourth
were those of an amiable man. Ceux qui font dea keureux sont
15. Are the pronoans, used as objects, to be repeated with each verb ? 16. In what or-
der are the pronouns placed when the direct and indirect objects come together before
the verb • 17. After a verb in the imperative mood, used afSmiatively ?
LXXXIV. — ^1. How are the poesestiive pronouns used? 2. Are they ever used sub-
stantively f 8. Are ihe Englluh pronouns, niine^ thin^, «&c., not frequently transilateii by
d moi^ dtoi^Ac? 4. What is the French for : an acquaintanee of mine t
LXXXV.— 1. What do the demonstrative pronouns, celui^ ceUe^ &G., express, and
how must they be limited?
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 35)
les vrais conquerantSy those who make people happy are true
conquerors.
2. Celiii-ciy celle^i, ceci, are used to designate objects that are
near to us; celui-ldj celle-ld, cela, those that are far from us.
Celui-ciy celle-ciy celui-la, ceHe-lOj relate to nouns that have been
previously expressed. Cfect, cela^ are used absolutely.
3. Celui-ci, celle-ci, <fec., refer to the last mentioned, celui-ld,
celle-la, &c., to the first mentioned, of two objects ; as, Le corps
peril et Pdme est immortelle, cependant on neglige celle-ci, et tous
les soins sont pour celui-ld, the body perishes and the soul is im-
mortal, and yet we neglect the latter, and all our cares are for
the former.
4. The demonstrative pronoun ce is used as the subject of the
verb Hre^ in the sense of that person or that thing ; as, c'est mon
frere ; c^est mon livre (P. IV. 100).
5. Ce is used before Hre^ instead of ily ils, elle^ elles^ when Ure
is followed by a noun, or a word standing in the place of a noun ;
as, Je lis La Fontaine ; c^est mon auteur favori, I read La Fon-
taine; he is my favorite author. Prenez ce livre; c^est le meH"
leur.
6. Ce is used as the subject of etre with reference to something
preceding : Ce rCest jxis ainsi, it is not so. C^est hien,
1. Ce is used before itre, standing between two infinitives ; as,
Faire au hien aux hommeSy c'est rendre hommage d Dieu, (179,
Rem. 3.)
8. Ce is used after two or more infinitives, and after an attrib-
utive clause of some length ; as, Boire, manger^ dormir^ c'est tout
ce quHlfait, Le plus s(kr moyen d' avoir des amis, c'est d'etre bon
et obligeant,
9. When ce, followed by a relative pronoun, begins a sentence,
8. What do celui-oi^ edi«-ci, etfci, designate? Oelui-ld, csO&'ld, celaf 8. Which
refer to the latter, and which to the former, of two previoasly mentioned objects? 4.
In what sense is ce ased as the sabject of itre in &Mt mon frire f oV«f mon livre f
5l When is ce before Ure used instead of i^ ile^ elle, elleaf 6. What does ce refer to,
in ce rt'eet pas aiwtit 7. What is the rale for the use of ce in Obliger sea iimin, c'est
obUffer sot-mime t 8. Give an example of the use of ce after two or more iiiflnitiTes.
9. When ce^ followed by a relative pronoan, begins a sentence, iiinst it be repeated be*
tflN the next yerbf
858 RBLATITB PRONOUNS.
it is to be repeated before the verb of the second proposition, if
that verb is itre ; as, Ce qui est certain^ c^est que le mande est de
travefs^ what is certain, is that the world is wrong.
Rem. 1. — (7e, in this case, is not used before Hre followed by
an adjective ; and may be used or omitted when Hre is followed
by a noun in the singular.
Kbm. 2. — Ce and que^ separated by itre and some quality that
refers to the noun following que, are used to express a simple
proposition with much energy ; as, C^est un beau sefour que Pa-
ris, Paris is a fine place to live in.
§ LXXXVL — Rblativb Pronouns, (xxv.)
1. A relative pronoun is always of the same gender, number,
and person as its antecedent : moi qui suis estime ; vous qui ites
estime ; nous qui sommes estimes.
Rem. — We say : ^ous sommes deux qui avons ete recompenses,
the relative pronoun having for its antecedent the pronoun nous.
But if the adjective deva, in the same sentence, were preceded
by the article, the adjective would be used substantively, and
would then be the antecedent of the relative ; as, Nous sommes
Us deux qui ont ete recompenses,
2. The relative pronouns qui, que, dont, are placed immediate-
ly after their antecedent ; as, Le monsieur qui doit nous accom-
pawner, est-il venu ? has the gentleman come who is to accom-
pany ust
3. The relative dont must be followed by the subject of the
next verb ; as, C^est un komnu dont la prMti est connue, he is
a man whose probity is known.
4. Whose, followed by a noun governed by a preposition,
must be expressed by ditquel, de laquelle, &c. ; as, L'homme sur
Is <M, In this case, to be repeated when itr^ is followed by an a^Jeotlve?
LXXXYI. — ^How mast a relatWe pronoan agree in gender, nnnaber, nnd person? Gso
it agree with an ac^octive? Does it agree with an adjective preceded by the article?
fi. Where are the relative pron4»an8 gui, gu«, dont^ placed in the sentence? 8. What
part of the sentence must follow the relative pronoun dontf 4. Huw most tcA«M be
expressed when followed by a noun that is governed by n preposition ?
INDEFINITE PBONOUNS. 859
la probite duquel on pent compter^ the man on whose probity one
may rely.
5. Lequely duquel, <fec., are used instead of qui, que, dont, to
avoid ambiguity. Thus : J^ai vu le mart de votre soeur, lequel
(instead of qui) viendra me voir, I have seen your sister's husband,
who will come to see me. Je dots reeevoir uns lettre de mes en-
fants laquelk (instead of qu>e) f attends avec impatience, I am to
receive from ray children a letter which I expect with impatience.
La bonte de M. votre pere de laquelle (instead of dont) fai eprou-
ve Veffet, the kindness of your father, the eflfect of which I have
experienced.
6. Rem. — Dont, cPoii — dont expresses simply relation; d*oii
adds an idea of locality to it ; as, Za famille dont elle descend,
the family from which she descends. L'endroit (Toil il vient, the
place from which he comes.
§ LXXXVII. — Indefinite Pronouns.
1. The indefinite pronouns, when used absolutely, apply only
to persons, and are of the masculine gender.
2. Autrui, others, is used only as an indirect complement :
Vivre aux depens d^ autrui, to live at the expense of others.
3. Chacun, each one, every one, placed between the verb and
its object, does not govern the possessive adjective that follows :
lis ont donne chacun leur avis ; leur refers to ils. But when
chacun is placed after the object of the verb, the possessive ad-
jective that follows refers to it : Ils ont apporte leurs offrandes,
chacun selon ses mxyyens.
4. Chacun, used relatively, may refer to pei-sons or to things,
and agrees with the noun in gender : Chacune de ces dames, Ces
volumes content dnq francs chacun.
6. On, they, people, is used only as the subject of a verb,
which agrees with it in the singular. It is to be repeated before
6. In what case are lequeH^ duquel, 4ec, to be used for gui^ gue^ dont t 6. What is
the difference between dont and cTou t
LXXXYIL— 1. Of what gender are the indefinite prononns when they are used ab-
Bolntely ? 2. How is aiUrui ascd ? 8. When does the posaeaaive adjeottre that follows
tihetcwn refer to cAact»», and when does it not?
860 INDBFIKITE PRONOUNS.
each verb that refers to the same subject, but must not be used
in the same sentence with reference to different parties. Instead
of saying : On n^esiime guere que les qualites qtCon admire en
nous, say : Nous fCestimons gtUre^ <fec., we only esteem much
those qualities which people admire in us.
6. After et^ n, ou^ que^ and ^tit, P is used, for euphony, before
on ; but not when immediately followed by le^ la^ les, lui. Thus :
et Pon dit, and it is said ; et onle dit, and they say so.
7. Although on is masculine singular, the adjective which re-
fers to it, must be feminine or plural, when the sense absolutely
requires it; as, Majille, on n^estpas toujours jeune et belle. Au-
jounThui on est amis et demain rivaux,
8. Personne, no one, requires ne before the verb : // n'y a per-
Sonne qui n^en soit/dchij there is no one that is not sorry for it.
9. Personne is sometimes used for quelqu^un in phrases that
express uncertainty ; as, Personne a-t-il jamais raconte plus nai-
vement que La Fontaine ?
Rem. — Personne, a person, is a noun of the feminine gender :
La personne que vous avez vue.
10. Quelqii^un, somebody, used relatively, changes for gender
and number ; as, quelqu^une de ces dames ; quelques-uns de ces
messieurs.
11. Quiconque, whoever, is always singular: Quiconque flatte
ses maitres, Us trahit. When applied to females, the adjective
must agree with it in the feminine : Mesdames, quiconque de
vous sera assez hardie,
12. L*un r autre, fem. Vune Vautre, one another, each other,
must be in the plural, when they refer to more than two objects :
MiUe soldats s*excitent les una les autres au combat.
13. Lun et P autre, both ; ni Punni P autre, neither, agree in
gender and number with the nouns which they represent. When
the nouns are of different genders, they are masculine : J^attends
mjonfrhre et wa sosur, ni Pun ni P autre ne viennent.
6. How Is on iM«dr 6. What is used before on after et,9i^ou, que, quit 7. Can the
adjective which refers to on be feminine or plural ? 9. How is penonns used? lOi
How is guelqu^un need? 11. What is the meaaing of quiconque f 18. What is the
meuAngotPunrawtref 18. OttwietVautref
THE VERB AND ITS SUBJECT. 861
14. Tely fem. teliey such, many a person, many a one : Tel tit
aujourcThui qui pleurera demain.
Rem. — Tel is used substantively for sueh-a-one; as, monsieur
un telj madame une telle.
THE VERB.
§ LXXXVin. — ^Agreembnt of the Verb and its Subject.
1. A verb agrees in number and person with its subject
When the subject is composed of two or more nouns or pro-
nouns in the singular, the verb is put in the plural ; and when
the nouns or pronouns are of different persons, it agrees with the
first in preference to the second, and with the second in prefer-
ence to the third ; as, Man/rere et moi, nous viendronsr vous voir.
2. When the words forming the subject are synonymous, or
when they are placed as a climax, the verb agrees with the last ;
as, Son courage, son intrepidite nous itonne. Ze temps^ les biens,
la vie, tout est h la patrie,
3. When the words forming the subject are connected by ou^
and are of the third person, the verb agrees with the last ; but
when they are of different persons, the verb is put in the plural
and agrees with the person that has the precedence : Lui ou son
frere viendra ; lui ou moi viendrons ; vous ou lui viendrez,
4. x\fber two subjects connected by m, the verb must be in
the plural, when the affirmation of the state or action is possible
with regard to both ; as, Ni Pun ni Fautre ive sont arrives. But :
JVTt Pun ni Vautre n^est mon pire,
5. When two subjects are connected by comme^ aussi, que, &c.,
I^e verb agrees with the first ; as. La vertu, ainsi que le savoir,
a son prix, viitue, as well as knowledge, has its price.
14 What is the meaning ottelf Is it nserl sabstantirely f
LXXXVIIL— 1. How does the verb agree with the subject when' it Is composed of
two or mere nouns or prononns in the sfngnlar? When the noons or pronoons Ibrming
the sabject are of different persons? 2. When the words forming the snt^lect are sy-
nonymoos? 8. When they are connected hy out 4. How does the yerb agree after
two sabjec^ connected by ni f 5. How, wlien two snbjeets are connected by eomme,
criMti, que^ Ac. ?
16
362 TUB VERB AND ITS SUBJECT.
6. A verb having a collective noun in the singular for its sub-
ject, is put in the singular : Le peuple etait mecontent, the people
were dissatisfied.
7. When the collective noun is followed bj de and another
noun, the verb agrees with the collective, when it is preceded by
the article, that is, when it is a general collective ; as, JJarmie
des infidiles fut detruite^ the army of the infidels was destroyed.
La moitii des troupes pirit de miserej one half of the troops per-
ished for want.
8. When the collective is preceded by the numeral wi, that
is, when it is a partitive collective, the verb agrees wiih the one
of the two nouns to which the state or action principally refers.
This is generally the noun that follows the collective ; as, Une
foule (Tenfants cauraient dans la rue^ a crowd of children ran
through the street Un grand nombre de soldats perireni de
misere. But we say with the verb in the singular : Un foule
d*enfants encombrait la rue (a crowd of children obstructed the
street), because the action of obstructing the street refers more
properly to crowd than to children.
9. The verb always agrees with the noun that follows, or is
nndei-stood, after la plupart (most), beaucoup^ peu, or any adverb
of quantity ; as. La plupart des hommes sont int^ress^s, most men
are selfish. Le s4nat ^tait partag4^ la plupart ^taient d^avisj the
senate was divided, most were of opinion. Peu ^taient enfaveur
du projet,
10. The verb itre, having the pronoun ce for its subject, is put
in the plural only, when followed by a noun or pronoun in the
third person plural : Ce sont nos amis ; ce sont eux ; but, c'est
nous ; c^est vous, messieurs, _,
8. How does the verb agree with a coIIectfTe nonn, sach as peuple f 7. How does
the verb agree when a collective noan, preceded by the article, is followed by de and
another noan } 8. How, when the collective noun is preceded hj unt 9. How does
the verb agree after la plvpartf deauooicp.'or any adverb of quantity f 10. When is
the verb Ure^ preceded by os, put in the plonlt
TENSES OF TBE INDICATIVE. 363
§ LXXXIX. — Use of the Auxiuart Verbs, (xxviii.)
1. The auxiliary itre is used in the formation of the compound
tenses of the following neuter verbs : alter, arriver, choir (to fall),
decider (to decease), mourir, naitre, tomber, venir, devenir, par-
venir, revenir.
2. The following verbs are conjugated with avoir, when they de-
note action ; and with itre, when they express state or situation :
Accourir, to run towards. Entrer^ to enter.
Disparaiire, to disappear. Soriir^ to go out.
Oroitre, to grow. PatMr^ to pass.
Ceater^ to cease. Pcartir^ to start.
Pirir, to perish. VieilUr, to grow old.
Monter, to ascend. Orandir^ to grow tall.
Deacendre, to descend. Better, to remain.
3. Convenir takes avoir in the sense of to suit, to become ; and
Ure, when it means to agree: Cette rtiaison nCa ccnvenu, N^oua
sommes convenus du prix,
4. Demeurer and rester take avoir, when they mean to dwell,
to reside ; and Hre, when they mean to remain : II a demeare
deux ans en Angleterre. 21 est demeure sur le champ de bataille,
5. Echapper, to pass unnoticed, takes avoir ; in the sense of
to say a thing inadvertently, it takes itre : Cette faute nCa eckap*
pe, I did not notice that mistake. Elle m*est echappee, I said it
inadvertently.
§ XC. — Use of the Tenses of the Indicative, Conditional,
AND Imperative.
1. The present tense is used to express what exists or takes
place at the time we speak, customary action in present time,
and what is true at all times : Je lis, I am reading. Je lis tous
les jours, I read every day. Socrate croyait que Vdme est im-
LXXXIX.— 1. Which are the neater verbs that are coi^Jugated with the auxillarf
Href 2. Which verbs take sometimes avotr and somotimes Stref 8. In what sense
does convenir take aw>ir t In wfiat sense does it take itre ? 4. When do demeurer
and re&t4r take avoir and when Uref 5. What is the meanlDg of OetteJituU nCa
*chappe t Cette faute nCeei icKappie t
364 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
mortelle, Socrates believed that the soul is immortal. On nCa
dit que voire fr ere est ici^ I was told that yoar brother is here.
2. Th^ present lense is often used to express a proximate fu-
ture ; as, Je pare demaitiy I start to-morrow.
3. The present is used for the past, to give more life and ani-
mation to what we relate : J^ai vu voire malheureux JUs^ trtdni
par les chevaux que sa main a nourris ; il veut les rappeler ei sa
voix les effraie^ I saw your unfortunate son, dragged by the horses
which his hand has fed : he wished to recall them, but his voice
frightened them.
4. The present tense is used to express a state or action which
has been going on for some time, and is still continuing in the
present : Je suis id depute irois jours, I have been here these
three days. II y a longtemps que je le sots, I have known it a
long time. (P. IV. 126.)
5. The imperfect tense is used to express what existed, what
was going on, or what was customary in past time ; it is to the
past time referred to what the present tense is to the present
time : Je lisais quand vous ites entre, I was reading when you
came in. Je lisais tous les jours pendant deux heures, lorsque
fetais a Vecole, I used to read two hours every day, when I was
at school. (P. IV. 138.)
6. The past indefinite represents the state or action completed,
either now or long since ; as, J*ai vu voire frere, I have seen
your brother. Je Vai vu, il y a un an, I saw him a year ago.
(P. IV. 106.)
7. The past definite is used to express what occurred in a time
entirely elapsed, and of which the present day forms no part;
as, Je vis voire frere Pan dernier, hier, I saw your brother last
year, yesterday. (P. IV. 150.)
Hem. — The past indefinite may be used as well as the past
definite, with reference to a period of time that is entirely past.
XC— 1. When Is the present tense nsed ? 2. Is it used to express fbtnre time? S. Is
it used to express past time ? 4. How do 70a say, I have been here theM three daywf
Why do yen use the present tense ? 5. When is the imperfect tense used f S. How
does the past ind efinite represent the state or action ? 7. When is the past definite need ?
Can the past indefinite be nsed for the past definite f
TBNSES OF THB GONDITIOMAL. 365
8. The pluperfect denotes that an action or event took place
previous to another past action or event ; as, J^avais ecrit quand
vous ites venu, I had ^rritten when you came.
Rem. — It would be wrong to use the pluperfect in sentiences
like the following : tPai appris que vou8 aviez StS It Paris, We
should say : tPai appris que vous avez ite d Paris ; because we
wish to say : You have been in Paris, I heard it ; not, You had
been in Paris before I heard it.
9. The past anterior is used to express the earlier of two ac-
tions immediately succeeding each other; the latter of which be-
ing expressed by a verb in the past definite. It is generally pie-
ceded by a conjunctive adverb, such as quand, aussitdt, &;q.,:
Quand feus fini, il vint, when I had done, he came.
10. The future tenses are used, the present to express what will
take place, and the pajstj what will have taken place, at some fu
ture time.
11. The future tenses are used after adverbs of tima, when the
action or event is placed in the future, in cases in which the pres-
ent or perfejt is used in English : Je sortirai quand faurai fini
d^ecrire, I shall go out when I have finished writing. (P. IV. 128.)
12. The conditional tenses denote what would take place, or
would have taken place, if a certain condition were, or had been,
fulfilled : Je leferais, sHl etait id, I would do it, if he were here,
Je Vauraisfait, sHl avait etS id, I would have done it, if he had
been here.
Rem. — ^The future and conditional tenses are not used after
the conjunction n, when it means if. (P. IV. 128.)
13. The imperative is used to express a command, entreaty,
or exhortation : Ecoutez-moi, listen to me. Partons, let us go.
(P. IV. 160.)
8. When lr,the pluperfect used? Is It correot to say, tPai appris que vomovUb
Hi mala€te K 9. When is the pMt anterior arad f 1 Ol When are the Ititare tenses used ?
1 1. How do yoo express in French, / shail go out trAeft J haveftnUhed toriting t 12.
When are the conditional tenses nsed f Can the future and conditional tenses be used
after %i, if? After si, whether? 18. When is the imperative used t
S66 THK INFIVITiyS.
§ XCI. — ^Thk Subjunctivx.
1. The subjunctive mood denotes doubt or indecision* It is
used only in dependent sentences.
(1.) After verbs and phrases that express pleasure, pain, sur-
prise, will, desire, command, doubt, fear, &a (167.)
(2.) After interrogative and negative sentences which imply
doubt. (167.)
(3.) After impersonal verbs. (167.)
(4.) In a relative sentence limiting one of the following words :
U plui^ le nUeuXy le racing U meilleur^ le pirt^ le moindre^ peu^ le
seuly U premier, le dernier, d^c. ; or,
(5.) In a relative sentence limiting a noun of an indefinite
sense, which imparts a character of uncertainty to the dependent
sentence. (168, 169.)
(6.) After quelque, . . .gue, quel que, quoi, . . .que, si,,, .que.
ri70.)
(7.) After certain conjunctions. (See P. IV. 172.)
(8.) After que, used in the place of si, or any one of the con-
junctions that govern the subjunctive. (173.)
(9.) After the conjunctions de fa^on que, de sorts que, drc^
when the result is doubtful. (173.)
2. The subjunctive being always subordinate to another verb,
the tense of the subjunctive in which the verb is to be put, is de-
termined by the tense of the preceding verb. (See 175 and 176.)
§ XCII.— Thb Infinitivb.
1. The infinitive is used as subject or object (178.)
2. When the infinitive is used as the object of a preposition,
the sense must indicate, without ambiguity, the noun to which
the infinitive refers. It would not be correct to say : Je vous
instruis pour rendre service d vos parents^ because the sense does
not indicate whether the infinitive rendre refers to je or to vous,
XCI —1. What does the sabjuncti ve mood dsnote f When U ft used in the first place f
Intheseoondpleeer Third? Fourth f Fifth? Sixth? Seventh? Eighth? Ninth?
S. How do yoa determine the tense in which a verb In the sabjnnctiye Is to be placed?
X0II.—1. How is the fnflniUve tised?
OOVSRMMBNT OF VSRBS.
867
We should say, if we wish it to refer to vous : Je vous instruU
pour que vous rendiez service a vos parents,
3. The infinitive is to be preferred to the indicative or the
subjunctive, when it does not render the sentence ambiguous.
Instead of saying : H vaut mieux qu*on soit malheureux que m-
minel ; Mon frere est certain quHl rSussira ; it is better to say :
H vaut mieux itre midheureux que crimiiul; Man frere est cer--
tain de reussir.
§ XCni. — ^GOYBRNMENT OF VbRBS.
1. When two verbs govern the same noun both directly, or
both indirectly, but by means of the same preposition, the noun
need be expi^essed only once ; as, J^estime et je respecte ces horn-
mes^ I esteem and respect those men.
2. When one verb governs the noun directly, and the other
indirectly, or when each verb requires a different preposition, the
noun must be expressed after the first verb, and a preposition
must be used, in its stead, with the second : as, // aime son mat-
tre et lui obiit^ he loves and obeys his master. U re^ut la lettre
et y rSpondit, he received the letter and answered it.
§ XCrV. — List of Verbs that require no Preposition be-
fore THE following InFINITIVE.
Aocourir.
Courir.
Espdrer.
Oufr.
Aimer mieux.
Croire.
Faire.
Paraltre.
Aller.
Daigner.
Falloir.
Penser.
Apercevolr.
Declarer.
Imaginer (S*).
Pouvoir.
Assurer.
Ddsirer.
Laisser.
PrdWrer.
Avoir beau.
Devdir.
Mener.
Prdtendre.
Avoaer.
6couter.
Nier.
Bapporter.
Compter.
Entendre.
Observer.
Beconnattre.
Confesser.
Envoyer.
Oser.
Begarder.
S. What to to be obseryed when the Infinitive to used as the object of a preposition f
& Which is better: Mon/rire e9i certain qu'il riu9»ira ; or, Mon frire est certain
de riuekir t What Ih the rale with refrnrd to it ?
XCLII.— 1. When two verbs govern the same noun, mast the nonn be repeated wltk
each verb ? 2. What to to be done when two verbs govern the noon, each In a dlffar-
cnt manner?
868
OOVKRNMXNT OF VERBS.
BetoQiner.
Sembler.
Soatenir.
Venir.
Bevenir.
Sentir.
T^moigner.
Voir.
Sayoir.
Souhaiter.
Yaloir mieax.
Youloir.
Rem. — DMrer^ e^^erer^prifirer^ and wuhaiter, sometimes take
de before the infinitiye.
§ XCY. — List of Verbs that rsquirx the preposition A
BEFORE the FOLLOWING InFINITIVS.
Abidaser (8').
Abouiir.
Aooorder (S'):
Aoooutumer.
Aduumer (8*).
Admettre.
Aguerrir (8').
Aider.
Aimer.
Amuser (8').
Af^liqaer (8').
Apprendre.
Appreter (S').
Aspirer.
Aasigner.
Assujettir (8*).
Attacber (8').
Attendre.
Attendre (8*).
Augmenter (8*).
AutoriBer.
AviUr (8*).
Avoir.
Avoir peine.
Balancer.
Bomer.
Bomer (Se).
Cbercber.
Commenoer {or
de).
Complaire (Se).
Conoourir.
Condanmer.
Gondescendre.
Consenttr (or de).
Consifiter.
Conspirer.
Consumer.
Contribuer.
Convier.
Coater.
Demander (or de).
Demeurer.
D^penser.
Dtfplaire (Se). *
DesUner.
Determiner.
Determiner (Se).
Disposer (Se).
Divertir (Se),
Donner.
Efiforoer (8'), {or
de).
Employer.
Empresser (8'),
{or de).
Enoourager.
Endurcir (8')-
Enbardir.
Enseigner.
Entendre (8')-
Essayer {or de).
tire.
£tudier (8*).
^vertuer (8').
Exceller.
Exciter.
Exercer.
Exeroer (8*).
Exhorter.
Exposer (8').
Fatiguer (Se).
Gagner.
Habituer (S').
Hasarder (Se).
H^siter.
Inciter.
Instruire.
Interesser (8*).
Inriter.
Laisser (xcvii.)
Mettre.
Mettre (Se).
Montrer.
Obstiner (8*).
Oflfrir(S').
Opini&trer (8*).
Panrenir.
Pencber.
Penser.
Perdre.
Persev^rer.
Persister.
Plaire (Se).
PUer (Se).
Porter.
Pousser.
Prendre plaisir.
Preparer.
Preparer (Se)
Provoquer.
Beduire.
Beduire (Se).
BeDoncer.
B^pugner.
B^signer (Se).
Bester.
Betrancber (Se)
B^ussir.
Bisquer.
Servir.
Songer.
Suffire (xcvii.)
Tarder {to ddmf).
Tendre.
Tenir.
Travailler.
Viser.
Vouer.
XCIV.—Name some of the yerbe that require no preposition before the following
verb in the Infinitive.
XCY.— Name some of the verbs that require the preposition <l before the following
verb in the infinitive.
OOYEBNMSNT OF VERBS.
§ XCVL— 1. List of Verbs that require the preposition
Db before the following Infinitive.
Austenir (S').
Accuser.
Achever.
Aifecter.
Affliger (S').
Agir (S'), imp.)
Applaudir (S').
Appr^hender.
Avertir.
Aviser (S').
Avoir besoin.
Avoir coutame.
Avoir desseia.
Avoir eavie.
Avoir garde.
Avoir honte.
Avoir lieu.
Avoir peur.
Avoir raison.
Avoir soin.
Avoir Bujet.
Avoir tort.
BI4mer.
Brftler.
Censurer.
Cesser.
Chagriner (Se).
Charger.
Charger (Se).
Choisir.
Commander.
Conclure.
Conjurer.
Conseiller.
Contenter (8e).
Convaincre.
Convenir.
Craindre.
Dt^charger.
/ Rem. — Observe that the verbs requiring the preposition d (List
xcv.), generally express tendency to, continued or jprogressive ac'
16«
D^courager.
Faire signe.
Prendre soiti.
D^daigner.
Faire semblant.
Prescrire.
D^fendre.
Feindre.
Presser.
D^fier (zcvii.)
F^liciter.
Presser (Se).
Demander (or k).
. F^iciter (Se).
Pr^sumer.
D^pScher (Se).
Finir.
Prier.
Ddsaocoutumer.
Flatter (Se).
Promettre.
Ddsesp^rer.
Fr^mir.
Proposer.
Ddshabituer (Se)
. Garder (Se).
Proposer (Se).
D^soler (Se).
G^mir.
Protester.
D^tourner.
Glorifier (Se).
Punir.
Diflfdrer.
H&ter (Se).
Rappeler (Se).
Dire.
Imputer.
Rebuter (Se).
Discontinuer.
Indigner (S').
Becommander.
Disconvenir.
Ing^rer (S').
Refuser.
Disculper (Se).
Inspirer.
Regretter.
Dispenser.
Jurer.
Rdjouir (Se).
Dispenser (Se).
Laisser (xcvii.)
Remercier.
Dissuader.
Louer.
Repentir (Se)
Douter.
Efforcer (S'), (or
M^iter.
Rdprimander.
k).
Meier (Se).
Reprocher (Se).
Eflfrayer(S').
Menaoer.
R^soudre.
Emparer CS').
Mdriter.
Ressouvenir (Se)
EmpScher.
Moquer (Se).
Rire.
Empresser (S'),
N^gliger.
Rougii*.
(ork).
Nier.
Scandaliser (Se).
Enjoindre.
Omettre.
Soucier (Se)
EnorgueiUir (8')
. Ordonner.
Souffrir.
Enrager.
Oublier.
Soup9onner.
Entreprendre.
Pardonner.
Souvenir (S?).
£pouvanter.
Parler.
Su£&re (xcvii.)
Essayer (or k).
Passer (Se).
Sugg^rer.
£tonner (8*).
Permettre.
SuppUer.
fiviter.
Persuader.
Tftcher (xcvii).
Excuser.
Piquer (Se).
Tarder (xcvii).
Excu8er(S').
Plaindre.
Tenter.
Faire bien.
Plaindre (Se).
Trembler.
Faire mine.
Prendre garde.
Vanter (Se).
8^0 GOVXRNMKKT OV TEBB6.
tUm ; and that the verba requiring the preposition de (xcvi.), geti
erally express result, consequence^ or cessation of action,
2. The infinitive limiting the meaning of ao abstract noun
must be pieceded by the preposition de : tPai eu le plaisir de Is
rencontrer. In this sentence, the verb reneontrer limits the noun
plaisir. Bat in the following sentences : Je prends piaisir a
vous rendre ce service ; II y a du piaisir a chliger ses amis ; the
noun plaisir is not limited by the following infinitive.
g XCVII. — List of Ybrbs that require sometimes A xsd
SOMETIMES De before the following Infinitive.
Oommaieer d, to express progress ; de, the beginning of an action. Z'en^
font eomrnenee dparUr. L*orateur comment de parUr a amq heuret.
Qmtinuer d, to denote action without interruption ; oonUnuer de, to ez-
pre88 repeated action. 11 eonimue d parler. II eordinue d'y idler.
OotUraindre a, to force into action ; wntrwndrt de, to constrain from action.
Difier d to challenge ; dSfier de, to defy.
Etre. C'ett d voue d , bespeaks turn ; c*eat d vou$ de.:.,, duty or right.
Cesl <l voua d parkr, it is your turn to speak. C'ed d vout de parler, it
is your duty (or your right) to speak.
Lauetr d, to leave ; lamer de, to fail, with a negatire. Jt voua laiate d
penaer. 11 ne lauae paa d' itre kont^te.
Manquer a, to be wanting in one*B duty ; mcmquer de, to fiiil (to omit). II
^ a manqui d rempiir aee deeoin. Ne manqua pae de vemr.
ObUger a, to impose necessity ; obUger de, to oblige. Vein da/oir vmia
oblige d U/abre. Voue m'oMigerest de lefabre. Je tuia ebligi de le/aire.
Oublier d, to forget how (to lose the habit of) ; cubUer de, to forget (to
omit). .Tat eMU d danaer. I*ai mtUiS dy otter.
JRrftiaer de, this yerb takes d before diner, boire, msnger, Ithda r^uai d
manger, he refused him something to eat.
Rutquer d, transitire ; riaquer de, intransitive.
Suffirt: personal d, impersonal de.
XCVl— 1. Nftme aome of the verto that reqatre the preposition de before the follow-
ing verb in the infinitive. %. M«Bt the inflnitiye limitiog an nhetraet noan be preceded
by a preposition ? Qive an example.
XCVII.— When does eommeneer take d and when ds before the next infinitiTer
When does conU'nuer take d, and when de, before the next infinitive? What Is the
nwHiiing of contraind red? Of coiUraindre de t Otdifierdt Of diJUrdst What
is the meaning of Ceat d voue d parler t Ceei d 90ue de parler t What is the mean-
\n%oHai9aerdt Of laia$erdef Of manquer df Otmanguerdef OtobUgerdt
OioUigerdet OtoutdUrdt OtotMierdet
THE ADVERB. 871
l^kher df when the action passes from the subject ; tdcher <&, when it
does not. 21 tdche a me nuire. Jt tdcherai de U/aire,
Tarda- a, to delay, to tany ; tarder de (imp.), to long. II tarde bien a ve-
nirj he is long in coming. II Ud tarde de vous voir, he longs to see you.
Venir a, to happen ; venir cfe, to have just. S'U vient a mourir. Jt viena
de le voir. Je vieiu travaiUer.
§ XCVIIL— THE PARTICIPLE.
The participles have been treated of in P. IV. 180 and 181.
We shall only add to the remarks made on the past participle,
P. IV. 182, that the principal difficulty in applying Rule 3, 181,
consists in determining whether the past participle governs the
preceding direct object or not. When we say : Les regies que
fai commence a vous expliquer, the participle commence remains
invariable, because the object qtu is governed by the infinitive
expliquer. In the following sentence : // m^a rendu tons les ser-
vices qu^il a pu^ pu remains invariable, because que is governed
by the infinitive rendre^ which is understood after pu. When
we say : Mies se sont proposes comme des modeles de douceur
(they proposed themselves as patterns of gentleness), the pronoun
se is the direct object of the participle propose. But when we
say : Mies se sont proposi de /aire cela (they proposed doing
that), the pronoun se is the indirect object of the participle pro-
pose, because it means, they proposed to themselves^ &c
§ XCIX.— THE ADVERB.
1. The adverbs plus, moins, si, aussi, tant, autant, are used to
express comparison.
What is the meaning of venir df Of venir de t
XCVIIL— How is the present participle used ? (See P. lY. 180.) To what part of tiie
sentence does it refer when it is preceded Yij ent To what part of the sentence may
it refer, when it is not preceded by «»' What is the dilTerence between the present
participle and the participial a^lectivef State the rules that are applicable to the past
participle. (See P. lY. 181.) Is the participle commeMiS variable in the following sen-
tence: Lee riglee que fai oommenQi d voue eKpliquer t Why not? Is the participle
pu variable in the following sentence : II nCa rendu Ume let eervioee qu^U a put
Why not?
XCIX.— 1. Which adverbs are nsed to express comparison f
3f 8 THE ADVKBB.
2. Dawmtage may be used for plus^ when not followed bj p
complement : Cela me plait davantape, that pleases me more.
Bat davaniage cannot be used for le pliLs, De toutea lea Jleurs,
la rose eat celle qui me plait le plus (not davaniage),
8. ^t and tant denote extension ; ausai and autant, comparison.
4. Sij aussi^ are used before adjectives and adverbs ; tant, au-
ton/, with nouns and verbs. Elle est »i bonne, II a tant lu. II
eat auaai atudieux que aon/rere ; il lit autant que voua.
Rem. — Si cannot be used before an adverbial phrase. Instead
of saying, // eat at en peine, ai en colh-e, say, // eat aifort en peine,
at fort en colere, he is in such trouble, he is so angry.
5. Si may be used for aitasi, and tant for autant, in negative
sentences : // n'eat paa ai riehe que voua. Rien ne m^a tant/dcke
que cette nouvelle.
6. Plutdt means rather ; plua tdt, earlier, sooner.
7. De auite means in succession ; tout de auite, immediately.
8. Tout'h-coup means suddenly; tout d^un coup, all in one
stroke. La maison eat tombie tout-a-coup, the house fell sudden-
ly. // gagna mille ^cua tout d*un coup, he made a thousand
crowns in one stroke.
9. Tree is used only before an adjective or adverb. Before
nouns bien or extrimement is used: J^ai bienfroid,
10. The adverbs of comparison, ai, auaai, plua, m^na, tant,
autant, are repeated with each adjective, verb, or adverb. H eat
ai aage, ai bon, quUl rCa paa aon pareil, he is so wise, so good,
that he has not his equal. H est plus aavant est plua aage que
son f rare,
11. Those that are used as adverbs of quantity, before nouns;
as, plus, autant, beaucoup, &c^ need not be repeated, but the
preposition de must precede each noun : Nous avons beaucoup
de pommes, de piches, &c.
1 When maj dawmtage he used for plusf Can it be nsed tmlepliut & What
du H and tant denote? What do auaii and autant denote? 4 With what words are
»i and atusi oaed? With what words are tant and avtant naed? 5. In what sen-
tences may 9i be used for atusi^ and tant for autant t Can 9i be txsed before adverbial
phrases? liovr iiojoviwy: he Uao angry t 6. What b the meaning of p^u^tf Of
pltM tott 7. What is the meaning of de suiter Of tout de suiter & What la the
meaning of tou^d-cowpf Of lout d*un coup f 9. Can <r^ be used before a noan? ICl
Moat the adverb of comparison be repeated with each adjectlyi;, verb, and adverb?
ADVERBS OF NEGATION. 8^3
§ C. — Adverbs of Negation.
1. The adverbs of negation are ne pas, ne point
2. Point is a stronger negative than pas : II ne lit pas, he is
not reading. // ne lit point, he does not read.
3. Pas is preferable to point with adverbs of comparison, and
with numeral adjectives : II rCest pas atissi habile ; je n^ai pas
lu dix pages,
4. In interrogative sentences point implies doubt on the part of
the speaker : Tout le monde rit; n^ai-je point dit quelque sottisef
every one is laughing ; have I not said something silly ? N''ai-je
pas dit la verite ? did I not speak the truth ? (I did ; did I not ?)
5. The second negative {pas or point) may be suppressed with
the verbs cesser, oser, pouvoir, savoir, when followed by an infin-
itive, or used absolutely ; as, i7 ne cesse de parler ; je n^ose le
dire ; je ne puis lefaire ; je ne sais,
6. Pas or point is not used when the verb is modified by an-
other negative word, such as, jamais, guere, nul, nullement, rien,
aucun, per Sonne, ni repeated, ne que, meaning seulement,
1. The negative ne is used after the conjunctions, a moins que,
de peur que^ de crainte que, and after the verb empicher : A moins
que vous ne lui parliez ; de peur qu^on ne voits trompe ; fempi-
cherai quHl ne sorte,
8. The negative ne is likewise used after autre, autrement,
plus, mieux, moins, m^illeur ; and after the verbs craindre, avoir
peur, trembler, apprehender, but only when the preceding verb
is not accompanied by a negative ; as, // parle auirem^nt quHl
n'agit ; il est plus modeste, quHl tie le parait ; je crains quHl ne
vienne. When the verb in the preceding proposition is accom-
panied by a negative, ne is not used before the dependent verb ;
as, H ne parle pas autrement quHl agit; il rC est pas plus modeste
quHl le paraU ; je ne crains pas quHl vienne.
O.— 1. Whleh «re the adverbs of negation ? 2. What Is the difference between pat
and point f 8. With what words is pas prelbrable to point f 4 What does poin^
imply in interrogative sentences? 5. With which verbs may p<Z8 or point be sup. ^
pressed f 6. Can pas or point be nsed in a sentence containing another negative f 7
After whi^ conjanctions must no be nsed? Is it nsed after the verb empicherf. 8
After what other words is no used ? Is it used when the preceding verb is acoomp*
nied by a negative?
374 TBS PRSPOBinov.
Rem. — ^After craitidre^ appr^hender^ avoir peur^ tremhler^ de
crainU que, de peur que, ne and pas are used, when we wish to*
the accomplishment of the action expressed by the second verb :
9. The verbs nier, deseepirer^ disccnvenir, douter, require ne
before 'the dependent verb, when they are accompanied by a
negative : Je nenie paSyje ne doute pa$^ que eela ne eoit, I do no^
deny, I do not doubt, that it is so.
§ CL— THE PREPOSITION.
1. Some prepositions govern the noun directly, others require
the aid of another preposition, generally de. (P. IV. 185.)
2. A, dans, fit, in : H est au maffasin, he is at the store ; il est
dans le tnagoMn, he is in the store ; les marehandises sont en
magasin, the goods are in store (stored). H est h la ville, he is
in town (not in the country) ; il n^y a pas un hamme dans la
ville qui puisse le /aire, there is not a man in town that can do
it ; il est en ville, be is in town (not at home).
3. A travers, au trovers de, across, through ; the latter implies
that obstacles are in the way ; the former, not : A travers les
champs, across the fields; au travers (Pun huisson, through a
thicket
4. Avant, devant ; aprh, derriere, (See P. 11. 82.)
6. Avee, ehez, — Avec, together with, in company of: II es*
avec ses amis, he is with his friends. Chez, with, among, is ap-
plied to one^s country, to one's home : Chez les Eomains, t^itait
la coutume, among the Romans, it was the custom; chez nous^
in our country.
6. De, avec, with. — De expresses result, consequence ; as, Je
suis content de cela, I am pleased with that ; qu'avez-vous fait d*-
man canif? what have you done with my penknife ^, je ne me
mele pas de cela, I do not meddle with that. Avec has the
9. In what enfe to n« ased after the verbs wUr, douier^ Ste. f
CL— 1. Howdo prepositions govern the noan 7 2. What Is themesniag of a«fliMfW-
ftinf dttns U magaiinf en magctsinf Ot d la 9UUf dana lavUlef enfoUUf
& What Is the meaning of d trofoeff Of au iravert def 4. What is the meaniagot
avatur OfdMNEfUf Otapr^t OtderrUret 5. Otavset Otehmf
TBB PREPOSITION. 375
meaning of withy together, by means of: Meier de Veau avec U
vfw, to mix water with the wine ; je Vai fait avec votre eanif I
did it with your penknife.
7. JEVi, dans. (See P. IV. 186.)
8. Entre, between, among; parmi, among. jEntre vous et
moi, between you and me ; parmi le peuple, among the people.
Among, used distributively, is expressed by entre ; as, Partagez
cet argent entre ces kommes, divide that money among those men.
9. En face de, vis-a-vis de, opposite. Vis-a-vis de mesfenetres,
en face de ckez mm.
10. Pres de, aupres de, near, by ; the latter denotes not only
proximity, but implies also assiduity or sentiment : Pres de Ve-
glise ; cet enfant n'est heuretix qu^aupres de sa mere.
11. Vers, envers, towards; vers, physically; envers, morally:
Vei's le nord, vers le soir ; il est poli envers tout le monde.
12. Void, voila. — Voici refers to what follows, and voila, to
what precedes.
Voici trois medecins qui ne se trompent pas ;
Galte, dotix exercice et modeste repas.
La droiture du cceur, la verite, Vinnocence, Vempire sur les pas-
sions, voila la veritable grandeur.
13. The adverbs dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, become prep-
ositions, whan they aie used to express opposition ; as, Les enne-
mis sont dedans et dehors la ville, the enemy is within and with-
out the city. Also, when they are preceded by a preposition ;
as Par dessus les murs, over the walls ; de dessous la table, from
underneath the table.
14. The complement of two simple prepositions, or of two
compound prepositions (prepositive phrases) governing the noun
by means of the same preposition, need be expressed only once ;
as, // parle pour et contre vous, he speaks for and against you ;
pris et autour de la ville, near and aiound the city.
6. What do«8 de exprew? Aveet 7. What is th« diflTereiice between en and <fa»ff,
when applied to time? 8. What is the meanini? of entret Ot patinit When is
among expressed by €ntre t 9. What is the meHning of en face det Of vis-d-Hft de t
UK Otpriadef Of auprfy det 11. Of veref Of enveref 12 What does votoi refer
to? And voUdf 18. When do the adverbs deaeue, deeaout, dedans, dehore, becotae
prepositions f 14. Is it neoessaiy to repeat the complement witli each preposition ?
376 THB COXJDNCTION.
15. Bat the complement of a simple and a componnd prepo-
Bition, or of two compound prepositions requiring the aid each
of a different preposition, must be expi-essed with each preposi
tion. It would not be coiTect to say : Juger suivant et canfor-
mement aux lois^ because suivant is followed bj its noun directly,
and conformiment requires h. We therefore should say : Juger
suivant les his et conformsment h ee qu^tUes prescrivent^ to judge
in accordance with the laws, and conformably to what they pre-
scribe.
10. The prepositions d, de, en^ sans, are repeated before each
noun : II dut la vie d la clemence et d la magnanimite du vain-
queur^ he owed his life to the clemency and magnanimity of the
conqueror.
17. The other prepositions must also be repeated, when the
nouns express each something different; but when the nouns
have a similarity of meaning, they may be omitted : Dans la
paix et dans la guerre, dans la nwllesse et Voisiveti ; par la force
et par Fadreese, par la force et la violence.
§ OIL— THE CONJUNCTION.
1. The conjunctions quand, loreque, des que^ aussitbt que, de-
puis que, &c., govern the verb in the indicative mood.
2. The conjunctions avant que, d moine que, dec, govern the
verb in the subjunctive mood. (1V2.)
d. Afn de, avant de, a moins de, and all compound words
having de for their final component part, govern the verb in the
infinitive. They are called, by some, conjunctions, by others,
prepositions.
4. After the conjunction que, the verb is put in the indicative
18. When Is It neoeasary? 16 Wbieh prepositions are always repeated? 17. la
whnt case must all other prppoMtfons be repeated?
CII.— 1. Name some of the conjunctions that govern the verb in the indicatiTe mood
2. Name some of tlume that govern the verN in the snlijanctlve mood. 8. How do c^n
d€y avant <f«, &e^ govern the verb ?. 4 In what mood is tbe verb put after the OOD-
\onetlon qmf
THE CONJUNGTIOV. 377
or^in the sabjanctive, according as the preceding proposition
may require.
5. The conjanction qtte is never omitted, and must be repeated
at the head of each sentence. It is also used to avoid the repe-
tition of other conjunctions. Puisqu'on plaide^ qu^on meurt et
qu'on devient malade,
6. Que may be used in the place of many conjunctions, and
governs the verb in the same manner as the conjunction for
which it stands : Approchez que (for afin que) je vous dise cela,
Attendez que {(or juaqu^h ce que) fate fini,
7. Que^ used to avoid the repetition of sij governs the subjunc-
tive. (173.)
8. Que is used for parce que after i^eet : S*il ne vient paSj c^est
guHl est malade,
9. Que may be used for pourquoi at the head of a negative
ientence, when pas is omitted : Que ne vtent-U?
10. Que is used for comhien^ in exclamatory sentences : Que
Vims ites hon ! Que de bonte vous avez pour mot/
11. JSt k used to join similar parts of an affirmative proposi-
tion, or different propositions, that express affirmation : II cultive
les letires et les sciences, H croit que la terre est une planete et
qu*elle toume autour du soleil,
12. Ni is used to join similar parts of a negative proposition,
or different propositions, that express negation : Tl ne cultive ni
les lettres ni les sciences, II ne croit pas que la terre soit une
planete^ ni qu^elle tourne autour du soleil, II ne ressemble pas a
sonfrire, ni de visage ni de caractere,
13. JSt precedes sans, and ni may take the place of it: Sans
force et sans vertu, or Sans force ni vertu,
14. When plus, moins, mieux, autant, are placed at the head
of two clauses of a sentence, the conjunction et is not used : Plus
on lit Radne, plus on Vadmire ; not, et plus on Vadmire, y
8. Is the conjanction qu6 ever omitted f «. Is gut used in the place of other con-
junctions f 7. What mood does qm govern when it is used for «<f 8. What is the
meaning of qvA after o'crt f 9. When may qu^ be u»ed for pourqttoi t 10. In what kind
of sentences is que used for eombien t 11. For what purpose is ei used f 18. And ni T
1& Is H or n<used with •anst 14. Is el used before plus^ moint, mieum, autant
standing at the head of two clauses of a sentence ?
VOCABULARY TO THE DICTATIONS,
Fbox IBB 88d to ram 64ni.
Abaiir€t ter. a. t. to tluowdowA; to •nr-
throw; towbveit.
AUUu, m^ ibMlatak
AcoabUr, a. t. to OTerwhelm.
Acoordm', a. t. to grant
Aoeridii0r^ a. t. to give eradlt to.
AcemeUUr^ in. a. t. to reoaiye ; to waloome.
Aeh090r^ a. y. to flniah.
AequMr^ far. a. ▼. to aMnira.
Awni^ p. pL reeaived, aamlttod.
Ad&udr^ a. ▼. to loften, to make fentla.
Adrtmr^ a. ▼. to addraML
Adr^mer (•*), ret v. to apply to.
MiXtUr^ a. T. to w«akeii, to eDfeebla.
2 fUrmsr^ a. t. to aArm, to anert
4f/nMMB, a4). (Hghtfol, horrible.
Jm d€^ prep, in order to.
1 pH qu^ oo^). in order that
Affir, a. ▼. to act
Aifir («'>, re£ T. to be the mattar, to eoneeni.
AgUer^ a. ▼. to agltoto.
Aorandir. a. v. to enlarge, to aggrandise.
Aids d€ id rx prep, witb the help oC
Aider^ a. v. to help.
Ainti^ ady. thna.
AJouUr^ a. y. to add.
AlifAeiU^ n. m. food.
AUmmUaire^ a^. alimentary.
AlUger, a. y. to ease, to lighten, to relieye.
AUemfOnd, n. m. Oerman.
AUunU, p. p. lighted, biasing.
Alors^ adv. then.
AlUri, p. p. thirsty, dry.
AmoM, n. m. maia.
Ams^ n. t auni, mind.
AmitU, n. C friendship.
Amnur^ n. ro. loye.
Animer^ a. y. to animate.
AnnaU^ n. t pL annals.
ApaiMr, a. y. to appease.
App^cewiir^ a. y. to pen^elve.
Appttrattre^ irr. n. v. to appear.
Apparency n. £ appearance.
Appartenir^ In*, n. y. to belonc.
Appsler («*), reC y. to be citllea.
Apprendr^ irr. a. y. to learn ; to teach ;
toteU.
ApprockStn,t approach.
Approeksr («*X nt y. to come near.
Apr^ OT), prepw according to.
^/rf^a^J. apt: fit proper.
Arttbe, n. m. Arabian.
Ar<ib€, adj. Arabian, Arsbia
Arme, n. t weapon.
Arraeher, a. y. to pall oat
Arriiet^ a. y. to arrest
ArrU&rt a. y. to stup^
Arrivw^ n. y. to arrive; to happen ; to take
A*aata (<f >, by storm.
A^aUfftr^ a. y. to besiege.
Aui^ p. p. seated, sittinfu
Awu^ettkr^ a. y. to snbdae.
AttTA, n. m. star.
AUachi, p. p. attached.
Attachsr, a. y. to attach, to bind.
^ttaotMr. a. y. to attack.
AUeindr^ irr. a. y. to attain: to hart
AUendre («'), ref. y. to expect to, to look
forward ta
Attdience, n. f. hearing, aodlenceL
Auffmenter^ a. y. to Increase.
AuaH Hen ^ue, conj. as well as.
AutitSt, ady. Immediately.
AmtUre, a4|. anstere.
AtOow dSi prep, aronnd.
Autr^Aa, adv. fonnarly.
Avancer («'), reC y. to advance.
^mtMt, a. y. to warn.
AfdSj n. m. opinion ; advice.
Awfins, n. £ oats.
AvattsPt a. y. to avow, to confess.
Jaitt er, a. y. to lower.
Aitoaoer, n. y. to ba ondedded.
AtlU, n. f ball
Bannir^ a. T. to banish.
J?fi«, bagae, s4J. low.
Bttaani^ a^J. snnbarnt, swsrthy.
BataiUe, n. £ battle.
JSsav/^ n. £ beaaty.
Bacqueter, a. v. to pick, to peck
Belliqueux^ a4), warlike.
Bnoin^ n. m. want, need.
TOOABULART TO THE DI0TATION8.
S19
SHaO, B. m. Mttle, Uye-stook.
Bian^ n. m. good.
Bi^n-itre, n. m. well-being.
BienfiiU^rt n. in. benefactor.
BftM^r, a. T. to wonnd ; to hart
Bt**9ur«y n. t wound.
Bnnhsur^ n. m happiness; lack.
Bitnti, n. f. Icindness.
Bord^ n. m. border.
BomOy n. t limit, boand.
BtmehSf n. t moath.
Bouty n. ni. end.
Branche, n. f branch.
Bfos^ n. m. aroL
Bra9ier^ n. m. brarier.
Brawmre^ n. t bravery.
BriUer, n. v. to shine.
Brodtnri&t n. t embroider/.
B'ftyer^ a. y. to grind.
BuUnt n. m. booty,
Cctcher («eX reC y. to hide.
Camper^ n. v. to camp, to encamp.
CminelUy n. f cinnamon.
CoiqvM^ n. m. easqae, heloL
OaH>*e ds (d), prep, on account oC
OfitMtfr, a. v. to cause.
CaritcUre^ n. m. character ; disposition.
CacalerU, n. f. cavalry.
CttvtilUr, n. m. rider; lionemaa.
Oic/tf/*, n. V. to yield.
Gvntur^, n. t irirdle, belt
CUebre^ at^. celebrated.
6S[{^<^ adj. celestial
(7«|><»m2<m£, conj. howeyer, and yet
CercU, n. m. circle.
(knU^ p. p. hemmed in.
Chagrin^ n. m. griei; sorrow.
Chaine, n. f. chain.
C%afn«AiA, n. m. cameL
Champ, n. m. field.
Chaque, a^J. each.
Chaige, n. f. charge; office.
Charger^ a. y. to load.
^AarrtM, n. £ plough.
OliarU, n. C charter.
ChoMer^ a. y. to chase ; to expel, to drive
awajr.
Ohaiumire, V. t cottage.
OV/ n. in. chief, head.
Chevre, n. f. gont
Chinai9, n. C Ghlneea.
Choc, n. m. shock, onset
ChoUt, n. £ choice.
{?Ai(t«, n. t fUL
(7at«2, n. m. heaven.
OiU/yen, n. m. citixen.
Clairmnenl, adv. clearly.
Cifna\ n. m. climate.
CoUre. n. f. aneer.
C'tmhaty n. m. fight.
C'tmbaiire. a. db n. v. to fight to fight for.
Com ler. a. v. to heap up ; to loa^ to over-
whelm.
CfHnmander, a. v. to command.
CommerQant, adj. commereiaL
Compagne, n. t companion.
Oompoter^ a. ▼. to compose.
OomfMMe, n. £ commune.
OonoMsion, n. £ concession, grant
Ooneewnr, a. v. to conceive.
OonetHafU, a^j. conciliatory.
OoneUiaUur, adv. condliatory.
C!9n6*»<oy«n, n. m. fellow-citixen.
OoHCourir, irr. n. y. to concur; to c»-oper.
ate.
Ooneours, n. m. coneoarse.
Condamnar, a v. to condemn.
0»9ulttifo, n. £ guidance, oondnet
Conjler, a. y. to intrust
Co^fitndre, a. v. to conlband.
Oo^juri, n. m. conmirator.
Oownai89eur^ n. m. Judge.
Oanqvirant^ wd^. conquering; desiroos «f
conquest
ConquUe, n. £ conquest
ConieU, n. m. counsel, advice.
Oon^MiUnient, n. m. consent
Ct>n%itiuenee (en), in consequence.
{>ms^»«n< {p*ir\ adv. eonseqaently.
Oi9«M0rver (m), r«MC v. to be preservM.
Oonspirer, n. v. to conspire.
Oowmlai, n. m. consulship.
ConUriir. Irr. a. ▼. to contain.
Oontr^ande, n. £ amuggllng.
C!9fi<r<(, prep, against.
Oonveraer, n. v. to oonversei
Corps, n. m. body.
Costume, n. m. drees, costume.
au, n. £ sea-ehore: coast
Couisher, n. V. to lie; to sleep.
Cooler, to run out; to spend.
Coup, n. m. blow.
Coup d^ctU, n. m. glance; view.
Coupable, n. m. guilty.
Cour, n. £ court
Amr (JkUre), to pay court
Courroie, n. £ strap.
(%>«rrotMn, n. m. anger.
CowM, n. m. course.
Cowfsier, n. m, steed, coarser.
Ctnthtme, n. £ custom.
Coutwne {avoir), to be aocostonoed.
Cr^r, a. V. to create.
Creueo, n. m. hollow.
Crever, a. y. to burst, to pat oat
Critique, aty. critioaL
CruauU, n. £ croel^. '
Cuir, n. QL leather.
UaSbord, adv. at first Ant
Didder, a. v. to decide.
JMbrit, n. m. pL remalna, mint.
Dioouverte, n. £ discovery.
Dieounrir^ irr. a. y. to discover.
Biorire, irr a. v. to descrlba
DiAiire, irr. a. v. to defiMt
Defendre, a. v. to defend ; to forbid.
JMgniHer, a v. to disguise.
DtJ^ de (AM), |»rep Irayond.
BHideux, adj. delicious; delightful.
Belivrer, a. v. to deliver.
BimeUre {te\ re£ v. to resign.
Bimon, n. m. demon.
380
TOOABULABT TO TBS DICTAnOKB.
Mmontrm', «. ▼. to pmw, to tlraw.
Denier^ n. m. denier; tntOMj.
Dtnrit. D. f. rommoditj.
DetUelU, n. t 1m«.
D^p^Me, n t expense.
JHpirir^ o. v. to peri»h, to wasto ftWftf.
Deplairf^ fir. n. v. to dlspleiM.
Dtpiorw^ A. T. to fleplflre, to bewaU.
J>ijpoter, «. y. to lay down.
D&pouUUr, a. T. to stripi
Dt^MtU, preiK 8tno^ from.
D^TpnU, n. m. depoty.
I>^itesndr«^ n. v. tii eume dowB.
l>«mt-t^ n. m. deaert.
2Ve<*«p^rtf, at^ deaperato
DfHinUr^mMt^nsnt n. m. diatntoreatotlDeia.
iMMoMiaaancM. n. t dIaobadieDoa.
DiM gut, coi^. aa anon aa
Z>Ma4><n, n. m. dealgn. plan.
Detutnm de (hm), prepL below.
D^miui d6 {d€% prep^ fWim.
J>«HauJi d« {au\ prep, abova.
D^aUfUe^ n. f. deatlny.
JPM«iMr, n. T. to daattna.
ZMIormiiMr (aa), ref. ▼. to Teaolve.
J>frant dt {p^nir au\ to eome to meat
J)HMt9Ur^ m, T. to devaatatoL
MteUmpemgni, n. m. developoiant
/>«e^fi«r, liT. n. ▼. to beoMne.
Devoir, a. v. to owe; to ba obliged; moat;
to be.
Dirouemenit n. m. devotion.
Diwm^r (mX re£ v. to devoto o.*a aelf to.
Dietiiture. n. C dictatorablp.
Ditftf, n. m. God.
IHt-ifftr^ a. T to direct
DimpatHtdr^ irr. n. v. to diaappear.
J>i*ptm«r, n. ▼. to diapoae.
Di^ipuUr (jmX Kf. T. to contend for.
DiMtimuU, p. p. diaaembllng. in»ineerei
DiMtinffusr (m>. re£ ▼. to be diatlngaiabed.
J>UAf'it»uer, a. ▼. to distribute.
/>i«)<n, ailj. divine.
DivUer^ a v. to divide.
Dnminsr, n. v. to sway, to mla
/>»<, n. t dowry.
X^oiMytt'** n. C mildneai^
DtmUar, n f. pain, saffrrlnf. criefl
iXmcB, aiU. sweet mild, amiabla
Drogue n. f. drag.
i>rolC n. m. riglit; law.
Droit, afU. straight; nprighL
Due. n. m. duke.
Dueh€K»«, n. f. dnebesSk
/>tt/\ ac^. bard ; harsh.
Dursr^ n. y. to last to eonttooa.
iSVf u, n. t water.
JScarter, a. v. to tnm aside, to remoya.
JEohang^y n. m. exchange.
Ecltapptr bf)^ ref. v. to escape.
B^rltitri, p.%. enlightened.
Elnt4int, adj. shlniiifr.
KcUiUr^ n. ▼. Ui burst to burst forth.
XoMur, n. t Scotland.
Ecouter, a. V. to listen ta
Bcri^ (sPX ret y. to exolaim.
JCevmet n. t foam.
JV^8, n. C era, epocb.
"let^ n. m. effrat; thin^
rU (mX indeed.
■ /«r, fc y. to fVighteD.
a(U. equal
ard de (tf TX with regard to.
ihimf eza yelll
Elan, n. m. atart; flight; buoyancy.
Jttanoer («*X reC v. to dash, to rash.
EUner (t*X reC y. to ariaa
EUre, irr. a. y. to elect
JBoffe, n. f praise.
Embramer, a. y. to embrace.
Euteute^ n. £ riot disturbance.
Emnuner, a. y. to take away, to lead away.
Emparer {•'\ ref y. to possesa one^s sob
oC to seize npon.
Empertw^ n. m. emperor.
Empire n. m. empire.
Emploi^ n. m. employment
Emporti^p.^ yloieiit psMlonate.
EmprUonntr, a. y. to Imprison, to confine.
JRMft, p. pw moved.
Ettekainer^ a. y. to chain, to enchain.
Endroit, n. m. pkce, spot
JEHAiiioe, n. t childhood.
EnJIn^ adv. at last
Enfuir (««X rot v. to flee.
Enffoger, a. v. to engage ; to begin.
Enjoui, a4]. playful ; sprightly.
Enn&mi^ n. m. enemy.
EnMigner^ e. v. to teach ; to show.
EnMuiUy adv. then.
Entirr, a4|. entire^
BntiArmneni, adv. entirely.
Enttfurmr^ a. v. to surround.
Entrawr, a. v. to clog, to letter.
Eutf-awt, n. f. pL fetters; horse^loek.
Eiitr4^ prep. )»etween ; among.
Entrvprendr€t irr. a. v. to undertake.
EiUretien, n. m. conversation.
Euv€lopp€r, a. y. to envelop.
Enars, adj. scattered, disponed.
JoMtuU, n. t shoulder.
Epoqus^ n. f. epoch, period.
Ei-reur^ n. t mistake.
Etclav€, n. m. dc C sUva.
Etpiioe, n. m apaoei .
EkpSce, n. £ apeeiea. kind.
E»piranee, n. £ hope.
3ipriiy n. m. spirit, mind, wit
IMomac, n. m. stomach.
XtabliMemmt^ n. m. estoblishment instl-
totion.
Etat^ n. m. state; condition.
Meiudre (a'X re£ v. to become extinguish-
ed
Elfndre^ a v. to stretch out; to spread.
EUmnem^nt, n. m. ast*>nlshment
EtndU, a(\J. narrow ; close.
Ewfinfi, n. f. escape.
BvtfiUiy p. p. awake; watehful; aprightly.
Ewnrm&nt, n. m. event
Eviter, a. v. to avoid, to shun.
EucepU, prep, except
J^BicuUrt a. V. to execate.
VOCABULARY TO THE DICTATIONS.
881
Eao&roiee^ n. m. pntctloe.
EoHger^ a. t. to exact, to reqaire.
Soapidienl, n. m. exftedient.
Sirpirant, adj expiring.
JDaopirer^ n. v. to expire.
JBiffpliMter («'X ref. v. to explain one's sell
EsnploU^ n. m. deed, achievement
^Setremmnentthdy. extremoiy.
Foible, adj. feeble, weak.
Faiblesw, n. f. weakness.
Fait, n. m. deed.
Farder, a. v. to paint
FaUgu«. n. f. toil, labor; flitigae.
FaOiful mU. tired.
FatUe, n. t bolt mistake.
Favour, n. f. flivor.
/'Wiu^tf, irr. n. v. to feign.
F&ndre, a. t. to cleave ; to ploagh.
F«r, n. m. Iron; sword.
FideUii, n. t fidelity.
Fier, adj. proad.
Figure, n. f. flgnre; shape; flwe.
^n, n. t end.
/'^fm, a4j. fixed.
Flairtr, a. v. to smelL
FlHri, p. p. tarnished, dishonored.
FlitriMur^ n. t dishonor.
Flewof, n. m. stream, river.
/^/i, n. £ fkith.
iPbi (ma), upon my fidth.
FtA% (d ia\ iidv. at once.
Fondion^ n. £ ftmction.
Fond^, a. V. to foand, to establish^ to .
Fondre, n. v. to melt; to dart, to foil
Fores, n. t force, strength.
Former, a. v. to form.
Fort, adj. strong.
^oW. adv. very much.
For^Ur, a. v. to fortify, to strengthen.
F^n-Urene, n. t fortre.s.
Fourbe, a4). knavisli.
Fovmir, a. v. to fhrnish, to supply.
Fourrure, n. f, fur.
Fi'opper, a. v. to strika
Froment, n. m. wheat
/^i»r, irr. n. v. to fieei
Fumer, a. v. to smoke.
Gag€, n. m. pledge, secnzlty.
Gaqner, a. v. to gain.
Gat. a4J. cheerAtH sprightly.
Galiret, n. t pL ipilleys.
ChUop {au\ in a gallop.
Garaer, a v. to keep.
Garni, p. p. farnitdied ; sappUed
G«ndr€, n. m. son-in-law.
GefUi'09ite, n. I generosity.
Genou, n. m. knee.
Genre, n. m. kind ; race.
Gene. n. m. pi. people.
Geete,n. tgestare.
Gloire. n. f fflory.
Gorge, n. C throat
&o«<0r, a. v. to taste; to eojoy.
Grdee, n. f. favor; paidoiL
^ree^ n. m. Greek.
Grec, -eque, adj. Greek.
Grice, n. f. Greece.
Gro9eier, a^j. coarse; rad», unmanneily.
Gturre^ n. C war.
HaMUement {ptjete cTX n. m. wearing ap-
parel
Biibitant, n. m. Inhabitant
HabUer, a. v. to inhabit
iSTofne, n. £ hatred.
HaranQuee {tribune auas), n. m. rostnun.
i7arcM,a4J.bold.
iSTouA a4{. high.
iSrawfomen^ adv. londly; boldly.
i7autour,n.m. heicht; haughtiness.
ffennir, n. v. to neigh.
Bommaoe, n. m. homage^
ffoepitalier, adj. hospiubla.
Bonnite, a4j. honest; polite.
iJoniMur, n. m. honor.
Buile, n. f. olL
ffrnnatn^ a^j. human ; humane.
ffumanUe, n. f. humanity.
Sumew, n. C humor, disposition.
Idie, n. £ idea.
Imp6t, n. m. import; tax.
Improtitte {d I*), adv. suddenly, nnawi.rea
Incendie, n. m. fire.
/noonnii^ a^. unknown.
Incorporer, a. v. to incorporate.
Jndipendant, ac^. Independent
Indigni, a^}. provoked, indignant
JndMdu, n. m. indivldnaL
If^fifrmer, a. v. to inform.
Ingenumimt, adv. ingennoosly.
Inquiet, SfC^. nneasy.
/n47U<^<iK£«, n. £ uneasiness.
Inepirer, a. v. to inapire.
JnetruU, p. p. instrnded, taught
JntelUffenee, n. £ intellect, ondentandlnf.
InUretmtnt, a^J. interesUng.
Jntiree^er, a. v. to interest
Iw>ent^, a. v. to invent
Irlande, n. £ Ireland.
Irriti, p. p. irrluted.
/wtM, n. L issue.
Jaioum, adi. jealous.
lAsmais (d), adv. fiMrever.
Jttmbe, n. £ Im.
t^iso«Eo<, n. m. javelin.
Jeter (m), ref v. to throw one^ sell
Joie, n. f. Joy.
«/<n<^, n. m. yoke.
Jouir, n. V. to eqjoy.
Jttge, n. m. Indge.
«/ttmea«, adj. twin.
Jurer, a. v. to swear.
Jueqtte, prep, till, until; ta
J^&our«r, n. v. to plough.
Lae, n. m. lake.
Langueur, n. C languor.
Xarm«, n. £ tear.
Lieker, a. v. to lick.
Z^^Mafaur, n. m. legislator.
388
TOOABULART TO THK DICTATIONS.
X^^fMM, n. m. Ttgtttabla.
Lnkdmtoiin^ mm. nextdaf.
LUdrer^ a. v. to libenta.
Uhrt, aiU frM.
Ue€ {entrer en\ tn enter the lists.
JUm, n. m. ti« ; boand.
Litr, A T. to bind, to tie ; to anite.
Liau, n. m. plsoSL
LUu de (at*). pr«p. fflstsed o£
UrnUe, n. C Vlmtt
lAmUsr. e ▼. to Hmlt
JUik n. m. flax.
LUUre, n. t litter.
Uvrm' (MX i«C T. to give one^h self op.
LUtirahyB, a^l. lltenrf.
Zoi, n. t law.
Itf<i» (i«, pren. bt from.
Xo<« (c(«X Mv* from fttf, from a ^
LoMr^ o. m. leisnrs, ease.
JLor«, adv. then.
XorsffiM, eoDJ. wImb.
jMimUr*, n. £ light.
XrtMM, n. C moon.
Zmm, b m. lazwy.
MagUirat^ n. m. magistrate.
ifaiitteiUr, irr. a. r. to maintaiii.
MtUnUm^ n. m. malntenanoe ; prcserra-
tton.
JTciSa, d. m. eom,
Ma[iir€y n. m. master,
ifoi, n. m. evil.
Maladie, n. f. sickness, dtseaae.
JfaMtfvr, n. m. mislbitwie.
Maniire^ n. 1 manner.
Manqu^n n> ▼• to firiL
ifara««) n. m. marsh. .
Marioffe, n. m. marriage.
Marque, a4). fixed, appointed.
JtfaMrtf, n. t matter.
Jftfonteitt, ai^. dissatiafled.
Midioere, adj. middling, indUBsrent
Mmnbre, n. m. member.
iftifiM, Midi, self
Jmm«, ady. even.
Mime (tUy, adv. in the same manner.
Msnteur.mA^ lying, deoettfnL
Mer, n. £ sea.
Menutre de {d\ pren. In proportion ; as.
MiUiiriA, n. f small farm.
MeUrs{ae), ref. v. to put one^s sel£
MUUu, n. m. middle, midst
MiUtaire, n. m. soldier.
MUlier, n. m. thousand.
Miaire, n. C misery.
Modiriy ai)j. moderate.
ModM, n. r. pi. millinery.
Jf<attr«,n.f. pi. morals; manners.
Moindre, a4}. leaat
ifoiiw (au), adv. at least
MoUeBue, n. t softness, eflTemlnacy.
Monarehie, n. f. monarchy.
MonarcJUqtte, adj. monarehlcaL
Monarque^ n. m. monarch,
ifimdtf, n. m. world, people.
MonUr, n. v. to ascend, to go np.
MoiUrer, a. v. to show.
Mort, n. £ death.
JforM, adj. mortal.
Maurir, Irr. a. ▼. to die;
Moymi, n m. meana.
Moyen. adj. middlei
Jfii<tt^.a40- motnaL
ifif<iietfe«Mn<,adv. matoallj.
2ra(f€ (d la\ by swimming.
Nagtir^ n. ▼. to swim.
ilTaiU; ad), nnaffected.
i^atfre, Irr. n. ▼. to be bom.
moiBwIU^, t neeessitj.
JTiffoee, n. m. eommeroe.
^Mf/; sdj. new.
^ea, n. m. nose.
^oce, n. £ marriage.
JTom, n. m. name.
IfombrA, B. m. number.
^omfrreucD, a4). nameroos.
itTommsr, a. V. to name; to eau; to^tpoint
ITaurrUurey n. £ food.
ITul, pron. no one.
iroMesf«,n.£ nobility.
OMir, n. y. to obey.
Oeeup*, p. p. oeeopied, bo^.
CPU, n. m. eye.
Q^r (a'X re£ v. to offsr one*h self
Oi90au, n. m. bird.
Oie^, ad). Idle.
Omdre, n. £ shadow.
OUvdiTB, adj. o]|ve-ool<»«d.
Oppoaoni; n. m. opposer.
Opuaeuhf n. m. opascale.
(firdonnance, n. £ ordinanoe.
Ordonner, a. v. to order.
Ordre, n. m. order.
Ordree, n. m. ordera.
Oreifle, n. £ ear.
Orffe^ n. £ barley.
Orgveil, n. m. pride.
Otacre, n. m. hoatage.
Outrage, n. m. outrage.
Quire (en), adv. beaidea.
Outrage, n. m. woi^
Paie, n. £ pay, wages.
P<i4B,n. £peaoe.
Pakne, n.f. palm; triumph; vletoiy.
ParaUre., irr. a. v. to appear.
I\ir Id, adv. by there; by that means.
Parmita, n. m. pi. parents.
Parmi, prep, among.
Parole, n. £ word.
Part de {de la), from.
Partager, a. v. to share ; to divide.
ParU, n. tn. part; leaolutloo.
ParHeulUrement, adv. particularly.
Partie, n. £ party, part
/VirMtf de {/aire), to be one o£
Parvenir, irr. n. v. to reach ; to auoeeed
Pairie, n. £ country, flitherbuid.
Peindrf, irr. a. v. to paint
/*0<n« (d), adv. scarcely.
I Peintre, n. m. painter.
I Peiwture, n. £ painUng.
VOCABULART TO THE DIOTATIOKS.
388
PinMratU, a^ penetrating
P&ndant, prep, daring.
PitUblement, adv. palnftillv .
Pereitr^ a. v. to pleroa.
P«rdr€s a. y. to lose.
Pirir^ n. v. to pertob.
PermeiUre^ Irr. a. v. to permH, to allow.
PtfTM, n. C Persia.
Perm, n. m. ft C Persian.
Perauad&r, «. v. to persuade
P«8«r, a V. to weigh.
Pen dpeu, adv. by degreea.
PeupU, n. m. people; nation.
Pied, n. m. foot
Piquant, adj. sharp.
Placer {9e\ re£ v. to pat ooe^ seU
Plate, n. f. woand.
Plaindre (m), ref. ▼. to eomplaln.
jpta/nfa, n. f. complaint
Pldtrer, a. v. to paint ; to patch.
Poche^ n. C pocket
Poete, n. m. poet
Poianard, n. m. dacger.
Poi^ n. DL hair; hide.
Poieeon, n. m, llsh.
PoW-ail, n. m. cbeet, breast
/Vn7rine, n. f. breast
Politique, n. f. policy; poliUdan.
PofifigiM, aty. political.
PotU, n. m. bridge.
Porter, a. v. to Mar.
PorUfur^ a m. bearer.
PoetMer, a. v. to poesesa.
pMUriU, n. t potfterity.
/\>ttr«t«l«r«, irr. a t. to parsu.^.
iVnMWwr, n. m. power.
Prati^pur, a. y. to practise.
Pricieuao^ a4j. prectoas.
Pricipiter, a. ▼. to precipitate ; to cast
Pris ae, prep. near.
Pr^ {de), adv. close.
PrSeenter^ a v. to present
PrHendre, a. v. to pretend.
PritendUy n. m. ftatare bnsbaci.
Priter (mX reC v. to lend each other.
Pritre, n. m. priest
Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner.
Privl, adj. private.
ProbUl, n. £ probity; honestf.
Proclamer, a v. to proclaim.
Produire, irr. a v. to prodace.
ProduUt n.m. prodactlon; prodnee; pro-
ceeds.
Proposer {ee), ret v. to intend.* to
Prowvery a y. to prove; to ba^w.
PuiSy adv. then.
Puieque, coi^ since.
Puiettanee^ n. £ power.
Pwieeant, a^ powerftiL
Punir, a V. to panish.
Punition, n. £ punMiment
PuTy a4J. para
OiM^u«, a4i. some.
QuittaHoe^ n. £ receipt
Bachtior, a. t. to ledMBi*
J}acon<er« a v. to relata
Jiaiein, n. m. grape.
Jiaiaotiy n. £ reason : right
Samener^ a v. to lead babk.
Satiffy n. m. rank.
SappeleTy a v. to call back ; to recall
Rapport, n. m. relation.
Sapport d {avoir), to relate to^ to refer to^
to be connected With.
Rapport d {par), prep, with reference to.
RapporteTy a v. to bring beck ; to relate.
Rapporter (m), re£ v. to relate to.
Rateembfer, a v. to collect, to bring to-
gether.
RSiOUi, n. £ reality.
RMamery a v. to claim, to reclaim.
Rieit, n. m. recital ; narration.
RecommandeTy a v. to recommend
Rioomoeneey n. £ reward.
Reoonauire, irr. a v. to lead back.
Reeonnaitieaneey n. £ gratitada
ReconnaUre, irr. a v. to recognise; to dto-
cover.
ReoourSt n. m. reconrsa
Reduire, irr. a v. to reduce.
Riel, adj. real
R^brtnSy ac^. relbrmed; on half-pay.
JS^rmer, a v. to reform.
R^uey n. m. refhsaL
Rt^fueery a v. to reftise, to deoUaa
Regard^Ty a v. to look at
RiffleTf a V. to regulata
Regney n. m. reign.
Regner. n. v. to reign.
R^oindre, irr. a v. to rejoin ; to Join.
Relever, a v. to raise up again.
RenUde, n. m. remedy.
RenUdier, a v. to remedy, to help.
Remettre, Irr. a v. to pat back; to deliver
RempUr, a v. to fill.
Remporiery a v. to carry away, to bear olT'
to obtain.
Reneowtrery a v. to meet
Rendrey a v. to render; to maka
Rendre {96% re£ v. to betake one^a self; to
go tOk
Ret^ermeTy a v. to inclose ; to shot op.
Repandre, a t. to spread; to shed; to*
spill ; to poar.
RepeUy n. m. repast, meal
RepUfuer, n. v. to reply.
R^prtaewtery a v. to represent
R^gviiy a4J. resigned.
Rieoudre (m), irr. ref. v. to resolve, to de-
tormina
ReseenMancey n. £ resemblance, likenesa
Reeeemblant, a^J. resembling.
ReeeentiTy Irr. a v. to feel
Reetery n. v. to remain.
Ritablir, a v. to restore, to re-^tablish.
Retirer (ee), ret v. to withdraw.
Riuni, p. p. united, together.
Revitiry irr. a v. to invest, to clotha
Revufy n. £ review.
RideaUy n. m. cnrtaln.
Rirey irr. n. v. to laugh.
RiMf n. m. rica
384
TOOABULABT TO THE DICTATIONS.
JZoyauM, a. t rojaltj.
i^MliMr, «. T. to rain.
J7MM«,m. RUttteD.
iSSriNo, B. na
48cior{fC«r, a. ▼. to mtrtSot,
Sage, aOj. wIm.
tiagemt^ n. £ wiadom.
&uf<r, ft^T. to lelM.
Ai/iMr, a. T. lo gr0«t| to Mlute^
Sang, n. m. blood.
Seeomrir^ Irr. ■. ▼. to MsM; to
8*eout9^ n. m. Mttotanoe^ raooor.
Seigneur, D. OL lord.
i8M<m. prop, aoeofdlnf ta
SetnhltiUi^ it4). siraiUr; llko,
S«u*bUr^ 0. y. to loein.
iSefM»( n. m. aenaio.
a^A^dbUiU, n. f. wnslUHty.
5m<lr, Irr. a. ▼. to imell ; to feel
iSs/NtrmMiit, adv. aeparateljr.
Siparer, a v. to separate ; to ipHt
afrr^, a^ V. to presa
S^ul, i4). alone, stogie; only.
SUge^ B. in. siega
S(*fi'iid^ adl. sodaL
St»in^ n. m. osre.
Stddaiy n. ni. soldier.
Sid^^ n. m. sua.
S'tUMUr, a y. to solid!
Snrnnte, n. f. soni.
i8r>r«, n. m. lot, flite, destiny.
Sottfi-anott^ n. £ salfering.
Sf*tuw0r^ a y. to raise np^ to exolte.
Sttum£»r% irr. a, y. to sabject
Source, n. C source.
SouUiUr, irr. a y. to sastain.
Souverain^ a4|. aoyereicn.
SpecUide, n. m. sigbt, snow.
iiDirUuei, a<\). wiUy ; tntelleetaal ; spiritoaL
Stylet, n. m. Mtiletta
Buff' ag€^ n. m. snflinge; approbation.
SaiU, n. f eontinoation.
iSviiMifiC a4). MiowlBg.
Su^ets B. m. subject
Supporter, a y. to bear.
Sw\ prep, upon, oyer.
Surprenam, ad^ anrprlaing.
Surpriee, n. £ snrpriae.
AMo«er, a. y. to raiae^ to atlr upi
TailU^ n. £ sbape; else.
TbtUtfr, a y. to cut, to hew.
7\tnt que, oonj. aa long aa
Taper, a y. to strike, to hit
Thrffi/MU-lBteu
THnt, n. m. complexion, color.
Tel, telle, aflj. such.
TSm^rOI, n. £ rasbnesa
TVmoifi'iMr, a y. to teatliy, to ahow.
TtmptU, B. £ tempest
Tamporet, adj. teinpora\
TSmare, a. y. to stretch, to hold ont
TeniaUne, n. £ attempt
TemUiMr, a. y. to finish.
3Vre, B. £ earth ; land.
TYsra, b. ni. third par^.
Tirer^ a. y. to draw, to poU.
TUre, B. m. tltlei
Ton, B. m. tone.
TbfMMrro, n. ra. thunder.
Touckant, a(^. touching.
Taweher, a. ft b. T. to touch.
Tbumer, a. y. to turn.
Ibui^coup, ady. auddeuly.
7Wia,B.B^ trait; ihct; act
TVad^ n. m. treaty.
TV-aiier, a. ft n. y. to treat
TranqvMUU, n. £ quiet composnra
Travail, n. m. labor, toil
Ti-afoerser^ a y. to traverse, to oroaib
Triompke^ n. m triumph.
TrUle^ a4|. sad, gloomy.
Tromper, a. y. to decdya
Tromper (saX re£ y. to make a mlatakflk
TV&ne, n. m. throne.
Trouver (a«), re£ y. to be.
7\Mr,ay. tokiU.
Twrc, B. m. TuriL
Tturquie, n. £ Turkey.
Uni, p. p. uBited.
Uniquement, a^J. solely.
Univere, n. m. univerae.
Uniteroel, a^J. uniyenaL
27«a0r«, n. m. usage; use.
rtOe, a4). useftiL
raO^anl, ad), yallant
Fa<n,«U. vain; idUk
Vain (en>, ady. in yain.
Vaincre, irr. a. y. to yanqoiah, to
Vdinement, ady. in yain.
Valoir, irr. a^ y. to be worth; to
to obtidn.
Veillsr, a. y. to watch.
Venger {ee), re£ y. to ayenge one^ i
Ver9, n. m. yerse.
F«r^, n. £ yirtae.
VertueuoD, ac^. yiitoona
r<c<im«, n. £ yictiao.
Fie, B. £ lilK.
FlefdXforllft^
VieUlard, n. m. old man.
VIeiUesee, n. £ old aira
n^ a4). lively; aensitiye.
rlndieat^f, t4}. yindictlye.
Vipre, irr. b. y. to live.
Vnci, prep, here la, there is ; theae
VoMn, a4|. Beighboriog.
VoitB, B. £ voice.
Voler, n. v. to fly.
VoloniairefMiU, adv. yolnntarlly.
Vrai, mdL true.
FoJonM B.i;wiU.
■..^c.fV
/
/■ in I J /{-I
r~ /
/ •■ ; / / '•
II III
4
."•fi/
i^/////.1
«f '■■■
•v.
'^
j^'i'':;'-''-f-4««i^..
- -::*^...^-':7'r:^.
• » . * •
* r* ^ _ , . •
• A.
_• * • * . f -
« • ■ •
«. • . • »
'.'.V '
. . . -• • • ' ^ . 14,.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11